Delta Ia-Asd Asda-B3 Um en 20210201

Delta ASDA-B3 Series Servo Drive User Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Marketing: [email protected]
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: [email protected]
Service: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Tokyo Office
Industrial Automation Sales Department BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul Office
Mail: [email protected]
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228 TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Delta ASDA-B3 Series

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon, Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945 TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.

909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z),
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang,
Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.

Servo Drive User Manual
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. TEL: +39 02 64672538
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720 Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
Americas 17 121357 Moscow Russia
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
São Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Mexico Office
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma, Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052 New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
www.deltaww.com
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice. DELTA_IA-ASD_ASDA-B3_UM_EN_20210201
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this product. This manual provides information about the ASDA-B3 series servo
drives (B3) and the ECM-B3 and ECM-A3 series servo motors.
This manual includes:
 Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor
 Servo structure and wiring diagram
 Instructions for test operation
 Instructions for servo tuning
 Description of motion control
 Description of parameters
 Description of communication protocol
 Troubleshooting
 Inspection and maintenance
ASDA-B3 product features:

 New control algorithm: overcomes the problems of a lack of stiffness or flexibility in the
machine structure.
 Automatic tuning function: user-friendly and allows you to complete tuning easily.
 Gain adjustment function: automatically detects changes in the inertia and improves the
control precision.
 New generation of the ECM-B3 series servo motor: a compact size servo motor meets the
need for reducing the size and weight of the equipment structures.
How to use this manual:

Use this manual as a reference when installing, setting up, using, and maintaining the servo drive.
Before initiating the tuning or setup process, read Chapters 1 to 5.
Delta technical services:

Consult your Delta equipment distributor or Delta Customer Service Center if you encounter any
problems.
i
Safety Precautions
ASDA-B3 is a high resolution, open type servo drive. It should be installed in a shielded control box during
operation. This product uses precise feedback control and a digital signal processor (DSP) with high-speed
calculation functions to control the current output generated by IGBT to operate three-phase permanent
magnet synchronous motors (PMSM) and to achieve precise positioning.
The ASDA-B3 series are used in industrial applications and should be installed in the control box.
Servo drives, wires, and motors should all be installed in an environment which complies with the minimum
requirement of UL50 Type 1.
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions at all times during inspection, installation, wiring,
operation, maintenance, and examination of the servo drive.
The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING”, and “STOP” indicate:
Danger. May cause severe or fatal injuries to personnel if the instructions are not
followed.
Warning. May cause moderate injury to personnel, or lead to several damage or even
malfunction of the product if the instructions are not followed.
Absolutely prohibited activities. May cause serious damage or even malfunction of the
product if the instructions are not followed.
Inspection
Follow the instructions when using the B3 servo drive and servo motor, or it may cause fire or
malfunction.
Installation
Do not expose the product to an environment containing vapor, corrosive gas, inflammable
gas, or other foreign matter to reduce the risk of electric shock or fire.
Wiring
 Connect the ground terminals to class-3 ground system. Ground resistance should not
exceed 100 Ω. Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
 Do not connect the three-phase source to the motor output terminals U, V, and W,
or it may cause personnel injury or fire.
 Tighten the screws of the power and motor output terminals, or it may cause fire.
 When wiring, refer to the description of wire selection in Chapter 3 to prevent any
danger.
ii
Operation
 Before operating the machine, change the servo parameter setting according to the
application. If the parameters are not adjusted to the correct values, it may lead to
malfunction of the machine or the operation might be out of control.
 Ensure you can activate the emergency stop before operating the machine.
 When applying power, make sure the motor is not rotating because of inertia of the
machine or other causes.
During the operation, do not touch any rotating motor parts, or it may cause personnel injury.
 To avoid accidents, remove all units during the first test run, so that the motor is
operating without any load.
 If you fail to operate the servo motor properly after it is connected to the equipment,
it may damage the equipment and lead to personnel injury.
 In order to reduce the danger, make sure the servo motor can operate normally without
load. Then try operating the motor with load.
 Do not touch the heat sink of the servo drive when it is operating to avoid scalding.
Maintenance and Inspection
 Do not touch the internal parts of the servo drive and servo motor, or it may cause
electric shock.
 Do not disassemble the servo drive panel when the power is on, or it may cause
electric shock.
 After turning off the power, do not touch the wiring terminals until the charging light is
off, or the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Do not disassemble the servo motor, or it may cause electric shock or personnel injury.
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on, or it may cause electric shock or
personnel injury.
 Only qualified electricians can install, wire, and maintain the servo drive and servo motor.
iii
Main Circuit Wiring
 Do not put the power cable and signal cable in the same channel or bond them together.
Separate the power cable and signal cable by at least 30 centimeters (11.8 inches).
 Use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for signal cables and encoder
(PG) feedback cables. The maximum length of the signal input cable is 3 meters
(9.84 feet) and the maximum length of the PG feedback cable is 20 meters (65.62 feet).
 High voltage may remain in the servo drive after the power is turned off. Wait until the
“CHARGE” indicator is off before performing inspection.
Do not repeatedly turn the power on and off. If continuous power on and off is needed,
wait one minute between intervals.
Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit
 When wiring, securely tighten the screws of the terminal block.

 When wiring, do not short-circuit the wire with adjacent wires.
 Before applying power, inspect and ensure that the wiring is correct.
Leakage Current
 The leakage current of the servo drive is greater than 3.5 mA.
 According to the IEC 61800-5-1 standards, the wires must comply with one of the
following specifications to ensure proper grounding:
1. Copper wire cross-sectional area is at least 10 mm2.
2. Aluminum wire cross-sectional area is at least 16 mm 2.
 Failure to comply with the specifications may result in personnel injury.
 Before applying power, inspect and ensure that the wiring is correct.
Note: the content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Download the latest version from Delta's website
at http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
iv
Table of Contents
Before Operation
1 Product Overview
1.1 Components of the servo set ··············································································1-2
1.2 Model overview ································································································1-3
1.2.1 Nameplate information ··················································································1-3
1.2.2 Model explanation ························································································1-5
1.3 ASDA-B3 servo drive and motor ········································································ 1-11
1.4 Description of the drive interface ········································································1-12
1.4.1 B3□-L models ···························································································1-12
1.4.2 B3□-M / B3□-F models ················································································1-13
1.4.3 B3□-E models ···························································································1-14
2 Installation
2.1 Ambient storage conditions ················································································2-2
2.2 Ambient installation conditions ············································································2-3
2.3 Mounting direction and space ·············································································2-4
2.4 Safety precautions for using motors ·····································································2-6
2.4.1 Troubleshooting for the motor operation and status ·············································2-8
2.4.2 Mounting directions and precautions for the servo motor ······································2-9
2.4.3 Precautions for using servo motor with oil seal ·················································2-10
2.4.4 Precautions for using couplings ·····································································2-10
2.4.5 Oil and water prevention measures for the servo motor ······································ 2-11
2.4.6 Measures to suppress temperature increase of the servo motor ···························2-12
2.5 Specifications for the circuit breaker and fuse ·······················································2-13
2.6 Installation requirements for EMC ······································································2-14
2.6.1 EMI filters ·································································································2-15
2.7 Selecting the regenerative resistor ·····································································2-17
2.8 The use of braking ··························································································2-22
3 Wiring
3.1 System connection ···························································································3-3
3.1.1 Connecting to peripheral devices (connecting to Delta communication type
servo motor) ·······························································································3-3
3.1.2 Connectors and terminal blocks ······································································3-5
3.1.3 Wiring for power supply ·················································································3-6
3.1.4 UVW connectors for the ASDA-B3 servo drive ····················································3-9
3.1.5 Specification for the encoder connector ··························································3-17
3.1.6 Wire selection ···························································································3-27
3.1.7 IP67 connector wiring instructions··································································3-30
3.2 Wiring diagram for the servo system ···································································3-32
3.3 Wiring for CN1 I/O connector ············································································3-34
3.3.1 CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models) ·····················································3-34
3.3.2 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models) ·······················3-35
3.3.3 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for M, F, and E models) ········3-38
3.3.4 CN1 I/O connector (for L model) ····································································3-38
3.3.5 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for L model) ······································3-40
3.3.6 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for L model) ·······················3-45
3.3.7 CN1 wiring diagrams ··················································································3-48
3.4 Wiring for the CN2 encoder connector ································································3-56
3.5 Wiring for the CN3 communication connector ·······················································3-59
3.5.1 Wiring for the MODBUS communication connector ············································3-59
3.5.2 Wiring for the CANopen communication connector ············································3-61
3.6 CN4 serial connector (Mini USB) ·······································································3-63
3.7 Wiring for the CN6 communication connector ·······················································3-64
3.7.1 Wiring for the DMCNET communication connector ············································3-64
3.7.2 Wiring for the EtherCAT communication connector ············································3-66
3.8 CN10 STO connector (Safe torque off)································································3-68
3.9 STO function (Safe Torque Off) ·········································································3-69
3.9.1 Introduction to STO ····················································································3-69
3.9.2 The potential danger of STO·········································································3-69
3.9.3 Specifications of STO ·················································································3-70
3.9.4 How does the STO function work? ·································································3-71
3.9.4.1 Activation status ····················································································3-71
3.9.4.2 Deactivation status ·················································································3-73
3.9.5 Wiring for STO ··························································································3-74
3.9.5.1 Wiring without the STO function ································································3-74
3.9.5.2 Wiring for single drive module with the STO function ·····································3-74
3.9.5.3 Wiring for multiple drive modules with the STO function ·································3-75
3.10 Standard wiring example ················································································3-76
3.10.1 Position (PT) control mode - differential pulse signal ········································3-76
3.10.2 Position (PT) control mode - open-collector pulse signal ···································3-77
3.10.3 Position (PR) control mode - internal position command ···································3-78
3.10.4 Speed (S) control mode ·············································································3-79
3.10.5 Torque (T) control mode·············································································3-80
3.10.6 CANopen communication mode ··································································3-81
3.10.7 DMCNET communication mode···································································3-82
3.10.8 EtherCAT communication mode ··································································3-83
4 Trial Operation and Panel Display

4.1 Panel description ·····························································································4-2
4.2 Parameter setting procedure···············································································4-3
4.3 Status display ··································································································4-6
4.3.1 Save the setting display·················································································4-6
4.3.2 Display the decimal point ···············································································4-6
4.3.3 Alarm messages ··························································································4-7
4.3.4 Positive and negative sign setting ····································································4-7
4.3.5 Monitoring display ························································································4-7
4.4 General functions ···························································································4-10
4.4.1 Operation of fault record display ····································································4-10
4.4.2 Force DO on ····························································································· 4-11
4.4.3 Digital input diagnosis operation ····································································4-12
4.4.4 Digital output diagnosis operation ··································································4-12
4.5 Testing ·········································································································4-13
4.5.1 Testing without load ····················································································4-13
4.5.2 Apply power to B3 servo drive ······································································4-14
4.5.3 JOG trial run without load ············································································4-18
4.5.4 Trial run without load (Speed mode) ·······························································4-20
4.5.5 Trial run without load (Position mode) ·····························································4-22
Tuning
5 Tuning
5.1 Tuning procedure and the applied mode ································································5-2
5.1.1 Flowchart of the tuning procedure ····································································5-2
5.1.2 Differences between gain adjustment modes ·····················································5-3
5.2 Auto tuning ·····································································································5-4
5.2.1 Flowchart of auto tuning ················································································5-5
5.2.2 Auto tuning with the drive panel ······································································5-6
5.2.3 Auto tuning with ASDA-Soft (software) ······························································5-7
5.2.4 Alarms related to auto tuning ········································································5-14
5.3 Gain adjustment modes ···················································································5-15
5.3.1 Flowchart of Gain adjustment mode ·······························································5-15
5.3.2 Gain adjustment mode 1 ··············································································5-16
5.3.5 Setting the bandwidth response level (stiffness) ················································5-18
5.3.6 Setting the command response gain (response) ···············································5-19
5.4 Tuning in manual mode ···················································································5-20
5.5 Mechanical resonance suppression ····································································5-22
Operation and Motion Control
6 Operation Mode
6.1 Selecting the operation mode··············································································6-3
6.2 Position mode ·································································································6-5
6.2.1 Position command in PT mode········································································6-5
6.2.2 Position command in PR mode ·······································································6-5
6.2.3 Control structure of Position mode ···································································6-6
6.2.4 S-curve filter for Position commands ································································6-7
6.2.5 Electronic gear ratio (E-Gear ratio) ··································································6-9
6.2.6 Low-pass filter ···························································································6-10
6.2.7 Timing diagram of PR mode ·········································································6-10
6.2.8 Gain adjustment of the position loop ······························································ 6-11
6.2.9 Low-frequency vibration suppression in Position mode ·······································6-12
6.3 Speed mode ·································································································6-15
6.3.1 Selecting the Speed command source ····························································6-15
6.3.2 Control structure of Speed mode ···································································6-16
6.3.3 Smooth Speed command ············································································6-17
6.3.4 Scaling of the analog command ····································································6-19
6.3.5 Timing diagram of Speed mode ·····································································6-20
6.3.6 Gain adjustment of the speed loop ·································································6-21
6.3.7 Resonance suppression unit ········································································6-23
6.4 Torque mode ·································································································6-26
6.4.1 Selecting the Torque command source ···························································6-26
6.4.2 Control structure of Torque mode···································································6-27
6.4.3 Smooth Torque command ············································································6-28
6.4.4 Scaling of the analog command ····································································6-28
6.4.5 Timing diagram of Torque mode ····································································6-29
6.5 Dual mode ····································································································6-30
6.5.1 Speed / Position dual mode ··········································································6-31
6.5.2 Speed / Torque dual mode ···········································································6-32
6.5.3 Torque / Position dual mode ·········································································6-33
6.6 Others ·········································································································6-34
6.6.1 Applying the speed limit···············································································6-34
6.6.2 Applying the torque limit ··············································································6-34
6.6.3 Analog monitoring ······················································································6-35
7 Motion Control
7.1 PR mode description ·························································································7-2
7.1.1 Shared PR parameters ··················································································7-4
7.1.2 Monitoring variables of PR mode ·····································································7-6
7.1.3 Motion Control commands ·············································································7-9
7.1.3.1 Homing methods ·····················································································7-9
7.1.3.2 Speed command ···················································································7-22
7.1.3.3 Position command ·················································································7-24
7.1.3.4 Jump command·····················································································7-28
7.1.3.5 Write command ·····················································································7-30
7.1.3.6 Index Position command ·········································································7-32
7.1.4 Overview of the PR procedure ······································································7-36
7.1.5 Trigger methods for the PR command ····························································7-42
7.1.6 PR procedure execution flow ········································································7-46
7.2 Application of motion control ·············································································7-58
7.2.1 Data array ································································································7-58
7.2.2 High-speed position capture function (Capture) ················································7-62
Parameter Setting
8 Parameters
8.1 Parameter definitions ························································································8-2
8.2 List of parameters ····························································································8-3
8.3 Parameter descriptions ····················································································8-13
P0.xxx Monitoring parameters ··············································································8-13
P1.xxx Basic parameters·····················································································8-29
P2.xxx Extension parameters ···············································································8-64
P3.xxx Communication parameters ·······································································8-93
P4.xxx Diagnosis parameters ············································································· 8-100
P5.xxx Motion control parameters ······································································· 8-107
P6.xxx PR parameters ······················································································ 8-131
P7.xxx PR parameters ······················································································ 8-154
Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions ································································ 8-174
Table 8.2 Digital output (DO) descriptions ····························································· 8-181
Table 8.3 Monitoring variables descriptions ··························································· 8-187
9 MODBUS Communication
9.1 RS-485 communication interface (hardware) ··························································9-2
9.2 RS-485 communication parameter settings ····························································9-3
9.3 MODBUS communication protocol ·······································································9-3
9.4 Writing and reading communication parameters ····················································9-14
9.5 RS-485 communication specification ··································································9-15
10 Absolute System
10.1 Battery box (absolute type) and wiring ·······························································10-3
10.1.1 Specifications ··························································································10-3
10.1.2 Battery box dimensions ·············································································10-5
10.1.3 Connection cable for the absolute encoder ····················································10-6
10.1.4 Battery box cable ·····················································································10-8
10.2 Installation ··································································································10-9
10.2.1 Installing the battery box in the servo system ··················································10-9
10.2.2 Installing and replacing a battery ······························································· 10-11
10.3 System initialization and operating procedures ·················································· 10-13
10.3.1 System initialization ················································································ 10-13
10.3.2 Pulse number ························································································ 10-14
10.3.3 PUU number ························································································· 10-15
10.3.4 Establish the absolute origin coordinates ····················································· 10-16
10.3.4.1 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with DI/DO ····························· 10-16
10.3.4.2 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with parameters ······················· 10-17
10.3.4.3 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with the PR homing function ······· 10-17
10.3.5 Read the absolute position ······································································· 10-17
10.3.5.1 Reading the absolute position with DI/DO ················································ 10-17
10.3.5.2 Reading the absolute position with communication ···································· 10-20
10.4 List of absolute parameters, DI/DO, and alarms ················································ 10-21
11 CANopen Mode
11.1 Basic configuration ························································································ 11-2
11.1.1 Supported functions ·················································································· 11-2
11.1.2 Hardware configuration ·············································································· 11-3
11.1.3 Parameter settings of CANopen mode ·························································· 11-4
11.2 Communication specification ··········································································· 11-5
11.2.1 Servo communication architecture ································································ 11-5
11.2.2 Communication objects ·············································································· 11-6
11.2.2.1 Process data object (PDO) ····································································· 11-7
11.2.2.2 Service data object (SDO) ······································································ 11-8
11.2.2.3 SDO abort codes ················································································11-11
11.2.2.4 Synchronization object (SYNC) ····························································· 11-12
11.2.2.5 Emergency object (EMCY) ··································································· 11-13
11.2.2.6 NMT services ···················································································· 11-14
11.3 CANopen operation mode ············································································ 11-17
11.3.1 Profile Position Mode ·············································································· 11-17
11.3.2 Interpolation Position Mode ······································································ 11-21
11.3.3 Homing Mode ························································································ 11-24
11.3.4 Profile Velocity Mode ··············································································· 11-26
11.3.5 Profile Torque Mode ················································································ 11-28
11.4 Object dictionary ························································································· 11-30
11.4.1 Specifications for objects ·········································································· 11-30
11.4.2 List of objects ························································································ 11-31
11.4.3 Details of objects ···················································································· 11-33
11.4.3.1 OD 1XXXh communication object group ·················································· 11-33
11.4.3.2 OD 2XXXh servo parameter group ························································· 11-49
11.4.3.3 OD 6XXXh communication object group ·················································· 11-50
11.5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting ···································································· 11-82
Troubleshooting
12 Troubleshooting
12.1 Alarm list ····································································································12-3

General type ·······························································································12-3
Motion control type ·······················································································12-4
STO type ··································································································12-5
Communication type ·····················································································12-6
12.2 Causes and corrective actions ·········································································12-7
Appendix
A Specifications
A.1 ASDA-B3 series servo drive ·············································································· A-2
A.1.1 Specifications of the ASDA-B3 servo drive ······················································· A-2
A.1.2 Dimensions of the servo drive ······································································· A-5
A.2 ECM series servo motor ··················································································· A-7
A.2.1 ECM-B3 series servo motor ········································································· A-11
A.2.2 ECM-A3L low inertia series servo motor ························································· A-15
A.2.3 ECM-A3H high inertia series servo motor························································ A-17
A.2.4 Torque features (T-N curves) of the B3 motors ················································· A-19
A.2.5 Torque features (T-N curves) of the A3 motors ················································· A-21
A.2.6 Power derating curves of the B3 motor ··························································· A-23
A.2.7 Overload features ······················································································ A-24
A.2.8 Dimensions of ECM-B3 series servo motor ····················································· A-26
A.2.9 Dimensions of ECM-A3L/A3H series servo motor ············································· A-29
B Accessories
B.1 Power connector····························································································· B-2
B.2 Power cable··································································································· B-4
B.3 Encoder connector ·························································································· B-8
B.4 Encoder cable (incremental type) ······································································· B-9
B.5 Encoder cable (absolute type) ·········································································· B-11
B.6 Battery box cable ··························································································· B-13
B.7 Battery box (absolute type) ·············································································· B-14
B.8 CN1 connector ······························································································ B-15
B.9 CN1 quick connector ······················································································ B-16
B.10 Terminal block module ··················································································· B-17
B.11 B3 / B2 conversion cables ·············································································· B-19
B.12 CN3 RS-485 tap ·························································································· B-19
B.13 CN3 RS-485 / CANopen terminal resistor ·························································· B-20
B.14 CN6 DMCNET terminal resistor ······································································· B-20
B.15 CN4 Mini USB communication module ······························································ B-21
B.16 CANopen communication cable······································································· B-23
B.17 CANopen distribution box··············································································· B-23
B.18 Optional accessories ····················································································· B-24
Product Overview
Before using the ASDA-B3 series servo drive, pay attention to the description of the
1
inspection, nameplate, and model type. You can find a suitable motor model for your
B3 servo drive in the table in Section 1.3.
1.1 Components of the servo set ································································1-2

1.2 Model overview ·················································································1-3
1.2.1 Nameplate information ··································································1-3
1.2.2 Model explanation ·······································································1-5
1.3 ASDA-B3 servo drive and motor ························································· 1-11
1.4 Description of the drive interface ························································· 1-12
1.4.1 B3□-L models ··········································································· 1-12
1.4.2 B3□-M / B3□-F models ······························································· 1-13
1.4.3 B3□-E models ··········································································· 1-14
1-1
Product Overview ASDA-B3
1.1 Components of the servo set

A complete servo set includes:
1 (1)
(2)
A servo drive and a servo motor.
A UVW motor power cable: one end of the U, V, and W wires connects to the servo drive
and the other end to the motor (optional purchase).
(3) A green ground wire: it connects to the ground terminal of the servo drive (optional
purchase).
(4) An encoder cable: one end of it connects to the encoder and the other end to the CN2 on
the servo drive (optional purchase).
(5) A 26-pin connector for CN1 (optional purchase for B3 -F, M, and E models).
(6) A 44-pin connector for CN1 (optional purchase for B3 -L models).
(7) A 6-pin connector for CN2 (optional purchase).
(8) An RJ45 connector for CN3 and CN6, which you use for general (RS-485) communication
(optional purchase).
(9) A 4-pin connector for CN4 (Mini USB connector) (optional purchase).
(10) Power supply for the servo drive:

Model Control circuit Main circuit Regenerative resistor
100 W - 3.0 kW L1C, L2C terminal block R, S, T terminal block P , D, C,

terminal block
(11) One metal piece for short-circuiting the terminal block.
(12) An installation instruction sheet.
1-2
ASDA-B3 Product Overview
1.2 Model overview

1.2.1 Nameplate information
1
ASDA-B3 series servo drive
 Nameplate information
Model name
ASD-B3-0121-M
Capacity specification 100W
App lica ble power su pply 2 0 0 ~ 2 3 0 V 3 P H 5 0 V 6 0 H z 0 .3 9 A
2 0 0 ~ 2 3 0 V 1 P H 5 0 V 6 0 H z 0 .6 9 A
Rated p ower outp ut 110V 0-250Hz 0.9A
B30121M0T18010001
Ser ial n umber and

barcod e
Firmwa re version
 Serial number
B30121M0 T 18 01 0001 (1) Model name

(2) Manufacturing plant (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(3) Year of production (18: year 2018)
(4) Week of production (from 1 to 52)
(5) Serial number (production sequence in a week,
starting from 0001)
1-3
ECM series servo motor
 Nameplate information
1 Model name
Applicable power supply
ECM-A3H-CY0602RS0
A1.45 Ins.A
Rated power output 0.64 kW 0.2
Barcode and
serial number ABCYB1JBW14230024
 Serial number
ABCYB1JB W 14 23 0024 (1) Model name

(2) Manufacturing plant (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(3) Year of production (14: year 2014)
(4) Week of production (from 1 to 52)
(5) Serial number (production sequence in a week,
starting from 0001)
Note: the servo motor uses the certified voltage as the rated input voltage for operation, so the applicable
power supply is 110V.
1-4
1.2.2 Model explanation
ASDA-B3 series servo drive
ASD – B3 – 04 21 – M
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 1
(1) Product name
AC Servo Drive
(2) Series
B3 series
B3A series
B3B series
(3) Rated power output
Code Specification Code Specification Code Specification
01 100 W 07 750 W 20 2.0 kW

02 200 W 10 1.0 kW 30 3.0 kW
04 400 W 15 1.5 kW - -
(4) Input voltage and phase
21: 220V, single- / three-phase

23: 220V, three-phase
(5) Model code:
B3 series
Analog
Pulse
Code voltage PR mode RS-485 CANopen DMCNET EtherCAT STO
input
control
L ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × ×
M × ○ ○ × ○ × × ×
F × ○ ○ × × ○ × ×
E × ○ ○ × × × ○ ×
1-5
B3A series
Analog
Pulse
input
control
1 L
M
F
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
○
○
○
E ○ ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
B3B series
Analog
Pulse
input
control
L ○ ○ × ○ × × × ×
Note: B3 represents B3, B3A, or B3B in this manual.
1-6
ECM-B3 series servo motor
ECM - B 3 M - C 2 06 04 R S 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(1) Product name

1
ECM: Electronic Commutation Motor
(2) Servo type
B: general type servo motor
(3) Series
3: 3rd series
(4) Inertia
M: medium inertia
L: low inertia
(5) Rated voltage and speed
C: 220V and 3,000 rpm

E: 220V and 2,000 rpm
F: 220V and 1,500 rpm
(6) Encoder type
A: 24-bit absolute magnetic optical encoder (resolution of single turn: 24-bit; multiple turns:
16-bit)
2: 24-bit incremental magnetic optical encoder (single-turn absolute)
P: 17-bit absolute magnetic encoder (resolution of single turn: 17-bit; multiple turns: 16-bit)
M: 17-bit incremental magnetic encoder (single-turn absolute)
1-7
(7) Motor frame size
Code Specification Code Specification
1
04 40 mm 13 130 mm
06 60 mm 18 180 mm
08 80 mm - -
01 100 W 10 1.0 kW
02 200 W 15 1.5 kW
04 400 W 20 2.0 kW
07 750 W 30 3.0 kW
(9) Shaft type and oil seal
w/o brake with brake w/o brake with brake

w/o oil seal w/o oil seal with oil seal with oil seal
Round shaft
- - C* D*
(with fixed screw holes)
Keyway
P* Q* R S
Note: * indicates this model type is coming soon.
(10) Shaft diameter and connector type
S: standard shaft diameter and standard connectors.

7: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and standard connectors.
J: standard shaft diameter and IP67 waterproof connectors.
K: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and IP67 waterproof connectors.
Note: special shaft diameter is available for F80 400 W models.
(11) Special code
1: standard products
1-8
ECM-A3 series servo motor
ECM - A 3 L - C 2 06 04 R S 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(1) Product name

1
(2) Servo type
A: high-precision servo motor
(3) Series
3: 3rd series
(4) Inertia
H: high inertia
L: low inertia
C: 220V and 3,000 rpm
(6) Encoder type
Y: 24-bit absolute optical encoder (resolution of single turn: 24-bit; multiple turns: 16-bit)
1: 24-bit incremental optical encoder (single-turn absolute)
16-bit)
1-9
1
04 40 mm 08 80 mm
06 60 mm - -
0F 50 W 04 400 W
01 100 W 07 750 W
02 200 W - -

Round shaft
- - C D
Keyway
P* Q* R S
S: standard shaft diameter and standard connectors.

7: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and standard connectors.
J*: standard shaft diameter and IP67 waterproof connectors.
K*: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and IP67 waterproof connectors.
(11) Special code
Z: refer to the note in Section A.2.8.
1-10
1.3 ASDA-B3 servo drive and motor

Servo motor Servo drive
Inertia
Rated /
Max.
speed
Power
Output
(W)
Model name
Rated
torque
(N-m)
Max.
torque
(N-m)
Model name
1
50 ECM-A3L-C 2 040F 3 4 1 0.159 0.557
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
100 ECM-A3L-C 2 0401 3 4 1 0.32 1.12
200 ECM-A3L-C 2 0602 3 4 1 0.64 2.24 ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2

Low
inertia 400 ECM-A3L-C 2 0604 3 4 1 1.27 4.45
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
400 ECM-A3L-C 2 0804 3 4 1 1.27 4.44
3000 /
750 ECM-A3L-C 2 0807 3 4 5 2.39 8.36 ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
6000 rpm Single- /
three- 100 ECM-B3L-C 2 0401 3 4 1 0.32 1.12 ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
phase
200 ECM-B3M-C 2 0602 3 4 1 0.64 2.24 ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
400 ECM-B3M-C 2 0604 3 4 1 1.27 4.45

ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
400 ECM-B3M-C 2 0804 3 4 1 1.27 4.45
750 ECM-B3M-C 2 0807 3 4 1 2.4 8.4 ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2

Medium
1000 ECM-B3M-E 2 1310 3 4 1 4.47 14.3 ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2
inertia
2000 / 1500 ECM-B3M-E 2 1315 3 4 1 7.16 21.48 ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2
3000 rpm 2000 9.55 28.65
ECM-B3M-E 2 1320 3 4 1
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
Three- 2000 ECM-B3M-E 2 1820 3 4 1 9.55 28.65
phase
1500 /
3000 ECM-B3M-F 2 1830 3 4 1 19.1 57.29 ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
3000 rpm
50 ECM-A3H-C 2 040F 3 4 1 0.159 0.557
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
100 ECM-A3H-C 2 0401 3 4 1 0.32 1.12
Single- / 200 ECM-A3H-C 2 0602 3 4 1 0.64 2.24 ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
High 3000 /
three-
inertia 6000 rpm 400 1.27 4.45
phase ECM-A3H-C 2 0604 3 4 1
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
400 ECM-A3H-C 2 0804 3 4 1 1.27 4.44
750 ECM-A3H-C 2 0807 3 4 5 2.39 8.36 ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
Note:
1. In the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type, 3 represents the brake or
keyway / oil seal type, 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type, and 5 represents the
special code.
2. In the servo drive model name, 1 represents the product series and 2 represents the model code.
3. B3, B3A, and B3B series servo drives are all compatible with the motors listed in the above table.
1-11
1.4 Description of the drive interface

1.4.1 B3□-L models
1 (1)
C
N
4 (8)
(2)
(9)
(3)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6) (11)
(12)
(7)
No. Name Description

(1) - 7-segment display.
(2) CHARGE Power indicator.
Main circuit power input terminal: connects to commercial power supply
(3) RST
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
Control circuit power input terminal: connects to single-phase power supply
(4) L1C, L2C
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
Regenerative Connects to an external regenerative resistor, external regenerative braking
(5)
resistor unit, or the built-in regenerative resistor.
Servo drive current output: connects to the motor power connector (U, V, W).
(6) UVW Do not connect to the main circuit power. Incorrect wiring will cause damage
to the servo drive.
Grounding
(7) Connect to the ground wire for the power and servo motor.
screws
(8) CN4 Mini USB connector: connects to PC.
(9) CN3 MODBUS communication port connector.
(10) CN1 I/O signal interface: connects to PLC or controls I/O.
(11) CN10 STO connector: only available on B3A series servo drives.
(12) CN2 Encoder connector: connects to the encoder.
1-12
1.4.2 B3□-M / B3□-F models
(1)
(2)
C
N
4 (8) 1
(3) (9)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6) (11)
(12)
(7)

(3) RST
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
(4) L1C, L2C
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
(5)
to the servo drive.
Grounding
screws
CANopen (CN3) or DMCNET (CN6) high speed communication port
(9) CN3 or CN6
connector.
1-13
1.4.3 B3□-E models
1
(1)
C
N
4 (8)
(2)
(3) (9)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(6) 10 (11)
(12)
(7)

(3) RST
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
(4) L1C, L2C
(200 - 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz).
(5)
to the servo drive.
Grounding
screws
(9) CN6 EtherCAT high speed communication port connector.
1-14
Installation
Follow the instructions in this chapter during installation. This chapter includes
2
information about the circuit breaker, fuse, EMI filter selection, and the regenerative
resistor.
2.1 Ambient storage conditions ··································································2-2

2.2 Ambient installation conditions······························································2-3
2.3 Mounting direction and space ·······························································2-4
2.4 Safety precautions for using motors ·······················································2-6
2.4.1 Troubleshooting for the motor operation and status ·····························2-8
2.4.2 Mounting directions and precautions for the servo motor ······················2-9
2.4.3 Precautions for using servo motor with oil seal ································· 2-10
2.4.4 Precautions for using couplings ···················································· 2-10
2.4.5 Oil and water prevention measures for the servo motor ·······················2-11
2.4.6 Measures to suppress temperature increase of the servo motor ·········· 2-12
2.5 Specifications for the circuit breaker and fuse ········································ 2-13
2.6 Installation requirements for EMC ······················································· 2-14
2.6.1 EMI filters ················································································ 2-15
2.7 Selecting the regenerative resistor ······················································ 2-17
2.8 The use of braking ··········································································· 2-22
2-1
Installation ASDA-B3
Precautions:
If the connection between the servo drive and servo motor is over 20 meters (65.61 feet),
2
increase the gauge of the UVW connecting wire and the encoder cable. Refer to Section 3.1.6
for the wire specification.
2.1 Ambient storage conditions

Before installation, this product must be kept in the shipping carton. In order to retain the
warranty coverage and for maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C (-4°F) to +65°C (149°F).
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas.
2-2
ASDA-B3 Installation
2.2 Ambient installation conditions
B3 servo drive: the environment should be free of devices that generate

excessive heat; no water, vapor, dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable
gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal particles; and the environment should be
solid without vibration and interference of electromagnetic noise.
2
Motor: the ambient temperature for the motor location should be between 0°C
(32°F) and 40°C (104°F). The environment should be free of devices that
generate excessive heat; no water, vapor, dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and
inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal particles.
50 mm 50 mm
(2 inch) (2 inch)
50 mm
(2 inch)
Measuring
poin t
The ambient temperature of the operating environment for the servo drive is between 0°C (32°F)
and 55°C (131°F). If the temperature is over 45°C (113°F), place the product in a well-ventilated
environment. During long-term operation, the suggested temperature of the operating environment
should be under 45°C (113°F) to ensure the servo drive’s performance. Mount the product
vertically in the distribution board (see the illustration of the correct mounting direction in
Section 2.3) and install a fan on the board for heat dissipation. Ensure that the temperature for
the clearance of 5 cm (1.97 inches) beneath and on both sides of the servo drive is kept under
55°C (131°F), and the servo drive must be kept clear of heat sources. Make sure the size of the
distribution board and its ventilation condition can prevent the internal electrical devices from
overheating. Also check if the vibration of the machine affects the electrical devices of the
distribution board.
2-3
2.3 Mounting direction and space

Precautions:
2  Mount the servo drive in the correct direction according to the following illustrations with the
base of the heat sink vertically on the wall. Incorrect mounting direction may result in
malfunction.
 For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space between the AC servo drive
and the adjacent objects and the wall, or overheating may result in machine malfunction.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the servo drive, and do not mount it in the incorrect
direction, or it may result in machine malfunction.
Correct
Base
Air Flow
Air Flow
Incorrect
Air Flow Air Flow
2-4
Heat dissipation requirements
 To lower the wind resistance of the fan for better heat dissipation, follow these diagrams for
2
the suggested clearance values when installing one or more servo drives.
 Avoid mounting one servo drive above one another. Keep the bottom of the servo drive
clear because the generated heat rises and causes higher temperature for the drives
mounted above.
One servo drive Multiple servo drives
min.
50 mm
(2 inch) min.
100 mm
(4 inch)
min. min.
25 mm 25 mm
(1inch) (1 inch) Air Flow Air Flow
min. min. min. min.

50 mm 25 mm 25 mm 50 mm
(2 inch) (1 inch) (1 inch) (2 inch)
min.
min. 80 mm
50 mm (3.2 inch)
(2 inch) Air Flow Air Flow
Cabinet
Note: the diagrams are not accurately scaled. Refer to the annotations on the diagrams.
2-5
2.4 Safety precautions for using motors

The Delta AC servo motor is designed for industrial applications. It is necessary that you fully
2
understand the motor specifications and operation manual. For your safety and correct use,
read the manual, specifications, and precautions for the motor carefully before connecting the
motor to any equipment.
The safety precautions are as follows:
Handling, mounting, and storage
 When removing or installing a servo motor, hold the whole motor instead of holding the
cable or only the motor shaft.
 Do not hit the motor shaft. Impact force will damage the shaft and the encoder that is
attached at the rear end of the shaft.
 Keep the axial or radial shaft load within the allowable range listed in the specifications.
 The shaft of the servo motor is not water- or oil-proof. Do not use, install, or store the servo
motor in an environment that contains water, oily liquids, corrosive and inflammable gases,
or is with high humidity.
 The material of the motor shaft is not rustproof. Although rustproof oil has been applied to
the shaft during the manufacturing process, you must check the shaft condition and apply
rustproof oil every three months if storing the motor for more than six months.
 Ensure that the environmental conditions for storing the servo motor conform to the
specifications in the instruction sheet.
 The encoder attached to the motor is easily damaged; take the necessary steps to avoid
electromagnetic interference, vibration, and abnormal temperature changes.
Wiring
 If the current exceeds the maximum current in the specifications, the internal parts of the
motor may lose their magnetism. Contact the distributor or local Delta sales representative if
this problem occurs.
 Check that the motor wiring and the voltage of the motor brake are correct. Also, make sure
that the wiring of the encoder power and signal cables is correct. Incorrect wiring will lead to
abnormal operation, malfunction, or damage of the motor.
 To avoid capacitive coupling and noise, isolate the motor power cable from the encoder
power and signal cables. Do not connect them to the same circuit.
 The AC servo motor must be correctly grounded.
 The encoder connector must not undergo any high-voltage component test because it will
damage the encoder.
 When the motor or brake is undergoing high-voltage component tests, cut off the power
supply for the controller. You should perform this kind of test only when necessary so as to
maintain the product lifespan.
2-6
Operation
 AC servo motor operation is controlled by the servo drive. Do not directly connect a
2
commercial type power supply (100/200V, 50/60 Hz) to the servo motor circuit; otherwise
the motor cannot operate normally and may be permanently damaged.
 Follow the motor specifications when using the product. The motor’s operation temperature
must not exceed the specified range.
 The material of the motor shaft is not rustproof. To ensure a longer motor life, apply rustproof
oil during operation.
 The built-in brake is for clamping rather than stopping the motor. Caution: the built-in brake
is not a device for safely stopping the machine. Install another safety device for stopping the
machine. When the built-in brake is clamping the motor, rotation backlash can still occur
and the maximum rotation is 1° to 2°. When a motor with a brake is operating, the brake
lining sometimes generates a noise (a swishing or clicking sound), which is caused by the
structure of brake module, not a malfunction. It will not affect the motor’s function.
 When using a servo motor with a brake, do not use the brake for dynamic braking.
 If any odor, noise, smoke, heat, or abnormal vibration occurs during motor operation,
stop the motor and turn off the power immediately.
Others
 Delta servo motors have no user-replaceable parts.

 Do not disassemble the motor or change its parts, or it will void the warranty.
 Do not disassemble the motor by yourself, or it may lead to permanent malfunction or damage.
 Do not splash any water or oil on the product.
2-7
2.4.1 Troubleshooting for the motor operation and status
When the servo motor makes abnormal noises:
2
Possible causes Checking methods Handling measures
Check if there is any foreign Replace the connecting
There is a source of vibration in object, damage, or deformation component (such as the
the connecting component. in the movable parts of the coupling) or contact the
connecting component. manufacturer.
1. Check if the servo motor has
been subject to impact force
or vibration which causes
damage to the encoder.
2. Remove and shake the
The encoder is subject to
motor to see if there is any Replace the servo motor.
excessive vibration / shocks.
abnormal noises (disk
damage).
3. Visually inspect the
encoder’s rear cover for dust
(encoder damage).
When the servo motor is overheating:

Possible causes Checking methods Handling measures
Make sure the installation
surface is flat; if there are other
objects (such as paint or gasket)
Measure the temperatures of the
between the mounting surface
Mounting surface of the servo servo motor frame and the
and motor surface resulting in
motor has poor thermal mounting surface (metal).
poor heat dissipation. Remove
conductivity. The temperature difference
the object or use other methods
should not exceed 20°C (68°F).
to help heat dissipation (such as
forced air cooling for the servo
motor).
2-8
2.4.2 Mounting directions and precautions for the servo motor
You can install the servo motor horizontally or vertically.
2
Mounting direction Precautions
Horizontal
If you are using a servo motor with an oil seal, refer to

Section 2.4.5 for oil and water prevention measures for the
servo motor.
Vertical - shaft end up
 Do not operate the servo motor with oil seal in the vertical
direction.
 When wiring, install an oil trap (marked as (1) in the figure on
the left) to prevent vapor from entering the motor.
 When installing the servo motor in a machine (such as in a
gearbox), adhere to the measures in Section 2.4.5 to prevent
oil and gas from entering the servo motor.
(1 )
Vertical - shaft end down
If you are using a servo motor with an oil seal, refer to

Section 2.4.5 for oil and water prevention measures for the
servo motor.
Note: if you install gears on the servo motor, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
2-9
2.4.3 Precautions for using servo motor with oil seal
This section defines the operating conditions for using the servo motor with oil seal:
2
1. In the operating environment, keep the oil level lower than the oil seal lip.
(2)
(3) (1)
(4)
(5) (6)
(1) Servo motor; (2) Motor shaft; (3) Gear; (4) Oil; (5) Oil seal lip; (6) Oil seal
2. Do not submerge the oil seal in liquid. The oil seal can only withstand splashes of oil.
3. Do not soak the oil seal lip in oil.
4. Keep the oil level lower than the oil seal lip. If the oil level is higher than the oil seal lip, oil
may enter the servo motor and cause damage to the motor.
2.4.4 Precautions for using couplings
Caution:
It is suggested to use flexible couplings specifically designed for servo motors, especially double
spring couplings, which provide some buffer tolerance during eccentric motion and deflection.
Select couplings of appropriate size for the operating conditions. Improper use or connection
may cause damage.
1. Wipe off the rustproof coating or oil on the motor shaft.
2. If you use a servo motor with a keyway, install the attached key or a key matching the
specified dimensions on the motor shaft.
Note: when you install the key on the motor, do not apply excessive impact force to the keyway or
motor shaft.
3. Use dial gauge or other methods to ensure the centering precision is within the specifications.
If you cannot use the dial gauge or other methods, slide the coupling along both axes and
adjust it until it does not get stuck.
2-10
(1) The distance is measured

at four different positions on
the circumference for the
centering precision. The
2
difference between the
(1) maximum and minimum
measurements should be
0.03 mm or less; even within
this range, you can make
adjustments to increase the
centering precision.
Note: when you are doing the
measurements, rotate the
coupling and the motor
shaft together.
4. Servo motor shaft installation safety precautions
(1) When connecting the shaft, make sure that the required centering precision is reached.
If the shaft is not correctly centered, vibration may damage the bearings and encoder.
(2) When installing the coupling, do not apply excessive force to the shaft. Also, do not apply
excessive force to the area around the encoder, as the impact may damage the encoder.
(3) If the coupling makes any abnormal noise, realign the shaft until the noise disappears.
(4) Ensure the axial load and radial load are within the specifications. Refer to the
specifications for the maximum axial load (N) and maximum radial load (N) for each
servo motor.
2.4.5 Oil and water prevention measures for the servo motor
Follow these precautions and do not allow water, oil, or other foreign matter to enter the servo motor.
1. Do not submerge the cable in oil or water.

(1)
(2)
(1) Servo motor; (2) Oil
2. If oil or water is unavoidable, use oil-resistant cables. Delta does not provide oil-resistant cables.
2-11
3. If the servo motor must be mounted with the shaft end up, do not use it in a machine,
gearbox, or other environment where the servo motor may have contact with oil or water.
2
(1)
(2)
(1) Gear; (2) Oil
4. Do not use the servo motor in an environment with cutting fluids. Depending on the type of
cutting fluids, sealing materials, coated colloids, cables, or other components may be
affected or even deteriorated.
5. Do not continuously expose the servo motor to oil mist, water vapor, oil, water, or grease.
If you cannot avoid using the servo motor under the above conditions, take prevention
measures to avoid dirt and water from entering the machine.
2.4.6 Measures to suppress temperature increase of the servo motor
1. When installing the servo motor, pay attention to the cooling conditions (such as size of the
heat sink) provided in the specifications of each servo motor type.
2. The heat generated during the motor operation is dissipated to the heat sink through the
motor mounting surface. Therefore, if the surface area of the heat sink is too small, the
temperature of the servo motor may increase abnormally.
3. If it is difficult to apply large heat sinks in the operating environment or if the ambient air
temperature or height exceeds the given specifications, take the following measures:
(1) Reduce the full-load rating of the servo motor: for more details, refer to the
specifications of each servo motor type. When selecting servo motors, consider
motors with the power capacity 1 to 2 levels higher.
(2) Reduce the acceleration and deceleration of the work cycle to lower the motor load.
(3) Apply external forced air cooling to the servo motor by using cooling fans or other
methods.
Important: do not place a gasket or other insulating materials between the servo motor and heat
sink, as it may cause motor temperature increase, affect noise immunity, and result in
malfunction.
2-12
2.5 Specifications for the circuit breaker and fuse

Servo drive model Circuit breaker Fuse (Class T)
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
5A
5A
10A
10A
10A
10A
2
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2 10A 20A
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 15A 30A
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2 20A 30A
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2 30A 50A
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2 30A 50A
Note:
1. In the servo drive model column, 1 represents the product series and 2 represents the model code.
The above table includes the B3, B3A, and B3B series.
2. Operation mode: general.
3. If the servo drive is equipped with a residual-current device (RCD) for electricity leakage protection,
select a circuit breaker with sensitivity of at least 200 mA and with minimum 0.1 sec working time to
avoid incorrect operation of the RCD.
4. Select Type B residual-current device (RCD) with time delay if the system ground wire may contain
DC electricity.
5. Use the fuse and circuit breaker that comply with the UL / CSA standard.
2-13
2.6 Installation requirements for EMC

This section illustrates the installation requirements for passing the EMC test. Note that the
2
EMC rating varies based on the installation structure or wiring. Delta servo products are
designed in accordance with the specifications of the EMC test. Refer to the following diagram
for the standard installation.
T SR
MCCB
Shielding box
U-shape saddle
*1
EMI filter
U-shape saddle
Servo drive
U, V, W
*1 Motor
R, S, T
*1
L1C, L2C
U-shape saddle
CN2 *1 Encoder
U-shape saddle
*1
Controller CN1
Note:
1. Use shielded wires.
2-14
2.6.1 EMI filters
All electronic equipment (including servo drives) generate high or low frequency noise during
2
operation, which interferes with peripheral equipment through conduction or radiation. With an
EMI filter correctly installed, you can eliminate much of the interference. For better performance,
it is recommended to use Delta’s EMI filter for suppressing the interference.
Recommended EMI filter
Power Servo drive model
1PH 3PH
100 W ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2 EMF023A21A EMF10AM23A
2000 W ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2 - EMF021A23A
3000 W ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2 - EMF021A23A
Note: in the servo drive model column, 1 represents the product series and 2 represents the model
code. The above table includes the B3, B3A, and B3B series.
General precautions for installation
To ensure the best performance of the EMI filter, apart from the instruction and wiring of the
servo drive, refer to these precautions:
1. The servo drive and EMI filter must be mounted on the same metal plate.
2. The wiring should be as short as possible.
3. The metal plate must be well grounded.
4. It is recommended to install one servo drive with one EMI filter.
For more mounting specifications, refer to the following documents:
1. EN61000-6-4 (2001)
2. EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2
3. EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1
2-15
Motor cable selection and installation precautions
The selection of motor cable (refer to Appendix B Accessories) and installation accuracy
2
determine the performance of the EMI filter. Follow these precautions:
1. Use a cable that has braided shielding (the effect of double shielding is better).
2. The shield on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the shortest cable
length and the largest contact area.
3. Remove the protective paint on the U-shape saddle and metal plate to ensure good contact.
See the following figure.
4. Correctly connect the braided shielding of the motor cable and the metal plate: fix the
braided shielding on both ends of the motor cable with the U-shape saddle and metal plate.
See the following figure.
(1)
(2) (3)
(1) Remove the protective paint on the U-shape saddle and metal plate to
ensure good contact.
(2) U-shape saddle
(3) Well-grounded metal plate
2-16
2.7 Selecting the regenerative resistor

When the direction of torque is opposite to the direction of rotation, the energy generated
2
returns to the servo drive from the load. This energy is turned into electricity in the capacitance
of the DC Bus and thus increases the voltage. When the voltage reaches a given value, it is
consumed by a regenerative resistor. The servo drive has a built-in regenerative resistor;
you can also use an external regenerative resistor if needed.
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1) Moving direction of the object; (2) Direction of torque; (3) Regenerative energy
Specifications of the built-in regenerative resistor in the ASDA-B3 are as follows:

Specifications of the Minimum allowable
Capacity of the built-in
built-in regenerative resistor resistance value
Servo drive (kW) regenerative resistor
(reference for external
Resistance (Ohm) Capacity (Watt) (Watt)
resistors) (Ohm)
0.1 - - - 60
0.2 - - - 60
0.4 100 40 20 60
0.75 100 40 20 60
1.0 100 40 20 30
1.5 100 40 20 30
2.0 20 80 40 15
3.0 20 80 40 15
2-17
When the regenerative energy exceeds the capacity of the built-in regenerative resistor, use an
external regenerative resistor. Pay special attention to the following when using a regenerative
resistor:
2 1. Choose the correct resistance value (P1.052) and capacity (P1.053) for the regenerative
resistor; otherwise it might affect the performance.
2. When using an external regenerative resistor, ensure the total resistance value is greater
than the minimum allowable resistance value of the servo drive. For general applications,
you can connect more than one resistor in series. If the value from resistors connected in
series exceeds the rated range, you can reduce the value by connecting the resistors in
parallel. If you want to connect the resistors in parallel to increase the power of the
regenerative resistors, make sure the resistance value meets the requirements.
See the following diagrams and settings for connecting the regenerative resistors in series
and parallel.
Connect to one external regenerative resistor
P
P1.052 = 10 (Ω)
1 kW, 10Ω
P1.053 = 1000 (W)
C
Connect to external regenerative resistors (serial connection)
P
1 kW, 10Ω
P1.052 = 20 (Ω)
P1.053 = 2000 (W)
1 kW, 10Ω
C
Connect to external regenerative resistors (parallel connection)
P1.052 = 5 (Ω)
1 kW, 10Ω 1 kW, 10Ω
P1.053 = 2000 (W)
3. Normally, if the capacity of the regenerative resistor (the average value) is within the rated
capacity, the temperature can increase to 120°C (248°F) or even higher (under the
condition that the regenerative energy continues to function). For safety reasons, apply
forced cooling to reduce the temperature of the regenerative resistor. Alternatively, you can
use regenerative resistors equipped with thermal switches. Contact the manufacturer for the
load characteristics of the regenerative resistor.
2-18
When installing an external regenerative resistor, connect the resistor to P and C contacts,
and P and D contacts are left open. It is recommended that you choose external regenerative
2
resistors of the resistance values specified in the table on page 16. Choose the external
regenerative resistor according to the selected rotary motor (the setting value has included the
factor of energy consumed by the IGBT).
Rotary motor:
Selecting the regenerative energy

(a) Calculation of the regenerative energy when there is no external torque.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1) Moving direction of the object; (2) Direction of torque;
(3) Regenerative energy generated when the motor decelerates
If the motor is making a reciprocating motion, the regenerative resistor consumes the excess
return energy. Refer to the following table when calculating and selecting the required
regenerative resistor.
Regenerative energy
Maximum
generated when the
Rotor inertia regenerative
motor decelerates from
Servo drive (kW) Motor energy of the
(× 10-4kg.m2) the rated speed to a
capacitance Ec
stop without load Eo
(joule)
(joule)
0.1 ECM-A3L-C 2 040F 3 4 5 0.0229 0.11 4.21
0.1 ECM-A3L-C 2 0401 3 4 5 0.04 0.20 4.21
0.2 ECM-A3L-C 2 0602 3 4 5 0.09 0.45 5.62

Low
0.4 ECM-A3L-C 2 0604 3 4 5 0.15 0.74 8.42
inertia
0.4 ECM-A3L-C 2 0804 3 4 5 0.352 1.74 8.42
0.75 ECM-A3L-C 2 0807 3 4 5 0.559 2.76 18.25
0.1 ECM-B3L-C 2 0401 3 4 5 0.299 1.48 4.21
0.2 ECM-B3M-C 2 0602 3 4 5 0.141 0.70 5.62
0.4 ECM-B3M-C 2 0604 3 4 5 0.254 1.26 8.42

Medium
0.4 ECM-B3M-C 2 0804 3 4 5 0.648 3.20 8.42
inertia
0.75 ECM-B3M-C 2 0807 3 4 5 1.07 5.29 18.25
1.0 ECM-B3M-E 2 1310 3 4 5 7.79 17.12 26.21
2-19
Regenerative energy
Maximum
generated when the
Rotor inertia regenerative
motor decelerates from
Servo drive (kW) Motor energy of the
(× 10-4kg.m2) the rated speed to a
capacitance Ec
2
stop without load Eo
(joule)
(joule)
1.5 ECM-B3M-E 2 1315 3 4 5 11.22 24.66 34.94
2.0 ECM-B3M-E 2 1320 3 4 5 14.65 32.20 26.21
2.0 ECM-B3M-E 2 1820 3 4 5 29.11 63.98 26.21
3.0 ECM-B3M-F 2 1830 3 4 5 53.63 66.3 31.82
0.1 ECM-A3H-C 2 040F 3 4 5 0.0455 0.23 4.21
0.1 ECM-A3H-C 2 0401 3 4 5 0.0754 0.37 4.21
High 0.2 ECM-A3H-C 2 0602 3 4 5 0.25 1.24 5.62

inertia 0.4 ECM-A3H-C 2 0604 3 4 5 0.45 2.23 8.42
0.4 ECM-A3H-C 2 0804 3 4 5 0.92 4.55 8.42
0.75 ECM-A3H-C 2 0807 3 4 5 1.51 7.47 18.25
Note: in the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type; 3 represents the brake or
keyway / oil seal type; 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type; and 5 represents the
special code.
Assume that the load inertia is N times the motor inertia, and when the motor decelerates from
3,000 rpm to a stop, the regenerative energy is (N+1) × Eo and the regenerative resistor needs to
consume (N+1) × Eo - Ec joules. Assume that the reciprocating motion cycle is T sec, then the
required power of regenerative resistor = 2 × ((N+1) × Eo - Ec) / T. The calculation is as follows:
Step What to do Calculation and setting method
Set the capacity of the regenerative
1 Set P1.053 to the maximum value.
resistor to the maximum.
2 Set the operation cycle (T). Manual input.
3 Set the rotation speed (wr). Manual input or read the status with P0.002.
4 Set the load / motor inertia ratio (N). Manual input or read the status with P0.002.
Calculate the maximum regenerative
5 Eo = J * wr2/182
energy (Eo).
Find the regenerative energy that can be
6 Refer to the table above.
absorbed by the capacitor (Ec).
Calculate the required capacity of the
7 2 × ((N+1) × Eo - Ec) / T
Example:
For the motor ECM-A3L-CY0604RS1 (400 W), the reciprocating motion cycle is T = 0.4 sec.
Its rotation speed is 3,000 rpm and the load inertia is 15 times of the motor inertia.
Regenerative energy Maximum
generated when the motor regenerative
Servo drive Rotor inertia
Motor decelerates from the rated energy of the
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2)
speed to a stop without capacitance Ec
load Eo (joule) (joule)
0.4 ECM-A3L-CY0604RS1 0.15 0.74 8.42
2-20
Find the maximum regenerative energy: Eo = 0.74 joules (from the table above).
Find the regenerative energy that can be absorbed by the capacitor: Ec = 8.42 joules (from the
2
table above).
2×((N+1)×𝐸0 −𝐸𝑐 ) 2×((15+1)×0.74−8.42)
The required capacity of the regenerative resistor = = = 17.1 W
T 0.4
From the calculation above, the required power of the regenerative resistor is 17.1 W, which is
smaller than the specified capacity. In this case, the built-in 40 W regenerative resistor fulfills the
need. In general, the built-in regenerative resistor can meet the requirement when the external
load is not too great.
(b) Calculation of the regenerative energy when there is external torque and the motor does the
negative work.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1) Moving direction of the object; (2) Direction of torque; (3) Regenerative energy
Usually, the motor does positive work and the motor’s torque direction is identical to the rotation
direction. However, in some instances, the motor’s torque direction is opposite to the rotation
direction. This means the motor is doing negative work and the external energy is applied to the
servo drive through the motor. For instance, if the external force direction is identical to the
rotation direction (such as downward motion of the vertically-mounted machine), the servo
system outputs more power to counterbalance the excessive external force (the weight of
vertically-mounted machine) in order to keep up with the specified target speed. In this case,
considerable energy returns to the servo drive. When the DC Bus is full and cannot store more
energy, this energy is consumed by the regenerative resistor.
Example:
For the motor ECM-A3L-CY0604RS1 (400 W), when the torque of the external load is +70% of
the rated torque (1.27 N-m) with rotation speed up to 3,000 rpm, the required external
3000×2×π
regenerative resistor is: 2 × (0.7 × 1.27) × ( ) = 558 W. So, a regenerative resistor of
60
560 W and 40Ω is needed.
2-21
2.8 The use of braking

A brake is usually used for motions in the Z-axis direction because gravity causes the mechanism
2
to fall. A brake can prevent the mechanism from falling and reduce the motor’s excessive
resistance. The motor lifespan could be reduced due to the excessive heat generated by
continuous resistance. To avoid incorrect operation, the brake can only be enabled when the
servo is switched off. The drive controls the brake with DO. If DO.BRKR is set to off, it means the
brake is not operating and the motor is clamped; if DO.BRKR is set to on, it means the brake is
operating and the motor can run freely. You can use MBT1 (P1.042) and MBT2 (P1.043) to set the
delay time.
Timing diagram of brake control:
ON
SON OFF OFF
(DI input)
ON
BRKR OFF OFF
(DO output)
MBT1 (P1.042) MBT2 (P1.043)
ZSPD (P1.038)
Motor speed
ZSPD (P1.038)
Motor speed
Output timing of the BRKR signal:
1. When the servo drive is off and the time set for P1.043 is exceeded, but the motor speed is
still faster than the speed set for P1.038, DO.BRKR is off (the motor is clamped).
2. When the servo drive is off and the time set for P1.043 is not yet reached, but the motor speed
is already slower than the speed set for P1.038, DO.BRKR is off (the motor is clamped).
2-22
Wiring of the brake:
Servo drive Ensure the polarity of
2
diode is correct, or it
DOX: (DOX+, DOX-) will damage the drive.
X = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
It is open circuit when the Motor
DO1: (7, 6) emergency stop signal is on.
DO2: (5, 4) Brake 1
DO3: (3, 2)
DO4: (1, 26)
DO5: (28, 27) Brake
DO6: (16, 15)
DOX+
For brake
Relay
DC24V Encoder
DOX- DC24V
Brake 2
Note:
1. The B3 -M, F, and E models have only DO1 and DO2. For more details, refer to Chapter 3 Wiring.
2. The brake signal controls the solenoid valve, providing power to the brake and enabling the brake.
3. Note that there is no polarity for the brake coil.
Calculate the brake’s rated current (ECM-A3L-CY0604RS1 is used as an example here).

Power consumption of the brake (20°C) = 6.5 W (refer to Appendix A Specifications),
6.5 W
so the brake's rated current = = 0.27 A
24V
2-23
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
2-24
Wiring
This chapter illustrates the power supply circuit, connectors, and wiring for each mode
3
of the ASDA-B3.
3.1 System connection ············································································· 3-3

3.1.1 Connecting to peripheral devices (connecting to Delta communication type
servo motor) ················································································ 3-3
3.1.2 Connectors and terminal blocks ······················································· 3-5
3.1.3 Wiring for power supply ·································································· 3-6
3.1.4 UVW connectors for the ASDA-B3 servo drive ···································· 3-9
3.1.5 Specification for the encoder connector ··········································· 3-17
3.1.6 Wire selection ············································································ 3-27
3.1.7 IP67 connector wiring instructions ·················································· 3-30
3.2 Wiring diagram for the servo system ····················································· 3-32
3.3 Wiring for CN1 I/O connector ······························································ 3-34
3.3.1 CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models) ······································ 3-34
3.3.2 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models) ········ 3-35
3.3.3 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for M, F, and E
models) ···················································································· 3-38
3.3.4 CN1 I/O connector (for L model) ····················································· 3-38
3.3.5 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for L model) ······················· 3-40
3.3.6 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for L model) ········ 3-45
3.3.7 CN1 wiring diagrams ··································································· 3-48
3.4 Wiring for the CN2 encoder connector ··················································· 3-56
3.5 Wiring for the CN3 communication connector ········································· 3-59
3.5.1 Wiring for the MODBUS communication connector····························· 3-59
3.5.2 Wiring for the CANopen communication connector ····························· 3-61
3.6 CN4 serial connector (Mini USB)·························································· 3-63
3.7 Wiring for the CN6 communication connector ········································· 3-64
3.7.1 Wiring for the DMCNET communication connector ····························· 3-64
3.7.2 Wiring for the EtherCAT communication connector ····························· 3-66
3.8 CN10 STO connector (Safe torque off) ·················································· 3-68
3.9 STO function (Safe Torque Off) ···························································· 3-69
3.9.1 Introduction to STO ····································································· 3-69
3.9.2 The potential danger of STO ························································· 3-69
3-1
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.9.3 Specifications of STO ·································································· 3-70

3.9.4 How does the STO function work? ·················································· 3-71
3
3.9.4.1 Activation status ································································ 3-71
3.9.4.2 Deactivation status ····························································· 3-73
3.9.5 Wiring for STO ··········································································· 3-74
3.9.5.1 Wiring without the STO function ············································ 3-74
3.9.5.2 Wiring for single drive module with the STO function ·················· 3-74
3.9.5.3 Wiring for multiple drive modules with the STO function ·············· 3-75
3.10 Standard wiring example ·································································· 3-76
3.10.1 Position (PT) control mode - differential pulse signal ························· 3-76
3.10.2 Position (PT) control mode - open-collector pulse signal ······················ 3-77
3.10.3 Position (PR) control mode - internal position command ···················· 3-78
3.10.4 Speed (S) control mode ······························································ 3-79
3.10.5 Torque (T) control mode ····························································· 3-80
3.10.6 CANopen communication mode ··················································· 3-81
3.10.7 DMCNET communication mode ··················································· 3-82
3.10.8 EtherCAT communication mode ··················································· 3-83
3-2
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.1 System connection

3.1.1 Connecting to peripheral devices (connecting to Delta
3
communication type servo motor)
Power
100 W - 1.5 kW Single- / Three-phase 200 - 230V
2 kW - 3 kW Three-phase 200 - 230V
No fuse breaker (NFB)

It could prevent the instantaneous excessive current
caused by short-circuit or from damaging the servo
drive when power is on / off.
Magnetic contactor (MC)

When an alarm occurs, it outputs
Mini USB connector (CN4)
ALARM signal and cuts off the power to
Connect to PC to operate the
the servo drive.
software. Use standard type
USB mini connection cable to
connect to ASDA-Soft.
Communication port
Power input of the connector (CN3/CN6)
main circuit (RST)
Control circuit (L1C L2C)
I/O connector (CN1)
Brake resistor
connector (P + D C) STO (CN10)
Encoder connector (CN2)

Regenerative
resistor Servo drive output (UVW)
(optional purchase)
3-3
Wiring ASDA-B3
Installation precautions:
1. Make sure the power and wiring connections of the R, S, T, and L1C, L2C are correct. Refer to
3
Appendix A Specifications for the correct voltage input to avoid any damage to the servo
drive and dangerous operating conditions.
2. Make sure the UVW terminal block is correctly wired to avoid abnormal operation of the motor.
3. When installing an external regenerative resistor, P and D contacts are left open, and the
external regenerative resistor is connected to P and C contacts. When using the built-in
regenerative resistor, P and D contacts are short-circuited, and P and C contacts are
left open.
4. When an alarm occurs or the system is in the emergency stop status, use DO.ALRM or
DO.WARN to disconnect the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) so as to power off the
servo drive.
3-4
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.1.2 Connectors and terminal blocks
Symbol Name Description
3
Power input for the Connect to single-phase AC power.
L1C, L2C
control circuit (Refer to the model specification for the proper input voltage.)
Power input for the main Connect to three-phase AC power.
R, S, T
circuit (Refer to the model specification for the proper input voltage.)
Connect to the servo motor.
Wire
Symbol Description
color
U, V, W, U Red
Motor power connector A three-phase main power cable for the
FG V White
motor.
W Black
FG Green Connect to the ground terminal for

the servo drive.
Use the built-in P and D contacts are short-circuited,
resistor and P and C contacts are left open.
The resistor is connected to P and C
Use an external
contacts, and P and D contacts are
P , D, Regenerative resistor resistor
left open.
C, terminal or braking unit
Connect the external braking unit to P
Use an external and of the servo drive. P & D
braking unit contacts and P & C contacts are left
open.
Ground terminal Connect to the ground wire for the power and servo motor.
I/O connector Connect to the controller. Refer to Section 3.3 for more
CN1
(optional purchase) information.
Encoder connector Connect to the encoder. Refer to Section 3.4 for more
CN2
(optional purchase) information.
RS-485 or CANopen
For RS-485 or CANopen. Refer to Section 3.5 for more
CN3 connector (optional
information.
purchase)
Mini USB connector Connect to PC or notebook.
CN4
(optional purchase) Refer to Section 3.6 for more information.
DMCNET or EtherCAT
For DMCNET or EtherCAT. Refer to Section 3.7 for more
CN6 connector (optional
information.
purchase)
Connect to STO (Safe Torque Off). Refer to Section 3.9 for
CN10 STO connector
more information.
Pay special attention to the following when wiring:

1. When the power is off, do not touch R, S, T, U, V, W, P , D, C, and since the
capacitance inside the servo drive can still contain a dangerously large amount of electric
charge. Wait until the charging light is off.
2. Separate R, S, T and U, V, W from other wires. The separation should be at least 30 cm
(11.8 inches).
3. When using RS-485, use the shielded twisted-pair cable to ensure the communication quality.
4. When selecting the wires, refer to Section 3.1.6.
5. Do not use any external capacitor, or it might damage the servo drive.
3-5
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.1.3 Wiring for power supply
There are two methods for wiring the power supply: single-phase and three-phase. In the
3
following diagram, Power 1 is normally open, and Power 2 and ALRM_RY_B are normally
closed. MC (magnetic contactor) is the power relay and the contact for the main power circuit.
 Wiring method for single-phase power supply (for models of 1.5 kW and below)
SR
MCCB
Noise filter Power 1 Power 2 MC ALRM_RY_B
MC
SPD
R Servo drive
U
S V Motor
MC
T W
L1C
L2C
Note:
MCCB: molded case circuit breaker CN1
MC: magnetic contactor 24 VDC
SPD: surge protection device
DO5+ (28)
Power 1: power on ALRM_RY
Power 2: power off
ALRM_RY: alarm relay
ALRM_RY_B: normally closed contact DO5- (27)
of the alarm relay
3-6
ASDA-B3 Wiring
 Wiring method for three-phase power supply (for all series)

T SR
3
MCCB
Noise filter Power 1 Power 2 MC ALRM_RY_B
MC
SPD
Servo drive
R U
S V Motor
T W
MC
L1C
L2C
Note:
MCCB: molded case circuit breaker CN1
MC: magnetic contactor 24 VDC
SPD: surge protection device DO5+ (28)
Power 1: power on
Power 2: power off ALRM_RY
ALRM_RY_B: normally closed contact
DO5- (27)
of the alarm relay
3-7
Wiring ASDA-B3
 Connecting multiple servo drives (in series)

Using a common DC Bus can increase the efficiency of the regenerative energy.
3
For instance, while one of the axes is decelerating, the regenerative energy can supply
other axes. If you need to connect servo drives of different power levels, only models of
similar power levels can be connected.
Example (a servo system only allows servo drives of two different power levels)
1. If there is a 400 W servo drive in the system, you can connect a 200 W servo drive, and
the regenerative resistor (or braking unit) should connect to the 400 W servo drive.
2. If there is a 400 W servo drive in the system, you can connect a 750 W servo drive, and
the regenerative resistor (or braking unit) should connect to the 750 W servo drive.
T SR
MCCB
EMI filter Power 1 Power 2 MC ALRM_RY_B
MC
SPD
MC
R
S
T
L1C
L2C
P
Regenerative
resistor D
C
R
S
T
L1C
L2C
Note:
MCCB: molded case circuit breaker P
MC: magnetic contactor Regenerative
SPD: surge protection device
resistor D
Power 1: power on
Power 2: power off C
ALRM_RY_B: normally closed contact
of the alarm relay
3-8
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.1.4 UVW connectors for the ASDA-B3 servo drive
In addition to the standard quick connectors, Delta also provides IP67 waterproof connectors for
3
50 W - 750 W motors.
Delta provides two types of power cables*1: standard cables and flexible cables. If the power
cable is connected to a moving machinery, it is suggested to use a flexible cable. Refer to the
following table for flexible cable specifications.
R = Bend radius of the encoder cable
Test item Test specification
Bend radius 7.5 times of the cable outer diameter
Number of bending times 10 million*2
Bending speed 5 m/s
Note:
1. Delta also provides standard and flexible encoder cables. Refer to Appendix B for more details.
2. Bending the cable into a curve and then straightening it is considered as one time.
3-9
Wiring ASDA-B3
3
(1)
Note: pin assignments of the B3 and B2 models are the same. For easier wiring, the B3’s connector
illustration (angle of viewing) is changed, which is different from that of B2.
3-10
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Refer to the following table for UVW connector specifications.
Motor model UVW connector
3
Recommended brand Model number
50-36-1735 (housing)
Molex
39-00-0040 (terminal)
C4201H00-2*2PA (housing)
JWT
C4201TOP-2 (terminal)
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
Pin assignment
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5 CASE
GROUND
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 U (Red) V (White) W (Black) BRAKE1*4 BRAKE2*4
(Green /
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5 Yellow)
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 - -
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 040F 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5

50-36-1736 (housing)
Molex
39-00-0040 (terminal)
C4201H00-2*3PA (housing)
JWT
C4201TOP-2 (terminal)
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
U (Red) V (White) W (Black) BRAKE1*4 BRAKE2*4
(Green /
Yellow)
1 2 4 5 3 6
Wire selection: use a 600 VAC PVC cable. Refer to Section 3.1.6 for more information.
Note:
1. In the servo motor model name, 1 represents the motor inertia, 2 represents the encoder type,
3 represents the brake or keyway / oil seal type, 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector
type, and 5 represents the special code.
2. Power supply for the brake is 24 VDC. Do not share the same power supply with control signals.
3. The brake coil has no polarity. Its pin symbols are BRAKE1 and BRAKE2.
4. Color of brake cable for motors with the frame size of 40 - 86 mm: brown and blue.
3-11
Wiring ASDA-B3
3
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1310 3 4 5 CE05-6A18-10SD-D-BSS(R1) (connector)
DDK
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1315 3 4 5 CE3057-10A-1-D(R1) (cable clamp)
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1320 3 4 5 SUNCHU CMS3106S18-10SBI
WPS3106A18-10S-R (connector)
PLT
WPS3057-10A-R (cable clamp)
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
U (Red) V (White) W (Black) BRAKE1 BRAKE2
(Green /
Yellow)
A B C D - -
Note: in the servo motor model name, 1 represents the motor inertia, 2 represents the encoder type,
3-12
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3
1 2
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1310 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1315 3 4 5 Recommended brand Model number for UVW end
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1320 3 4 5
CE05-6A18-10SD-D-BSS(R1) (connector)
DDK
CE3057-10A-1-D(R1) (cable clamp)
SUNCHU CMS3106S18-10SBI
PLT
Recommended brand Model number for brake end
DDK CM10-SP2S-x-D or CMV1-SP2S-x-D
SUNCHU SC-CMV1-SP02C
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
(Green /
Yellow)
A B C D 1 2
Note:
4. Color of brake cable for motors with the frame size of 100 mm or above: red and black. The model
number of UVW connector is MIL 18-10S and that of the brake connector is CMV1-2S.
3-13
Wiring ASDA-B3
3
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1820 3 4 5 DDK
ECM-B3 1 -F 2 1830 3 4 5
PLT
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
U (Red) V (White) W (Black) BRAKE1 BRAKE2
(Green /
Yellow)
A B C D - -
3-14
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3
1 2
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1820 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -F 2 1830 3 4 5 Recommended brand Model number for UVW end
DDK
PLT
Recommended brand Model number for brake end
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
(Green /
Yellow)
A B C D 1 2
Note:
4. Color of brake cable for motors with the frame size of 100 mm or above: red and black. The model
number of UVW connector is MIL 22-22S and that of the brake connector is CMV1-2S.
3-15
Wiring ASDA-B3
3
4 3
1 2

23004231-01 (wire diameter: Φ3.5 - 6.5 mm)
CHOGORI
Pin assignment
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
CASE
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
GROUND
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 U (Red) V (White) W (Black) BRAKE1*4 BRAKE2*4
(Green /
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5 Yellow)
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 - -
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 040F 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
5 4
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 6 3
1
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5
2
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5

CHOGORI
Pin assignment
CASE
GROUND
(Green /
Yellow)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Note:
4. Color of brake cable for motors with the frame size of 40 - 86 mm: brown and blue; color of brake
cable for motors with the frame size of 100 mm or above: red and black.
3-16
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.1.5 Specification for the encoder connector
Delta provides two types of encoder cables*1: standard cables and flexible cables. If the encoder
3
cable is connected to a moving machinery, it is suggested to use a flexible cable. Refer to the
following table for flexible cable specifications.
R = Bend radius of the encoder cable
Test item Test specification
Bend radius 7.5 times of the cable outer diameter
Number of bending times 10 million*2
Bending speed 5 m/s
Note:
1. Delta also provides standard and flexible power cables. Refer to Appendix B for more details.
2. Bending the cable into a curve and then straightening it is considered as one time.
3-17
Wiring ASDA-B3
Encoder connection (Diagram 1): Quick connector
(2)
(1)
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Quick connector (Male)
Note: the diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the encoder, and it is not drawn to
scale. The specification is subject to change depending on the selected servo drive and motor models.
Motor model Quick connector (Male)
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 040F 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 Recommended brand Model number
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5 1-172161-9 or 172161-1 (housing)

TE Connectivity 170359-1 (terminal) - tin-plated
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5
170359-3 (terminal) - gold-plated
Note:
3 represents the brake or keyway / oil seal type, 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type,
and 5 represents the special code.
2. It is suggested that the terminals of the servo motor and quick connector are plated with the same
material. As the servo motor terminal is tin-plated, using the tin-plated connector is recommended.
3-18
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Specifications and pin assignment for the quick connector of the incremental encoder
Model name
L
mm
L
inch
3
ACS3-CAE 1003 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1010 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 1020 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Note: select cables according to the in the model name. F represents flexible cables and N represents
standard cables.
Quick connector for the encoder

(Female) (Male)
Servo drive Encoder
View from this side View from this side
1 2 3 3 2 1
White White
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
T+ T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
White/Red White/Red
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
T- T-
7 8 9 9 8 7
Brown Blue Blue Brown
Shield Shield
DC+5V GND GND DC+5V
Note: the wire colors of the ASDA-B3 servo drive are for reference only. Refer to the actual servo drive.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Servo drive Encoder
To directly connect the wires without using the connectors, wire them according to the
corresponding wire number (shown above). For example, connect wire No. 1 of the servo drive
to wire No. 1 of the motor encoder; connect wire No. 2 of the servo drive to wire No. 2 of the
motor encoder, and so on. Number the wires of the servo drive in sequence and then connect
them to the encoder.
3-19
Wiring ASDA-B3
Specification and pin assignment for the quick connector of the absolute encoder
3 Model name
L
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 1003 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1010 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 1020 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Note: select cables according to the in the model name. B represents flexible cables and A represents
standard cables.
Connection method:
Caution Follow these instructions when wiring. Incorrect wiring may cause battery
explosion.
Battery box
CN2 connector Quick connector
Connect to the
servo drive Connect to
the motor

(Female) (Male)
Servo drive Encoder
1 2 3 3 2 1
White Red Black White
Reserved Reserved
T+ BAT+ BAT+ T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
White/Red Black Black/Red White/Red
Reserved Reserved
T- BAT- BAT- T-
7 8 9 9 8 7
Shield Shield
DC+5V GND GND DC+5V
3-20
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Encoder connection (Diagram 2): Military connector
(2)
3
(1)
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Military encoder
Motor model Military connector
3 2 1
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1310 3 4 5
7 4
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1315 3 4 5
10 9 8
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1320 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1820 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -F 2 1830 3 4 5 Recommended brand Model number

3-21
Wiring ASDA-B3
Specifications and pin assignment for the military connector of the B3 incremental encoder
3 L
L
Model name Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2703 CMV1-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2705 CMV1-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2710 CMV1-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2720 CMV1-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
Military connector
CN2 connector
Connect to the
Connect to servo drive
the motor
3 2 1
7 4
10 9 8
Pin No. Terminal Color
1 T+ White
2 T- White/Red
3 - -
4 DC+5V Brown
5, 6, 7, 8 - -
9 GND Blue
10 Shield -
3-22
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Specifications and pin assignment for the military connector of the B3 absolute encoder
L 3
L
Model name Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2703 CMV1-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2705 CMV1-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 2710 CMV1-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2720 CMV1-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
Connection method:
explosion.
Battery box
Military connector
CN2 connector
Connect to the
the motor
3 2 1
7 4
10 9 8
1 T+ White
2 T- White/Red
3 - -
4 DC+5V Brown
5 BAT- Black
6 BAT+ Red
7, 8 - -
9 GND Blue
10 Shield -
3-23
Wiring ASDA-B3
Encoder connection (Diagram 3): IP67 waterproof connectors for ECM-A3 / B3 motors
(1) CN2 connector; (2) IP67 waterproof connector
Motor model IP67 waterproof connector

ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 1 7
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5 2 6
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5 8
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 040F 3 4 5 3 5
4
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5 CHOGORI 22008231-01 (wire diameter: Φ3.5 - 6.5 mm)
3-24
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Specifications and pin assignment for the IP67 waterproof connector of the A3 / B3 incremental
encoder
L
3
L
Model name Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2A03 22008231-01 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A05 22008231-01 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A10 22008231-01 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2A20 22008231-01 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
IP67 waterproof connector

CN2 connector
Connect to the
the motor
1 7
2 6
8
3 5
4
1 T+ White
2 T- White/Red
3 GND Blue
4 DC+5V Brown
5, 6, 7 - -
8 BRAID SHIELD -
3-25
Wiring ASDA-B3
Specifications and pin assignment for the IP67 waterproof connector of the A3 / B3 absolute
encoder
3 L
L
Model name Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2A03 22008231-01 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A05 22008231-01 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A10 22008231-01 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2A20 22008231-01 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
Connection method:
explosion.
Battery box
IP67 waterproof connector
CN2 connector
Connect to the
the motor
1 7
2 6
8
3 5
4
1 T+ White
2 T- White/Red
3 GND Blue
4 DC+5V Brown
5 BAT- Black
6 BAT+ Red
7 - -
8 BRAID SHIELD -
Note: if using an incremental encoder cable, connecting BAT+ and BAT- is not required.
3-26
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.1.6 Wire selection
Refer to the requirements for doubling, and note the recommended wire for connectors and
3
signal wiring for ASDA-B3 as listed in the following tables:
1. The shield should connect to the phase of the ground terminal.

2. When wiring, use the wires suggested in this section to avoid danger.
Wire
K. S. Terminals Inc. Kise Terminal Kss Terminal
Servo drive model diameter
U, V, W Y type O type Y type O type Y type O type
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2 18 AWG
SVBL1-3.7 RVBM1-3.7 SVS 1.25-3.5 RVS 1.25-3.5 YF1.25-3 RF1.25-3
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2 0.82 mm2
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 14 AWG
SVBL2-3.7 RVBM2-3.7 SV 3.5-3 RVS 2-3.5 YF3.5-3S RF2-3
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2 2.1 mm2
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2 12 AWG
SVB3-4 RVB3-4 SV3.5-4 RV3.5-4 YF3.5-4 RF3.5-4
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2 3.3 mm2
Wire
P ,C Y type O type Y type O type Y type O type
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
SVBL2-3.7 RVBM2-3.2 SV 3.5-3 RV 2-3 YF3.5-3S RF2-3
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2 14 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 2.1 mm2
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
SVBL2-4 RVBL2-4 SV 3.5-4 RV 3.5-4 YF2-4 RF2-4
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
Wire
L1C, L2C Y type O type Y type O type Y type O type
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
SVBL2-3.7 RVBM2-3.2 SV 1.25-3 RV 1.25-3 YF1.25-3 RF1.25-3
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2 16 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 1.3 mm2
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
SVBL2-4 RVBL2-4 SV 1.25-4 RVL 1.25-4 YF2-4 RF2-4
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
3-27
Wiring ASDA-B3
Wire diameter K. S. Terminals Inc. Kise Terminal Kss Terminal

Servo drive model
R, S, T Y type O type Y type O type Y type O type
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2 22 AWG
3
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2 0.32 mm2
20 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2 SVBL1-3.7 RVBM1-3.7 SV 1.25-3 RV 1.25-3 YF1.25-3 RF1.25-3
0.52 mm2
16 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
1.3 mm2
14 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 SVBL2-3.7 RVBM2-3.2 RV 2-3 RF2-3
2.1 mm2
SV 3.5-3 YF3.5-3S
12 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2 - - - -
3.3 mm2
12 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
3.3 mm2
SVBS5-4 RVBS5-4 SVS 5.5-4 RVS 5.5-4 YF5.5-4 RF5.5-4
10 AWG
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
5.3 mm2
If you choose other brands of terminals, refer to the terminal block width and screw specifications
in the following table:
Servo drive model Width Screw

ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
7 mm M3
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
9.5 mm M4
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
Note:
1. Select the correct O-type terminal or Y-type terminal corresponding to the servo drive and make sure
the wire conforms to the specifications.
2. Use a crimping tool to properly crimp the terminal and wire.
3. Do not use bare wires for wiring, or the loose wires may cause accidents.
4. Use 600 VAC PVC wire for the power cable with the wiring length of 20 meters (65.62 feet) or less.
3-28
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Encoder cable - wire diameter mm² (AWG)

Servo drive model
Size Number Specification Standard length
3
ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0221- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0421- 2
ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2
L = 3 - 20 m L = 3 - 20 m
Note*5 2C+2P
(UL2464) (9.84 - 65.6 ft)
ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2
ASD-B3 1 -1521- 2
ASD-B3 1 -2023- 2
ASD-B3 1 -3023- 2
Note:
1. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for wiring the encoder to reduce the noise interference.
2. The shield should connect to the phase of the ground terminal.

3. When wiring, use the wires suggested in this section to avoid danger.
4. Specification of brake cable for motors with the frame size of 40 - 86 mm: 22 AWG; specification of
brake cable for motors with the frame size of 100 mm or above: 20 AWG.
5. When the encoder cable length is 3 - 20 m (9.84 - 65.62 ft), 0.324 mm²-2C (22 AWG-2C) is +5V and
grounded, and 0.205 mm²-2P (24 AWG-2P) is the signal cable.
3-29
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.1.7 IP67 connector wiring instructions
Follow these wiring instructions:
3 2 - 3 mm
8 - 12 mm
Step 1:
Cut through the cable and expose the shielding.
The exposed wire length should be 8 - 12 mm
(0.31 - 0.47 inches) and the tinned wire length
should be 2 - 3 mm (0.08 - 0.12 inches).
Step 2:
Place the (A) seals nut, (B) seals ring,

(C) (A) (C) clamp ring, and (D) gasket on the cable in
(D) (B)
sequence.
Note: place the flat face of the gasket outwards and
the groove face towards the clamp ring for the
IP67 design.
Step 3:
(1) For the power connector, refer to
Section 3.1.4 for the pin assignment to
connect the pins.
(2) For the encoder connector, refer to
Section 3.1.5 for the pin assignment to
connect the pins.
(B)
Step 4:
Place the groove face of the (A) gasket towards
the clamp ring and fit it into the (B) clamp ring.
(A)
Step 5:
Use a wrench to lock the clamp ring to the
housing and place the seals ring in the

clamp ring.
Step 6:
Use a wrench to lock the seals nut to the clamp
ring to complete the wiring.
3-30
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Caution:
After wiring the IP67 connector, only fasten the
3
(B) (A) (B) (A) location to lock the connector for connecting
the servo motor and drive. Do not pull or rotate
the (B) clamp ring and seals nut to avoid loose

Conne ct to Conne ct to th e
the mo tor servo d rive connection and thus fail to meet the IP67
protection level.
3-31
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.2 Wiring diagram for the servo system

Models of 750 W and below
3
Connect to the external regenerative resistor
Power
Single- / Three-phase
200 - 230V P D C
Built-in regenerative resistor*1

U
R Servo
Regenerative circuit
Rectifier circuit
motor
Varistor
S + V
M
T
W
Loss
phase
detection Encoder
L1C Voltage Gate Current
detection drive detection
Control
power
L2C
Disconnec-
tion
detection
Control
External speed panel
External torque
Position pulse
Control unit
Digital input
CN1 CN2
Analog monitor
output
A, B, Z output
Digital output
DMCNET*3
CN6 EtherCAT*4
RS-485
CANopen*2
CN3
Mini USB CN4
Note:
1. Models of 200 W and below do not have built-in regenerative resistor; models of 400 W and 750 W
have built-in regenerative resistor.
2. CANopen is available on B3 -M only.
3. DMCNET is available on B3 -F only.
4. EtherCAT is available on B3 -E only.
3-32
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Models of 1 kW – 3 kW (with built-in regenerative resistor and fan)
Connect to the external regenerative resistor
3
Power
1 kW - 1.5 kW models single- / three-phase 200 - 230V
2 kW - 3 kW models three-phase 200 - 230V P D C
Built-in
regenerative +12V
resistor
U
Regenerative circuit
Servo
Rectifier circuit
motor
Varistor
S + V
M
T
W
Loss
phase
detection Encoder
L1C Voltage Gate Current
detection drive detection
Control
power
L2C
Disconnec-
tion
detection
External speed Control

External torque panel
Position pulse
Digital input Control unit

CN1
Analog monitor CN2
output
A, B, Z output
Digital output
RS-485 CN6 DMCNET*2

CANopen*1 CN3 EtherCAT*3
Mini USB CN4
Note:
1. CANopen is available on B3 -M only.
2. DMCNET is available on B3 -F only.
3. EtherCAT is available on B3 -E only.
3-33
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.3 Wiring for CN1 I/O connector

3.3.1 CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models)
3
You can define 4 digital input (DI) points and 2 digital output (DO) points to provide highly
flexible communication between the servo drive and the controller. In addition, differential type
output signals, A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, and Z-, for the encoder are provided. The pin assignments
are shown as follows.
10
1 19
26
18
9
(1) CN1 connector (female); (2) CN1 connector (male)
Pin assignment:
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description

PULL HI_P
1 OA Encoder A pulse output 14 External power input of pulse
(Pulse)
2 /OA Encoder /A pulse output 15 DO1+ Digital output
3 OZ Encoder Z pulse output 16 DO1- Digital output
4 /OZ Encoder /Z pulse output 17 DO2+ Digital output
5 COM+ Power input (24V ± 10%) 18 DO2- Digital output
6 DI1- Digital input 19 V_REF Analog speed / position input (+)
7 DI2- Digital input 20 T_REF Analog torque input
8 DI3- Digital input 21 MON1 Analog monitor output 1
9 DI4- Digital input 22 MON2 Analog monitor output 2

Ground for analog /
10 GND 23 SIGN+ Position sign (+)
differential output signal
11 OB Encoder B pulse output 24 SIGN- Position sign (-)
12 /OB Encoder /B pulse output 25 PULSE+ Position pulse (+)

PULL HI_S External power input of Sign
13 26 PULSE- Position pulse (-)
(Sign) pulse
Note:
1. The pulse input function is supported by the B3A series only.
2. Do not directly input the 24V power supply to the SIGN+, SIGN-, PULSE+, and PULSE- pins, or
the circuit elements will be damaged.
3-34
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.3.2 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for M, F, and E models)
The following table details the signals listed in the previous section.
General signals:
Signal Pin No. Description

Wiring method
(refer to
Section 3.3.7)
3
(1) When the motor speed command is set to
-10V to +10V, it means the rotation speed is
-3000 to +3000 rpm (default). You can set the
Analog V_REF 19 corresponding range with parameters. C1
command (2) When the motor position command is set to
(input) -10V to +10V, it means the range of the
rotation position is -3 to +3 cycles (default).
When the motor torque command is set to -10V to
T_REF 20 C1
+10V, it means the rated torque is -100% to +100%.
The operation status of motor, such as speed and
Analog MON1 21 current, can be displayed in analog voltage.
monitor This servo drive provides 2 output channels. C2
(output) MON2 22 You can select the data to be monitored with
P0.003. This signal is based on the power ground.
PULSE+ 25
PULSE- 26 Position pulse can be sent by the line driver
(single-phase max. frequency 4 MHz) or open
collector (single-phase max. frequency 200 kHz).
Position Three command types can be selected with
SIGN+ 23
pulse* P1.000, CW/CCW pulse, pulse and direction, and C3/C4
(input) SIGN- 24 A/B pulse.
If open collector type is used when sending position
pulses, CN1 should be connected to an external
PULL HI_P 14 power supply for pull high.
PULL HI_S 13
OA 1
/OA 2
Position OB 11
pulse Encoder signal A, B, and Z output (line driver). C9/C10
(output) /OB 12
OZ 3
/OZ 4
NPN: COM+ is for DI voltage input and requires an
external power supply (24V ± 10%).
COM+ 5
Power PNP: COM+ is for DI voltage input (negative end) -
and requires an external power supply (24V ± 10%).
GND 10 GND for analog signal and differential output signal.
Note: the pulse input function is supported by the B3A series only.
3-35
Wiring ASDA-B3
These servo drive models provide user-defined I/O for you to set functions according to the
application requirements. See Section 8.3 and refer to Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions
3
and Table 8.2 Digital output (DO) descriptions. The default DI/DO signal configuration for each
operation mode includes the most commonly used functions and meets the requirements for
general applications. Set P1.001.U to 1 and cycle the power to the servo drive, then you can
reset the signals to the default values corresponding to each mode.
See the following table for the default DI signal of each control mode:
Control mode
PT PR S/Sz T/Tz PT-S PT-T PR-S
DI
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SON SON SON SON SON SON SON
0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22

2
NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23

3
PL PL PL PL PL PL PL
0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21

4
EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS
Control mode
PR-T S-T Communication PT-PR PT-PR-S PT-PR-T
DI
Default Default Default Default Default Default
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
0x01 0x01 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SON SON - SON SON SON
0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22

2
NL NL NL NL NL NL
0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23

3
PL PL PL PL PL PL
0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21

4
EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS
Note:
1. Description of each DI signal:
Signal Description Signal Description
SON Servo is activated NL Negative limit
EMGS Emergency stop PL Positive limit
2. Refer to the C7 and C8 figures in Section 3.3.7 for wiring.
3-36
ASDA-B3 Wiring
See the following table for the default DO signal of each control mode:
Control mode
3
PT PR S/Sz T/Tz PT-S PT-T PR-S
DO
Default Default Default Default Default Default Default
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY
0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07

2
ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM
Control mode
PR-T S-T Communication PT-PR PT-PR-S PT-PR-T
DO
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY SRDY
0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07

2
ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM ALRM
Note:
1. Description of each DO signal:
Signal Description Signal Description
SRDY Servo ready ALRM Servo alarm
If the default DI/DO function cannot meet the application requirement, specify the DI/DO
functions by setting DI or DO code to the corresponding parameters. The signal functions are
set with the parameters listed in the following table.
Signal Pin No. Corresponding Signal Pin No. Corresponding

parameter parameter
DI1- 6 P2.010 DO1+ 15
P2.018
DI2- 7 P2.011 DO1- 16
Standard Standard
DI DO
DI3- 8 P2.012 DO2+ 17
P2.019
DI4- 9 P2.013 DO2- 18
3-37
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.3.3 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for M, F, and
E models)
3
The CN1 quick connector* is designed for easy wiring, which can be applied to the ASDA-B3
series servo drive. It is a good choice if you do not want to solder the wires. Its spring terminal
blocks prevent the wire from loosening due to vibration.
Note: coming soon.
3.3.4 CN1 I/O connector (for L model)
You can define 9 digital input (DI) points and 6 digital output (DO) points to provide highly
flexible communication between the servo drive and the controller. In addition, differential type
output signals, A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, and Z-, for the encoder are provided. Analog torque command
input, analog speed / position command input, and pulse position command input are also
available. The pin assignments are shown as follows:
16
1 31
44
30
15
3-38
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Pin assignment:
Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description
3
1 DO4+ Digital output 23 /OB Encoder /B pulse output
2 DO3- Digital output 24 /OZ Encoder /Z pulse output
3 DO3+ Digital output 25 OB Encoder B pulse output
4 DO2- Digital output 26 DO4- Digital output
5 DO2+ Digital output 27 DO5- Digital output
6 DO1- Digital output 28 DO5+ Digital output
GND for analog signal and
7 DO1+ Digital output 29 GND
8 DI4- Digital input 30 DI8- Digital input
11 COM+ Power input (24V ± 10%) 33 DI5- Digital input
Encoder Z pulse line-driver PULL HI_S External power input of Sign
13 OZ 35
output (Sign) pulse
PULL HI_P
14 MON2 Analog monitor output 2 36 External power input of pulse
(Pulse)
15 DO6- Digital output 37 SIGN- Position sign (-)
16 DO6+ Digital output 38 NC -
17 MON1 Analog monitor output 1 39 SIGN+ Position sign (+)
18 T_REF Analog torque input 40 GND
19 GND 41 PULSE- Position pulse (-)
Analog command input speed /
20 V_REF 42 NC -
position (+)
21 OA Encoder A pulse output 43 PULSE+ Position pulse (+)
Encoder Z pulse open-collector
22 /OA Encoder /A pulse output 44 OCZ
output
Note:
1. NC represents “No connection”, which is for internal use only. Do not connect to NC, or it may damage
the servo drive.
2. The analog voltage control function is not supported by the B3B series.
3. Do not directly input the 24V power supply to the SIGN+, SIGN-, PULSE+, and PULSE- pins, or
the circuit elements will be damaged.
3-39
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.3.5 Signal explanation for CN1 I/O connector (for L model)
The following table details the signals listed in the previous section.
3 General signals:
Signal Pin No. Description

Wiring method
(refer to
Section 3.3.7)
(1) When the motor speed command is set to -10V
to +10V, it means the rotation speed is -3000 to
+3000 rpm (default). You can set the
Analog V_REF 20 corresponding range with parameters. C1
command (2) When the motor position command is set to
(input) -10V to +10V, it means the range of the rotation
position is -3 to +3 cycles (default).
When the motor torque command is set to -10V to
T_REF 18 C1
+10V, it means the rated torque is -100% to +100%.
The operation status of motor, such as speed and
Analog MON1 17 current, can be displayed in analog voltage.
monitor This servo drive provides 2 output channels. C2
(output) MON2 14 You can select the data to be monitored with
P0.003. This signal is based on the power ground.
PULSE+ 43
PULSE- 41 Position pulse can be sent by the line driver
(single-phase max. frequency 4 MHz) or open
collector (single-phase max. frequency 200 kHz).
Position Three command types can be selected with
SIGN+ 39
pulse P1.000, CW/CCW pulse, pulse and direction, and C3/C4
(input) SIGN- 37 A/B pulse.
If open collector type is used when sending position
pulses, CN1 should be connected to an external
PULL HI_P 36 power supply for pull high.
PULL HI_S 35
OA 21
/OA 22
Position OB 25
Encoder signal A, B, and Z output (line driver). C9/C10
pulse /OB 23
(output) OZ 13
/OZ 24
OCZ 44 Encoder Z pulse output (open collector). C11
NPN: COM+ is for DI voltage input and requires an
external power supply (24V ± 10%).
COM+ 11
PNP: COM+ is for DI voltage input (negative end)
Power and requires an external power supply (24V ± 10%).
-
19, 29,
GND GND for analog signal and differential output signal.
40
No connection. This is for internal use only. Do not
Other NC 38, 42
connect to NC, or it may damage the servo drive.
Note: the analog voltage control function is not supported by the B3B series.
3-40
ASDA-B3 Wiring
There are various operation modes available (refer to Section 6.1) and the I/O configuration
differs for each mode. This servo drive model provides user-defined I/O for you to set functions
3
according to the application requirements. See Section 8.3 and refer to Table 8.1 Digital input
(DI) descriptions and Table 8.2 Digital output (DO) descriptions. The default DI/DO signal
configuration for each operation mode includes the most commonly used functions and meets
the requirements for general applications. Set P1.001.U to 1 and cycle the power to the servo
drive, then you can reset the signals to the default values corresponding to each mode.
See the following table for the default DI signal of each control mode:
Control mode
PT PR S/Sz T/Tz PT-S PT-T
DI
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SON SON SON SON SON SON
0x04 0x08 0x09 0x10 0x04 0x04

2
CCLR CTRG TRQLM SPDLM CCLR CCLR
0x16 0x11 0x14 0x16 0x14 0x16

3
TCM0 POS0 SPD0 TCM0 SPD0 TCM0
0x17 0x12 0x15 0x17 0x15 0x17

4
TCM1 POS1 SPD1 TCM1 SPD1 TCM1
0x02 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x00 0x00

5
ARST ARST ARST ARST - -
0x22 0x22 0x22 0x22 0x00 0x00

6
NL NL NL NL - -
0x23 0x23 0x23 0x23 0x18 0x20

7
PL PL PL PL S-P T-P
0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21 0x21

8
EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS EMGS
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

9
- - - - - -
3-41
Wiring ASDA-B3
Control mode
PR-S PR-T S-T PT-PR PT-PR-S PT-PR-T
DI
3
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
SON SON SON SON SON SON
0x08 0x08 0x00 0x04 0x04 0x04

2
CTRG CTRG - CCLR CCLR CCLR
0x11 0x11 0x14 0x08 0x08 0x08

3
POS0 POS0 SPD0 CTRG CTRG CTRG
0x12 0x12 0x15 0x11 0x11 0x11

4
POS1 POS1 SPD1 POS0 POS0 POS0
0x14 0x16 0x16 0x12 0x12 0x12

5
SPD0 TCM0 TCM0 POS1 POS1 POS1
0x15 0x17 0x17 0x13 0x24 0x24

6
SPD1 TCM1 TCM1 POS2 ORGP ORGP
0x18 0x20 0x19 0x24 0x18 0x20

7
S-P T-P S-T ORGP S-P T-P
0x21 0x21 0x21 0x2B 0x2B 0x2B

8
EMGS EMGS EMGS PT-PR PT-PR PT-PR
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x02 0x02

9
- - - ARST ARST ARST
Note:
1. Description of each DI signal:
Signal Description Signal Description Signal Description
SON Servo is activated NL Negative limit PL Positive limit
CCLR Pulse clear ARST Alarm reset EMGS Emergency stop

Internal position
CTRG TCM0 Torque command 0 TCM1 Torque command 1
command triggered
TRQLM Torque limit SPD0 Speed selection 0 SPD1 Speed selection 1
SPDLM Speed limit POS0 Internal position selection 0 POS1 Internal position selection 1
Switch between S and P Switch between T and P Switch between S and T
S-P T-P S-T
modes modes modes
Switch between PT and
PT-PR POS2 Internal position selection 2 ORGP ORG signal
PR modes
3-42
ASDA-B3 Wiring
See the following table for the default DO signal of each control mode:
Control mode
3
PT PR S/Sz T/Tz PT-S PT-T
DO
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03

2
ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD
0x09 0x09 0x04 0x04 0x04 0x04

3
HOME HOME TSPD TSPD TSPD TSPD
0x05 0x05 0x08 0x08 0x05 0x05

4
TPOS TPOS BRKR BRKR TPOS TPOS
0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07

5
Control mode
PR-S PR-T S-T PT-PR PT-PR-S PT-PR-T
DO
0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01 0x01
1
0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03 0x03

2
ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD ZSPD
0x04 0x04 0x04 0x09 0x09 0x09

3
TSPD TSPD TSPD HOME HOME HOME
0x05 0x05 0x00 0x05 0x05 0x05

4
TPOS TPOS - TPOS TPOS TPOS
0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07 0x07

5
Note:
Description of each DO signal:
Signal Description Signal Description Signal Description

Homing is Target speed
SRDY Servo ready HOME TSPD
complete reached
Zero motor Target position
ZSPD TPOS ALRM Servo alarm
speed reached
BRKR Magnetic brake - - - -
3-43
Wiring ASDA-B3
If the default DI/DO function cannot meet the application requirement, specify the DI/DO functions
by setting DI or DO code to the corresponding parameters. The signal functions are set with the
3
parameters listed in the following table.
Corresponding Corresponding
Signal Pin No. Signal Pin No.
parameter parameter
DI1- 9 P2.010 DI6- 32 P2.015
DI2- 10 P2.011 DI7- 31 P2.016

Standard Standard
DI3- 34 P2.012 DI8- 30 P2.017
DI DI
DI4- 8 P2.013 DI9- 12 P2.036
DI5- 33 P2.014 - - -
Corresponding Corresponding
Signal Pin No. Signal Pin No.
parameter parameter
DO1+ 7 DO4+ 1
P2.018 P2.021
DO1- 6 DO4- 26
DO2+ 5 DO5+ 28
Standard Standard
P2.019 P2.022
DO DO
DO2- 4 DO5- 27
DO3+ 3 DO6+ 16
P2.020 P2.041
DO3- 2 DO6- 15
3-44
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.3.6 Application: using the CN1 quick connector for wiring (for L model)
The CN1 quick connector (ACS3-IFSC4444) is designed for easy wiring, which can be applied
3
to the ASDA-B3 series servo drive. It is a good choice if you do not want to solder the wires.
Its spring terminal blocks prevent the wire from loosening due to vibration.
3-45
Wiring ASDA-B3
Pin assignment for the CN1 quick connector:
OCZ 44 43 PULSE
3
NC 42 41 /PULSE
GND 40 39 SIGN
NC 38 37 /SIGN
PULL HI_P 36 35 PULL HI_S
DI3- 34 33 DI5-
DI6- 32 31 DI7-
DI8- 30 29 GND
DO5+ 28 27 DO5-
DO4- 26 25 OB
/OZ 24 23 /OB
/OA 22 21 OA
V_REF 20 19 GND
T_REF 18 17 MON1
DO6+ 16 15 DO6-
MON2 14 13 OZ
DI9- 12 11 COM+
DI2- 10 9 DI1-
DI4- 8 7 DO1+
DO1- 6 5 DO2+
DO2- 4 3 DO3+
DO3- 2 1 DO4+
Note: NC represents “No connection”.
3-46
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Wiring and installation for the CN1 quick connector:
Installation
Wiring
(1) The CN1 quick connector has multiple
spring terminals. Determine which terminal
is to be wired in advance. Use a flathead
screwdriver to press the spring down to
open the pin.
(2) Insert the stripped wire into the pin and
withdraw the screwdriver to complete the
wiring.
3-47
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.3.7 CN1 wiring diagrams
The wiring diagrams in this chapter are based on the B3-L model. Refer to the notes for the pin
3
definition of other models. For the functions supported by each model, refer to Chapter 1.
The valid voltage for the analog speed command and the analog torque command is between
-10V and +10V. You can set the command value that corresponds to the voltage range with the
relevant parameters.
C1: input for speed / torque (force) analog command
Controller Servo drive
1.2 kΩ
20 V-REF
10 kΩ (18 T-REF)
10V
Approx. 12 kΩ
10V
19
SG GND
Note: the pin definition of the communication type models is different from that of the L model.
Communication type model pins: V-REF (19), T-REF (20), and GND (10).
C2: output for analog monitoring command (MON1 and MON2)
Servo drive Controller
8 kΩ
Max. output:
±8V, 1 mA
MON1 17 8 kΩ
(MON2 14)
10V
full-scale
19
GND
SG
Communication type model pins: MON1 (21), MON2 (22), and GND (10).
3-48
ASDA-B3 Wiring
You can input the Pulse command with the open collector or line driver. The maximum input
pulse is 4 Mpps for the line driver and 200 Kpps for the open collector.
3
Caution: do not directly input the 24V power supply to the SIGN+, SIGN-, PULSE+, and
PULSE- pins, or the circuit elements will be damaged.
C3-1: the source for the pulse input is open collector NPN type equipment, which uses the
external power supply.
35 PULL HI_S
+ DC 1.5 kΩ Max. pulse input frequency:

- 24V 200 Kpps
51 Ω
37 SIGN- 51 Ω
36 PULL HI_P
Max. pulse input frequency:

1.5 kΩ 200 Kpps
51 Ω
41 PULSE- 51 Ω
SG
Note:
1. This is supported by the B3-L model and the B3A series only.
2. The pin definition of the communication type models is different from that of the L model.
Communication type model pins: PULL HI_S (13), PULL HI_P (14), SIGN- (24), and PULSE- (26).
3-49
Wiring ASDA-B3
C3-2: the source for the pulse input is open collector PNP type equipment, which uses the
external power supply.
3
+ DC
- 24V
35 PULL HI_S

1.5 kΩ 200 Kpps
51 Ω
37 51 Ω
SIGN-
36 PULL HI_P
1.5 kΩ Max. pulse input frequency:

200 Kpps
51 Ω
41 51 Ω
PULSE-
SG
Note:
Communication type model pins: PULL HI_S (13), PULL HI_P (14), SIGN- (24), and PULSE- (26).
3-50
ASDA-B3 Wiring
C4: pulse input (line driver) can only be used with 2.8V - 3.6V power systems.
Do not use it with 24V power.
3

4 Mpps
SIGN+ 39 51 Ω
SIGN- 37 51 Ω

4 Mpps
PULSE+ 43 51 Ω
PULSE- 41 51 Ω
SG
Note:
Communication type model pins: SIGN+ (23), SIGN- (24), PULSE+ (25), and PULSE- (26).
3-51
Wiring ASDA-B3
When the drive connects to an inductive load, you must install the diode (permissible current:
below 40 mA; surge current: below 100 mA; maximum voltage: 30V).
3
C5: DO wiring - the servo drive uses an external power supply and the resistor is for general load.
Servo drive
R
24 VDC
DOX+
DOX-
C6: DO wiring - the servo drive uses an external power supply and the resistor is for inductive
load.
Make sure the polarity
Servo drive of diode is correct,
or it may damage the
servo drive.
24 VDC
DOX+
DOX-
3-52
ASDA-B3 Wiring
DI wiring - input signals by relay or open collector transistor.
Conditions of DI On / Off:
ON: 15V - 24V; condition: input current = 3 mA.

OFF: below 5V; condition: input current ≦ 0.5 mA.
C7: NPN transistor (SINK mode)

3
Servo drive
11 COM+
Approx. 4.7 kΩ
DC 24V
DI
C8: PNP transistor (SOURCE mode)
Servo drive
DI
DC 24V
11 COM+
Approx. 4.7 kΩ
3-53
Wiring ASDA-B3
C9: output for encoder position signal (line driver)
Servo drive Max. output current 20 mA Controller
3
AM26C31 series
OA 21
/OA 22 120 Ω
OB 25
/OB 23 120 Ω
OZ 13
/OZ 24 120 Ω
SG
Note:
1. It is suggested that you connect the two GND for the controller and servo drive in parallel when the
voltage deviation between the controller and the servo drive is too great.
Communication type model pins: OA (1), /OA (2), OB (11), /OB (12), OZ (3), and /OZ (4).
C10: output for encoder position signal (opto-isolator)
Servo drive Max. output current 20 mA Controller

AM26C31 series
200 Ω
OA 21
/OA 22
High speed
photocoupler
200 Ω
OB 25
/OB 23
High speed
photocoupler
200 Ω
OZ 13
/OZ 24
High speed
photocoupler
SG
Communication type model pins: OA (1), /OA (2), OB (11), /OB (12), OZ (3), and /OZ (4).
3-54
ASDA-B3 Wiring
C11: encoder OCZ output (open collector Z pulse output)

24V
Servo drive
Max. 30V
50 mA
3
OCZ 44
GND 40
Note: this is not supported by the communication type models.
3-55
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.4 Wiring for the CN2 encoder connector

The CN2 encoder signal connector is shown as follows:
 DO NOT wire Pin 3 and Pin 4 of the servo drive CN2 connector. They are for
internal use only; wiring them will cause damage to the internal circuit.
 When using an absolute encoder, the battery supplies power directly to the
encoder, so wiring to the CN2 connector of the servo drive is not required.
Quick connector ends:
2 4 6
1 3 5
Military connector ends:
3 2 1 2 4 6
7 4
10 9 8
1 3 5
3-56
ASDA-B3 Wiring
IP67 waterproof connector ends:

3
1 7
2 6 2 4 6
8
3 5 1 3 5
4
Pin assignment of CN2 connector:
The end that connects to the encoder The end that connects to the servo drive
Military Quick IP67
Color Pin No. Signal Description
connector connector connector
4 7 4 Brown 1 DC+5V +5V power supply
9 8 3 Blue 2 GND Power ground

Do not connect this pin.
- - - - 3 -
For internal use only.
- - - - 4 -
1 1 1 White 5 T+ Serial communication signal (+)
2 4 2 White / Red 6 T- Serial communication signal (-)
10 9 8 - Case Shield Shielding
6 2 6 Red - - Battery +3.6V
5 5 5 Black - - Battery ground
Note: for the absolute battery wiring, refer to Section 3.1.5 Specification for the encoder connector.
Connecting shielded wire to the CN2 encoder connector is shown as follows:
Step 1:
Cut through the cable and expose the shielding.
The exposed wire length should be 20 - 30 mm
(0.79 - 1.18 inches).
Step 2:
Spread the metal shielding and fold it back.
Refer to the CN2 pin assignment (see the table
above) to connect the pins.
3-57
Wiring ASDA-B3
(A)
3 Step 3:
You need the following items to assemble the
connector:
(A) Big metal case
(B) Small metal case
(C) (B) (C) Metal ring
Step 4:
Place the big metal case to cover the exposed
wire shielding. Make sure the shielding is
completely covered to maintain the integrity of
the shielding.
Step 5:
Fasten the small metal case on the other side.
Step 6:
Tighten the metal ring to the big metal case.
Step 7:
Fit one side of the plastic case over the
connector.
Step 8:
Place and fasten the other side of the case to
complete the connector.
3-58
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.5 Wiring for the CN3 communication connector

3.5.1 Wiring for the MODBUS communication connector
3
When the servo drive is connected to the PC via CN3, you can operate the servo drive, PLC, or
HMI through MODBUS using the assembly language. The CN3 connector supports the RS-485
communication interface which enables you to connect multiple servo drives simultaneously.
Note: B3 -L model: single port (Pin 1 - Pin 8); supports RS-485 only.
(1) (2)
Pin assignment:
Pin No. Signal Description

1 - -
2 - -
3, 7 GND_ISO Signal GND
4 RS-485- The servo drive transmits the data to differential terminal (-).
5 RS-485+ The servo drive transmits the data to differential terminal (+).
6, 8 - -
Note: refer to Chapter 9 for the RS-485 wiring.
3-59
Wiring ASDA-B3
Connecting multiple servo drives:
3 Control ler
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
120 Ω
6
7
8
(2) (3)
(1) Connect to the controller / PLC; (2) Modbus connector; (3) Wiring for RS-485 terminal resistor
Note:
1. This supports up to 32 axes via RS-485. The communication quality and the number of connectable
axes are determined by the controller’s specifications, quality of wires, grounding, interference, and
whether a shielded twisted-pair cable is used.
2. It is suggested to use a terminal resistor of 120 Ω (Ohm) and 0.5 W (or above).
3. To connect multiple servo drives in parallel, use a Modbus connector as shown above, and put the
terminal resistor in the last servo drive.
3-60
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.5.2 Wiring for the CANopen communication connector
The CN3 connector conforms to the CANopen DS301 and DS402 standards. You can use it for
3
controlling position, torque, and speed, as well as accessing or monitoring the servo status with
the standard CAN interface. The CN3 connector supports the CANopen communication
interface which enables you to connect multiple servo drives simultaneously.
Note: B3 -M model: dual ports; supports high-speed communication (CANopen).
16
(1) (2)
Pin assignment:

1, 9 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2, 10 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
4, 12 - -
5, 13 - -
6, 14 - -
8, 16 - -
3-61
Wiring ASDA-B3
3 Control ler
(1)
1
2
120 Ω
3
4
5
6
7
8
(2)
(1) Connect to the controller / PLC; (2) Wiring for CAN terminal resistor
Note:
1. The CANopen cable length can be up to 30 m (98.43 ft). The communication quality and the number
of connectable axes are determined by the controller’s specifications, quality of wires, grounding,
interference, and whether a shielded twisted-pair cable is used.
3. To connect multiple servo drives in parallel, use two sets of CAN ports as shown above, and put the
terminal resistor in the last servo drive.
3-62
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.6 CN4 serial connector (Mini USB)

CN4 is a serial connector that connects to a PC and allows you to operate the servo drive with
3
the software. This is a Type B Mini USB that is compatible with the USB 2.0 specification.
Note: when there is high interference during operation, it is suggested that you install a USB isolator.
(Delta part number: UC-ADP01-A)
(1) (2)
(1) USB connector (female); (2) USB connector (male)
3-63
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.7 Wiring for the CN6 communication connector

3.7.1 Wiring for the DMCNET communication connector
3
The servo drive uses a standard RJ45 connector with a shielded cable to connect to the
controller or motion control card for controlling position, torque, and speed, as well as accessing
or monitoring the servo status with Delta’s DMCNET system.
You can set the station number of DMCNET with P3.000. Its maximum transmission rate is
20 Mbps. Two ports are provided for connecting multiple servo drives, with one way in and the
other way out. Remember to put the terminal resistor (120 Ω) in the last servo drive.
16
(1) (2)
Pin assignment (same for both connectors):

1, 9 DMCNET_1A DMCNET Channel 1 bus line (+)
2, 10 DMCNET_1B DMCNET Channel 1 bus line (-)
3, 11 DMCNET_2A DMCNET Channel 2 bus line (+)
4, 12,
- -
5, 13
6, 14 DMCNET_2B DMCNET Channel 2 bus line (-)
7, 15,
- -
8, 16
3-64
ASDA-B3 Wiring
Control ler
3
(1)
1
2
120 Ω
3
4
5
120 Ω
6
7
8
(2)
(1) Connection to the controller / motion control card
(2) DMCNET terminal resistor (Delta part number: ASD-TR-DM0008)
Note:
1. This supports up to 12 axes with the cable length up to 30 m (98.43 ft).
3. To connect multiple servo drives in serial, use two sets of DMCNET ports as shown above, and put
the terminal resistor in the last servo drive.
3-65
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.7.2 Wiring for the EtherCAT communication connector
Two ports are provided for connecting multiple servo drives, with one way in and the other way
3
out.
16
(1) (2)
Pin assignment (same for both connectors):

Pin No. Terminal Signal Description
1, 9 TX+ TX+ Transmit +
2, 10 TX- TX- Transmit -
3, 11 RX+ RX+ Receive +
4, 12 - - -
5, 13 - - -
6, 14 RX- RX- Receive -
7, 15 - - -
8, 16 - - -
Description of each indicator for the CN6 connector:
 Network status indicator

Indicator Status Description
On Network is connected. Connection is established but no data transmission.
Connection is established
Blinking Data in transmission.
and in data transmission.
Off No connection. Connection is not established.
 EtherCAT connection status indicator (RUN)

After power cycling and the initialization of the servo
Off Initial drive is complete, the communication has not yet started,
but the controller can access the servo drive’s register.
SDO, TxPDO, and RxPDO data packets can be
On Operational
transmitted.
Blinking Pre-operational The controller can exchange data through the mailbox.
The servo drive can use the SDO and TxPDO data
Single flash Safe-operational
packets to exchange data with the controller.
3-66
ASDA-B3 Wiring
 EtherCAT error indicator (ERR)

3
Off No error No error has occurred.
Servo drive malfunction. Contact the distributor for
On PDI Watchdog timeout
assistance.
Parameter setting error causes the system unable to
Blinking State change error
switch states. Refer to the following diagram.
The synchronization between the controller and the
Synchronization error /
Single flash servo drive failed or the data was lost during data
SyncManager error
reception.
Init
(IP) (PI)
Pre-operational (SI)
(OI) (PS) (SP)
(OP) Safe-operational
(SO) (OS)
Operational
State switching diagram
PL C
(1)
Note:
1. When multiple servo drives are connected, the maximum distance between each drive is 50 m
(164.04 inches).
2. Use CAT5e STP cable.
3. It is suggested to use a Beckhoff cable (model number: ZB9020).
3-67
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.8 CN10 STO connector (Safe torque off)

This connector provides the STO function. More details are provided in the next section.
3
Note:
1. The STO function is supported by the B3A series only.
2. STO certification application is in progress.
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
(1) (2)
(1) CN10 STO connector (female); (2) CN10 quick connector (male)
Pin assignment:
1 Reserved Reserved
2 Reserved Reserved
3 STO_A STO input A+
4 /STO_A STO input A-
5 STO_B STO input B+
6 /STO_B STO input B-

STO alarm output (+), BJT Output
7 FDBK+
Max. rating: 80 VDC, 0.5 A
STO alarm output (-), BJT Output
8 FDBK-
Max. rating: 80 VDC, 0.5 A
If you do not need the STO function, plug in the

STO connector that comes with the servo drive.
The wiring has been done as shown in the figure
on the right. If this connector has been
disassembled, refer to Section 3.9 STO function
(Safe Torque Off) for wiring information.
3-68
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.9 STO function (Safe Torque Off)

3.9.1 Introduction to STO
3
Once the STO function is enabled, the servo drive stops supplying current to the motor, cutting
off the power supply and torque force. Do not repeatedly use this function for it does not stop
the motor with active force.
Note:
1. The STO function is supported by the B3A series only.
2. STO certification application is in progress.
3.9.2 The potential danger of STO
After the STO function is enabled, the motor is no longer controlled by the servo motor.
Thus, take all the potential danger resulted from enabling the STO function into consideration.
Delta is not liable for mechanical damage and personnel injury if you fail to observe the
following instructions:
1. For a safety circuit design, make sure the selected components conform to the safety
specifications.
2. Before installation, read the safety instructions in the STO-related user manual for the
components you use.
3. Do not touch the servo drive when the STO function is enabled. Although the power to the
motor is cut off, there is residual electricity since the power supply is not completely
removed from the servo drive. When maintaining the servo drive, use the molded case
circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) to cut off the power.
4. When the STO function is enabled, the servo drive can no longer control, stop, or
decelerate the motor.
5. After the STO function is enabled, the servo drive no longer controls the motor, but the
motor can still be moved by other external forces.
6. The feedback monitoring output signal (FDBK) is only for inspecting the STO function status
rather than for safety output.
7. The STO function must be powered by the safety extra-low voltage (SELV) power source
with reinforced insulation.
8. Power the STO signals with single power supply, or the leakage current will result in STO
malfunction.
3-69
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.9.3 Specifications of STO
The ASDA-B3 series servo drive conforms to the following safety specifications:
3
Item Description Standard Safety data
Channel1: 80.08%
SFF Safe failure fraction IEC61508
Channel2: 68.91%
HFT
Hardware fault tolerance IEC61508 1
(Type A subsystem)
IEC61508 SIL2
SIL Safety integrity level
IEC62061 SILCL2
Probability of dangerous failure per
PFH IEC61508 9.56×10-10
hour [h-1]
Average probability of failure on
PFDav IEC61508 4.18×10-6
demand
Category Category EN954-1 Category 3
PL Performance level ISO13849-1 d
MTTFd Mean time to dangerous failure ISO13849-1 High
DC Diagnostic coverage ISO13849-1 Low
3-70
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.9.4 How does the STO function work?
The STO function controls the motor current by two individual circuits. It cuts off the power
3
supply to the motor when needed, after which the motor is free from torque force. When an STO
alarm occurs, determine the alarm type according to the pin status of the feedback monitor
signal (FDBK). The following table details how this function works.
Description of action and feedback status:

Safety
Signal signal Status of opto-isolator
source
STO_A
ON ON OFF OFF
~ / STO_A
STO
STO_B
ON OFF ON OFF
~ / STO_B
Torque off Torque off Torque off
Servo drive output status Ready
(STO_B lost) (STO_A lost) (STO mode)
Feedback monitor signal
Open Close Open Open
(FDBK status)
Alarm N/A AL500 AL501 AL502
Note:
1. ON = 24V; OFF = 0V.
2. Open = open circuit; Close = short circuit.
3. The status of the feedback monitor signal switches immediately based on the safety signal source
changes.
4. Contact the distributor if AL503 occurs. Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for more details.
3.9.4.1 Activation status
STO reaction time:

When one of the safety signal source is low, the circuit cuts off the motor current within 20 ms.
STO_A / STO_B H L
Max. 20 ms
Motor current ON OFF
3-71
Wiring ASDA-B3
AL500: see the following diagram. When the motor runs normally, but both STO_A and STO_B
signals are low for 10 ms at the same time, the firmware disables the drive (Servo Off) and
3
triggers AL500.
STO_A H L
STO_B H L
10 ms
Firmware
detection of STO not active STO active
the STO
function
Max. 20 ms
FDBK Open Close
SRDY ON OFF
Alarm No alarm AL500
AL501 / AL502: see the following diagram. When the motor runs normally, but one of the safety
signal source is low for 1 s, the firmware disables the drive (Servo Off) and triggers AL501 or
AL502. The following diagram illustrates AL501.
STO_A
H L
H
STO_B
L
1s
Firmware
detection of STO not active STO active
the STO
function
Max. 20 ms
FDBK Open Open
SRDY ON OFF
Alarm No alarm AL501
Note:
1. When the STO_A signal is low, AL501 occurs; when the STO_B signal is low, AL502 occurs.
2. Contact the distributor if AL503 occurs.
3. Refer to Section 3.9.4 for the FDBK signal.
3-72
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.9.4.2 Deactivation status
When both safety signal sources switch back to high, the alarm will not be cleared automatically.
3
Of all the STO alarms, only AL500 can be cleared with DI.ARST.
STO_A L H
STO_B L H
Max. 10 ms
FDBK Close Open
DI.ARST AL500 ARST
Max. 10 ms
SRDY OFF ON
Note: refer to Section 3.9.4 for the FDBK signal.
3-73
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.9.5 Wiring for STO

3.9.5.1 Wiring without the STO function
3
You can short-circuit the connector or plug in the short-circuit connector that comes with the
servo drive. Refer to the following wiring diagram:
STO
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 STO_A
4
/ STO_A
M
5 STO_B
6
/ STO_B
FDBK+
7
8
FDBK-
3.9.5.2 Wiring for single drive module with the STO function
To use a safety relay to trigger the STO function, connect the wiring as shown in the following
diagram:
STO
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
24 VDC 3 STO_A
ESTOP
4
/ STO_A
M
Safety relay
5 STO_B
6
/ STO_B
7 FDBK+
8
FDBK-
3-74
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.9.5.3 Wiring for multiple drive modules with the STO function
In the multiple drive modules system, the value of multiplying PFD and PFH by the number of
3
drives must not exceed the specified safety value.
STO
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 STO_A
24 VDC
4
M
/ STO_A
5 STO_B
6
/ STO_B
7 FDBK+
8
ESTOP
FDBK-
STO
1 Reserved
Safety relay 2 Reserved
3 STO_A
M
/ STO_A
5 STO_B
6
/ STO_B
7 FDBK+
8
FDBK-
STO
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 STO_A
M
/ STO_A
5 STO_B
6
/ STO_B
7 FDBK+
8
FDBK-
3-75
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.10 Standard wiring example

3.10.1 Position (PT) control mode - differential pulse signal
3
Servo drive
ASDA -B3 Series
MCCB
MC ＊2
P
AC 200 / 230V R Regenerative
D resistor
Three-phase＊5 S
50 / 60 Hz C
T Red
U Power
L1C White
supply
V
L2C W
Black
Green 24V EMGS BRKR Brake

＊3
Encoder
CN2
This is for systems of 2.8 – 3.6V. CN1 1 +5V
Do not input 24V power. SIGN 2 GND
SIGN+ 39
SIGN
SIGN- 37 3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
Differential pulse＊1 Do no t co nn ect
command input PULSE+ 43 4 th is p in
1.2 kΩ
PULSE- 41 5 T+ SG Twisted-pair or
±10V 10 kΩ T-REF 18 6 T- twisted-shielded
12 kΩ cable
GND 19 Case Shield
Twisted-pair or MON1 17
10 kΩ
twisted-shielded GND 19
cable 10 kΩ CN3
MON2 14
6,8 -
COM+ 11 ＊2
5 RS485+
SON DI1 9
4.7 KΩ
4 RS485-
CCLR DI2 10
4.7 KΩ
3,7 GND_ISO
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7 KΩ
2 -
TCM1 DI4 8
4.7 KΩ
4.7 KΩ 1 -
ARST DI5 33
4.7 KΩ
NL DI6 32
PL DI7 31
4.7 KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
4.7 KΩ
Mini USB ＊4
4.7 KΩ
DI9 12
1.5 kΩ
DO1+ 7
SRDY
DO1- 6
1.5 kΩ
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
24V DO2- 4
1.5 kΩ
DO3+ 3
HOME
DO3- 2
1.5 kΩ
DO4+ 1
TPOS
DO4- 26
1.5 kΩ
ALRM
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
1.5 kΩ
DO6+ 16
DO6- 15
A-phase
OA 21
differential signal /OA 22
B-phase OB 25
differential signal /OB 23
Encoder
pulse output Z-phase OZ 13
differential signal /OZ 24
Z-phase open OCZ 44

collector signal GND 40
Max. output current: 50 mA
voltage: 30V
Note:
1. This is the wiring for differential pulse signal input. For the wiring for open-collector signal input,
refer to Section 3.3.7.
2. Models of 200 W and below have no built-in brake resistor.
3. The brake coil has no polarity.
4. Connects to Mini USB (for PC communication).

5. Models of 1.5 kW and below can use single-phase power supply.
3-76
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.10.2 Position (PT) control mode - open-collector pulse signal

Servo drive
3
ASDA -B3 Series
MCCB
MC ＊2
P
AC 200 / 230V R Regenerative
D resistor
Three-phase＊5 S
50 / 60 Hz C
T Red
U Power
L1C White
supply
V
Open-collector pulse ＊1 L2C Black
command input W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
PNP type
device NPN type device CN1 Encoder
CN2
+ DC PULL HI_S 35 + DC PULL HI_S 35
- 24V
24V 1 +5V
SIGN-
SIGN 37 -
SIGN-
SIGN 37
2 GND
PULL HI_P 36 PULL HI_P 36
3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
PULSE- 41 PULSE- 41 Do no t co nn ect
4 th is p in
SG SG 1.2 kΩ
5 T+ SG Twisted-pair or
T-REF 18 6 T- twisted-shielded
±10V 10 kΩ
12 kΩ cable
GND 19 Case Shield
10 kΩ
cable 10 kΩ CN3
MON2 14
6,8 -
COM+ 11 ＊2
5 RS485+
SON DI1 9
4.7 KΩ
4 RS485-
CCLR DI2 10
4.7 KΩ
3,7 GND_ISO
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7 KΩ
2 -
TCM1 DI4 8
4.7 KΩ
4.7 KΩ 1 -
ARST DI5 33
4.7 KΩ
NL DI6 32
PL DI7 31
4.7 KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
4.7 KΩ
Mini USB ＊4
4.7 KΩ
DI9 12
1.5 kΩ
DO1+ 7
SRDY
DO1- 6
1.5 kΩ
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
24V DO2- 4
1.5 kΩ
DO3+ 3
HOME
DO3- 2
1.5 kΩ
DO4+ 1
TPOS
DO4- 26
1.5 kΩ
ALRM
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
1.5 kΩ
DO6+ 16
DO6- 15
OA 21
A-phase
B-phase OB 25
differential signal /OB 23
Encoder
differential signal /OZ 24
Z-phase open OCZ 44

voltage: 30V
Note:
1. This is the wiring for open-collector signal input. For the wiring for differential pulse signal input,
refer to Section 3.3.7.
3-77
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.10.3 Position (PR) control mode - internal position command

Servo drive
3
ASDA -B3 series
＊2
P
Regenerative
MCCB MC D resistor
AC 200 / 230V R C
Red
Three-phase＊5 S U Power
White
50 / 60 Hz V supply
T Black
L1C W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
L2C
CN2 Encoder
1 +5V
2 GND
3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
Do no t co nn ect
4 th is p in
1.2 kΩ 5 T+
CN1 SG Twisted-pair or
6 T-
twisted-shielded
±10V 10 kΩ T-REF 18 Case Shield
12 kΩ cable
GND 19
10 kΩ
twisted-shielded GND 19 CN3
cable 10 kΩ
MON2 14 6,8 -
COM+ 11 ＊1 5 RS485+
SON DI1 9
4.7 k Ω
4 RS485-
CTRG DI2 10
4.7 k Ω
3,7 GND_ISO
POS0 DI3 34 -
4.7 k Ω
2
-
4.7 k Ω
POS1 DI4 8 1
4.7 k Ω
ARST DI5 33
4.7 k Ω
NL DI6 32
4.7 k Ω CN4
PL DI7 31
4.7 k Ω
Mini USB ＊4
EMGS DI8 30
4.7 k Ω
DI9 12
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5 kΩ
DO1- 6
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
24V 1.5 kΩ
DO2- 4
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5 kΩ
DO3- 2
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5 kΩ
DO4- 26
ALRM
DO5+ 28
1.5 kΩ
DO5- 27
DO6+ 16
1.5 kΩ
DO6- 15
A-phase OA 21
differential signal
/OA 22
B-phase OB 25
differential signal
/OB 23
Encoder
pulse output
Z-phase OZ 13
differential signal
/OZ 24
Z-phase open OCZ 44

voltage: 30V
Note:
1. Refer to Section 3.3.7 for CN1 wiring.
3-78
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.10.4 Speed (S) control mode

Servo drive
3
ASDA -B3 series
*2
P
MCCB Regenerative
MC D resistor
AC 200 / 230V R C
Red
Three-phase * 5 S U Power
50 / 60 Hz T
White
V supply
Black
W
L1C
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
*3
L2C
Encoder
CN2
1 +5V
2 GND
3 Do no t co nn ect
CN1 1.2 kΩ th is p in
Do no t co nn ect
V-REF 20 4 th is p in
±10V 10 kΩ
GND 19
12 kΩ 5 T+ SG Twisted-pair or
1.2 kΩ
6 T- twisted-shielded
±10V 10 kΩ T-REF 18 cable
GND 19 12 kΩ Case Shield
10 kΩ CN3
cable 10 kΩ 6,8 -
MON2 14 RS485+
5
COM+ 11 *1 RS485-
4
SON DI1 9
4.7 kΩ
3,7 GND_ISO
TRQLM DI2 10
4.7 kΩ
4.7 kΩ
2 -
SPD0 DI3 34
4.7 kΩ
1 -
SPD1 DI4 8
4.7 kΩ
ARST DI5 33 CN4
Mini USB ＊4
4.7 kΩ
NL DI6 32
4.7 kΩ
PL DI7 31
4.7 kΩ
EMGS DI8 30
4.7 kΩ
DI9 12
DO1+ 7
SRDY 1.5 kΩ
DO1- 6
DO2+ 5
ZSPD 1.5 kΩ
24V DO2- 4
DO3+ 3
TSPD 1.5 kΩ
DO3- 2
DO4+ 1
BRKR 1.5 kΩ
DO4- 26
ALRM
DO5+ 28
1.5 kΩ
DO5- 27
DO6+ 16
1.5 kΩ
DO6- 15
A-phase OA 21
differential signal
/OA 22
B-phase OB 25
differential signal
/OB 23
Encoder
differential signal
/OZ 24
Z-phase open OCZ 44

collector signal
GND 40
voltage: 30V
Note:
5 Models of 1.5 kW and below can use single-phase power supply.
3-79
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.10.5 Torque (T) control mode

Servo drive
3
ASDA -B3 series
*2
P
MCCB MC Regenerative
D resistor
AC 200 / 230V R C
Three-phase * 5 S U
Red
Power
50 / 60 Hz T White
supply
V
Black
W
L1C Green 24V EMGS BRKR
*3
Brake
L2C
Encoder
CN2
1 +5V
2 GND
CN1 1.2 kΩ 3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
±10V 10 kΩ
V-REF 20 4
Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
12 kΩ
GND 19 1.2 kΩ 5 T+ Twisted-pair or
SG
T-REF 18 twisted-shielded
±10V 10 kΩ 6 T- cable
GND 19 12 kΩ Case Shield
10 kΩ
twisted-shielded GND 19 CN3
cable 10 kΩ
MON2 14 6,8 -
COM+ 11 *1 5 RS485+
SON DI1 9 4 RS485-
4.7kΩ
SPDLM DI2 10 3,7 GND_ISO

4.7 kΩ
-
4.7 kΩ
TCM0 DI3 34 2
-
4.7 kΩ
TCM1 DI4 8 1
4.7 kΩ
ARST DI5 33
4.7 kΩ
NL DI6 32 CN4
4.7 kΩ
PL DI7 31 Mini USB * 4

4.7 kΩ
EMGS DI8 30
4.7 kΩ
DI9 12
DO1+ 7
SRDY 1.5 kΩ
DO1- 6
DO2+ 5
24V ZSPD 1.5 kΩ
DO2- 4
DO3+ 3
TSPD 1.5 kΩ
DO3- 2
DO4+ 1
BRKR 1.5kΩ
DO4- 26
ALRM
DO5+ 28
1.5 kΩ
DO5- 27
DO6+ 16
1.5 kΩ
DO6- 15
A-phase OA 21
B-phase OB 25
differential signal
/OB 23
Encoder
differential signal
/OZ 24
Z-phase open OCZ 44

voltage: 30V
Note:
3-80
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.10.6 CANopen communication mode

Servo drive
3
ASDA-B3-M Series
＊2
P
Regenerative
MCCB D resistor
MC
C
AC 200 / 230V R Red
U Power
Three-phase＊5 S White
supply
50 / 60 Hz V
T Black
W
Green 24 V BRKR EMGS Brake
＊3
L1C
L2C Encoder
CN2
1 +5V
2 GND
3 Do no t co nn ect
CN1 th is p in
Do no t co nn ect
COM+ 5 4 th is p in
＊1
_
DI1 6 4.7 KΩ 5 T+ SG Twisted-pair or
NL DI2 7 4.7 KΩ
cable
PL DI3 8
4.7 KΩ Case Shield
EMGS DI4 9
4.7 KΩ
CN3
DO1+ 15
SRDY 1.5 kΩ 6,8 -
DO1- 16 -
24V 5
DO2+ 17 -
ALRM 1.5 kΩ 4 Data input
DO2- 18
3,7 GND_ISO
A-phase OA 1 2 CAN_L
differential signal
/OA 2 1 CAN_H
B-phase OB 11 14,16 -
Encoder
differential signal /OB 12 -
pulse output 13
Z-phase OZ 3 12 -
differential signal Data output
/OZ 4 11,15 GND_ISO
10 CAN_L
9 CAN_H
CN4
Mini USB ＊4
Note:
3-81
Wiring ASDA-B3
3.10.7 DMCNET communication mode

Servo drive
3
ASDA-B3-F Series
P *2
Regenerative
MCCB D resistor
MC
C
AC 200 / 230V R Red
U Power
Three-phase＊5 S White
50 / 60 Hz V supply
T Black
W
Green
24V BRKR EMGS
*3
Brake
L1C
L2C CN2
Encoder
1 +5V
2 GND
3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
Do no t co nn ect
4 th is p in
CN1
COM+ 5 *1 6 T- twisted-shielded
_ cable
DI1 6 4.7 kΩ
Case Shield
NL DI2 7 4.7 kΩ
PL DI3 8
4.7 kΩ
EMGS DI4 9
4.7 kΩ
CN4
SRDY DO1+ 15 Mini USB * 4
1.5 kΩ
DO1- 16
24V DO2+ 17
ALRM
1.5 kΩ
DO2- 18
CN6
A-phase OA 1 1 DMCNET_1A
differential signal /OA 2 2 DMCNET_1B
Encoder B-phase OB 11 3 DMCNET_2A Data input
pulse output differential signal /OB 12 4,5 -
Z-phase OZ 3 6 DMCNET_2B
differential signal
/OZ 4 7,8 -
9 DMCNET_1A
10 DMCNET_1B
11 DMCNET_2A Data output
12,13 -
14 DMCNET_2B
15,16 -
Note:
3-82
ASDA-B3 Wiring
3.10.8 EtherCAT communication mode

Servo drive
3
ASDA-B3-E Series
MCCB P *2
MC
Regenerative
AC 200 / 230 V R D resistor
Three-phase＊5 S C
50 / 60 Hz T
Red
U Power
White
V supply
L1C W
Black
L2C Green 24V BRKR EMGS

*3
Brake
Encoder
CN2
1 +5V
CN1 2 GND
COM+ 5 *1 3 Do no t co nn ect
th is p in
_ Do no t co nn ect
DI1 6 4.7 kΩ
4 th is p in
NL DI2 7 4.7 kΩ
PL DI3 8
4.7 kΩ
cable
EMGS DI4 9
4.7 kΩ
Case Shield
DO1+ 15
SRDY 1.5 kΩ
DO1- 16 CN4
24V DO2+ 17 Mini USB * 4
ALRM
1.5 kΩ
DO2- 18
A-phase OA 1
B-phase OB 11 CN6 EtherCAT
Encoder Connects to the controller
pulse output differential signal /OB 12 or previous servo drive
CN6A
Z-phase OZ 3
differential signal /OZ 4 Connects to the next servo
CN6B drive or no connection
Note:
3-83
Wiring ASDA-B3
3-84
Test Operation and Panel
Display
This chapter describes the panel display of ASDA-B3 series servo drive, as well as its
4
operation and testing.
4.1 Panel description ···············································································4-2

4.2 Parameter setting procedure ································································4-3
4.3 Status display ···················································································4-6
4.3.1 Save the setting display ································································4-6
4.3.2 Display the decimal point ······························································4-6
4.3.3 Alarm messages ·········································································4-7
4.3.4 Positive and negative sign setting ···················································4-7
4.3.5 Monitoring display········································································4-7
4.4 General functions ············································································ 4-10
4.4.1 Operation of fault record display ··················································· 4-10
4.4.2 Force DO on ············································································ 4-11
4.4.3 Digital input diagnosis operation ··················································· 4-12
4.4.4 Digital output diagnosis operation·················································· 4-12
4.5 Testing ·························································································· 4-13
4.5.1 Testing without load ··································································· 4-13
4.5.2 Apply power to B3 servo drive ······················································ 4-14
4.5.3 JOG trial run without load ···························································· 4-18
4.5.4 Trial run without load (Speed mode) ·············································· 4-20
4.5.5 Trial run without load (Position mode) ············································ 4-22
4-1
Test Operation and Panel Display ASDA-B3
4.1 Panel description
4 (1)
(2)
(3)
C
N
(6)
4
(4)
(7)
(5)
(1) Display: 5-digit, 7-segment LED displays the monitoring values, parameters, and setting
values.
(2) MODE key: switches the display among Monitoring mode, Parameter mode, and Alarm
mode. In Editing mode, press the MODE key to switch back to Parameter mode.
(3) UP (▲) key: changes the monitoring code, parameter number, and value.
(4) CHARGE (Charge LED): the Charge LED indicator is on when the power is applied to the
circuit.
(5) DOWN (▼) key: changes the monitoring code, parameter number, and value.
(6) SHIFT key: in Parameter mode, press this key to change the group number. In Editing
mode, moving the flashing (selected) digit to the left lets you adjust the higher setting bit.
You can switch the display of high / low digits in Monitoring mode.
(7) SET key: displays and stores the parameter value. In Monitoring mode, pressing the SET
key switches between decimal and hexadecimal display. In Parameter mode, pressing the
SET key switches to Editing mode.
4-2
ASDA-B3 Test Operation and Panel Display
4.2 Parameter setting procedure

Switching modes:
4
Power On
Monitoring
Refer to Chapter 8.
mode
MODE
Parameter
Refer to Chapter 8.
mode
1. If no alarm occurs, Alarm mode is skipped.

MODE
2. When a new alarm occurs, it switches to Alarm mode
from any other mode.
Alarm mode
3. When switching to a different mode, if you do not press
a key within 20 seconds, it returns to Alarm mode.
MODE
See Chapter 12 for detailed alarm information.
Operating in each mode:

Monitoring mode
Monitoring
mode
1. Press keys to select monitoring

variables. Refer to Section 4.3.5 for
detailed information.
2. Directly enter the code of
monitoring variables via P0.002.
Refer to Chapter 8 for a detailed
description of P0.002.
3. Press the SHIFT key to switch the
display of high / low digits of
monitoring variables.
4-3
Parameter mode
Parameter
mode
4 Monitoring
parameter P0
SHIFT
Basic parameter
P1
SHIFT
Extension
parameter P2
SHIFT
Communication
parameter P3
SHIFT
Diagnosis
parameter P4
SHIFT
Motion control
parameter P5
SHIFT
PR parameter
P6
SHIFT
PR parameter
P7
SHIFT
MODE
Monitoring
mode
4-4
Editing mode
Parameter
mode
MODE
Editing mode
SET
4
SET
Display parameter After saving the parameter

setting value setting value, it
SHIFT automatically returns to
Parameter mode.
SET
After saving the parameter

setting value, it
SHIFT automatically returns to
Parameter mode.
SET
After saving the parameter

setting value, it
automatically returns to
Parameter mode.
MODE
Monitoring /
If no alarm occurs, Alarm mode is skipped.
Alarm mode
4-5
4.3 Status display

4.3.1 Save the setting display
When you complete the parameter setting, press the SET key to save the parameters.
4 The panel displays the status for one second.
Displayed symbol Description
Correctly saved the setting value (Saved).
Read-only and write-protected parameter (Read-only).
Entered the wrong password or did not enter a password (Locked).
Entered an incorrect setting value or the reserved setting value (Out of Range).
You cannot enter a value when in the Servo On state (Servo On).
Changes to the parameter take effect after cycling the power to the servo drive
(Power On).
4.3.2 Display the decimal point
High byte / low byte indication: this indicates the current high
Low High byte or low byte when the data is displayed in decimal format
byte byte (32 bits).
Negative sign: the two decimal points on the left represent the
negative sign when the data is displayed in decimal format
Negative No (16 or 32 bits). In hexadecimal format, it only shows positive
sign function values.
4-6
4.3.3 Alarm messages
When an alarm occurs, the servo drive shows ‘AL’ as the alarm symbol and
4
‘nnn’ as the alarm code.
Refer to Chapter 8 Parameters for a detailed description of P0.001 or
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting for alarm details.
4.3.4 Positive and negative sign setting
In Editing mode, press the UP (▲) and DOWN (▼) keys to change the displayed
value. Press the SHIFT key to change the selected value (the selected value is
flashing).
Press the SHIFT key for two seconds to switch between the positive (+) and
negative (-) signs. If the parameter value is out of range after switching the
positive or negative sign, then the servo drive automatically resets it to the
original value.
4.3.5 Monitoring display
When you apply power to the drive, the display shows the monitoring displayed symbol for one
second, and then enters Monitoring mode. In Monitoring mode, press the UP (▲) and DOWN (▼)
keys to change the monitoring variables. Or you can directly change the setting value of P0.002 to
specify the monitoring code. When powered, the default monitoring code is determined by the
value of P0.002. For example, the value of P0.002 is 4. When the drive is powered, it displays the
monitoring symbol C-PLS first, and then shows the input number of pulse commands. Refer to the
following table for more information.
P0.002 Monitoring displayed

Description Unit
setting value symbol
Motor feedback pulse number (after the scaling of
0 [user unit]
E-Gear ratio) (user unit)
Input number of pulse commands (after the scaling
1 [user unit]
of E-Gear ratio) (user unit)
The deviation between control command pulse and
2 [user unit]
feedback pulse number (user unit)
3 Motor feedback pulse number (encoder unit) [pulse]
Input number of pulse commands (before the

4 [pulse]
scaling of E-Gear ratio) (encoder unit)
Error pulse number (after the scaling of E-Gear
5 [pulse]
ratio) (encoder unit)
6 Input frequency of pulse commands [kpps]
7 Motor speed [rpm]
8 Speed command [Volt]
9 Speed command [rpm]
4-7
P0.002 Monitoring displayed

Description Unit
setting value symbol
10 Torque command [Volt]
4
11 Torque command [%]
12 Average torque [%]
13 Peak torque [%]
14 Main circuit voltage [Volt]
Load / motor inertia ratio

15 [1 times]
Note: if it shows 13.0, it means the load inertia ratio is 13.
16 IGBT temperature [°C]
Resonance frequency (low byte is the first

17 [Hz]
resonance and high byte is the second one)
The absolute pulse number of encoder Z phase

0 +500 0 0 +500 0 0
equals the homing value, 0. It is +5000 or -4999
18 -
pulses when the motor rotates in the positive or
negative direction.
Z Z Z
Mapping parameter #1: shows the content of

19 parameter P0.025 -
(P0.035 specifies the mapping target)
Monitoring variable #1: shows the content of
(P0.017 specifies the monitoring variable)
4-8
The following table shows the panel display of 16-bit and 32-bit values.
Example of the displayed value Description
If the value is 1234, it displays 01234 (in decimal format).
4
(Dec)
16 bits
If the value is 0x1234, it displays 1234 (in hexadecimal
(Hex) format; the first digit does not show).
(Dec high) If the value is 1234567890, the display of the high byte is
1234.5 and displays 67890 as the low byte (in decimal
format).
(Dec low)
32 bits
(Hex high) If the value is 0x12345678, the display of the high byte is
h1234 and displays L5678 as the low byte (in hexadecimal
format).
(Hex low)
The following table shows the panel display for the negative sign.
Example of the displayed value Description

Shows negative values. If the value is -12345, it displays as 1.2.345
(only in decimal format; there is no positive or negative sign for
hexadecimal format display).
Note:
1. Dec means the value is displayed in decimal format; Hex represents hexadecimal format.
2. The display shown above is applicable in both Monitoring mode and Editing mode.
3. When all monitoring variables are 32 bits, you can switch the high / low bit and the display method
(Dec / Hex). As described in Chapter 8, each parameter only supports one display method and
cannot be switched.
4-9
4.4 General functions

4.4.1 Operation of fault record display
In Parameter mode, select P4.000 - P4.004 and press the SET key to show the corresponding
4 fault record.
SET
The 1st recent error
SET
The 2nd recent error
SET
The 3rd recent error
SET
The 4th recent error
SET
The 5th recent error
4-10
4.4.2 Force DO on
You can switch to the Diagnosis mode by the following steps. Set P2.008 to 406 and enable the
function to force DO on. Then, set the DO by binary method with P4.006. When the parameter
value is 2, it forces DO2 on. When the value is 5, it forces DO1 and DO3 on. No data is retained
in this mode. The mode returns to the normal DO mode after cycling the power. You can also
set P2.008 to 400 to switch to the normal DO mode.
4
SET
SET
Force to enable
DO mode
SET
Force DO1 on
Force DO2 on
Force DO3 on
Force DO4 on
Force DO5 on
Force DO1 and DO3 on
Force DO1, DO2, and DO3 on
Note: P4.006 is displayed in hexadecimal format. Therefore, it does not show the fifth 0.
4-11
4.4.3 Digital input diagnosis operation
You can switch to the Diagnosis mode by the following steps. When DI1 - DI9 are triggered by
the external signal, the panel shows the corresponding signal in bit. When it shows 1, it means
4 the DI is on.
For example, if it shows 1FE1, E is in hexadecimal format; it will be 1110 when it transfers to
binary format. Then, DI6 - DI8 are on.
SET
The panel displays in

hexadecimal format.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Binary code
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Corresponding
DI status
(Display in hexadecimal format)
4.4.4 Digital output diagnosis operation
You can switch to the Diagnosis mode by the following steps. When DO1 - DO6 are triggered by
the output signal, the panel shows the corresponding signal in bit. When it shows 1, it means
the DO is on.
For example, if it shows 1F, F is in hexadecimal format; it will be 1111 when it transfers to binary
format. Then, DO1 - DO4 are on.
SET
The panel displays in
hexadecimal format
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Binary code
5 4 3 2 1 Corresponding
DO status
(Display in hexadecimal format)
4-12
4.5 Testing
This section is divided into two parts. The first part introduces testing without load and the
second part describes testing when running the servo motor with load. To avoid danger, operate
the servo motor without load first.
4.5.1 Testing without load

4
Remove the load from the servo motor, including coupling on the shaft and accessories, to avoid
any damage to the servo drive or machine. This prevents the disassembled parts of the motor
shaft from falling off and possibly causing personnel injury or equipment damage during operation.
Run the motor without load first to see if the servo motor can run during normal operation.
Caution: to prevent danger, it is strongly recommended that you check if the motor can operate
normally without load first. Then, try operating the motor with load.
Check the following items carefully before operation.
 Check for any obvious visible damage.

 The wires at the wiring terminal should be isolated.
 Make sure the wiring is correct to avoid damage or any abnormal operation.
 Check for and remove any electrically conductive objects, including metal
(such as screws) or inflammable objects inside or near the servo drive.
 Check that the control switch is in the Off state.
Inspection before
operation  Do not place the servo drive or external regenerative resistor on inflammable
(without power) objects.
 Make sure the circuits for the emergency stop and circuit breaker function
normally. These functions need to be activated once the electromagnetic
brake malfunctions..
 Reduce the electromagnetic interference if there is electronic interference
with the peripheral devices.
 Make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is correct.
 Protect the encoder cable from excessive stress. When the motor is running,
make sure the cable is not worn or stretched.
 Contact Delta if the servo motor vibrates or makes unusual noise during
operation.
 Make sure the settings for the parameters are correct. Different machinery
Inspection during has different characteristics. Adjust the parameters according to the
operation characteristics of each machine.
(power is applied)
 Reset the parameters when the servo drive is in the Servo Off state, or it
may cause malfunction.
 If there is no contact noise or other abnormal noise when the relay is
operating, please contact Delta.
 Check if the power indicator and LED display work properly.
4-13
4.5.2 Apply power to B3 servo drive
Follow these instructions.

1. Make sure the wiring between the motor and servo drive is correct:
4 (1) U, V, W, and FG have to connect to the red, white, black, and green wires respectively.
If the wiring is incorrect, the motor cannot work properly. The motor ground cable FG
must connect to the drive’s ground terminal. Refer to Chapter 3 for wiring.
(2) The encoder cable for the motor is correctly connected to CN2: if you only want to use
the JOG function, connecting CN1 and CN3 is not necessary. Refer to Chapter 3 for the
wiring for CN2.
Caution: do not connect the power (R, S, T) to the output terminal (U, V, W) of B3 servo
drive, or it may damage the servo drive.
2. Connect the power circuit for the servo drive:

200V servo drive: connect the power to the servo drive. Refer to Chapter 3 for power wiring.
3. Turn on the power:
220V servo drive supply: apply power, including to the control circuit (L 1C, L2C) and main
circuit (R, S, T).
When the power is on, the display of the servo drive shows:
The default digital inputs (DI6 - DI8) are the signal for negative limit (NL), positive limit (PL),
and emergency stop (EMGS). If DI6 - DI8 are not used, you must change the values of P2.015 -
P2.017, which you can set to 0 (disable the DI function) or some other value for a different
function.
If the servo drive status displays the P0.002 setting as the motor speed (07), then the screen
display shows:
When the panel displays no text, check if the control circuit power is undervoltage.
4-14
 When the screen displays:
4
Overvoltage warning:
This means the voltage input from the main circuit is higher than the rated range or a
power input error has occurred (incorrect power system).
Corrective action:
1. Use the voltmeter to measure the input voltage from the main circuit, and ensure it is
within the rated range.
2. Use the voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specifications.
Encoder error warning:

Check that the motor encoder is securely connected and the wiring is correct.
Corrective action:
1. Make sure the wiring is following the instructions in the user manual.
2. Check the encoder connector.
3. Check for loose wiring.
4. Check if the encoder is damaged.
4-15
4
Emergency stop warning:
Check if any of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to emergency stop (EMGS).
Corrective action:
1. If you do not want to set the emergency stop (EMGS) as one of the digital inputs,
make sure none of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to emergency stop (EMGS)
(make sure that none of the parameters, P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036, are set to 21).
2. If the emergency stop (EMGS) function is needed, make sure this DI is on when it is
preset as normally closed (function code: 0x0021), and then set this DI as normally
open (function code: 0x0121).
Negative limit error warning:

Check if any of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to negative limit (NL) and that DI is off.
Corrective action:
1. If you do not want to set the negative limit (NL) as one of the digital inputs, make sure
none of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to negative limit (NL) (make sure that none
of the parameters, P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036, are set to 22).
2. If the negative limit (NL) function is needed, make sure this DI is on when it is preset
as normally closed (function code: 0x0022), and then set this DI as normally open
(function code: 0x0122).
4-16
4
Positive limit error warning:
Check if any of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to positive limit (PL) and make sure that
DI is off.
Corrective action:
1. If you do not want to set the positive limit (PL) as one of the digital inputs, make sure
none of the digital inputs DI1 - DI9 are set to positive limit (PL) (make sure that none of
the parameters, P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036, are set to 23).
2. If the positive limit (PL) function is needed, make sure this DI is on when it is preset as
normally closed (function code: 0x0023), and then set this DI as normally open
(function code: 0x0123).
Overcurrent warning:
Corrective action:
1. Check the connection between the motor and servo drive.
2. Check if the conducting wire is short-circuited. Fix the short circuit and prevent any
metal conductors from being exposed.
Undervoltage warning:
Corrective action:
1. Check if the main circuit wiring is correct.
2. Use a voltmeter to check the main circuit voltage.
3. Use a voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specifications.
Note: during power on or in the Servo On state (without issuing any commands), if an alarm occurs or any
abnormal display appears, contact the distributor.
4-17
4.5.3 JOG trial run without load
It is easy to test the motor and servo drive using a JOG trial run without load since no extra wiring
is needed. For safety reasons, it is recommended to set JOG at low speed. Follow these steps:
4 Step 1: JOG trial run is available only when the servo drive is in the Servo On state. The drive
can be forced into the Servo On state by setting P2.030 to 1 or with the host controller.
(JOG trial run with panel operation is not available in the Communication mode.)
Step 2: set JOG speed (unit: rpm) with P4.005. Press the SET key to display the JOG speed.
The default is 20 rpm.
Step 3: press the ▲ or ▼ key to adjust the JOG speed. In the following example, the speed is
set to 100 rpm.
Step 4: press the SET key to display JOG and enter JOG mode.
Step 5: press the MODE key after completing the trial run to exit JOG mode.
SET
Display JOG speed.

Its default value is 20 rpm.
Press the keys to adjust

the JOG speed.
Adjust the speed to 100 rpm.
SET
Display JOG and enter JOG mode.
JOG mode
After entering JOG mode, press the

or key to make the motor run in
counterclockwise or clockwise
direction. Release the key to stop
the operation.
P (CCW) N (CW)
Press the MODE key to

MODE
exit JOG mode.
Exit
4-18
The following shows the JOG timing diagram:
Motor runs in
positive direction
4
Speed 0 Motor stops
Motor runs in
negative direction
Press Release Press
If the motor does not run, check if the wiring between U, V, W and encoder cable is correct.
If the motor runs abnormally, check if the U, V, W phase sequence is correct.
4-19
4.5.4 Trial run without load (Speed mode)
Before starting the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base to avoid any danger
caused by force generated by the motor during speed changes.
4 Step 1: set the control mode of the servo drive to Speed mode. Set P1.001 to 2 for Speed mode.
Then cycle the power to the servo drive.
Step 2: in Speed mode, the following table lists the digital input settings for the trial run.
Digital input Parameter setting value Symbol Function description CN1 Pin No.
DI1 P2.010 = 101 SON Servo activated DI1- = 9
DI2 P2.011 = 109 TRQLM Torque limit DI2- = 10
DI3 P2.012 = 114 SPD0 Speed selection DI3- = 34
DI4 P2.013 = 115 SPD1 Speed selection DI4- = 8
DI5 P2.014 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
DI6 P2.015 = 0 - DI disabled -
This table shows the settings that disable the negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7), and
emergency stop (DI8) functions. Thus, parameters P2.015 - P2.017 and P2.036 - P2.040 are set
to 0 (disabled). You can program the digital inputs of Delta’s servo drive. When programming the
digital inputs for the servo drive, refer to Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions in Chapter 8.
The default setting includes the negative limit, positive limit, and emergency stop functions.
Therefore, if any alarm occurs after you complete the settings, cycle the power to the servo
drive or set DI5 to On to clear the error. Refer to Section 4.5.2.
4-20
The Speed command selection is determined by SPD0 and SPD1. See the following table.
Speed command CN1 DI signal

Command source Content Range
number SPD1 SPD0
4
Voltage difference
External
S between V-REF -10V to +10V
analog signal
S1 0 0 Mode and GND
Speed command
Sz N/A 0
is 0
S2 0 1 P1.009 -60000 to +60000
Internal register
S3 1 0 P1.010 -60000 to +60000
parameter
S4 1 1 P1.011 -60000 to +60000
0: the switch is open (off).
1: the switch is closed (on).
The parameter setting range of the internal register is from -60000 to +60000. Speed setting =
setting value x 0.1 rpm. For example, P1.009 = +30000, speed setting = +30000 x 0.1 rpm =
+3000 rpm.
Command setting for the speed register:
Set P1.009 to +30000.
Set P1.010 to +1000.
Set P1.011 to -30000.
Motor’s running direction:

Input command Rotation direction
+ CCW (positive direction)
- CW (negative direction)
Step 3:
1. Switch on DI1 and the drive is in the Servo On state.

2. When both Speed commands of DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are off, that means it
executes the S1 command. The motor rotates according to the analog voltage command.
3. When DI3 (SPD0) is on, that means it executes the S2 command. The rotation speed is
3000 rpm.
4. When DI4 (SPD1) is on, that means it executes the S3 command. The rotation speed is
100 rpm.
5. When both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are on, that means it executes the S4 command.
The rotation speed is -3000 rpm.
6. You can repeat steps 3 - 5.
7. If you want to stop the motor, switch off DI1 (Servo Off).
4-21
4.5.5 Trial run without load (Position mode)
Before starting the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base to avoid any danger
caused by the force generated by the motor during speed changes.
4 Step 1: set the control mode of the servo drive to Position mode. Set P1.001 to 1 for Position
mode. Then cycle the power to the servo drive.
Step 2: in Position mode, the following table lists the digital input settings for the trial run.
Digital input Parameter setting value Symbol Function description CN1 Pin No.
DI1 P2.010 = 101 SON Servo activated DI1- = 9
DI2 P2.011 = 108 CTRG Command triggered DI2- = 10
DI3 P2.012 = 111 POS0 Position selection DI3- = 34
DI4 P2.013 = 112 POS1 Position selection DI4- = 8
DI5 P2.014 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
This table shows the settings that disable the negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7), and
emergency stop (DI8) functions. Thus, parameters P2.015 - P2.017 and P2.036 - P2.040 are set
to 0 (disabled). You can program the digital inputs of Delta’s servo drive. When programming the
digital inputs for the servo drive, refer to Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions in Chapter 8.
The default setting includes the negative limit, positive limit, and emergency stop functions.
Therefore, if any alarm occurs after you complete the settings, cycle the power to the servo
drive or set DI5 to On to clear the alarm. Refer to Section 4.5.2.
4-22
Refer to Section 3.10.2 for the wiring for Position (PR) control mode. See the following table for
the 100 sets of PR and the Position commands (POS0 - POS6).
Position Corresponding
POS6 POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG
command parameter
Homing
PR1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
↑
↑
P6.000
P6.001
P6.002
P6.003
4
~ ~
P6.098
PR50 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 ↑
P6.099
P7.000
PR51 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ↑
P7.001
~ ~
P7.098
PR99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 ↑
P7.099
0: the switch is open (off).

1: the switch is closed (on).
You can set the 100 sets of PR (P6.000 - P7.099), which you can also set for absolute position
commands.
4-23
4-24
Tuning
This chapter contains information about the auto tuning procedure and the three gain
5
adjustment modes. Advanced users can also tune the servo system using the manual
mode.
5.1 Tuning procedure and the applied mode ·················································5-2

5.1.1 Flowchart of the tuning procedure ···················································5-2
5.1.2 Differences between gain adjustment modes ·····································5-3
5.2 Auto tuning ·······················································································5-4
5.2.1 Flowchart of auto tuning ································································5-5
5.2.2 Auto tuning with the drive panel ······················································5-6
5.2.3 Auto tuning with ASDA-Soft (software) ·············································5-7
5.2.4 Alarms related to auto tuning ······················································· 5-14
5.3 Gain adjustment modes ···································································· 5-15
5.3.1 Flowchart of Gain adjustment mode ··············································· 5-15
5.3.2 Gain adjustment mode 1 ····························································· 5-16
5.3.5 Setting the bandwidth response level (stiffness) ······························· 5-18
5.3.6 Setting the command response gain (response) ······························· 5-19
5.4 Tuning in manual mode ····································································· 5-20
5.5 Mechanical resonance suppression ····················································· 5-22
5-1
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.1 Tuning procedure and the applied mode

5.1.1 Flowchart of the tuning procedure
5
You can tune the servo drive by following this flowchart. First, start from the Auto Tuning mode.
If you are not satisfied with the system’s performance, then use Gain adjustment modes 1, 2, 3,
or Manual mode for tuning the servo system.
Motor runs smoothly

without load
Enter Auto Tuning mode
Satisfied with the Yes

performance?
No
Enter Gain adjustment mode

performance?
No
Enter Manual mode

performance?
No
Complete
5-2
ASDA-B3 Tuning
5.1.2 Differences between gain adjustment modes
P2.032 Parameter
Adjustment
5
setting Inertia estimation
mode Manual Auto
value
P1.037, P2.000,
P2.004, P2.006,
P2.023, P2.024,
P2.025, P2.043,
Fixed set value of
0 Manual P2.044, P2.045, N/A
P1.037
P2.046, P2.049,
P2.089, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
P1.037, P2.000,
P2.004, P2.006,
P2.023, P2.024,
P2.025, P2.043,
Gain adjustment
1 Real-time estimation P2.031 P2.044, P2.045,
mode 1
P2.046, P2.049,
P2.089, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
P2.000, P2.004,
P2.006, P2.023,
P2.024, P2.025,
Gain adjustment Fixed set value of P2.043, P2.044,
2 P1.037, P2.031
mode 2 P1.037 P2.045, P2.046,
P2.049, P2.089,
P2.098, P2.099,
P2.101, P2.102
P2.000, P2.004,
Gain adjustment
P2.006, P2.023,
mode 3
P2.024, P2.025,
(only when the
Fixed set value of P1.037, P2.031, P2.043, P2.044,
3 two-degrees-of-
P1.037 P2.089 P2.045, P2.046,
freedom control
P2.049, P2.098,
function is
P2.099, P2.101,
enabled)
P2.102
Gain adjustment Reset to gain default
4 - -
mode 4 value
Note:
1. For more information on the parameter functions, refer to Section 5.3 Gain adjustment modes.
2. When the two-degrees-of-freedom control function is disabled (set P2.094 [Bit 12] to 0), the effect of
Gain adjustment mode 3 is the same as that of Gain adjustment mode 2, so setting P2.089 is invalid in
that scenario.
5-3
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.2 Auto tuning

The auto tuning function provided by the ASDA-B3 enables the system to perform real-time
5
machine inertia estimation and upload the tuned parameters to the servo drive. You can use the
ASDA-Soft software or the drive panel to start auto tuning. The following table lists the
parameters that change with the results of auto tuning.
Gain parameters Filter and resonance suppression parameters

Parameter Parameter
Function Function
No. No.
Low-frequency vibration
P1.037 Load inertia ratio P1.025
suppression frequency (1)
P2.000 Position control gain P1.026
suppression gain (1)
P2.004 Speed control gain P1.027
suppression frequency (2)
P2.006 Speed integral compensation P1.028
suppression gain (2)
P2.031 Bandwidth response level P2.023 Notch filter frequency (1)
P2.032 Gain adjustment mode P2.024 Notch filter attenuation level (1)
Command response gain
(enabling the two-degrees-of- Resonance suppression low-pass
P2.089 P2.025
freedom control function (set filter
P2.094 [Bit12] to 1) is required)
P2.043 Notch filter frequency (2)
P2.044 Notch filter attenuation level (2)
Speed detection filter and jitter
P2.049
suppression
5-4
ASDA-B3 Tuning
5.2.1 Flowchart of auto tuning
You can use the drive panel or ASDA-Soft to complete auto tuning. The auto tuning function in
5
the B3 servo drive helps you to find the most suitable parameters for your system according to
the machine characteristics.
Auto Tuning
With the controller: Without the controller:

the path is configured by the the back and forth path is set by
controller. the servo drive.
The drive automatically estimates

the inertia and starts to tune the
system.
Complete
Note: when the path is configured by the controller, make sure the dwell time is added to the operation
cycle. Otherwise, AL08B occurs and the servo drive cannot complete auto tuning.
You can use P2.105 and P2.106 to adjust the response and stiffness in Auto Tuning mode.
See the following flowchart.
Start
Use the drive panel or

ASDA-Soft to enter Auto
Tuning mode
Satisfied with the No Change the setting

stiffness? of P2.105
Yes
Satisfied with the No Change the setting

response? of P2.106
Yes
Complete
5-5
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.2.2 Auto tuning with the drive panel
With the following tuning procedure, use the drive panel to complete auto tuning. Make sure the
5
emergency stop, positive and negative limit switches work properly before you start to tune the
system.
Flowchart of auto tuning
M Press and hold the M key (Mode) and

S key (Shift) for four seconds to enter
S
the Auto Tuning mode.
"S-Cmd" on the drive panel is

M blinking. You can select the
S internal or external command
with the Up or Down key.
M M
Press the S key to set the Press the S key to set the internal command.
external command. S S
Check the
No No
servo status.
It reminds you to change the
Servo On? Servo On?
status to Servo On.
"Servo Off" is blinking Yes
Yes M
to remind you that the Press the S key to set the
S drive to Servo On.
controller has not
issued the Servo On
"JOG-S" is blinking to remind you to set
command to the drive.
the JOG speed.
Then, it returns to the
Auto Tuning mode. M
Then, you can set the JOG
speed with the Up, Down,
S
and Shift keys.
M Press the S key to complete the
S setting of JOG speed.
M Press the Up and Down

S keys to set Position 1.
M
Press the S key to complete the
S
setting of Position 1.
M Press the Up and Down
S keys to set Position 2.
M Press the S key to complete the setting of Position 2.

S Then, the system starts to do positioning between
the two points that you just set.
"SPEED" is blinking to remind you to adjust the
positioning speed.
M
Then, you can set the positioning
speed with the Up, Down, and
S
Shift keys.
M M
S S Press the S key to complete the speed setting.
Press the Up and Down keys to

M select YES or NO. "YES" means
S the setting is complete. "NO"
means you need to keep
adjusting the speed.
M
Press the S key to start Auto Tuning.
S
The panel shows the percent complete.
When you see "Set" displayed on the panel, you

Press the M key to exit can press the S key to complete the setting or
the Auto Tuning mode. press the M key to exit the Auto Tuning mode.
M M
S S Press the S key to complete the setting.
Complete
5-6
ASDA-B3 Tuning
5.2.3 Auto tuning with ASDA-Soft (software)
Instead of using the drive panel, you can use ASDA-Soft to complete auto tuning. Go to Delta’s
5
website (http://www.deltaww.com/) to download ADSA-Soft for free. Install the software and
open the executable file (.exe), then you can see the following screen.
Make sure your ASDA-B3 servo drive, servo motor, and power are all properly connected.
Then click Add for the ASDA-Soft to be in online mode.
5-7
Tuning ASDA-B3
There are two types of auto-tuning procedure, one using the controller and one using the servo
drive. Both procedures are described as follows.
5
 Auto tuning with the controller: the controller sends the commands to drive the motor.
Step 1:
When the software is in online mode, the program window appears as follows. Click Auto Tuning
in the Function List tree view.
5-8
ASDA-B3 Tuning
Step 2:
Click Controller: Motion Command from Controller and make sure the motion / machining
path is set correctly.
Suggestions: set the motor to operate at least one cycle in both positive and negative directions.
The delay time for reaching the positions in both positive and negative directions should not be
less than 1,000 ms with the running speed no less than 500 rpm.
Step 3:
Repeatedly run the motor with the path you just set. Before running the motor, make sure no
one is standing close to the machinery. Then, click Next.
5-9
Tuning ASDA-B3
Wait until the tuning progress bar reaches 100%, after which a window with “Auto tuning
completed.” appears. Click OK to continue.
The screen shows a table comparing the parameters before and after being changed by
auto tuning.
Click Update to complete auto tuning.
5-10
ASDA-B3 Tuning
 Auto tuning with the servo drive: the servo drive sends the commands to drive the motor.
Step 1:
5
When the software is in online mode, the program window appears as follows.
Click Auto Tuning in the Function List tree view.
Step 2:
Click Drive: Motion Command from Drive to enter the path setting window.
5-11
Tuning ASDA-B3
Follow these steps to set the motor running path:
1. Set the system to the Servo ON state.
5
2. Set the acceleration / deceleration time and jog speed. The default setting for acceleration /
deceleration time is 500 ms. Set the jog speed to no less than 500 rpm. Then click
Download.
3. After you set the motor’s running path, you can use the Left or Right button to run the motor
to Position 1 and Position 2. Then, click Start Moving to run between two positions.
The motor moves to Position 1 and Position 2 in the forward and backward directions.
Before running the motor, make sure no one is standing close to the machinery.
Then, click Next.
Left Right
5-12
ASDA-B3 Tuning
Step 3:
Wait until the tuning progress bar reaches 100%, after which a window with “Auto tuning
completed.” appears. Click OK to continue.
The screen shows a table comparing the parameters before and after being changed by auto tuning.
Click Update to complete auto tuning.
5-13
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.2.4 Alarms related to auto tuning
In Auto Tuning mode, it is vital that you program the command path, including the operation
5
cycle (such as acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration) and dwell time. See the following
figure. When any of the settings is incorrect, the servo drive stops tuning and displays an alarm.
Please check the alarm causes and take corrective actions.
Speed
Operation Operation
cycle cycle
Max. speed
Dwell
Time
Acc. time
Display Alarm name

AL08A Auto-tuning function - Command error
AL08B Auto-tuning function - Pause time is too short
AL08C Auto-tuning function - Inertia estimation error
5-14
ASDA-B3 Tuning
5.3 Gain adjustment modes

Apart from the auto tuning function described above, there are three other gain adjustment modes
5
you can use to fine tune the system. You can then easily complete tuning by increasing or
decreasing the bandwidth response level (P2.031). Follow the tuning procedure in Section 5.1.
5.3.1 Flowchart of Gain adjustment mode
Start
Adjustment mode 1 Keep estimating the inertia

P2.032 = 1 ratio (P1.037)
Adjust P2.031 (Bandwidth level)

performance?
No
Adjustment mode 2
P2.032 = 2
Adjust P2.031 (Bandwidth level)
and P1.037 (Inertia ratio)
performance?
No
Adjustment mode 3
P2.032 = 3
Adjust P2.031 (Bandwidth level),
P1.037 (Inertia ratio), and P2.089
(Command response gain) Satisfied with the Yes
performance?
No
Enter Manual mode
P2.032 = 0
You can adjust

all parameters in
Yes
Manual mode Satisfied with the
performance?
No
Complete
5-15
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.3.2 Gain adjustment mode 1
In this mode, the servo drive continues to estimate the machine inertia and updates the value of
5
P1.037.
P2.032 Parameter
setting Adjustment mode Inertia estimation
value Manual Auto
P1.037, P2.000,
P2.004, P2.006,
P2.023, P2.024,
P2.025, P2.043,
Gain adjustment
mode 1
P2.046, P2.049,
P2.089, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
Requirements for inertia estimation:
1. The motor accelerates from 0 rpm to 3,000 rpm within 1.5 seconds.
2. It is suggested to set the motor speed to 500 rpm or higher. The lowest speed should be no
less than 200 rpm.
3. The load inertia must be no more than 50 times the motor inertia.
4. The change in the inertia ratio cannot be too great.
When Gain adjustment mode 1 cannot meet your need, try Gain adjustment mode 2 to tune the
servo system. In Gain adjustment mode 2, the system does not automatically estimate the
inertia. You must set the correct machine inertia in P1.037.
P2.032 Parameter
value Manual Auto
P2.000, P2.004,
P2.006, P2.023,
P2.024, P2.025,
Gain adjustment Fixed set value of P2.043, P2.044,
2 P1.037, P2.031
mode 2 P1.037 P2.045, P2.046,
P2.049, P2.089,
P2.098, P2.099,
P2.101, P2.102
Inertia estimation is applicable to most applications. However, when the machine does not comply
with the requirements for inertia estimation, you have to set the correct inertia ratio in P1.037.
5-16
ASDA-B3 Tuning
When Gain adjustment modes 1 and 2 cannot meet your need, try Gain adjustment mode 3 to
5
tune the servo system. P2.089 (Command response gain) is available in this mode. You can
increase the gain value to shorten the response and settling time for the position command.
However, if you set the parameter value too high, it might cause position overshoot and machinery
vibration. This function is only available for changing commands, such as the acceleration /
deceleration application, which improves the response. However, when the two-degrees-of-
freedom control function is disabled (set P2.094 [Bit 12] to 0), the effect of Gain adjustment mode
3 is the same as that of Gain adjustment mode 2, so setting P2.089 is invalid in that scenario.
P2.032 Parameter
value Manual Auto
P2.000, P2.004,
P2.006, P2.023,
P2.024, P2.025,
Gain adjustment Fixed set value of P1.037, P2.031, P2.043, P2.044,
3
mode 3 P1.037 P2.089 P2.045, P2.046,
P2.049, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
5-17
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.3.5 Setting the bandwidth response level (stiffness)
When the inertia is fixed and you increase the bandwidth response level (P2.031), the servo’s
5
bandwidth increases as well. If resonance occurs, lower the parameter value by one or two
bandwidth response levels (you should adjust the bandwidth response level according to the
actual situation). For instance, if the value of P2.031 is 30, you can reduce the bandwidth
response level to 28. When you adjust the value of this parameter, the servo drive automatically
adjusts the corresponding parameters, such as P2.000 and P2.004.
Servo
bandwidth
Level increases
84 Hz
26 Hz
5 Inertia ratio
(P1.037)
Position Position
Command Command
Response Response
Feedback Feedback
Time Time
Before After
Figure 5.3.5.1 Adjust the bandwidth response level
5-18
ASDA-B3 Tuning
5.3.6 Setting the command response gain (response)
Use P2.089 to adjust the command response gain. Increasing the gain can minimize the
5
deviation between the position command and command response in the intermittent duty zone.
This function is only available for changing commands. Before adjusting the value of P2.089,
first enable the two-degrees-of-freedom control function (set P2.094 [Bit 12] to 1).
Position Position
Command Command
Response Response
Feedback Feedback
Time Time
Smaller Greater
Figure 5.3.6.1 Adjust the command response gain
5-19
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.4 Tuning in manual mode

The selection of the position or speed response bandwidth should be determined by the
5
machine stiffness and the application. Generally, for applications or machines that require
high-speed positioning and high precision, higher response bandwidth is required. However,
increasing the response bandwidth might cause mechanical resonance. Thus, machinery with
higher stiffness is used to solve this problem. When the response bandwidth is unknown,
you can gradually increase the gain parameter values to increase the response bandwidth.
Then, decrease the gain parameter values until you hear the sound of the resonance.
The following are the descriptions of the gain adjustment parameters.
 Position control gain (KPP, P2.000)
This parameter determines the response of the position control loop. The bigger the
KPP value, the higher the response bandwidth of the position loop. This lowers the
following error and position error, and shortens the settling time. However, if you set the
value too high, it can cause the machinery to vibrate or cause overshoot when
positioning. The calculation of the position loop response bandwidth is as follows:
KPP
Position loop response bandwidth (Hz) =
2π
 Speed control gain (KVP, P2.004)
This parameter determines the response of the speed control loop. The bigger the KVP
value, the higher the response bandwidth of the speed loop and the lower the following
error. However, if you set the value too high, it can cause mechanical resonance.
The response bandwidth of the speed loop must be 4 to 6 times higher than that of the
position loop. Otherwise, it can cause the machinery to vibrate or cause overshoot
when positioning. The calculation of the speed loop response bandwidth is as follows:
KVP (1 + P1.037/10)
Speed loop response bandwidth (Hz) = ( ) × [ ]
2π (1 + JL/JM)
JM: motor inertia; JL: load inertia; P1.037: 0.1 (times)
When P1.037 (auto estimation or manually set value) is equal to the real load inertia
ratio (JL / JM), the real speed loop response bandwidth is:
KVP
Speed loop response bandwidth (Hz) = ( )
2π
 Speed integral compensation (KVI, P2.006)
The higher the KVI value, the better the elimination of the deviation. However, if you set
the value too high, it can cause the machinery to vibrate. It is suggested that you set the
value as follows:
KVI ≤ 1.5 × Speed loop response bandwidth (Hz)
5-20
ASDA-B3 Tuning
 Low-pass filter for resonance suppression (NLP, P2.025)
A high load inertia ratio reduces the response bandwidth of the speed loop. Therefore,
5
you must increase the KVP value to maintain the response bandwidth. Increasing the
KVP value might cause sound due to mechanical resonance. Use this parameter to
eliminate the noise from resonance. The higher the value, the better the capability for
reducing high-frequency noise. However, if you set the value too high, it can cause
instability in the speed loop and overshoot. It is suggested that you set the value as
follows:
10000
NLP ≤
6 × Speed loop response bandwidth (Hz)
 Anti-interference gain (DST, P2.026)
Use this parameter to increase the ability to resist external force and eliminate
overshoot during acceleration / deceleration. The default value is 0. Adjusting this value
in Manual mode is not suggested unless it is for fine-tuning.
Note: to use this parameter, disable the two-degrees-of-freedom control function (set P2.094
[Bit 12] to 0).
 Position feed forward gain (PFG, P2.002)
This parameter can reduce the position error and shorten the settling time. However,
if you set the value too high, it might cause overshoot when positioning. If the setting of
the E-Gear ratio is larger than 10, it might cause noise as well.
Note: to use this parameter, disable the two-degrees-of-freedom control function (set P2.094
[Bit 12] to 0).
5-21
Tuning ASDA-B3
5.5 Mechanical resonance suppression

Five sets of notch filters are provided to suppress mechanical resonances. You can set all five
5
to auto resonance suppression with P2.047 or manually set the resonance suppression with
ASDA-Soft. See the following flowchart of manual adjustment.
Use the analytic tool provided by ASDA-Soft to

display the point of resonance.
The drive issues the

command to accelerate
and decelerate the motor
alternatively.
High-frequency No
Complete
resonance?
Yes
Set the value of resonance frequency to P2.023

and set P2.024 to 4.
Resonance No Increase the value of

eliminated? P2.024
Yes
Complete
5-22
Operation Mode
This chapter describes the operation of each control mode, including gain adjustment
6
and filters. For Position mode, you use the external pulse and commands from the
internal registers. For Speed mode and Torque mode, apart from the commands from
the internal registers, you can also control the servo drive by the analog voltage input.
In addition to Single mode, Dual mode is also available for meeting the application
requirements.
6.1 Selecting the operation mode ·······························································6-3

6.2 Position mode ···················································································6-5
6.2.1 Position command in PT mode ·······················································6-5
6.2.2 Position command in PR mode ·······················································6-5
6.2.3 Control structure of Position mode···················································6-6
6.2.4 S-curve filter for Position commands ················································6-7
6.2.5 Electronic gear ratio (E-Gear ratio) ··················································6-9
6.2.6 Low-pass filter ·········································································· 6-10
6.2.7 Timing diagram of PR mode ························································· 6-10
6.2.8 Gain adjustment of the position loop ·············································· 6-11
6.2.9 Low-frequency vibration suppression in Position mode ······················ 6-12
6.3 Speed mode ··················································································· 6-15
6.3.1 Selecting the Speed command source ··········································· 6-15
6.3.2 Control structure of Speed mode ·················································· 6-16
6.3.3 Smooth Speed command ···························································· 6-17
6.3.4 Scaling of the analog command ···················································· 6-19
6.3.5 Timing diagram of Speed mode ···················································· 6-20
6.3.6 Gain adjustment of the speed loop ················································ 6-21
6.3.7 Resonance suppression unit ························································ 6-23
6.4 Torque mode ·················································································· 6-26
6.4.1 Selecting the Torque command source ··········································· 6-26
6.4.2 Control structure of Torque mode ·················································· 6-27
6.4.3 Smooth Torque command···························································· 6-28
6.4.4 Scaling of the analog command ···················································· 6-28
6.4.5 Timing diagram of Torque mode ···················································· 6-29
6.5 Dual mode ····················································································· 6-30
6.5.1 Speed / Position dual mode ························································· 6-31
6-1
Operation Mode ASDA-B3
6.5.2 Speed / Torque dual mode ··························································· 6-32

6.5.3 Torque / Position dual mode ························································· 6-33
6.6 Others ··························································································· 6-34
6
6.6.1 Applying the speed limit ······························································ 6-34
6.6.2 Applying the torque limit ······························································ 6-34
6.6.3 Analog monitoring······································································ 6-35
6-2
ASDA-B3 Operation Mode
6.1 Selecting the operation mode

This servo drive provides three basic operation modes: Position, Speed, and Torque.
The available communication modes are CANopen, DMCNET, and EtherCAT. For the basic
operation mode, you can choose from Single mode, Dual mode, and Multi-mode. The following
table lists all the available modes.
Mode Short name Code Description
6
The servo drive receives the Position command and
Position mode
commands the motor to run to the target position.
(Terminal block PT 00
The Position commands are communicated through
input)
the terminal block and the signal type is pulse.
The servo drive receives the Position command and
commands the motor to run to the target position.
Position mode
PR 01 The Position commands are issued from the internal
(Register input)
registers (100 sets in total). Select the register
number with DI signals or through communication.
The servo drive receives the Speed command and
commands the motor to run at the target speed.
The Speed commands are issued from the internal
Speed mode S 02
registers (3 sets in total) or by analog voltage (-10V
to +10V) which is communicated through the
terminal block. Select the command with DI signals.
Single The servo drive receives the Speed command and
mode commands the motor to run at the target speed.
Speed mode The Speed command can only be issued from the
Sz 04
(No analog input) internal registers (3 sets in total) instead of through
the external terminal block. Select the command
with DI signals.
The servo drive receives the Torque command and
commands the motor to run with the target torque.
The Torque commands are issued from the internal
Torque mode T 03
registers (3 sets in total) or by analog voltage (-10V
to +10V) which is communicated through the
terminal block. Select the command with DI signals.
The servo drive receives the Torque command and
commands the motor to run with the target torque.
Torque mode The Torque command can only be issued from the
Tz 05
(No analog input) internal registers (3 sets in total) instead of through
the external terminal block. Select the command
with DI signals.
PT-S 06 Switch PT and S modes with DI signals.
PT-T 07 Switch PT and T modes with DI signals.
PR-S 08 Switch PR and S modes with DI signals.
Dual mode
PR-T 09 Switch PR and T modes with DI signals.
S-T 0A Switch S and T modes with DI signals.
PT-PR 0D Switch PT and PR modes with DI signals.
DMCNET mode
0B
Operates with the communication mode for PLC.
Communication mode
CANopen mode
0C
EtherCAT mode
PT-PR-S 0E Switch PT, PR, and S modes with DI signals.
Multi-mode
PT-PR-T 0F Switch PT, PR, and T modes with DI signals.
6-3
Here are the steps to switch the operation mode:

1. Switch the servo drive to Servo Off status. You can do this by setting DI.SON to off.
2. Set P1.001 and refer to the code listed above for the mode selection.
6
3. After setting the parameter, cycle power to the servo drive.
The following sections describe the operation of each mode, including the mode structure,
command source, selection and processing of the command, and gain adjustment.
6-4
6.2 Position mode

Two input modes for position control are available on the ASDA-B3: external pulse (PT mode)
and internal register (PR mode). In PT mode, the ASDA-B3 servo drive receives the pulse
command for direction (motor runs forward or reverse). You can control the rotation angle of the
motor with the input pulse. The ASDA-B3 can receive pulse commands of up to 4 Mpps.
You can also accomplish position control using the internal register (PR mode) without the
6
external pulse command. The ASDA-B3 provides 100 command registers with two input modes.
You can set the 100 registers first before switching the drive to Servo On status and then set
DI.POS0 - DI.POS6 of CN1 for the switch. Or, directly set the register values through
communication.
6.2.1 Position command in PT mode
The PT Position command is the pulse input from the terminal block. There are three pulse
types and each type has positive and negative logic that you can set in P1.000. Refer to
Chapter 8 for more details.
Parameter Function
P1.000 External pulse input type
6.2.2 Position command in PR mode
The PR command source is the 100 built-in command registers, (P6.000, P6.001) - (P7.098,
P7.099). Use DI (0x11) - (0x1E) (POS0 - POS6 of CN1) to select one of the 100 sets as the
Position command and trigger the command with DI.CTRG (0x08). See the following table for
more details.
Position Corresponding
POS6 POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG
command parameter
P6.000
Homing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ↑
P6.001
P6.002
PR#1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 ↑
P6.003
… …
P6.098
PR#50 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 ↑
P6.099
P7.000
PR#51 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 ↑
P7.001
… …
P7.098
PR#99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 ↑
P7.099
Status of POS0 - POS6: 0 means that DI is off (the circuit is open); 1 means that DI is on (the
circuit is closed).
CTRG : this indicates the moment that DI is switched from off to on.
6-5
There are many applications for both absolute type and incremental type registers. You can
easily complete a periodic motor operation according to the table above. For example, assume
the Position command PR#1 is 10 turns and PR#2 is 20 turns. PR#1 is issued first and PR#2
6
comes second. The following diagrams show the difference between absolute and incremental
positioning.
Absolute type Incremental type
20 turns
20 turns
10 turns 10 turns
6.2.3 Control structure of Position mode
The basic control structure is shown in the following flowchart.
Position command
Position
command
processing unit
Position control
Speed loop Current loop Motor
unit
For better control, the pulse signals are processed by the Position command processing unit.
The structure is shown in the following diagram.
Position command processing unit
Command
selection
GNUM0, GNUM1
P1.001
CN1 Command Acc. / Target
POS0 - POS6 Delay time
source Dec. time speed S-curve
CTRG P5.040 filter Moving filter
P6.000 P5.020 P5.060
︱ 1st numerator (P1.044)
︱︱︱ P1.036 P1.068
P5.055 2nd numerator (P2.060)
P7.099 P5.035 P5.075
3rd numerator (P2.061)
4th numerator (P2.062)
Low-pass filter
External Pulse type Denominator (P1.045) P1.008
pulse selection Counter
command
P1.000 Low-frequency
vibration suppression
Inhibit P1.025, P1.026
Low-frequency
vibration suppression
P1.027, P1.028
6-6
The upper path of the above diagram is the PR mode and the lower one is the PT mode that
you can select with P1.001. You can set the E-Gear ratio in both modes to adjust the positioning
resolution. In addition, you can use either a moving filter or low-pass filter to smooth the
6
command (described as follows).
The Pulse Command Input Inhibit (INHP) function
In PT mode, when DI.INHP is on, the servo drive stops receiving external pulse commands and
the motor stops running. As this function is only supported by DI4, setting P2.017 (DI4) to 0x45
(DI.INHP) is required.
DI.INHP OFF
ON ON
Pulse
command
6.2.4 S-curve filter for Position commands
The S-curve filter for Position commands smoothes the motion command in PR mode. The filter
makes the speed and acceleration continuous and reduces jerking, resulting in a smoother
mechanical operation. If the load inertia increases, the motor operation is influenced by friction
and inertia when the motor starts or stops rotating. Setting a larger acceleration / deceleration
constant for the S-curve (P1.036) and the acceleration / deceleration time in P5.020 - P5.035 can
increase the smoothness of operation. When the Position command source is pulse, the speed
and angular acceleration are continuous, so the S-curve command filter is not necessary.
Position
Time (ms)
Speed
Rated speed
Time (ms)
Torque
Time (ms)
AC0 - 15
P1.036 P1.036
2 2 AC0 - 15
P1.036 P1.036
2 2
Position and S-curve speed and time setting (incremental position command)
6-7
Position
6
Time (ms)
Speed Time (ms)
Rated speed
Torque
Time (ms)
AC0 - 15 AC0 - 15
P1.036 P1.036 P1.036 P1.036
2 2 2 2
Position and S-curve speed and time setting (decremental position command)
Refer to Chapter 8 for detailed descriptions of the relevant parameters.
Parameter Function
P1.036 S-curve acceleration / deceleration constant
P5.020 - P5.035 Acceleration / deceleration times (Number #0 - 15)
6-8
6.2.5 Electronic gear ratio (E-Gear ratio)
The electronic gear provides easy settings for the resolution. The resolution of ASDA-B3 is
24-bit, which means that it generates 16,777,216 pulses per motor rotation. Regardless of the
encoder resolution (17-bit, 20-bit, or 22-bit), the E-Gear ratio is set according to the 24-bit
resolution of ASDA-B3 servo drive.
When the E-Gear ratio is 1, it generates 16,777,216 pulses per motor rotation. When you set
6
the ratio to 0.5, then every two pulses from the command (controller) corresponds to one pulse
for the motor. However, larger E-Gear ratio might create a sharp corner in the profile and lead to
a high jerk. To solve this problem, apply an S-curve command filter or a low-pass filter to reduce
the jerk.
For example, if you set the E-Gear ratio so that the workpiece is moved at the speed of
1 μm/pulse, then it means the workpiece moves 1 μm per pulse.
(1) Motor; (2) Ball screw pitch: 3 mm (equals 3,000 μm); WL: workpiece; WT: platform
Gear ratio Moving distance per 1 pulse command
μm
3000 1 3000 μm
E-Gear is 1 rev
= = × = (Unit: )
not applied 1
16777216
pulse 1 16777216 pulse
rev
μm
3000 16777216 μm
E-Gear is 16777216 rev
= = × = 1 (Unit: )
applied 3000
16777216
pulse 3000 pulse
rev
Parameter Function
P1.044 E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N1)
P1.045 E-Gear ratio (denominator) (M)
6-9
6.2.6 Low-pass filter
Target
6
position
P1.008
Refer to Chapter 8 for detailed descriptions of the relevant parameter.
Parameter Function
P1.008 Position command smoothing constant (low-pass filter)
6.2.7 Timing diagram of PR mode
In PR mode, the Position command is issued with the DI signals (POS0 - POS6 and CTRG) of
CN1. Refer to Section 6.2.2 for information about the DI signal and its selected register. The timing
diagrams are shown as follows.
Internal register
PR#1 PR#2 PR#4
(PR#0 - 99)
Motion curve
(speed)
1 ms
POS0 on off off

off on off
POS1
External off on
DI POS2
CTRG
SON on
Set the response time with P2.009
Cmd_OK off on
Internal off on
DO TPOS
MC_OK off on
Note: Cmd_OK is on when the PR command is complete; TPOS is on when the error is smaller than the
value set by P1.054; MC_OK is on when Cmd_OK and TPOS are both on.
6-10
6.2.8 Gain adjustment of the position loop
There are two types of gain adjustment for the position loop: auto and manual.
 Auto
The ASDA-B3 servo drive provides an Auto Tuning function that allows you to easily complete
the gain adjustment. Refer to Chapter 5 Tuning for a detailed description.
 Manual
6
Before setting the position control unit, you have to manually set the speed control unit (P2.004
and P2.006) since a speed loop is included in the position loop. Then set the position control
gain (P2.000) and position feed forward gain (P2.002).
Description of the position control gain and position feed forward gain:
1. Position control gain: the higher the gain, the larger bandwidth for the position loop
response.
2. Position feed forward gain: reduces the deviation of phase delay.
Note that the position loop bandwidth should not be larger than the speed loop bandwidth.
fv
fp 
Calculation: 4 (fv: response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz); fp: response bandwidth of
position loop (Hz).)

KPP = 2 ×  × fp
Example: if the desired position bandwidth is 20 Hz, then adjust KPP (P2.000) to 125.
(2 ×  × 20 Hz = 125)
Parameter Function
P2.000 Position control gain
P2.002 Position feed forward gain
Position control unit
Position feed
Position feed
forward gain
Differentiator forward gain
smoothing constant
P2.002
P2.003
Position +
Position + Maximum
+ control gain
command speed limit
P2.000
- Position control P1.055
gain rate of
change Gain switching
P2.001 P2.027
Speed
command
Position
Encoder
counter
6-11
When you set the value of KPP (P2.000) too high, the bandwidth for the position loop is
increased and the phase margin is reduced. Meanwhile, the rotor rotates and vibrates in the
forward and reverse directions. In this case, decrease the KPP value until the rotor stops
6
vibrating. When the external torque is too high, the low value for KPP cannot meet the demand
of reducing the position following error. In this case, increasing the position feed forward gain,
PFG (P2.002), can effectively reduce the position following error.
The actual position curve changes from (1) to (3) with the increase in the KPP value.
(4) stands for the Position command.
6.2.9 Low-frequency vibration suppression in Position mode
If the machine is too flexible, vibration persists even when the motor stops after executing the
positioning command. The low-frequency vibration suppression function can reduce the
machine vibration. The suppression range is between 1.0 Hz and 100.0 Hz. Both auto and
manual functions are available.
Auto setting
If you have difficulty finding the resonance at low frequency, enable the auto low-frequency
vibration suppression function, which automatically searches for the specific resonance at low
frequency. If you set P1.029 to 1, the system automatically disables the auto low-frequency
vibration suppression function and starts to search the resonance at low frequency. When the
detected resonance frequency remains at the same level, the system automatically changes the
settings as follows.
1. Sets P1.029 to 0.
2. Sets P1.025 to the first frequency and sets P1.026 to 1.
3. Sets P1.027 to the second frequency and sets P1.028 to 1.
If P1.029 is automatically reset to 0, but the low-frequency vibration persists, check if P1.026 or
P1.028 is enabled. If the values of P1.026 and P1.028 are both 0, it means no resonance
frequency is detected. Lower the value of P1.030 and set P1.029 to 1 to search the vibration
frequency again. Note that when you set the detection level too low, it might detect noise as
resonance at low frequency.
6-12
The process of automatically searching for the resonance frequency is shown in the following
flowchart.
Repeat position
6
control function.
Check if vibration
No occurs during
positioning?
Yes
Set P1.029 to 1.
Decrease the Increase the value

value of P1.030.*1 of P1.030.*2
Yes Yes
No Check if No
No Check if P1.029
Vibration reduced? P1.026 and P1.028
is set to 0?
are set to 0?
Yes
Set P1.029 to 0.
Operation
complete
Note:
1. When the values of P1.026 and P1.028 are both 0, it means the frequency cannot be found. It is
probably because the detection level is set too high causing the low-frequency vibration not being able
to be detected.
2. When the value of P1.026 or P1.028 is greater than 0, but the vibration cannot be suppressed, it is
probably because the detection level is too low causing the system to detect minor frequency or noise
as low-frequency vibration.
3. When the auto suppression procedure is complete, but the vibration persists, you can manually set
P1.025 or P1.027 to suppress the vibration if you have identified the low frequency.
6-13
Parameter Function
P1.029 Auto low-frequency vibration suppression mode
6
P1.030 Low-frequency vibration detection
P1.030 sets the detection range for the magnitude of low-frequency vibration. When the
frequency is not detected, it is probably because you set the value of P1.030 too high and it
exceeds the vibration range. In this case, it is suggested that you decrease the value of P1.030.
Note that if the value is too small, the system might detect noise as the resonance vibration
frequency. You can also use a software Scope to observe the range of position error (pulse)
between the upper and lower magnitude of the curve to adjust the value of P1.030.
Manual setting
There are two sets of low-frequency vibration suppression: one is parameters P1.025 - P1.026
and the other is parameters P1.027 - P1.028. You can use these two sets of low-frequency
vibration suppression parameters to reduce two different frequency vibrations. Use P1.025 and
P1.027 to suppress the low-frequency vibration. The function works only when the low-frequency
vibration setting is close to the real vibration frequency. Use P1.026 and P1.028 to set the
response after frequency filtering. The bigger the values of P1.026 and P1.028, the better the
response. However, if you set the values too high, the motor might not operate smoothly. The
default values of P1.026 and P1.028 are 0, which means the two filters are disabled by default.
Parameter Function
P1.025 Low-frequency vibration suppression frequency (1)
P1.026 Low-frequency vibration suppression gain (1)
P1.027 Low-frequency vibration suppression frequency (2)
P1.028 Low-frequency vibration suppression gain (2)
6-14
6.3 Speed mode

There are two kinds of command sources: analog input and internal register (parameters).
The analog command controls the motor speed by scaled external voltage input. The command
register input controls the speed in two ways. Before operation, respectively set the speed
values in three registers. You can switch among the three sets of speed either by using
DI.SPD0 / DI.SPD1 of CN1 or change the value in the register through communication. In order
6
to deal with the problem of non-continuous speed when switching registers, you can use the
S-curve acceleration and deceleration filter.
6.3.1 Selecting the Speed command source
There are two types of Speed command sources: analog voltage and internal register
(parameters). Select the command source with DI signals of CN1. See the following table for
more details.
Speed CN1 DI signal
command Command source Content Range
number SPD1 SPD0
Voltage difference
External analog
S between V_REF and -10V to +10V
S1 0 0 Mode signal
GND
Sz N/A Speed command is 0 0
S2 0 1 P1.009 -60000 to 60000
S3 1 0 Register parameter P1.010 -60000 to 60000
S4 1 1 P1.011 -60000 to 60000
 Status of SPD0 and SPD1: 0 means that DI is off (the circuit is open); 1 means that DI is
on (the circuit is closed).
 When both SPD0 and SPD1 are 0, if it is in Sz mode, the command is 0. Thus, if the
Speed command using analog voltage is not required, you can use Sz mode to address
the problem of zero drift in the voltage. If it is in S mode, the command is the voltage
difference between V_REF and GND. The range of the input voltage is between -10V and
+10V, and you can adjust the corresponding speed (P1.040).
 When either one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0, the Speed command comes from the
internal register. The command is activated once the status of SPD0 and SPD1 are
switched. There is no need to use DI.CTRG for triggering.
 The parameter setting range (internal register) is -60000 to 60000.

Rotation speed = setting value x unit (0.1 rpm). For example, if P1.009 = +30000, then
rotation speed = +30000 x 0.1 rpm = +3000 rpm
Use the Speed command in Speed mode (S or Sz) and in Torque mode (T or Tz) to set the
speed limit.
6-15
6.3.2 Control structure of Speed mode
The basic control structure is shown in the following flowchart.
6
Speed command
Speed
command
processing unit
Speed
estimator
Speed control Resonance Current

Torque limit Motor
unit suppression unit loop
The Speed command processing unit selects the command source (see Section 6.3.1),
including the scaling parameter (P1.040) for maximum rotation speed corresponding to the
analog voltage and the S-curve parameter for smoothing the speed. The Speed control unit
manages the gain parameters for the servo drive and calculates the current command for servo
motor in real-time. The Resonance suppression unit suppresses the resonance of the machine.
The following diagram introduces the function of Speed command processing unit. Its structure
is shown as follows.
SPD0 and SPD1 signals of CN1
Register
S-curve filter
P1.009 -
P1.036
P1.011
Command
Low-pass filter
selection
P1.006
S-curve filter for P1.001
Scaling analog
A/D
P1.040 commands
P1.059
Analog signal
The upper path is the command from the register and the lower one is the command from the
external analog voltage that you can select with the status of SPD0 and SPD1, and P1.001
(S or Sz). In this condition, the S-curve and low-pass filters are applied to achieve a smoother
response.
6-16
6.3.3 Smooth Speed command
S-curve filter
During the process of acceleration or deceleration, the S-curve filter uses the three-stage
acceleration curve and creates a smoother motion trajectory. It avoids jerk (rapid change of
acceleration), resonance, and noise caused by abrupt speed variation. You can use the following
parameters for adjustment. The S-curve acceleration constant (P1.034) adjusts the slope of the
6
change in acceleration. The S-curve deceleration constant (P1.035) adjusts the slope of the
change in deceleration. The S-curve acceleration / deceleration constant (P1.036) improves the
status of motor activating and stopping. The servo drive can also calculate the total time for
executing the command. T (ms) indicates the operation time and S (rpm) indicates the absolute
Speed command, which is the absolute value of the initial speed minus the end speed.
Speed
Rated Acceleration Deceleration
speed
Time
0
(ms)
Torque
Time
0
(ms)
P1.036 P1.034 P1.036
2 2
P1.036 P1.035 P1.036
2 2
Figure 6.3.3.1 S-curve and time setting
Parameter Function
P1.034 S-curve acceleration constant
P1.035 S-curve deceleration constant
P1.036 S-curve acceleration / deceleration constant
6-17
S-curve filter for analog commands

The S-curve filter for analog commands helps to stabilize the motor operation when the analog
input signal (speed) changes rapidly.
6
Speed (rpm)
(1) Analog Speed command; (2) Motor speed
The S-curve filter for analog commands smoothes the analog input signal. Its time program is
the same as the S-curve filter mentioned in the above paragraph. Also, the speed and
acceleration curves are both continuous. The above graph shows the S-curve and the motor
speed when you apply the S-curve filter for analog commands. The slopes of the Speed
command in acceleration and deceleration are different. Adjust the time settings (P1.034,
P1.035, and P1.036) according to the actual application to improve the performance.
Low-pass filter for Speed commands

You usually use the low-pass filter to remove unwanted high-frequency response or noise so
that the speed change is smoother.
Parameter Function
P1.006 Speed command smoothing constant (low-pass filter)
Speed command
Target speed
P1.006
6-18
6.3.4 Scaling of the analog command
In the analog mode, control the motor’s Speed command by the analog voltage difference
between V_REF and GND. Use P1.040 and P1.081 (maximum rotation speed for analog Speed
command) to adjust the slope of the speed change and its range. P1.082 can change the filter
switching time between P1.040 and P1.081.
Speed command
6
6000 rpm
P1.081 = 6000
3000 rpm
P1.040 = 3000
-10 -5
Analog voltage
5 10 input (V)
3000 rpm
6000 rpm
Parameter Function
P1.040 First set of maximum rotation speed for analog Speed command
P1.081 Second set of maximum rotation speed for analog Speed command
P1.082 Filter switching time between P1.040 and P1.081
6-19
6.3.5 Timing diagram of Speed mode
S4
6
Internal
register S3
S2
External
analog S1
voltage or 0
off on off on
SPD0
External SPD1 off on
I/O
SON on
Note:
1. “off” means that DI is off (the circuit is open); “on” means that DI is on (the circuit is closed).
2. When it is in Sz mode, the Speed command S1 = 0; when it is in S mode, the Speed command S1 is
the external analog voltage input.
3. In Servo On state, the command is selected according to the status of SPD0 and SPD1.
6-20
6.3.6 Gain adjustment of the speed loop
The structure of the speed control unit is shown in the following diagram.
6
Speed control unit
Speed feed
Differentiator forward gain
P2.007 System inertia J
(1+P1.037)*JM
Speed control + +
+ +
gain +
P2.004
- + +
Integrator
Gain Load inertia
Rate of
switching ratio
change
P2.027 P1.037
Speed integral P2.005
compensation
P2.006
Motor inertia
Gain switching JM
P2.027
Torque constant Torque

Current command
reciprocal
command
1/KT
Low-pass filter Speed

Encoder
P2.049 estimator
In the speed control unit, you can adjust different types of gain. You can adjust the gain
manually or use the two gain adjustment modes provided.
Manual: manually set the parameters, and all auto or auxiliary functions are disabled.
Gain adjustment mode: refer to Chapter 5 Tuning.
Manual mode
When you set P2.032 to 0, you also set the speed control gain (P2.004), speed integral
compensation (P2.006), and speed feed forward gain (P2.007). The parameter descriptions are
as follows.
Speed control gain: the higher the gain, the larger the bandwidth for the speed loop response.
Speed integral compensation: increasing this gain increases the low frequency rigidity and
reduces the steady-state error. However, this sacrifices the phase margin. If you set this gain
too high, it reduces the system stability.
Speed feed forward gain: reduces the deviation of phase delay.
Parameter Function
P2.004 Speed control gain (KVP)
P2.006 Speed integral compensation (KVI)
P2.007 Speed feed forward gain (KVF)
6-21
Theoretically, a stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP), integral gain
(KVI), and feed forward gain (KVF). Here, the time domain is used to illustrate the basic principle.
Time domain
6 The higher the KVP value, the larger the
bandwidth. The time of the speed increase
will also be shorter. However, if the value is
set too high, the phase margin is too small.
The effect is not as good as KVI for the
steady-state error but is better for the effect
on following error.
The higher the KVI value, the larger the
low-frequency gain. It shortens the time for
the steady-state error to reduce to zero.
However, it does not significantly reduce the
following error.
The closer the KVF value is to 1, the more
complete the forward compensation.
The following error becomes very small.
However, a KVF value that is set too high
also causes vibration.
6-22
6.3.7 Resonance suppression unit
When resonance occurs, it is probably because the stiffness of the control system is too high or
the response bandwidth is too great. Eliminating these two factors can improve the situation.
In addition, use the low-pass filter (P2.025) and Notch filter (P2.023, P2.024, P2.043 - P2.046,
and P2.095 - P2.103) to suppress the resonance if you want the control parameters to remain
unchanged.
6
Parameter Function
P2.095 Notch filter bandwidth (1)
P2.025 Resonance suppression low-pass filter
Speed control unit

Speed feed
Differentiator forward gain Current
P2.007 sensor
Low-pass filter
P2.025 Current
controller
PI controller
P2.004, P2.006
PWM
Motor
Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2 Notch filter 3 Notch filter 4 Notch filter 5
P2.023, P2.024 P2.043, P2.044 P2.045, P2.046 P2.098, P2.099 P2.101, P2.102 Encoder
Auto resonance suppression switch and detection level setting

P2.047, P2.048
Speed estimator
6-23
The ASDA-B3 provides two types of resonance suppression: one is the Notch filter and the
other is the low-pass filter. See the following diagrams for the results of using these filters.
System open-loop gain with resonance:
6  Notch filter
(1) Resonance point; (2) Notch filter; (3) Resonance point suppressed by the Notch filter
 Low-pass filter
(1) Resonance point; (2) Attenuation rate (-3 dB); (3) Low-pass filter (Cutoff frequency of low-pass filter =
1000 / P2.025 Hz); (4) Resonance point suppressed by the low-pass filter
To conclude from these two examples, if you increase the value of P2.025 from 0, the bandwidth
(BW) becomes smaller. Although it solves the problem of resonance, it also reduces the response
bandwidth and phase margin, and thus the system becomes unstable.
If you know the resonance frequency, you can suppress the resonance by using the Notch filter,
which is better than using the low-pass filter in this condition. If the resonance frequency drifts
significantly with time or due to other causes, using the Notch filter is not suggested.
6-24
System open-loop gain with resonance:
6
When the value of P2.025 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller, as shown in the following
figure. Although it solves the problem of the resonance frequency, the response bandwidth and
phase margin are reduced.
If you know the resonance frequency, you can suppress the resonance by using the Notch filter.
The frequency range of the Notch filter is 50 - 5000 Hz and the suppression strength is 0 - 40 dB.
If the frequency does not meet the Notch filter conditions, then using the low-pass filter to reduce
the resonance is suggested.
6-25
6.4 Torque mode

The Torque control mode (T or Tz) is suitable for torque control applications, such as printing
machines and winding machines. There are two kinds of command sources: analog input and
6 internal register (parameters). The analog command input uses scaled external voltage to
control the torque of the motor while the register uses the internal parameters (P1.012 - P1.014)
for the Torque command.
6.4.1 Selecting the Torque command source
External analog voltage and internal parameters are the two Torque command sources.
You select the command source with DI signals of CN1. See the following table for more details.
Torque CN1 DI signal
number TCM1 TCM0
Voltage difference
External analog
T between T_REF and -10V to +10V
T1 0 0 Mode signal
GND
Tz N/A Torque command is 0 0
T2 0 1 P1.012 -500% to 500%
T3 1 0 Register parameter P1.013 -500% to 500%
T4 1 1 P1.014 -500% to 500%
 Status of TCM0 and TCM1: 0 means that DI is off (the circuit is open); 1 means that DI is
on (the circuit is closed).
 When both TCM0 and TCM1 are 0, if it is in Tz mode, then the command is 0. If there is no
need to use the analog voltage for the Torque command, then Tz mode is applicable and
can avoid the problem of zero voltage drift. If it is in T mode, then the command is the
voltage difference between T_REF and GND. Its input voltage range is -10V to +10V,
which means you can adjust the corresponding torque (P1.041).
 When either one of TCM0 or TCM1 is not 0, the internal parameters become the source
for the Torque command. The command is executed after TCM0 and TCM1 are switched.
There is no need to use DI.CTRG for triggering.
You can use the Torque command in Torque mode (T or Tz) and Speed mode (S or Sz). When it
is in Speed mode, you can think of it as the command input for the torque limit.
6-26
6.4.2 Control structure of Torque mode
The following diagram shows the basic control structure of Torque mode.
Output torque
6
Torque +
Torque command Resonance Current control
processing Motor
command suppression unit unit
unit
-
Current sensor
The Torque command processing unit selects the command source (see Section 6.4.1),
including the scaling parameter (P1.041) for rotation speed and S-curve parameter for
smoothing the torque. The current control unit manages the gain parameters for the servo drive
and calculates the current for servo motor in real-time; you can only set this by commands.
The structure of torque command processing unit is as follows.
TCM0 and TCM1 signals of CN1
Register
P1.012 - P1.014
Command
Low-pass filter
selection
P1.007
P1.001
Scaling
A/D
P1.041
Analog signal
The upper path is the command from the register and the lower one is the command from the
external analog voltage that you can select with the status of TCM0 and TCM1, and P1.001
(T or Tz). Adjust the torque with the analog voltage scaling (P1.041) and smooth the response
with the low-pass filter (P1.007).
6-27
6.4.3 Smooth Torque command
Parameter Function
6 P1.007 Torque command smoothing constant (low-pass filter)
Target
torque
P1.007
6.4.4 Scaling of the analog command
The Torque command is controlled by the analog voltage difference between T_REF and GND.
Adjust the torque slope and its range with P1.041.
For example:
1. If you set P1.041 to 100 and the external input voltage is 10V, the Torque command is 100%
of the rated torque.
2. If you set P1.041 to 300 and the external input voltage is 10V, the Torque command is 300%
of the rated torque.
Torque command
300%
100% The slope is set by P1.041.
-10 -5
Analog voltage
5 10 input (V)
-100%
-300%
Parameter Function
P1.041 Maximum output for analog Torque command
6-28
6.4.5 Timing diagram of Torque mode
T4
6
Internal
register T3
T2
External
analog T1
voltage
or 0
off on off on
TCM0
External TCM1 off on
I/O
SON on
Note:
1. “off” means that DI is off (the circuit is open); “on” means that DI is on (the circuit is closed).
2. When in Tz mode, the Torque command T1 = 0; when in T mode, the Torque command T1 is the
external analog voltage input.
3. In Servo On state, the command is selected according to the status of TCM0 and TCM1.
6-29
6.5 Dual mode

Apart from the single mode for position, speed, and torque, there are also eight dual / multiple
modes available for operation (see Section 6.1).
6 Mode Short name

PT-S
PT-T
PR-S
Code
06
07
08
Description
PT and S can be switched with DI signal, S_P.
PT and T can be switched with DI signal, T_P.
PR and S can be switched with DI signal, S_P.
Dual mode
PR-T 09 PR and T can be switched with DI signal, T_P.
S-T 0A S and T can be switched with DI signal, S_T.
PT-PR 0D PT and PR can be switched with DI signal, PT_PR.
PT-PR-S 0E PT, PR, and S can be switched with DI signals, S_P and PT_PR.
Multi-mode
PT-PR-T 0F PT, PR, and T can be switched with DI signals, T_P and PT_PR.
The dual mode for Sz and Tz is not supported. To avoid occupying too many digital inputs in the
dual mode, Speed and Torque modes can use the external analog voltage as the command
source to reduce the use of DI points (SPD0, SPD1 or TCM0, TCM1). In addition, Position
mode can use the PT mode pulse input to reduce the use of DI points (POS0 - POS6). Refer to
Section 3.3.2 for the table of DI/O default value in each mode.
6-30
6.5.1 Speed / Position dual mode
Speed / Position dual mode includes PT-S and PR-S. The command source for PT-S comes
from the external pulse while the source for PR-S comes from the internal parameters (P6.000 -
P7.027). You can control the Speed command with the external analog voltage or the internal
parameters (P1.009 - P1.011). The switch between Speed and Position modes is controlled by
the DI.S-P (0x18) signal. The switch for PT and PR for Position mode is controlled by DI.PT-PR
6
(0x2B). Thus, you select both Position and Speed commands in PR-S mode with the DI signal.
The timing diagram is shown as follows.
CTRG
S-P ON OFF ON
POS0 - 6 invalid POS0 - 6 valid POS0 - 6 invalid
SPD0 - 1 valid SPD0 - 1 invalid SPD0 - 1 valid

Speed mode Position mode Speed mode
In Speed mode (DI.S-P is on), you select the Speed command with DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1.
DI.CTRG is not applicable. When switching to Position mode (DI.S-P is off), since the Position
command has not been issued (it waits for the rising edge of DI.CTRG), the motor stops (indicated
by △ in the figure above). When the Position command is controlled by DI.POS0 - DI.POS6 and
triggered by the rising edge of DI.CTRG, the motor operates to the specified position. When
DI.S-P is on, it returns to the Speed mode. Refer to the introduction of single mode for the DI
signal and the selected commands for each mode.
6-31
6.5.2 Speed / Torque dual mode
Speed / Torque dual mode includes only S-T. You control the Speed command with the external
analog voltage and the internal parameters (P1.009 - P1.011), which you select with DI.SPD0
6 and DI.SPD1. Similarly, the source of the Torque command can be the external analog voltage
or the internal parameters (P1.012 - P1.014), and is selected by DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
The switch between Speed and Torque modes is controlled by the DI.S-T (0x19) signal.
The timing diagram is shown as follows.
S-T ON OFF ON
SPD0 - 1 invalid SPD0 - 1 valid SPD0 - 1 invalid
TCM0 - 1 valid TCM0 - 1 invalid TCM0 - 1 valid
Torque mode Speed mode Torque mode
In Torque mode (DI.S-T is on), you select the Torque command with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
When switching to Speed mode (DI.S-T is off), you select the Speed command with DI.SPD0
and DI.SPD1. The motor operates according to the Speed command. When DI.S-T is on,
it returns to the Torque mode. Refer to the introduction of single mode for the DI signal and the
selected commands for each mode.
6-32
6.5.3 Torque / Position dual mode
Torque / Position dual mode includes PT-T and PR-T. The command source for PT-T comes
from the external pulse while the source for PR-T comes from internal parameters (P6.000 -
P7.027). You control the Torque command with the external analog voltage or the internal
parameters (P1.012 - P1.014). The switch between Torque and Position modes is controlled by
the DI.T-P (0x20) signal. The switch for PT and PR for Position mode is controlled by the
6
DI.PT-PR (0x2B) signal. Thus, you select both Position and Torque commands in PR-T mode
with the DI signal. The timing diagram is shown as follows.
CTRG
S-P ON OFF ON
POS0 - 6 invalid POS0 - 6 valid POS0 - 6 invalid
TCM0 - 1 valid TCM0 - 1 invalid TCM0 - 1 valid

Torque mode Position mode Torque mode
In Torque mode (DI.T-P is on), you select the Torque command with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
DI.CTRG is not applicable. When switching to Position mode (DI.T-P is off), since the Position
command has not been issued (it waits for the rising edge of DI.CTRG), the motor stops
(indicated by △ in the figure above). When the Position command is controlled by DI.POS0 -
DI.POS6 and triggered by the rising edge of DI.CTRG, the motor operates to the specified
position. When DI.T-P is on, it returns to the Torque mode. Refer to the introduction of single
mode for the DI signal and the selected commands for each mode.
6-33
6.6 Others
6.6.1 Applying the speed limit
The maximum speed in each mode (Position, Speed, and Torque) is determined by the internal
6 parameter (P1.055). The methods for using the Speed limit command and Speed command are
the same. You can use either the external analog voltage or the internal parameters (P1.009 -
P1.011). Refer to Section 6.3.1 for descriptions.
The speed limit is applicable only in Torque mode (T) for controlling the motor’s maximum speed.
If you are using the external analog voltage in Torque mode, the DI signals are available and you
can set SPD0 - SPD1 for the motor speed limit value (internal parameters). If not, use the analog
voltage input for the Speed limit command. When you set P1.002 (disable / enable speed limit
function) to 1, the Speed limit function is enabled. The timing diagram is shown as follows.
Speed limit function disabled

Speed limit function enabled
(P1.002)
(P1.002)
SPD0 - 1 invalid SPD0 - 1 valid
Command source selection of speed limit
6.6.2 Applying the torque limit
The methods for using the Torque limit command and Torque command are the same. You can
use either the external analog voltage or the internal parameters (P1.012 - P1.014). Refer to
Section 6.4.1 for descriptions.
You can use the torque limit in Position mode (PT and PR) or Speed mode (S) to limit the motor
torque output. If you are using the external pulse in Position mode or using the external analog
voltage in Speed mode, the DI signals are available and you can set TCM0 and TCM1 for the
torque limit command (internal parameters). If not, use the analog voltage input for the Torque
limit command. When you set P1.002 (disable / enable torque limit function) to 1, the Torque
limit function is enabled. The timing diagram is shown as follows.
Torque limit function disabled Torque limit function enabled

(P1.002) (P1.002)
TCM0 - 1 invalid TCM0 - 1 valid
Command source selection of torque limit
6-34
6.6.3 Analog monitoring
You can find the required voltage signal with analog monitoring. The servo drive provides two
analog channels. Refer to Chapter 3 for more information about wiring.
Parameter
P0.003
Function
Analog output monitoring
6
P1.003 Encoder pulse output polarity
P1.004 MON1 analog monitor output proportion
P1.005 MON2 analog monitor output proportion
P4.020 Offset adjustment for analog monitor output (Ch1)
Example:
Specify a motor speed of 1,000 rpm, which corresponds to analog voltage output of 8V with the
maximum speed of 5,000 rpm. The setting is as follows:
Required speed 1000 rpm

P1.004 = x 100% = ×100% = 20%
Max. speed 5000 rpm
You can calculate the corresponding voltage output for the current motor speed with the
following formula.
Motor speed MON1 analog monitor output

Current speed 300 rpm
300 rpm MON1 = 8V × P1.004 ×100% = 8V × 20 ×100% = 2.4V
Max. speed × 5000 rpm ×
100 100

900 rpm MON1 = 8V × P1.004 ×100% = 8V × 20 ×100% = 7.2V
Max. speed × 5000 rpm ×
100 100
6-35
Voltage drift
When voltage drift occurs, the voltage level defined as zero voltage is different from the set zero
point. To fix this problem, use DOF1 (P4.020) and DOF2 (P4.021) to calibrate the offset voltage
6
output. The voltage level for analog monitoring output is ±8V. If the output voltage exceeds the
range, it is limited within ±8V. The resolution is approximately 10 bits, which is equivalent to
13 mV/LSB.
8V
DOF
-8V
6-36
Motion Control
This chapter introduces internal motion commands in the ASDA-B3 in PR mode. In this
7
mode, commands are generated based on the internal command of the servo drive.
Various motion commands are available, including Homing, Speed, Position, Write,
Jump, and high-speed position capture (Capture). This chapter contains detailed
description of each command type.
7.1 PR mode description ···········································································7-2

7.1.1 Shared PR parameters ··································································7-4
7.1.2 Monitoring variables of PR mode ······················································7-6
7.1.3 Motion Control commands ······························································7-9
7.1.3.1 Homing methods ····································································7-9
7.1.3.2 Speed command ·································································· 7-22
7.1.3.3 Position command ································································ 7-24
7.1.3.4 Jump command ··································································· 7-28
7.1.3.5 Write command ··································································· 7-30
7.1.3.6 Index Position command························································ 7-32
7.1.4 Overview of the PR procedure ······················································· 7-36
7.1.5 Trigger methods for the PR command ············································· 7-42
7.1.6 PR procedure execution flow ························································· 7-46
7.2 Application of motion control ······························································· 7-58
7.2.1 Data array ················································································· 7-58
7.2.2 High-speed position capture function (Capture) ································· 7-62
7-1
Motion Control ASDA-B3
7.1 PR mode description

In PR mode, the servo drive automatically generates the motion commands and saves all
parameter settings in the servo drive parameter file. Thus changing parameter values
7
simultaneously changes the PR commands. The ASDA-B3 provides 100 path setting sets,
which include the homing method, Position command, Speed command, Jump command, Write
command, and Index Position command.
The property and corresponding data for each PR path are set by parameters. You can find
information of all PR parameters in the descriptions of parameter groups 6 and 7 in Chapter 8.
For example, PR#1 path is defined by two parameters, P6.002 and P6.003. P6.002 is for
specifying the property of PR#1, such as the PR command type, whether to interrupt, and
whether to auto-execute the next PR. P6.003 is subject to change based on the property set in
P6.002. If P6.002 is set to a Speed command, then P6.003 specifies the target speed. When
P6.002 is set to a Jump command, then P6.003 specifies the target PR. The parameters for the
PR#2 path are P6.004 and P6.005, and they work same way as P6.002 and P6.003. The same
is true for the rest of PR paths. See Figure 7.1.1.
Setting
PR path Path property Path data
paramters
PR#0 P6.000 P6.001
PR#1 P6.002 P6.003
PR#2 P6.004 P6.005
PR#50 P7.000 P7.001
PR#99 P7.098 P7.099
Figure 7.1.1 Setting parameters for each PR path
7-2
ASDA-B3 Motion Control
In the ASDA-Soft software, when you select the PR to be edited in PR mode, the corresponding
parameters appear at the top of the window. See Figure 7.1.2. If you select PR#1, P6.002 and
P6.003 appear at the top in the editing section. See P6.002 and P6.003 in Table 7.1.1 for
example. The PR property and its data content differ in accordance with the motion command
7
type. For more information about Motion Control mode, refer to Section 7.1.3.
Figure 7.1.2 PR Mode interface in ASDA-Soft
Table 7.1.1 Example of PR#1 property and data content
BIT
31 - 28 27 - 24 23 - 20 19 - 16 15 - 12 11 - 8 7-4 3-0
PR#1
P6.002 - AUTO DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT TYPE
P6.003 Data content (32-bit)
Note: TYPE: Control command mode
TYPE No. Command mode

1 SPEED: speed control
2 SINGLE: positioning control; stop once positioning is complete.
3 AUTO: positioning control; execute the next PR path once positioning is complete.
7 JUMP: jump to the specified path.
8 WRITE: write parameters to the specified path.
0xA INDEX: index positioning control
7-3
ASDA-Soft version V6 provides an editing interface for PR diagrams. (see Figure 7.1.3).
It is easier to set PR paths in ASDA-Soft, where you can set the options of command triggering,
command types, and other properties.
Figure 7.1.3 PR Diagram display in ASDA-Soft
7.1.1 Shared PR parameters
ASDA-B3 provides 16 acceleration and deceleration time settings (P5.020 - P5.035), 16 delay
time settings (P5.040 - P5.055), and 16 target speed settings (P5.060 - P5.075) for you to set
the PR paths (as shown in Figure 7.1.1.1). If you change a parameter that is used by multiple
PR paths, then all PR paths using this parameter are changed as well. For example, if multiple
PR commands use the target speed setting from P5.060, when you change the value of P5.060,
those PR commands’ target speed are also changed. Please be aware of this when setting PR
paths so as to avoid any danger or damage to the machine.
7-4
ASDA-Soft also provides a user-friendly interface for this shared PR parameter function
(see Figure 7.1.1.2). In these data, the acceleration or deceleration time is set based on the
length of time for motor to accelerate from 0 to 3000 rpm or to decelerate from 3000 rpm to 0.
For instance, if the acceleration time is set to 50 ms, when the target speed for the motion
7
command is 3000 rpm, then the required duration is 50 ms. If the target speed for the motion
command is 1500 rpm, then the acceleration time is 25 ms. The acceleration or deceleration
time is a fixed slope, so the slope does not change when you change parameter values.
PR path setting ACC:1 DEC:4 DLY:2 SPD:5
Acceleration / deceleration time

Delay time (DLY) Target speed (SPD)
(ACC / DEC)
0 P5.020 200 0 P5.040 0 0 P5.060 20.0
1 P5.021 300 1 P5.041 100 1 P5.061 50.0
2 P5.022 500 2 P5.042 200 2 P5.062 100.0
3 P5.023 600 3 P5.043 400 3 P5.063 200.0
4 P5.024 800 4 P5.044 500 4 P5.064 300.0
5 P5.025 900 5 P5.045 800 5 P5.065 500.0
6 P5.026 1000 6 P5.046 1000 6 P5.066 600.0
... ... ... ... ... ...
14 P5.034 50 14 P5.054 5000 14 P5.074 2500.0
15 P5.035 30 15 P5.055 5500 15 P5.075 3000.0
Figure 7.1.1.1 Shared parameter data for PR paths
Figure 7.1.1.2 ASDA-Soft interface for shared PR parameter data
7-5
7.1.2 Monitoring variables of PR mode
The PR mode provides four monitoring variables for the servo commands and feedback status:
command position (PUU), PR command end register, feedback position (PUU), and position
7
error (PUU). These are described as follows:
1. Command position (PUU): monitoring variable code 001, simplified as Cmd_O (Command
Operation). The target position of the motion command generated per scan cycle during
servo operation (updated every 1 ms).
2. PR command end register: monitoring variable code 064, simplified as Cmd_E (Command
End). The target position of the PR command. When a command is triggered, the servo
drive calculates the target position and then updates to PR command end register.
3. Feedback position (PUU): monitoring variable code 000, simplified as Fb_PUU (Feedback
PUU). The feedback position (coordinates) for the motor.
4. Position error (PUU): monitoring variable code 002, simplified as Err_PUU (Error PUU).
The deviation between the command position (PUU) and the feedback position (PUU).
How these four monitoring variables work is shown in Figure 7.1.2.1. After the servo issues a
Position command, the servo sets the position of Cmd_E once the target position data is
acquired. The motor operates to the target position based on the PR path setting. Cmd_O
calculates the amount of command deviation in each fixed cycle and sends it to the servo drive,
where it is treated as a dynamic command. Fb_PUU is motor encoder feedback position and
Err_PUU is the deviation of Cmd_O minus Fb_PUU.
Err_PUU
Before Fb_PUU
command
Cmd_O
issued
Cmd_E
After Err_PUU
command Fb_PUU
issued Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Command in Fb_PUU
execution Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Command Fb_PUU
completed Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Motor Fb_PUU
positioned Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Figure 7.1.2.1 Timing diagram for PR mode monitoring variables
7-6
The detailed command behavior of each stage is illustrated in Figure 7.1.2.2. Cmd_E is the
endpoint specified by the command; it is set when the PR path is triggered. Fb_PUU is the
feedback position, which is motor’s actual position. Divide this motion command into slices and
take one of them as example. Cmd_O is the target of this cycle command and Err_PUU is the
7
deviation between the target position of the cycle command and the feedback position.
Position (PUU)
Cmd_E
Cmd_O Err_PUU
Comma nd
Fb_PUU
Time
Figure 7.1.2.2 Monitoring variables status when a command is executed in PR mode
You can use digital input (DI) to call PR paths and digital output (DO) to monitor PR paths (refer
to Table 8.1 and 8.2 for the DI/O function descriptions). When you trigger the motion command
with DI.CTRG [0x08], the servo drive operates based on the command from the internal
registers. Once the execution is complete, DO.Cmd_OK [0x15] is set to on.
When the motor reaches its target position, DO.TPOS [0x05] is set to on. Then, after the PR
Position command completes and motor reaches the target position, both DO signals are on
and the servo outputs the MC_OK [0x17] signal to signify that it has completed this PR path.
The operation is as shown in Figure 7.1.2.3. If you have set a delay time in this PR and the
motor reaches the target position, then DO.TPOS [0x05] is set to on.
When the delay time is over, DO.Cmd_OK [0x15] (PR position command complete) is set to on.
After both of the above mentioned DO signals are on, the servo outputs the MC_OK [0x17]
signal to signify that it has completed this PR path, as shown in Figure 7.1.2.4.
7-7
Before command Command in Execution Motor

issued execution completed positioned
Command trigger
DI: CTRG
7 Command
Cmd
PR position command
completed
DO: Cmd_OK
Motor reaches target

position Cmd_O(Pulse) – Fb_Pulse < P1.054
DO: TPOS
Servo procedure
completed
DO: MC_OK
Figure 7.1.2.3 Operation of DI/DO signals in PR mode
Before command Command in Command

issued execution completed
Motor in Motor
Command trigger operation positioned
DI: CTRG
Delay time
Command
Cmd
PR position command
completed
DO: Cmd_OK
Motor reaches
target position
Cmd_O(Pulse) –
DO: TPOS
Fb_Pulse < P1.054
Servo procedure
completed
DO: MC_OK
Figure 7.1.2.4 Operation of DI/DO signals in PR mode (including delay time)
7-8
7.1.3 Motion Control commands
The ASDA-B3 provides 100 path setting sets, which include the homing method, Speed
command, Position command, Jump command, Write command, and Index Position command.
The following sections detail each command type.
7.1.3.1 Homing methods 7

The ASDA-B3 provides 11 homing methods in the PR mode, including home sensor, limit, and
hard stop as the reference origin. They come with sub-selections such as whether to refer to the
Z pulse and the limit signal as the trigger, with more than 30 combinations available. The
homing method is specified by P5.004 and the homing definition is determined by P6.000.
The following lists the function of each bit.
Address: 0508H
P5.004 Homing methods
0509H
Default: 0x0000 Control mode: PR
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x012A
Format: HEX Data size: 16-bit
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Homing method Z Limit setting
Y Z pulse setting U Reserved
Definition of each setting value:
U Z Y X
Reserved Limit setting Z pulse setting Homing method
0-1 0-2 0-8
X = 0: homing in forward direction and define

the positive limit as the homing origin
-
X = 1: homing in reverse direction and define
Y = 0: return to Z pulse the negative limit as the homing origin
Y = 1: go forward to Z pulse
Y = 2: do not look for Z pulse X = 2: homing in forward direction, ORG:
OFFON as the homing origin
X = 3: homing in reverse direction, ORG:

- OFFON as the homing origin
When reaching the limit: X = 4: look for Z pulse in forward direction

Z = 0: show error and define it as the homing origin
Z = 1: reverse direction -
X = 5: look for Z pulse in reverse direction
and define it as the homing origin
X = 6: homing in forward direction, ORG:

Y = 0: return to Z pulse ONOFF as the homing origin
Y = 2: do not look for Z pulse X = 7: homing in reverse direction, ORG:
ONOFF as the homing origin
7-9
U Z Y X
- - X = 8: define current position as the origin
X = 9: torque homing in forward direction

When reaching the limit:
Y = 0: return to Z pulse
7
Z = 0: show error
Y = 2: do not look for Z pulse
Z = 1: reverse direction
X = A: torque homing in reverse direction
Address: 0600H
P6.000 Homing definition
0601H
Unit: - Setting range: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFF6F
Settings:
Homing definition:
High bit Low bit
D C B A U Z YX
DEC2: deceleration time selection for
A YX PATH: path type
second homing
B DLY: select 0 - F for delay time Z ACC: select 0 - F for acceleration time
C N/A U
first homing
D BOOT - -
 YX: PATH: Path type
0x00: Stop: homing complete and stop
0x01 - 0x63: Auto: homing complete and execute the specified path (Path#1 - Path#99)
 Z: ACC: select 0 - F for acceleration time
0 - F: correspond to P5.020 - P5.035
 U: DEC1: deceleration time selection for first homing
 A: DEC2: deceleration time selection for second homing
 B: DLY: select 0 - F for delay time
 D: BOOT: when the drive is powered on, whether to search for origin.
0: do not execute homing
1: execute homing automatically (servo switches to on for the first time after applying power)
7-10
The PR Homing mode includes the function for setting the origin offset. You can define any point
on the coordinate axis as the reference origin, which does not have to be 0. Once you define
the reference origin, the system can create the coordinate system for the motion axis. See
Figure 7.1.3.1.1. The coordinate for the reference origin is 2000 (P6.001 = 2000). The motor
7
passes by the reference origin and then stops at coordinate 1477. From the coordinate system
that it created, the system automatically calculates the position of 0 point. As soon as the PR
motion command is issued, the motor moves to the specified position.
P6.001: Origin definition
Origin 2000
Coordinates
(after homing) - 1000 0 1000 3000 4000 5000
Motor position
(after homing) 1477
H
Reverse to Z
S1 E L
Z pulse
Reference
origin
PL signal
Figure 7.1.3.1.1 Origin definition
Address: 0602H
P6.001 Origin definition
0603H
Default: 0 Control mode: PR
Unit: - Setting range: -2147483648 to +2147483647
Format: DEC Data size: 32-bit
Settings:
Origin definition.
The homing procedure goes through two stages: high speed and low speed. The servo starts
the homing procedure at high speed to seek the reference point (such as the limit switch and
ORG signal), which takes shorter time. Once the servo detects the reference point, the motor
runs at low speed to find the reference point accurately (such as the Z pulse). The speeds for
the two stages are defined by P5.005 and P5.006.
7-11
Address: 050AH
P5.005 High speed homing (first speed setting)
050BH
Operation
Panel / software Communication Control mode: PR (set with P5.004)
interface:
Default: 100.0 1000 Data size: 32-bit
7
Unit: 1 rpm 0.1 rpm - -
Setting range: 0.1 - 2000.0 1 - 20000 - -
Format: DEC DEC - -

Example: 1.5 = 1.5 rpm 15 = 1.5 rpm - -
Settings:
The first speed setting for high speed homing.
First high speed homing First high speed homing
Second low speed homing
ORG ORG

Z Pulse Z Pulse
Address: 050CH
P5.006 Low speed homing (second speed setting)
050DH
Operation
interface:
Setting range: 0.1 - 500.0 1 - 5000 - -
Format: DEC DEC - -

Example: 1.5 = 1.5 rpm 15 = 1.5 rpm - -
Settings:
The second speed setting for low speed homing.
You can set the homing parameters in the PR mode homing screen in ASDA-Soft, including the
Homing Mode, Homing Speed Setting, and Homing Definition (see Figure 7.1.3.1.2).
7-12
Figure 7.1.3.1.2 Homing screen in ASDA-Soft
The following describes the homing methods supported by the ASDA-B3. They can be
categorized into six types based on their reference points.
1. Referencing the limit.

This method uses the positive or negative limit as the reference point. When the limit is
detected, you can choose whether or not to look for the Z pulse and use it as the reference
origin. The searching result is the same regardless of where the start point is. The ASDA-B3
always looks for the set reference point to reset the coordinates.
Limit
Motor
(a) Reverse to Z End

Start point
(b) Go forward to Z Start point 2

Start point 1 End
(c) Do not look for Z End

Start point
Z pulse
Limit signal
7-13
(a) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction, the servo operates
at high speed (first speed setting) and then decelerates once it reaches the limit
(rising-edge triggered). Then the servo switches to low speed (second speed setting)
to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction. When the servo finds the Z pulse,
7
it decelerates to a stop, completing the homing procedure.
(b) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the forward direction and the limit signal
at the start position is un-triggered (low, Start point 1), the servo operates at high
speed (first speed setting) and then decelerates once it reaches the limit (rising-edge
triggered). Then the servo switches to low speed (second speed setting) to look for
the Z pulse in the forward direction. When the servo finds the Z pulse, it decelerates
to a stop, completing the homing procedure.
If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the forward direction and the limit signal
at the start position is triggered (high, Start point 2), the servo operates at low speed
(second speed setting) in the reverse direction to look for the rising-edge limit signal.
Then the servo starts to look for the Z pulse in the forward direction once it reaches
the limit (rising-edge triggered). When the servo finds the Z pulse, it decelerates to a
stop, completing the homing procedure.
From the examples, regardless of the start positions, the origin position after homing
is the same under the same setting condition.
(c) If you set the servo to not look for the Z pulse, it first operates at high speed (first speed
setting) and then decelerates once reaching the rising-edge limit signal. Then the servo
switches to low speed (second speed setting) and returns to look for the rising-edge
signal. Once the servo finds the rising-edge signal, it decelerates to a stop, completing
the homing procedure.
7-14
2. Referencing the rising edge of the ORG signal.

This method uses the rising edge of the home sensor signal as the reference origin.
You can choose whether or not to use the Z pulse as the reference origin after the ORG
signal is detected.
Motor
Limit
7
End Start point 3
(a) Reverse to Z
Start point 1 Start point 2
Start point 3
(b) Go forward to Z
Start point 1 End Start point 2
End Start point 3

(b) Do not look for Z
Start point 1 Start point 2
Z pulse
Limit signal
ORG signal
(a) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction, when the ORG signal at
the start point is un-triggered (low, Start point 1), the servo operates at high speed (first
speed setting) and then decelerates once it reaches the ORG signal (rising-edge triggered).
Then it switches to low speed (second speed setting) until the ORG signal switches to low.
Next, the servo starts to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction. When the servo finds
the Z pulse, it decelerates to a stop, completing the homing procedure.
If the ORG signal at the start point is un-triggered and the current position is relatively closer
to the limit switch (Start point 2), the servo operates at high speed (first speed setting) until
reaching the limit switch. You can set whether to show an error or reverse the operating
direction when it reaches the limit switch. If you set the servo to reverse direction, it operates
in the reverse direction to reach the home sensor (ORG). Once reaching the home sensor
(ORG), the servo decelerates and operates at low speed (second speed setting) until the
ORG signal switches to low. Next, the servo starts to look for the Z pulse. When the servo
finds the Z pulse, it decelerates to a stop, completing the homing procedure.
7-15
If the ORG signal at the start point is triggered (high, Start point 3), the servo reverses with
low speed (second speed setting) and after the ORG signal switches to low, it continues to
look for the Z pulse. Once the servo finds the Z pulse, it decelerates to a stop, completing
the homing procedure.
7 (b) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the forward direction or not to look for the
Z pulse (this is similar to method (a) mentioned above), refer to the timing diagram above.
3. Referencing the Z pulse.

This method uses the Z pulse as the reference origin. One Z pulse is generated per
rotation of the motor. This method is only suitable when the operation is kept within one
motor rotation.
Limit
Motor
End
Start point 1 End Start point 2
Z pulse
Limit signal
7-16
4. Referencing the falling edge of the ORG signal.

This method uses the falling-edge signal of the home sensor as the reference origin.
You can choose whether or not to use the Z pulse as the reference origin after the ORG
signal is detected.
Motor
Limit
7
Start point 1 Start Start
point 3 point 2
(b) Go forward to Z
Start point 1 Start Start End
point 3 point 2

Start point 1 Start Start
End
point 3 point 2
Z pulse
Limit signal
ORG signal
(a) If you set the servo to to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction, when the ORG
signal at the start point is un-triggered (low, Start point 1), the servo operates at high
speed (first speed setting) until reaching the rising edge of the ORG signal. Then it
decelerates and switches to low speed (second speed setting) until the ORG signal
switches to low. Next, the servo reverses to look for the Z pulse. When the servo finds
If the ORG signal at the start point is un-triggered and the current position is relatively
closer to the limit switch (Start point 2), the servo operates at high speed (first speed
setting) until reaching the limit switch. You can set whether to show an error or reverse
the operating direction when it reaches the limit switch. If you set the servo to reverse
direction, it operates in reverse direction to reach the home sensor (ORG). Once
reaching the home sensor (ORG), the servo decelerates and operates at low speed
(second speed setting) in the forward direction to reach the falling edge of the ORG
signal. Next, the servo reverses to look for the Z pulse. When the servo finds the
Z pulse, it decelerates to a stop, completing the homing procedure.
7-17
If the ORG signal at the start point is triggered (high, Start point 3), the servo operates
at low speed (second speed setting) in the forward direction until the ORG signal
switches to low. Next, the servo reverses to look for the Z pulse. When the servo finds
7 (b) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the forward direction or not to look for the
Z pulse (this is similar to method (a) mentioned above), refer to the timing diagram
above.
5. Referencing the current position as the origin.

This method uses the motor’s current position as the reference origin. As long as the
homing procedure is triggered and the motor remains still, then coordinate positioning is
complete.
Motor
End
DI:0x27 SHOM
7-18
6. Referencing the torque limit.

This method uses the motor’s stop position as the origin by referring to: the limit on the
mechanism, the torque level setting (P1.087), and the retaining time (P1.088). You can
also choose whether to use the Z pulse as the reference origin.
Motor Protector
7
Start point
Z Pulse
Torque curve P1.088

P1.087
(Look for hard stop)
Time
Torque curve
(Look for Z pulse) Time

Start point End
Torque curve P1.088

P1.087
Time
(a) If you set the servo to look for the Z pulse in the reverse direction, the servo operates at
high speed (first speed setting) and outputs a greater current to counter the external force
once it touches the protector. When the motor torque reaches the torque detection level
(P1.087) and the output duration is longer than the level reached timer setting (P1.088),
the servo operates in the reverse direction to look for the Z pulse at low speed (second
speed setting). Once the servo finds the Z pulse, it decelerates to a stop, completing the
homing procedure.
(b) If you set the servo not to look for the Z pulse, it operates at high speed (first speed
setting) until touching the protector. Then the servo outputs a greater current to counter the
external force. When the motor torque reaches the torque detection level (P1.087) and the
output duration is longer than the level reached timer setting (P1.088), the servo stops,
completing the homing procedure.
Pay special attention when executing the Torque homing procedure. The motor’s actual
maximum torque output is 10% greater than the maximum torque limit setting (P1.087),
the great impact may cause damage to the machine.
7-19
The following tables list the parameters for the torque limit (P1.087) and the torque limit time
(P1.088).
Address: 01AEH
P1.087 Torque homing - torque level detection 01AFH
7
Unit: % Setting range: 1 - 300
Settings:
This setting is only for the torque homing mode. As shown in the following figure, after homing is
triggered, the motor runs in one direction and reaches the protector. The servo drive then outputs a
larger motor current in order to counter the external force. The servo drive uses P1.087 and P1.088 as
the conditions for homing. Since the hard stops are not always the same, it is recommended to return to
find the Z pulse as the origin.
Protector
Level reached timer P1.088
Maximum torque output

Torque level 10%
detection P1.087
Torque curve when
the servo searches
for the hard stop Start point
Torque curve the

servo searches for
Z pulse
Z pulse
Note: the actual maximum torque output of the motor is 10% greater than the detected torque level (P1.087).
For example: set P1.087 to 50%, then the maximum torque output of the motor is 60%.
Address: 01B0H
P1.088 Torque homing - level reached timer 01B1H
Unit: ms Setting range: 2 - 2000
Settings:
The setting of the level reached timer for the torque homing mode. Refer to P1.087 for the timing
diagram of torque homing mode.
7-20
As mentioned in Section 7.1.2, the PR mode provides four monitoring variables for you to
monitor the servo commands and feedback status. These are Command position PUU
(Cmd_O), PR command end register (Cmd_E), Feedback position PUU (Fb_PUU), and Position
error PUU (Err_PUU). Before homing completes, the command end register (Cmd_E) cannot be
7
calculated because the coordinate system can only be created after homing is complete, and
the target position remains unknown after the Homing command is issued. This is why the
status of each monitoring variables is different during homing. In Homing command’s default
setting, the contents of Cmd_E and Cmd_O are identical. After the servo finds the reference
origin and creates the coordinate system, it sets the content of Cmd_E to the coordinate of the
reference origin. However, once the servo finds the reference origin, it still requires some
distance for motor to decelerate to a stop. Meanwhile, Cmd_O continues to issue commands.
If no other PR commands are issued after homing (other than the Position command), the
contents of the final command position (Cmd_O) and command end position (Cmd_E) will be
different. See Figure 7.1.3.1.3.
Err_PUU
Before Fb_PUU
command
Cmd_O
issued
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
After Fb_PUU
command
Cmd_O
issued
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Command in Fb_PUU
execution Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Command Fb_PUU
completed Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Err_PUU
Motor Fb_PUU
positioned Cmd_O
Cmd_E
Figure 7.1.3.1.3 Homing mode and monitoring variables
7-21
7.1.3.2 Speed command
The PR mode includes a speed control function. The following parameters are available for PR
speed setting: acceleration / deceleration time, delay time, and target speed. You can easily set
7
the Speed command in the PR mode screen in ASDA-Soft. See Figure 7.1.3.2.1.
 INS is an interrupt command that interrupts the previous motion command. Refer to
Section 7.1.6 for more details.
 AUTO is a command that automatically loads and executes the next PR path when the
current PR path completes. You can set the target speed with two unit options, 0.1 rpm
and 1 PPS, and the setting range is -6000 rpm to 6000 rpm.
 ACC / DEC is the acceleration / deceleration time determined by the shared PR

parameters. The software calculates and displays the required duration for accelerating
from 0 to the target speed.
 DLY is the delay time that is determined by the shared PR parameters. It delays the
command; in other words, the delay time is the time to wait after the target speed
command completes.
See Figure 7.1.3.2.2 for the effects of the parameters for the PR mode speed control.
Table 7.1.3.2.1 shows the bit functions when speed control is in operation.
Figure 7.1.3.2.1 PR mode Speed control screen in ASDA-Soft
7-22
Speed
Delay time
Target speed
Acceleration time
Command
Feedback speed
Time 7
Speed
Feedback speed
Command
Delay time
Target speed Time
Deceleration time
Figure 7.1.3.2.2 Parameters for PR mode speed control
Table 7.1.3.2.1 Bit functions of PR speed control
D C B A U Z Y X
PR parameters
Command type - - DLY - DEC ACC OPT 1
Data content Target speed [0.1 rpm / PPS]
Note:
1. Y: OPT: option
BIT
3 2 1 0
Command type - UNIT AUTO INS
INS: Interrupt command that interrupts the previous motion command.
AUTO: automatically load the next PR command when the current one is complete.
UNIT: speed unit selection; 0 signifies 0.1 rpm and 1 signifies PPS.
2. Z, U: ACC / DEC: acceleration / deceleration time, set by P5.020 - P5.035.
3. B: DLY: delay time, set by P5.040 - P5.055.
7-23
7.1.3.3 Position command
The PR mode includes a position control function. There are two command types: Type 2 and
Type 3. If you choose the Type 2 command, the execution stops once the command is
7
complete. If you choose the Type 3 command, the next PR path is automatically executed.
Use the same method to set the value for these types of commands in ASDA-Soft. See Figure
7.1.3.3.1.
Section 7.1.6.
 OVLP is an overlap command that allows the next PR command to overlap the command
currently being executed when decelerating. If you use this function, setting the delay time
to 0 is suggested. Refer to Section 7.1.6.
 ACC / DEC is the acceleration / deceleration time determined by the shared PR

parameters. The software calculates and displays the required duration for accelerating
from 0 to the target speed.
 SPD is the target speed determinedby the shared PR parameters. You can choose
whether it is multiplied by 0.1.
 DLY is the delay time determinedby the shared PR parameters and it is defined by the
command from the controller; in other words, once the target position is reached, the servo
drive starts counting the delay time.
 The Position command is user-defined and its unit is PUU.
See Figure 7.1.3.3.2 for the effects of the parameters for the PR mode position control.
Table 7.1.3.3.1 shows the bit functions when position control is in operation.
7-24
Figure 7.1.3.3.1 PR mode Position control screen in ASDA-Soft
Speed
Target speed
Position
command
Delay time
Time
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Figure 7.1.3.3.2 Parameters for PR mode position control
7-25
There are four types of position commands for the PR mode. You can choose the position
command according to the application requirements. The functions of each type are described
in the following examples. Note that the condition in these examples is that a position command
is still being executed and another type of command is inserted. To see the definition of each
7
command and how the position commands are combined, please refer to Figure 7.1.3.3.3.
1. Absolute position command (ABS): when executed, the target position value equals the
absolute command value. In the following example, an ABS command with the value of
60000 PUU is inserted in the previous PR path, so the target position is 60000 PUU on the
coordinate axis.
2. Relative position command (REL): when executed, the target position value is the motor’s
current position value plus the position command value. In the following example, a REL
command with the value of 60000 PUU is inserted in the previous PR path. The target
position is the motor’s current position (20000 PUU) plus the relative position command
(60000 PUU), which equals 80000 PUU on the coordinate axis. The target position
specified by the original command is omitted.
3. Incremental command (INC): when executed, the target position is the previous target
position value plus the current position command value. In the following example, an INC
command with the value of 60000 PUU is inserted in the previous PR path. The target
position is the previous target position value (30000 PUU) plus the relative position
command (60000 PUU), which equals 90000 PUU on the coordinate axis. The target
position specified by the previous command is combined to define the new one.
4. High-speed position capturing command (CAP): when executed, the target position is the
last position acquired by the Capture function plus the position command value. Refer to
Section 7.2.2 for more on the high-speed position capturing function. In the following
example, a high-speed capturing command with the value of 60000 PUU is inserted in the
previous PR path. The target position is the captured position value (10000 PUU) plus the
relative position command (60000 PUU), which equals 70000 PUU on the coordinate axis.
The target position specified by the original command is omitted.
7-26
Motor’s current position Target

(Fb_PUU) position
Absolute command
(ABS)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Motor’s current
7
Target
position
(Fb_PUU) 60000 position
Relative command
(REL)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Motor’s current Endpoint of
Target
previous command
position
(Cmd_E)
60000 position
Incremental (Fb_PUU)
command (INC)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Motor’s current
Capturing Target
position
60000 position
position
High-speed position (Fb_PUU)
capturing (CAP)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Figure 7.1.3.3.3 Four types of Position command
Table 7.1.3.3.1 Bit functions of PR position control
D C B A U Z Y X
PR parameters
Command type - - DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 2 or 3
Data content Target position [PUU]
Note:
1. Y: OPT: option
BIT Description
3 2 1 0
Command type CMD OVLP INS -
0 0 ABS (absolute positioning)
0 1 REL (relative positioning)

Data content - -
1 0 INC (incremental positioning)
CAP
1 1
(high-speed position capturing)
OVLP: allow overlapping of the next command.
CMD: Position command selection.
3. A: SPD: target speed, set by P5.060 - P5.075.
7-27
7.1.3.4 Jump command
The PR mode includes a Jump command. It can call any PR paths or form PR paths into a loop,
as shown in Figure 7.1.3.4.1. You can specify the PR path number to jump to in the PR mode
7
screen in ASDA-Soft (see Figure 7.1.3.4.2).
 DLY is the delay time that is determined by the shared PR parameters. Once a Jump
command is issued, the servo drive starts counting the delay time.
 Available target PR numbers are PR#00 - PR#99.
Table 7.1.3.4.1 shows the bit functions when a Jump command is in operation.
PR #01 Jump
Jump
PR #07 PR #08 PR #09 PR #10
Figure 7.1.3.4.1 Jump command in PR mode
Figure 7.1.3.4.2 PR Mode Jump command screen in ASDA-Soft
7-28
Table 7.1.3.4.1 Bit functions of PR Jump command
D C B A U Z Y X
PR parameters
Command type - - DLY - - - OPT 7
Data content Jump to target PR path (0 - 99)
Note:
1. Y: OPT: option
BIT
3 2 1 0
7
Command type - - - INS
7-29
7.1.3.5 Write command
The PR mode includes a Write command. It can write constants, parameters, data arrays, and
monitoring variables to the specified parameters or data arrays. You can write a parameter to a
7
specified path in the PR mode screen in ASDA-Soft (see Figure 7.1.3.5.1).
 AUTO command automatically loads and executes the next PR once the current PR
completes.
 ROM command writes parameters to both RAM and EEPROM at the same time. Writing to
non-volatile memory function is also available; however, frequent usage shortens the life of
the EEPROM.
 DLY is the delay time that is determined by the shared PR parameters. Once a Jump
command is issued, the servo drive starts counting the delay time.
Table 7.1.3.5.1 shows the bit functions when a Write command is in operation.
Writing Target Data source

Parameter Constant
Data array Parameter
- Data array
- Monitoring variables
Figure 7.1.3.5.1 PR mode Write command screen in ASDA-Soft
7-30
Table 7.1.3.5.1 Bit functions of PR Write command
D C B A U Z Y X
PR parameters
Command type 0 SOUR_DEST DLY DESTINATION OPT 8
Data content SOURCE
Note:
1. Y: OPT: option
BIT
3 2 1 0
7
Command type - ROM AUTO INS
ROM: write data to RAM and EEPROM at the same time. This function can only write parameters.
3. C: SOUR_DEST: data source and data format to be written.

BIT
3 2 1 0 Description
Command
SOUR - DEST Data source Writing target
type
0 0 0 Constant Parameter
0 1 0 Parameter Parameter
1 0 0 Data array Parameter
Monitoring
1 1 0 Parameter
Data variable
0
content 0 0 1 Constant Data array
0 1 1 Parameter Data array
1 0 1 Data array Data array
Monitoring
1 1 1 Data array
variable
4. Z, U, A: DESTINATION: destination
A U Z
Target: Parameter Parameter group Parameter number
Target: Data array Data array number
5. SOURCE: Data source setting

D C B A U Z Y X
Data source: constant Constant data
Data source: Parameter
- Parameter number
parameter group
Data source:
- Data array number
data array
Data source: Monitoring variable
-
monitoring variable number
7-31
7.1.3.6 Index Position command
The PR mode includes an Index Position command, which creates an indexing coordinate
system. This command positions the motor within the indexing coordinates. Unlike other
7
feedback positions in global coordinate system, the Index Position command is able to divide
the total moving distance of one index into the number of paths required by the application
(see Figure 7.1.3.6.1). When using the Index Position command for motor operation in single
direction (or mostly in the same direction), if the motor position exceeds the range, absolute
position or position counter overflow occurs. Refer to the setting in Chapter 10. You can start the
index positioning in the Index Coordinates Setting Wizard in the PR mode screen in ASDA-Soft
(see Figure 7.1.3.6.2). As shown in the example, the start PR path is set to 1, the path number
is set to 10, and the total moving distance is 100000 PUU. When you click OK, the software
automatically writes position command 0 PUU to PR#01, 10000 PUU to PR#02, 20000 PUU to
PR#03, and so on up to PR#08. When the index position reaches 80000 PUU, it automatically
returns to 0 PUU. In addition, you can modify the index position in each PR path as needed,
as shown in Figure 7.1.3.6.3.
Section 7.1.6.
 OVLP is an overlap command that allows the next PR command to overlap the command
currently being executed when decelerating. If you use this function, setting the delay time
to 0 is suggested. Refer to Section 7.1.6.
 DIR sets the rotation direction with options of forward rotation (always runs forward),
reverse rotation (always runs backward), and the shortest distance. The movement is
illustrated in Figure 7.1.3.6.4.
 S_LOW is the speed unit with options of 0.1 r/min or 0.01 r/min.
 AUTO is a command that automatically loads and executes the next PR path when the
current PR completes.
 ACC / DEC is the acceleration / deceleration time determined by the shared PR parameters.
 SPD is the target speed determined by the shared PR parameters.
 DLY is the delay time determined by the shared PR parameters. It is defined by a

command from the controller. The servo starts counting the delay time once reaching the
target position.
 Position command is the target position of each index segment. Note that the setting
range must be smaller than the total index moving distance (P2.052).
Table 7.1.3.6.1 shows the bit functions when an Index Position command is in operation. If you
use the index function, execute homing first in order to create the coordinate system so that the
origin of the motor’s feedback position and that of the motor’s index position can be identical.
If you do not execute homing, AL237 occurs.
7-32
Position (PUU)
Motor s feedback
231-1
position
Total index
moving
distance Motor s index position
(P2.052)-1
7
Motor s running
0 direction
-231
Indexing
coordinates
Total index moving distance
Total index Path No.
moving 8
distance 8 7 1
7
Indexing
6 6 2
coordinates
5
4 5 3
3 4
Motor s
2 running
1 direction
Figure 7.1.3.6.1 PR mode indexing coordinates
Figure 7.1.3.6.2 Index Coordinates Setting Wizard in PR mode
7-33
Figure 7.1.3.6.3 PR mode Index Position screen in ASDA-Soft
Always forward
(Forward) 8
7 1
Current Indexing
6 Coordinate 2
position
5 3
Always 4
backward
(Backward)
&
Shortest Dist. Target
Indexing position
coordinates
Total index
moving
Always forward
distance 8 8 70000 PUU
(Forward)
7 7 60000 PUU
Current
position
6 6 50000 PUU
5 5 40000 PUU
Target 4 4 30000 PUU
position 3 Always backward 3 20000 PUU
(Backward) Motor’s
2 & 2 10000 PUU
Shortest Dist.1 0 PUU running
1 direction
Figure 7.1.3.6.4 Motor’s operation direction and indexing coordinates
7-34
Table 7.1.3.6.1 Bit functions of the PR Index Position command
BIT
D C B A U Z Y X
PR parameters
Command type - OPT2 DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 0xA
Data content Index Position command [PUU](0 - P2.052 minus1)
Note:
1. Y: OPT: option
BIT
3 2 1 0 Description
7
Command type DIR OVLP INS -
0 0 Always goes forward (Forward)
Always goes backward

0 1
Data content - - (Backward)
1 0 Shortest distance
1 1 -
OVLP: allow overlapping of the next command.
2. C: OPT2: option 2
BIT
3 2 1 0
Command type - AUTO - S_LOW
S_LOW: speed unit options, 0 stands for 0.1 r/min and 1 for 0.01 r/min.
4. A: SPD: target speed, set by P5.060 - P5.075.
7-35
7.1.4 Overview of the PR procedure
In the PR mode, there are six types of commands. To make users understand how the PR
procedure works, ASDA-Soft presents the execution order and calling sequence of all PR
7
procedures. The symbols and contents in the PR diagram are shown as follows. This includes
five parts: number, command execution type (property), command type, next procedure
command, and command information. See Figure 7.1.4.1.
(1)
PR#1 (I)(O) (2)
Position (3)
DLY = [0] 0 ms
(4)
100000 PUU
INC
200 rpm (5)
Figure 7.1.4.1 Overview of the PR procedure
(1) Number: the PR number, ranging from PR#0 to PR#99 (100 sets of PR paths).
(2) Command execution type (property): (B) execute homing when power on; (O) command
overlap; (R) write data to EEPROM; (I) command interrupt.
(3) Command type: there are five types of PR procedure commands: homing, speed, position,
writing, and jumping. The color displayed in this section depends on the command type.
(4) Next procedure command: if followed by a PR command, there would be an arrow pointing
to the specified PR path.
(5) Command information: displays the details of this PR path. The displayed contents and
color depend on the information type.
The following sections illustrate each command type and its representation.
7-36
Homing methods
In the display of homing methods, PR#0 always signifies the homing procedure, which is
marked as “Homing”. See Figure 7.1.4.2.
7
PR#0 (B) (1)
Homing
0:PLZ (2)
Offset = 0 (3)
PR#1 (4)
Speed1 = 100 (5)
Speed2 = 20 (6)
Figure 7.1.4.2 Homing methods display
(1) Activation mode (Boot): to execute homing when the drive is in Servo On state, it displays
(B); if homing is not required, no information is displayed.
(2) Method selection: homing methods and Z pulse setting are shown in the following table.
Characters in red indicate the motor’s position after homing; F signifies running forward;
R signifies running in reverse; ORG signifies the origin; CUR signifies the current position;
BUMP signifies the hard stop.
Y = 0: reverse to look
for Z pulse Y = 2: do not look for
Homing method
look for Z pulse
X = 0: homing in forward direction and use PL as the
0: PLZ 0: PL
homing origin
X = 1: homing in reverse direction with NL as the
1: NLZ 1: NL
homing origin
X = 2: homing in forward direction with ORG (when it
2: F_ORGZ 2: F_ORG
switches from off to on state) as the homing origin
X = 3: homing in reverse direction with ORG (when it
3: R_ORGZ 3: R_ORG
switches from off to on state) as the homing origin
X = 4: look for the Z pulse in forward direction with it
4: F_Z
as the homing origin
X = 5: look for the Z pulse in reverse direction with it
5: R_Z
as the homing origin
X = 6: homing in forward direction with the ORG (when
6: F_ORGZ 6: F_ORG
it switches from on to off state) as the homing origin
X = 7: homing in reverse direction with ORG (when it
7: R_ORGZ 7: R_ORG
switches from on to off state) as the homing origin
X = 8: define current position as the origin 8: CUR
X = 9: Torque homing in forward direction 9: F_BUMPZ 9: F_BUMP
X = A: Torque homing in reverse direction A: R_BUMPZ A: R_BUMP
(3) Offset: origin offset, P6.001.
(4) Path: next PR path to be executed after homing.
(5) Homing at high speed: first homing speed, P5.005.
(6) Homing at low speed: second homing speed, P5.006.
7-37
Speed command
You can use the Speed command in any PR paths (PR#1 - PR#99). It is marked as “Speed”.
See Figure 7.1.4.3.
7
PR#1 (I) (1)
Speed
DLY = [0] 0 ms (2)

100 rpm (3)
Acc = [0] 6.67 ms (4)
Dec = [0] 6.67 ms (5)
Figure 7.1.4.3 Speed command display
(1) Command execution type (property): a Speed command can interrupt (INS) the previous
PR path. If the Interrupt function is enabled, it displays (I); if not, no information is
displayed.
(2) Delay time (DLY): determined by the shared PR parameters. It is defined by a command
from the controller; the servo drive starts counting the delay time once it reaches the target
speed.
(3) Target speed: the set target speed.
(4) Acceleration time (ACC): determined by the shared PR parameters; length of time to reach
the target speed from stopped.
(5) Deceleration time (DEC): determined by the shared PR parameters; length of time to
decelerate from target speed to stopped.
7-38
Position command
You can use the Position command in any PR paths (PR#1 - PR#99). It is marked as “Position”,
and includes the options to “Stop once position control completed” and “Load the next path
once position control completed”. The only difference is that “Load the next path once position
control completed” shows an arrow pointing to the next PR. See Figure 7.1.4.4.
PR#1 (I)(O) (1) PR#1 (I)(O)

7
Position Position
DLY = [0] 0 ms (2) DLY = [0] 0 ms
100000 PUU (3) 100000 PUU
ABS (4) ABS
200 rpm (5) 200 rpm
Acc=[0] 6.67 ms (6) Acc=[0] 6.67 ms
Dec=[0] 6.67 ms (7) Dec=[0] 6.67 ms
Figure 7.1.4.4 Position command display
(1) Command execution type (property): a Position command can interrupt (INS) the previous
displayed. The Position command can overlap (OVLP) the next PR path. Set the delay
time to 0 when using this function. If the Overlap function is enabled, it displays (O); if not,
no information is displayed.
from the controller. The servo starts counting the delay time once reaching the target
position.
(3) Target position: the set target position.
(4) Position command type: “ABS” means absolute positioning; “REL” means relative
positioning; “INC” means incremental positioning; “CAP” means high-speed position
capturing.
(5) Target speed: determined by the shared PR parameters.
7-39
Jump command
You can use the Jump command in any PR paths (PR#1 - PR#99). It is marked as “Jump” and
followed by an arrow pointing to the next PR path. See Figure 7.1.4.5.
7
PR#1 (I) (1)
Jump
DLY = [0] 0 ms (2)

PR#2 (3)
Figure 7.1.4.5 Jump command display
(1) Command execution type (property): a Jump command can interrupt (INS) the previous
displayed.
(2) Delay time (DLY): determined by the shared PR parameters.
(3) Target PR number: the set target PR number.
Write command
You can use the Write command in any PR paths (PR#1 - PR#99). It is marked as “Write”.
See Figure 7.1.4.6.
PR#1 (I)(R) (1)
Write
DLY = [0] 0 ms (2)

P1.001 = 1 (3)
Figure 7.1.4.6 Write command display
(1) Command execution type (property): a Write command can interrupt (INS) the previous
displayed. You can determine whether to write the data to EEPROM.
If writing data to EEPROM is required, it shows (R); if not, no information is displayed.
(2) Delay time (DLY): determined by the shared PR parameters.
(3) Writing target and data source: the corresponding target and data sources are shown in
the following table. Note that constants can be written in DEC or HEX format.
Writing Target Data source
Parameter (PX.XXX) Constant
Data array (Arr[#]) Parameter (PX.XXX)
- Data array (Arr[#])
- Monitoring variable (Mon[#])
7-40
Index Position command
You can use the Index Position command in any PR paths (PR#1 - PR#99). The number of PR
paths is determined by the index number. It is marked as “Index Position”. See Figure 7.1.4.7.
7
Index Position List [100000] (1)
PR#1 (I)(O) PR#2 (I)(O) PR#3 (I)(O) (2)
Index Position Index Position Index Position

DLY = [0] 0 ms DLY = [0] 0 ms DLY = [0] 0 ms (3)
0/100000 PUU 33333/100000 PUU 66667/100000 PUU (4)
Dir = [0] Forward Dir = [0] Forward Dir = [0] Forward (5)
Speed = 200 rpm Speed = 200 rpm Speed = 200 rpm (6)
Acc = [0] 6.67 ms Acc = [0] 6.67 ms Acc = [0] 6.67 ms (7)
Dec = [0] 6.67 ms Dec = [0] 6.67 ms Dec = [0] 6.67 ms (8)
Figure 7.1.4.7 Index Position command display
(1) Index Position command section: the number of the index position. It shows the total
moving distance at the top using double arrows to show that the motor can run reciprocally
between each target position in each PR path.
(2) Command execution type (property): a Position command can interrupt (INS) the previous
PR path. If the Interrupt function is enabled, it displays (I); if not, no information is displayed.
The Index Position command can overlap (OVLP) the next PR path. Before using the
Overlap function, set the delay time to 0. If the Overlap function is enabled, it displays (O);
if not, no information is displayed.
from the controller. The servo starts counting the delay time once reaching the target
position.
(4) Position command: the numerator is the position of this PR path; the denominator is the
total moving distance of this Index Position command, which is set by P2.052.
(5) Rotation direction (Dir): available options are “Rotation forward (Forward)”, “Rotation in
reverse (Reverse)”, and “Rotation with the shortest distance (Shortest)”.
(6) Target speed: determined by the shared PR parameters.
7-41
7.1.5 Trigger methods for the PR command
There are four types of PR trigger methods. They are DI-triggered, Event-triggered, P5.007-
triggered, and Capture-triggered (high-speed position capturing). Choose the most suitable
7
trigger method according to the applications and requirements.
Digital input (DI) triggering
For the DI triggering method, you choose the PR path to be executed by using the internal
registers (Position command Bit0 - Bit6) and use a command to trigger the selected PR path.
Before using DI-triggering commands, you must define the 8 sets of the DI functions, which are
[0x11]POS0, [0x12]POS1, [0x13]POS2, [0x1A]POS3, [0x1B]POS4, [0x1C]POS5, [0x1E]POS6,
and [0x08]CTRG (refer to Table 8.1). You can use the DI/O setting screen in ASDA-Soft to set
these functions, as shown in Figure 7.1.5.1.
Figure 7.1.5.1 DI/O setting screen in ASDA-Soft
7-42
Select the PR number to be executed based on the on / off status of DI.POS0 - 6 and use
DI.CTRG to trigger the specified PR path. See Figure 7.1.5.1 for an example.
Table 7.1.5.1 Use DI to select the PR path to be triggered
7
Correspon-
Position POS POS POS POS POS POS POS
CTRG ding
command 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
parameter
P6.000
Homing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6.001
P6.002
PR#1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6.003
… …
P6.098
PR#50 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6.099
P7.000
PR#51 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7.001
… …
P7.098
PR#99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
P7.099
In addition, there are two sets of DI for special functions: [0x27] Enable homing and [0x46]
Motor stops. If the former is triggered, the servo drive executes homing based on the homing
setting. If the latter is triggered, the servo drive stops the motor. You can use the DI/O setting
screen in ASDA-Soft to set these functions, as shown in Figure 7.1.5.2.
7-43
Event triggering
For the event triggering method, you use Event trigger commands 1 - 4 to execute the specified
PR path. There are two types of Event triggering: rising-edge trigger and falling-edge trigger.
The range of PR path numbers that you can specify is from 51 - 63 (see the example in Figure
7 7.1.5.3). Before using the event triggering for PR commands, you must define the DI functions,
which are [0x39] Event trigger command 1, [0x3A] Event trigger command 2, [0x3B] Event
trigger command 3, and [0x3C] Event trigger command 4 (see Table 8.1). You can use the DI/O
setting screen in ASDA-Soft to set these functions, as shown in Figure 7.1.5.4.
DI 2: [0x39]
Event trigger command 1
PR#51 PR#52
DI 3: [0x3A]
Event trigger command 2
PR#62 PR#63
PR path No. to be executed 51 62 52 63
Figure 7.1.5.3 Example of event triggering timing diagram
7-44
You can use P5.098 to set the rising-edge trigger of the PR path and use P5.099 to set the
falling-edge trigger. Refer to Chapter 8 for more details. Users can use ASDA-Soft to set the
event trigger of PR paths. See Figure 7.1.5.5.
Figure 7.1.5.5 Event ON / OFF setting screen in ASDA-Soft
PR command trigger register (P5.007)
For the PR command trigger register, you write the PR number to be executed in P5.007 to
have the servo drive execute the specified PR path. If you write 0 to the PR Command Trigger
register, the servo drive executes homing. If you write 1 - 99 to the PR Command Trigger
register, the servo drive executes the specified PR path. If you write 1000 to the PR command
Trigger register, the servo drive stops executing PR commands. Refer to the setting descriptions
of P5.007 in Chapter 8.
High-speed position capture (Capture) triggering
For the Capture triggering method, it uses high-speed position capture to trigger the specified
PR path. When the capturing completes, you can set Bit 3 of P5.039.X to trigger or not trigger
PR#50. For detailed settings, refer to Section 7.2.
7-45
7.1.6 PR procedure execution flow
The ASDA-B3 updates the command status every 1 ms. Figure 7.1.6.1 illustrates the PR
procedure execution flow and how the servo drive deals with PR commands. Once a PR
7
procedure is triggered, it goes through three units, which are PR queue, PR executor, and
motion command generator.
Priority High DI:CTRG P5.007 Event( ) Event( ) Low
PR queue
 Every 1 ms, issues the waiting lead PR to PR executor no matter whether the
executor has completed the commands or not.
 New lead PR replaces the PR in the executor.
PR executor
 Sends the paths set with motion commands to the generator (Speed Cmd, Position
Cmd).
 Completes jump and write commands.
 Within 1 ms, it completes at least 20 consecutive paths with interruption functions
and without delay.
Motion command generator
 Integrates multiple commands (sequence, interrupt, or overlap commands).

 Outputs the integrated motion commands.
Speed
Time
Figure 7.1.6.1 PR execution flow in the ASDA-B3
 Trigger mechanism
The trigger mechanism is as mentioned in Section 7.1.5. There are three trigger methods. A PR
procedure is executed as long as a trigger signal is output. When two different trigger methods
are used for one PR procedure within the same ms, the priority is as follows: DI trigger
(DI.CTRG) > PR command trigger register (P5.007) > Rising-edge event trigger (Event ↑) >
Falling-edge event trigger (Event↓). Within this ms, commands with higher priority are executed
first and then the lower priority commands are arranged in the next ms. If three trigger
commands are generated in the same ms, the third is not added to the PR queue.
7-46
 PR queue
The triggered PR path is the lead PR. The PR group it leads goes into the PR queue to wait for
prioritization.
In each ms, the servo drive sends the lead PR and the PR group it leads to the PR executor
with a first-in first-out method no matter whether a PR path is being executed. Therefore, as
long as a PR path is triggered, the PR queue collects it and sends it to the executor.
 PR Executor
7
Once the PR executor receives the lead PR and its PR group, the PR group that is being
executed will be replaced immediately. If the received PR group includes motion commands,
such as Speed commands and Position commands, then the PR executor sends them to the
motion command generator. PR paths with Write or Jump commands are complete at the
moment when the PR executor reads the command, and thus they do not enter the generator.
The PR executor can consecutively complete at least 20 PR paths with interrupt commands
(INS) (without delay times) within 1 ms. If there is a PR path that has not been completed within
1 ms, and a new PR group is sent to the executor by the queue, the new PR group then
replaces the previous PR group. In other words, instead of executing the PR group that hasn’t
been completed, the executor starts executing the new PR group. If there is a PR path that has
not been completed within 1 ms but no new PR group is sent to the executor, the executor
continues to execute the unfinished PR path.
 Motion command generator
Motion commands include the Speed and Position commands. The PR executor sends this type
of commands to the motion command generator. This generator has a buffer for temporarily
storing the next motion command and all motion commands are integrated here. Motion
commands can be executed as soon as they enter the generator. If another motion command
(with interrupt setting) also enters the generator, it is integrated with the current command in the
generator and the integration is based on the motion command settings. The settings include
whether multiple motion commands are sequence commands and whether they are set with the
Overlap or Interrupt function. All integration varies with each PR path setting.
Sequence command
The configurable commands for PR paths are the motion commands, which are the Position
and Speed commands. A Sequence command is a motion command without an Overlap or
Interrupt function. The following command starts to be executed only after the delay set in the
previous command. Regarding Position commands, the delay time starts to count after the
target position is reached. For Speed commands, the delay time counting starts after the target
speed is reached.
7-47
 Position command followed by a Position command
When the PR executor receives two consecutive Position commands, if they do not have Interrupt
or Overlap functions, the PR executor issues the first Position command to the motion command
generator, and the generator starts the first part of position control. After the first Position
7 command completes, if no delay time is set, the PR executor issues the second Position
command for the generator to start the second part of position control (see Figure 7.1.6.2 (a)).
If the first Position command includes a delay, the PR executor starts counting the delay time right
after the motor reaches the target position. Then it issues the second Position command for the
generator to start the second part of position control as shown in Figure 7.1.6.2 (b).
(1 ms command cycle) (1 ms command cycle)

PR#1 PR#2
PR Position Position
executor DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms
10000 PUU 10000 PUU
ABS ABS
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
(a) Position command without delay

PR#1 PR#2
10000 PUU 10000 PUU
ABS ABS
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
100 ms
(b) Position command with delay
Figure 7.1.6.2 Position sequence command
7-48
 Speed command followed by a Speed command
When the PR executor receives two consecutive Speed commands, if they do not have
Interrupt or Overlap functions, the PR executor issues the first Speed command to the motion
command generator, and the generator starts the first part of speed control. After the first Speed
command completes, if no delay time is set, the PR executor issues the second Speed
command for the generator to start the second part of speed control (see Figure 7.1.6.3 (a)).
If the first Speed command includes a delay, the PR executor starts counting the delay time
7
right after the motor reaches the target speed. Then it issues the second Speed command for
the generator to start the second part of speed control as shown in Figure 7.1.6.3 (b).
PR#1 PR#2
PR Speed Speed
100 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[11] 100 ms Acc=[0] 33.3 ms
Dec=[11] 100 ms Dec=[0] 33.3 ms
Speed (rpm)
500
Motion
command
generator
100 Time
(a) Speed command without delay

PR#1 PR#2
PR Speed Speed
100 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[11] 100 ms Acc=[0] 33.3 ms
Dec=[11] 100 ms Dec=[0] 33.3 ms
Speed (rpm)
500
Motion
command
generator
100
Time
100 ms
(b) Speed command with delay
Figure 7.1.6.3 Speed sequence command
7-49
 Multiple commands
The PR queue updates commands every 1 ms. For a motion command, the PR queue sends
the next command to the generator only after the previous command completes. Jump or Write
commands are executed in the PR queue immediately. As shown in Figure 7.1.6.4, in the first
7 ms, the PR queue receives a Position command and sends this command to the motion
command generator, having the generator to execute the command. In the second ms, the PR
queue receives a Write command and executes it immediately. In the third ms, the PR queue
receives a Jump command and executes it immediately as well. These last two commands are
not sent to the motion command generator since the PR queue and the generator can execute
commands independently. In the fourth ms, the PR queue receives a Position command.
Next, the PR executor sends this Position command to the generator for execution.
(1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle)

(1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle)
PR#1 PR#5
PR#2 PR#3
executor Write Jump
DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms
5000 PUU DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms 10000 PUU
ABS P5.045=100 PR#5 ABS
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
Figure 7.1.6.4 Multiple sequence commands
7-50
Command interruption
Interruption (INS) causes a command in execution to be replaced or integrated.

The results of the interruption differ based on the command types. The next command replaces
or combines with the previous command. There are two types of interruption: internal and
external, as shown in Figure 7.1.6.5.
Figure 7.1.6.5 Internal and external interruption
1. Internal Interruption
For a series of PR paths, if one PR path includes an AUTO function (auto-execute the next
path), the system continues to read the next path after reading the current path. If the current
path includes a delay, the next path is read after the delay time is over. Meanwhile, if the next
path includes an Interrupt function (which has a higher execution priority), the servo drive
immediately executes the interrupt command. It replaces the un-executed part in the previous
path with the next or integrates the next with the commands of the previous path which are in
execution.
 Position command  Position command (I)  Position command

When the PR executor receives three consecutive Position commands with an interrupt in the
second command, the executor treats the first and the second Position commands as one PR
group. Since the first Position command is not executed, the executor replaces the first
command with the second and only sends the second command to the motion command
generator for execution. After the second command is complete, the executor sends the third
command to the generator (see Figure 7.1.6.6 (a)). If the first command includes a delay, then
the PR executor sends the first command to the generator and then starts counting the delay
time. After the delay is over, it then sends the second command and the generator starts the
second part of speed control. While the first command is still being executed, it is integrated
with the second command. Note that this integration differs from that described in Section 7.1.3.
Refer to the following note. Once the second command is complete, the executor sends the
third command to the generator for execution (see Figure 7.1.6.6 (b)).
7-51
( 1 ms Cmd cycle ) (1 ms Cmd cycle)

PR#1 PR#2 (I) PR#3
PR Position Position Position
executor DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms
1000 PUU 5000 PUU 10000 PUU
7
ABS ABS ABS
100 rpm 200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
(a) Position command without delay
(1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle)

PR#1 PR#2 (I) PR#3
PR Position Position Position
10000 PUU 50000 PUU 100000 PUU
ABS ABS ABS
100 rpm 200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
500 ms
(b) Position command with delay
Figure 7.1.6.6 Internal interruption - Position command
Note: the integration for internal interrupt position command is slightly different from what is described in
Section 7.1.3. The way REL and INC commands work is identical. The target position is the previous target
position plus the current position. See the following example. The rest of the integration method is the
same as mentioned in Section 7.1.3.
Motor s current Endpoint of

previous command Target
position
(Fb_PUU) (Cmd_E) 60000 position
Internal interruption
REL (I)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Motor s current Endpoint of

position previous command Target
(Fb_PUU) (Cmd_E) 60000 position
Internal interruption
INC (I)
60000 PUU
0 10000 20000 30000 40000 50000 60000 70000 80000 90000 100000
Figure 7.1.6.7 Example of relative and incremental position commands for internal interruption
7-52
 Speed command  Speed command (I)  Speed command
When the PR executor receives three consecutive Speed commands with an interrupt in the
second command, the executor treats the first and the second as one PR group. Since the first
Speed command is not executed, the executor replaces the first command with the second and
only sends the second command to the motion command generator for execution. After the
second command is complete, the executor sends the third command to the generator
(see Figure 7.1.6.8 (a)). If the first command includes a delay, then the PR executor sends the
7
first command to the generator and then starts counting the delay time. After the delay is over,
it then sends the second command and the generator starts the second part of speed control.
While the first command is still being executed, it is integrated with the second command.
Once the second command is complete, the executor sends the third to the generator for
execution (see Figure 7.1.6.8 (b)).
( 1 ms command cycle ) (1 ms command cycle)

PR#1 PR#2 (I) PR#3
PR Speed Speed Speed

100 rpm 200 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[11] 100 ms Acc=[12] 333 ms Acc=[0] 33.3 ms
Dec=[11] 100 ms Dec=[12] 333 ms Dec=[0] 33.3 ms
Speed (rpm)
500
Motion
command
generator
200 Time
(a) Speed command without delay
(1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle) (1 ms Cmd cycle)

PR#1 PR#2 (I) PR#3
PR Speed Speed Speed

100 rpm 200 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[11] 100 ms Acc=[12] 333 ms Acc=[0] 33.3 ms
Dec=[11] 100 ms Dec=[12] 333 ms Dec=[0] 33.3 ms
Speed (rpm)
500
Motion
command
generator
200
100 Time
100 ms
(b) Speed command with delay
Figure 7.1.6.8 Internal interruption - Speed command
7-53
 Multiple interrupt commands
The PR queue updates commands every 1 ms. If all PR paths include an Interrupt function, the
queue can read at least 20 PR paths in 1 ms, and these paths are called a PR group. If this PR
group has multiple motion commands, the PR queue only sends the last command it receives to
7 the motion command generator for execution. Therefore, in a PR group, only one PR path with
motion command is executed. The latter motion command directly replaces the former, whereas
Jump and Write commands are executed as soon as they are received by the PR queue
(see Figure 7.1.6.9 (a)). If one of the PR paths includes a delay, the PR queue schedules all
paths on the basis of this PR path. The prior path(s) including a delay becomes the first PR
group, and what follows is the second PR group. Thus, this PR procedure can execute up to
two PR paths with motion commands, as shown in Figure 7.1.6.9 (b).
(1 ms Cmd cycle)
Approx. 20 PR paths
PR#1 (I) PR#7 (I)
PR#2 (I) PR#8 (I)
Write Jump
1000 PUU DLY=[0] 0 ms 10000 PUU DLY=[0] 0 ms
ABS P5.045=100 ABS PR#10
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
(a) Multiple commands without delay
(1 ms Cmd cycle) DLY 100 ms (1 ms Cmd cycle)
Approx. 20 PR paths
PR#1 (I) PR#7 (I)
PR#6 (I) PR#8 (I)
Write Jump
1000 PUU DLY=[1] 100 ms 10000 PUU DLY=[0] 0 ms
ABS P5.045=100 ABS PR#10
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
(b) Multiple commands with delay
Figure 7.1.6.9 Internal interruption - Multiple commands
7-54
2. External Interruption
If an external interruption is encountered, it uses the PR Command trigger method to execute

another PR path (refer to Section 7.1.5 for PR trigger methods). When the PR queue receives a
PR path with an Interrupt function, it sends this path to the motion command generator
immediately and changes the path in execution. Note that a delay does not change the result of
an external interruption. That is, once the PR queue receives an external interrupt command,
the motion commands in the latter part are executed by the generator and integrated with the
7
previous commands.
The external interruption is as shown in Figure 7.1.6.10 (a). If a PR path with an Interrupt
function enters the PR executor as an external interruption, the executor sends this Position
command immediately to the generator so that the motor can run in accordance with the
interruption. The motor uses the settings that integrate with the former motion commands when
running. The methods of integration are described in Section 7.1.3. Similarly, an external
interruption affects Speed and Position commands the same way and the same is true for
multiple commands. See Figure 7.1.6.10 (b) for an example.

External
PR#1 interruption PR#2
Position Position
1000 PUU 10000 PUU
ABS ABS
100 rpm 200 rpm
PR
executor (1 ms command cycle) (1 ms command cycle)
PR#10 (I) PR#11
Position Position
5000 PUU 10000 PUU
ABS ABS
200 rpm 500 rpm
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
(a) External interruption - Position command
7-55

External
PR#1 interruption PR#2
Speed Speed
DLY=[1] 100 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms

100 rpm 500 rpm
7
Acc=[11] 100 ms Acc=[11] 33.3 ms
Dec=[11] 100 ms Dec=[11] 33.3 ms
PR executor (1 ms command cycle) (1 ms command cycle)
PR#10 (I) PR#11
Speed Speed
200 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[12] 333 ms Acc=[0] 33.3 ms
Dec=[12] 333 ms Dec=[0] 33.3 ms
Speed (rpm)
500
Motion
command
generator
200
100 Time
(b) External interruption - Speed command
Figure 7.1.6.10 External interruption
Overlap command
If the previous position command includes an Overlap function, it allows the next command to
be executed while the previous motion is decelerating, thus achieving a continuous motion.
When you use an Overlap command, the delay time is still effective. The delay time starts to
count from the command’s start point; however, in order to have the commands transition
smoothly, setting the delay time of the previous command to 0 is suggested. In addition,
if deceleration time of the previous command is identical to acceleration time of the next,
the transition between commands can be very smooth, avoiding discontinuous speed during
transition (see Figure 7.1.6.11). The calculation is as follows.
1st target speed (𝑆𝑝𝑑1)

× Deceleration time (𝐷𝑒𝑐)
3000
2nd target speed (𝑆𝑝𝑑2)

= × Acceleration time (𝐴𝑐𝑐)
3000
An Interrupt command has a higher priority than an Overlap command. Thus, when you set an
Overlap function in the current Position command, and the next motion command includes an
Interrupt function, only the command with the Interrupt function is executed.
7-56

PR#1 (O) PR#2
Position Position
PR DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms
5000 PUU 10000 PUU
executor ABS ABS
7
200 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[0] 6.67 ms Acc=[0] 16.65 ms
Dec=[0] 6.67 ms Acc=[0] 16.65 ms
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
Deceleration time of the 1st command is different from
acceleration time of the 2nd command
(a) Overlap command - Acceleration and deceleration time are different

PR#1 (O) PR#2
Position Position
PR DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms
5000 PUU 10000 PUU
executor ABS ABS
200 rpm 500 rpm
Acc=[0] 6.67 ms Acc=[2] 6.67 ms
Dec=[0] 6.67 ms Dec=[2] 6.67 ms
Speed
Motion
command
generator
Time
st
Deceleration time of the 1 command is identical to
acceleration time of the 2nd command
(b) Overlap command - Acceleration and deceleration time are identical
Figure 7.1.6.11 Overlap command
Interpret PR path flow
The PR paths mentioned above include commands such as Sequence, Interrupt, and Overlap.
The replacement, integration, and overlapping for commands lead to different behavior
depending on the settings. The suggested steps to interpret the PR path is as follows.
1. Check the command sequence. Check whether there are delay time (DLY) and interrupt
(INS) commands because these two types change the command execution sequence.
2. Find the lead PR and identify each PR group of 1 ms.
3. In each PR group of 1 ms, only the last motion command is executed. The Jump and Write
commands are immediately executed in the PR executor.
4. Position commands are combined based on the principle described in Section 7.1.3.3.
7-57
7.2 Application of motion control

The ASDA-B3 motion control includes the high-speed position capture function. It uses digital
input DI3 (B3-F, M) or DI7 (B3-L) to instantly capture the motor’s feedback position and store
7
this position in the data array. You can find more details about the setting and how it works in
the following sections.
Note: B3-E models do not support the Capture function.
7.2.1 Data array
The data array can store up to 128 sets of 32-bit data captured by the high-speed capture
function. Set P2.008 to 30 and then 35 or use ASDA-Soft to write the data to EEPROM;
otherwise, the data in RAM is not saved after you turn the power off. ASDA-Soft provides a
user-friendly screen for reading and writing the data array. See the following figure.
Figure 7.2.1.1 Data Array screen in ASDA-Soft
7-58
You can use the panel, communication, or ASDA-Soft to read data from or write data to the data
array. Regardless of the methods, they are completed by parameter settings. The first group of
parameters for reading and writing the data array are P5.011, P5.012, and P5.013. P5.011
specifies the address for reading and writing the data array. P5.012 and P5.013 are for reading
7
and writing the actual data contents. You can use both to read and write, but the behaviors after
reading and writing differ. Refer to Table 7.2.1.1 for more information.
The second group of parameters for reading and writing the data array are P5.011 and P5.100 -
P5.103. P5.011 specifies the address for reading and writing the data array. P5.100 reads data
from or writes data to the data array address set by P5.011. P5.101 reads data from or writes
data to the data array address following the address set by P5.011. P5.102 and P5.103 work the
same way.
If the address value accumulates and exceeds the maximum of 19, the returned address is 0.
You can find more details in Table 7.2.1.2.
Table 7.2.1.1 Group 1 - reading and writing the data array
Parameter Description
P5.011
Address for Specify the address in the data array when reading and writing data.
reading / writing
Window for
by Behavior after reading Behavior after writing
reading / writing
Value of P5.011 does not
P5.012 Panel Value of P5.011 adds 1
add 1
Window #1 for
reading / writing Communication
Value of P5.011 adds 1 Value of P5.011 adds 1
/ ASDA-Soft
Cannot be written with the
P5.013 Panel Value of P5.011 adds 1
drive panel
Window #2 for
reading / writing Communication
Value of P5.011 adds 1 Value of P5.011 adds 1
/ ASDA-Soft
Example: when using the drive panel or communication for reading from or writing to the data
array, input values to the data array address in sequence as follows: Data array #11 = 100,
Data array #12 = 200, Data array #13 = 300. Then the data is read in sequence.
7-59
1. Read / write with panel:
Write to data array Read from data array

Set the address Set the address
Write Write
for writing the for reading the
first data
P5.011 = 11 first data
P5.011 = 11
7 Write 100 to
Data array #11
Write
P5.012 = 100
Value of P5.011 (writing

address) adds 1
P5.013
Not writable
with panel
Read
Data array #11
Read
P5.012 = 100
P5.011 (reading
address) remains
Read
P5.013 = 100
Value of P5.011
(reading address)
adds 1
P5.011 = 12 P5.011 = 11
P5.011 = 12
Write 200 to Write Write

Data array #12 P5.012 = 200 P5.011 = 12
Read Read
Data array #12 P5.013 = 200
Value of P5.011 (writing Read
address) adds 1 P5.012 = 200
P5.011 = 13
Value of P5.011
P5.011 (reading
(reading
Write 300 to Write address) remains
address) adds 1
Data array #13 P5.012 = 300 P5.011 = 12
P5.011 = 1
Write
P5.011 = 13
Read Read
Data array #13 P5.013 = 300
Read
P5.012 = 300
2. Read / write with communication
To read from or write to the data array through Modbus, use the communication command 0x10
to write consecutively, 0x06 to write single data, and 0x03 to read consecutively. First, use a
consecutive writing command to write 100 to Data array #11, 200 to Data array #12, and 300 to
Data array #13. When reading, use a single data writing command to set the start address as
Data array #11, then use a consecutive reading command to read P5.011 - P5.013 (Data array
#11 and #12). This reads two values, so P5.011 is incremented by 2 and then it reads Data
array #13.
Writing to the data array

Communi- P5.011 P5.012 P5.013
cation Start Data
Packet
address length Low bit High bit Low bit High bit Low bit High bit
Cmd
6
1 0x10 P5.011 11 0 100 0 200 0
words
6
2 0x10 P5.011 13 0 300 0 0 0
words
Reading the data array
Communi- P5.011 P5.012 P5.013
Start Data
Packet cation
address length Low bit High bit Low bit High bit Low bit High bit
Cmd
4 0x06 P5.011 - 11 0 - - - -
6
5 0x03 P5.011 11 0 100 0 200 0
words
6
6 0x03 P5.011 13 0 300 0 0 0
words
7-60
Table 7.2.1.2 Group 2 - reading and writing the data array
Parameter Description Example 1 Example 2
P5.011 Specify the address in the data

Address for array when reading and writing 5 17
7
reading / writing data.
Window for Example 1 Example 2

Description
reading / writing Address Content Address Content
P5.100
Read from or write to the address
Window #3 for 5 1234 17 5678
specified by P5.011.
reading / writing
P5.101 Read from or write to the first
Window #4 for address following the address 6 2345 18 6789
reading / writing specified by P5.011.
P5.102 Read from or write to the second
P5.103 Read from or write to the third
7-61
7.2.2 High-speed position capture function (Capture)
The high-speed position capturing function (CAP) uses the external-triggered high-speed digital
input DI3 (B3-F, M) or DI7 (B3-L) (with execution time of only 5 µs) to capture the position data
7
of the motion axis and store it in the data array for further motion control. As the Capture
function is executed by the hardware, there is no lag in the software, and it is able to capture the
motion axis’ position accurately. While the Capture function is enabled, the servo drive sends a
DI signal for the capture signal (the DI is not user-defined).
The flowchart for high-speed position capturing is shown in Figure 7.2.2.1. The relevant
parameters are defined as follows. P5.036 sets the start position in the data array for storing the
captured data; if it is not set, the default start position is #0. P5.038 sets the capturing amount.
The amount has to be greater than 0, otherwise the Capture function is not executed. P1.019.X
enables the cycle mode. When the last data is captured, the capturing amount is reset to 0
(P5.038 = 0), and the next cycle starts automatically to capture the set capturing amount.
However, the start position for storing the captured position data is still determined by P5.036;
that is, the captured data in the previous cycle is replaced by the data captured in the next
cycle. P5.039 enables and disables the Capture function and other settings. See the following
table for more information. To capture multiple position data, use P1.020 to set the masking
range for capturing. This prevents the same position data being captured repeatedly because
capturing more than once is not allowed in the masked area. You can set the Capture function
in ASDA-Soft, as shown in Figure 7.2.2.2.
P5.039 Bit Function Description

When P5.038 > 0 and bit 0 = 1, the capturing starts
and DO.CAP_OK is off. Each time a position is
captured, the value of P5.038 is decremented by 1.
0 Enable Capture function When P5.038 = 0, it means the capturing is finished,
DO.CAP_OK is on, and bit 0 is reset to 0. If bit 0 is
already 1, the written value must not be 1; you must
X write 0 to disable the Capture function.
Reset position when first data If bit 1 = 1, after the first data is captured, set the
1
is captured Capture axis’ position to the value of P5.076.
2 Reserved -
Execute PR#50 after the last If bit 3 = 1, execute PR#50 once all data are
3
data is captured captured.
0: disabled
1: reserved
Y - Source of Capture axis
2: CN1
3: CN2
0: NO (normally open)
Z - Trigger logic
1: NC (normally closed)
U - Minimum trigger interval (ms) -
7-62
CAP triggering logic

CAP axis source
Normally open
P5.039.Z = 0
CAP switch CAP axis position
P5.039.X Bit 0 P5.037 CN1 P5.039.Y = 2
DI4
CN2 P5.039.Y = 3
7
7890
DI4
Normally closed
P5.039.Z = 1
Data array
Start address
1234
Reset the 1st position P5.036
CAP 2345
P5.039.X Bit 1 = 1
1st position = P5.076 amount 5678
P5.038 6789
Enable CMP after the 1st data 7890
is captured
P5.039.X Bit 2 = 1
CAP amount
P5.038 = P5.038 - 1
No
CAP completed?
P5.038==0
Yes
Call PR#50 Cyclic CAP

P5.039.X Bit 3 = 1 P1.019.X = 1
P5.038 = default value
Figure 7.2.2.1 Flowchart for high-speed position capturing
Figure 7.2.2.2 Capture function screen in ASDA-Soft
7-63
It is suggested that you use the PR path programming to use the motion commands with the
Capture function. You can use Write commands to set the high-speed position capture function, as
well as to execute motion commands once capturing is complete.
See the example in Figure 7.2.2.3. PR#1 confirms that the Capture function is disabled (P5.039.X
7
[Bit 0] = 0). PR#2 sets the start position of data array to #1. PR#3 sets the capturing amount to 3.
PR#4 sets the capturing axis’ position to 0 for the first capture point. PR#5 sets the cyclic capture
mode with delay time of 1 ms to ensure that the next PR path can be executed with the Capture
function. PR#6 enables the Capture function and resets the first point; and once completed,
continue executing PR#50. This selects the motor’s encoder as the capturing axis, using ‘normally
closed’ contact as the trigger logic with a trigger interval of 2 ms. PR#7 sets the Speed command
to 50 rpm. PR#50 sets the capture Position command to 50000 PUU. Once the command is
completed, continue to PR#51 with the Speed command setting at 50 rpm.
From Figure 7.2.2.4, you can see that after the DI is triggered, the capturing axis is reset to 0
and the data stored in data array #1 because the Reset function for the first point is enabled and
P5.076 is set to 0. At the moment the DI is triggered the second and third time, the position data
is written to the data array #2 and #3. Once the first capture cycle is complete, DO: [0x16]CAP
is set to on and then PR#50 (high-speed position capture command) and PR#51 (motion with
fixed speed) are executed. Then, the servo drive continues executing the next cycle;
meanwhile, DO: CAP is set to off when the procedure is complete and the capturing amount is
set to 3. When the DI is triggered for the fourth time, the capture axis’ position is not reset; the
position data of the capturing axis is written to #1 again. Therefore, the data written in the
previous cycle is replaced. At the moment the DI is triggered the fifth and sixth time, the position
data is written to the data array #2 and #3. Once the second capture cycle is complete, DO:
[0x16]CAP is set to on and then PR#50 (high-speed position capture command) and PR#51
(motion with fixed speed) are executed.
When using Cyclic Capture mode (P1.019.X = 1), the Reset function for the first point is only
valid for the first cycle. Executing the PR path is valid for every cycle; in other words, every time
a cycle ends, PR#50 is executed. The first position data captured in every cycle is written to the
data array set by P5.036, and then the other data is written in sequence. So, position data
written in the previous cycle is always replaced by the position data of the next cycle.
7-64
PR#1 (I) PR#2 (I) PR#3 (I) PR#4 (I)
Write Write Write Write
DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms

P5.039=0x2030 P5.036=100 P5.038=3 P5.076=0
PR#5 (I) PR#6 (I)

PR#7 (I)
Speed
7
Write Write
DLY=[0] 0 ms
DLY=[10] 1 ms DLY=[0] 0 ms 50 rpm
P1.019=0x0001 P5.039=0x203B Acc=[0] 3.33 ms
Dec=[0] 3.33 ms
PR#50 (I) PR#51
Position Speed
50000 PUU 50 rpm
CAP Acc=[0] 3.33 ms
100 rpm Dec=[0] 3.33 ms
Figure 7.2.2.3 PR path with application of high-speed capture function
Data array
#100 0 0 0 45678 45678 45678
#101 0 12501 12501 12501 50345 50345
#102 0 0 26789 26789 26789 56789
10000 PUU
CAP axis
position
(PUU)
10000 PUU
Time
DI7: CAP
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
DO: [0x16]
CAP_OK
PR path #7 #51 #51
#1 - 6 #50 #50
Figure 7.2.2.4 Application example for high-speed capture function
7-65
7-66
Parameters
This chapter introduces the parameter settings of the servo drive, as well as the
8
descriptions for digital input (DI), digital output (DO), and monitoring variables.
You can control the drive functions with these parameters and DI/O.
8.1 Parameter definitions ·········································································8-2

8.2 List of parameters ··············································································8-3
8.3 Parameter descriptions ····································································· 8-13
P0.xxx Monitoring parameters ······························································· 8-13
P1.xxx Basic parameters ······································································ 8-29
P2.xxx Extension parameters ································································ 8-64
P3.xxx Communication parameters ························································ 8-93
P4.xxx Diagnosis parameters ·······························································8-100
P5.xxx Motion control parameters ·························································8-107
P6.xxx PR parameters ········································································8-131
P7.xxx PR parameters ········································································8-154
Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions ···················································8-174
Table 8.2 Digital output (DO) descriptions················································8-181
Table 8.3 Monitoring variables descriptions··············································8-187
8-1
Parameters ASDA-B3
8.1 Parameter definitions

The servo drive parameters are divided into eight groups. The first character after the start code
P is the group number and the following three characters are the parameter indicator.
8 The communication address is the combination of the group number and the three-digit number,
expressed in hexadecimal. The parameter groups are:
Group 0: Monitoring parameters (Example: P0.xxx)
Group 1: Basic parameters (Example: P1.xxx)
Group 2: Extension parameters (Example: P2.xxx)
Group 3: Communication parameters (Example: P3.xxx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameters (Example: P4.xxx)
Group 5: Motion control parameters (Example: P5.xxx)
Group 6: PR parameters (Example: P6.xxx)
Group 7: PR parameters (Example: P7.xxx)
Control mode description:

PT: Position control (command input through terminal block)
PR: Position control (command sent from internal register)
S: Speed control
T: Torque control
Special symbol description:

Icon of parameter
Description
property
★
Read-only parameter. Can only read the value of the parameter.
For example, P0.000, P0.010, and P4.000.
Parameter cannot be changed when servo is in Servo On status.
▲
For example, P1.000 and P1.046.
Parameter changes become valid after power cycling.
●
For example, P1.001 and P3.000.
■ Parameter resets to its default value after power cycling. For example, P3.006.
8-2
ASDA-B3 Parameters
8.2 List of parameters

Monitoring and general output parameters
Parameter Control mode
8
Function Default value Unit
No. PT PR S T
P0.000★ Firmware version Factory setting - O O O O
Current drive alarm code (seven-
P0.001■ - - O O O O
segment display)
P0.002 Drive status 1 - O O O O
P0.003 Analog output monitoring 0x0000 - O O O O
P0.008★ Total servo drive operation time 0x00000000 hour O O O O
P0.009★■ Status monitoring register 1 - - O O O O
Select content displayed by status
P0.017 0 - O O O O
monitoring register 1
P0.018 0 - O O O O
P0.019 0 - O O O O
P0.020 0 - O O O O
P0.021 0 - O O O O
P0.025■ Mapping parameter #1 - - O O O O
Target setting for mapping parameter
P0.035 - - O O O O
P0.025
P0.036 - - O O O O
P0.026
P0.037 - - O O O O
P0.027
P0.038 - - O O O O
P0.028
8-3
Parameters ASDA-B3
Monitoring and general output parameters (continued)

No. PT PR S T
8
P0.039 - - O O O O
P0.029
P0.040 - - O O O O
P0.030
P0.041 - - O O O O
P0.031
P0.042 - - O O O O
P0.032
P0.046★■ Servo drive digital output (DO) status 0x0000 - O O O O
P1.101■ Analog monitor output voltage 1 0 mV O O O O
P1.102■ Analog monitor output voltage 2 0 mV O O O O
(★) Read-only parameter. Can only read the value of the parameter. For example, P0.000, P0.010, and P4.000.
(▲) Parameter cannot be changed when servo is in Servo On status. For example, P1.000 and P1.046.
(●) Parameter changes become valid after power cycling. For example, P1.001 and P3.000.
(■) Parameter resets to its default value after power cycling. For example, P3.006.
Filter and resonance suppression parameters

No. PT PR S T
Speed command smoothing constant
P1.006 0 ms - - O -
(low-pass filter)
Torque command smoothing constant
P1.007 0 ms - - - O
(low-pass filter)
Position command smoothing constant
P1.008 0 10 ms O O - -
(low-pass filter)
Low-frequency vibration suppression
P1.025 1000 0.1 Hz O O - -
frequency (1)
P1.026 0 - O O - -
gain (1)
P1.027 1000 0.1 Hz O O - -
frequency (2)
P1.028 0 - O O - -
gain (2)
Auto low-frequency vibration suppression
P1.029 0 - O O - -
mode
P1.030 Low-frequency vibration detection 8000 pulse O O - -
P1.034 S-curve acceleration constant 200 ms - - O -
P1.035 S-curve deceleration constant 200 ms - - O -
S-curve acceleration / deceleration
P1.036 0 ms - O O -
constant
P1.062 Percentage of friction compensation 0 % O O O -
P1.063 Constant of friction compensation 1 ms O O O -
P1.068 Position command - moving filter 4 ms O O - -
8-4
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Filter and resonance suppression parameters (continued)

No. PT PR S T
8
First set of vibration elimination -
P1.089 4000 0.1 Hz O O - -
anti-resonance frequency
P1.090 4000 0.1 Hz O O - -
resonance frequency
P1.091 10 0.1 dB O O - -
resonance difference
Second set of vibration elimination -
P1.092 4000 0.1 Hz O O - -
anti-resonance frequency
P1.093 4000 0.1 Hz O O - -
resonance frequency
P1.094 10 0.1 dB O O - -
resonance difference
P2.023 Notch filter frequency (1) 1000 Hz O O O O
P2.024 Notch filter attenuation level (1) 0 -dB O O O O
P2.047 Auto resonance suppression mode 0x0001 - O O O O
P2.048 Auto resonance detection level 100 - O O O O
1.0 1 ms
(panel / (panel /
P2.025 Resonance suppression low-pass filter software) software) O O O O
10 0.1 ms
(communication) (communication)
1.0 1 ms
(panel / (panel /
Speed detection filter and jitter software) software)
P2.049 O O O O
suppression
10 0.1 ms
P2.095 Notch filter bandwidth (1) 5 - O O O O
8-5
Parameters ASDA-B3
Gain and switching parameters

No. PT PR S T
8
6.0
1 times
0.0 (B3-F) (panel /
(panel / software)
P1.037 Load inertia ratio software) O O O O
60
0.1 times
0 (B3-F) (communication)
(communication)
P2.000 Position control gain 35 rad/s O O - -
P2.001 Position control gain rate of change 100 % O O - -
P2.002 Position feed forward gain 50 % O O - -
Position feed forward gain smoothing
P2.003 5 ms O O - -
constant
P2.004 Speed control gain 500 rad/s O O O O
P2.005 Speed control gain rate of change 100 % O O O O
P2.006 Speed integral compensation 100 rad/s O O O O
P2.007 Speed feed forward gain 0 % O O O O
P2.026 Anti-interference gain 0 rad/s O O O O
Gain switching condition and method
P2.027 0x0000 - O O O O
selection
P2.028 Gain switching time constant 10 ms O O O O
pulse
P2.029 Gain switching condition 16777216 kpps O O O O
rpm
P2.031 Bandwidth response level 19 - O O O O
0x0001
P2.032 Gain adjustment mode - O O O O
0X0000 (B3-F)
P2.053 Position integral compensation 0 rad/s O O O O
P2.089 Command response gain 25 rad/s O O - -
0x1010
P2.094▲ Special bit register 3 - O O O -
0X0010 (B3-F)
P/PI torque switching command
P2.104 800 % O O O -
condition
P2.105 Automatic gain adjustment level 1 11 - O O - -
P2.106 Automatic gain adjustment level 2 2000 pulse O O - -
P2.112▲ Special bit register 4 0x0018 - O O O -
8-6
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Position control parameters

No. PT PR S T
8
Input for control mode and control 0x0000
P1.001● - O O O O
command 0x000B (B3-F)
P1.002▲ Speed and torque limits 0x0000 - O O O O
P1.003 Encoder pulse output polarity 0x0000 - O O O O
P1.012 - Internal Torque command / internal
100 % O O O O
P1.014 torque limit 1 - 3
P1.044▲ E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N1) 16777216 pulse O O - -
P1.045▲ E-Gear ratio (denominator) (M) 100000 pulse O O - -
P1.046▲ Encoder pulse number output 2500 pulse O O O O
P1.055 Maximum speed limit Rated speed rpm O O O O
P1.097▲ Encoder output denominator (OA, OB) 0 - O O O O
P5.003 Deceleration time for auto-protection 0xEEEFEEFF - - O O O
Refer to
P5.020 - Acceleration / deceleration times
description of ms - O - -
P5.035 (Number #0 - 15)
each parameter
P5.016■ Axis position - motor encoder 0 PUU O O O O
P5.018 Axis position - pulse command 0 pulse O O O O
Position control parameters - external pulse control command (PT mode)

No. PT PR S T
P1.000▲ External pulse input type 0x1042 - O - - -
P2.060 E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N2) 16777216 pulse O - - -
8-7
Parameters ASDA-B3
Position control parameters - internal register control command (PR mode)

No. PT PR S T
8
P5.008 Positive software limit 2147483647 PUU - O - -
P5.009 Negative software limit -2147483648 PUU - O - -
P6.002 - Internal Position commands
0 - - O - -
P7.099 (Path definition) #1 - 99
20.0 - 3000.0 1 rpm
Speed control for internal Position (panel / (panel /
P5.060 - software) software)
commands (target speed setting) - O - -
P5.075
#0 - 15 200 - 30000 0.1 rpm
P5.004 Homing methods 0x0000 - - O - -
100.0 1 rpm
(panel / (panel / - O - -
High speed homing (first speed software) software)
P5.005
setting)
1000 0.1 rpm
- O - -
20.0 1 rpm
(panel / (panel / - O - -
Low speed homing (second speed software) software)
P5.006
setting)
200 0.1 rpm
- O - -
Trigger Position command (PR mode
P5.007■ 0 - - O - -
only)
P5.040 - Delay time after position reached
0 - 5500 ms - O - -
P5.055 (Number #0 - 15)
P5.098 PR# triggered by event rising-edge 0x0000 - - O - -
P5.099 PR# triggered by event falling-edge 0x0000 - - O - -
P5.015■ PATH#1 - PATH#2 volatile setting 0x0000 - - O - -
8-8
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Speed control parameters

No.
PT PR S T
8
P1.001● - O O O O

P1.009 - Internal Speed command / internal
1000 - 3000 0.1 rpm - - O O
P1.011 speed limit 1 - 3
100 % O O O O
First set of maximum rotation speed for
P1.040 3000 rpm - - O O
analog Speed command
Second set of maximum rotation speed
P1.081 Rated speed rpm - - O O
for analog Speed command
Maximum output for analog Torque
P1.041▲ 100 % O O O O
command
Maximum speed for encoder output
P1.076▲ 5500 rpm O O O O
(OA, OB)
Torque control parameters
Control mode
Parameter
No.
PT PR S T

P1.001● - O O O O

P1.009 - Internal Speed command / internal
1000 - 3000 0.1 rpm - - O O
P1.011 speed limit 1 - 3
100 % O O O O
First set of maximum rotation speed for
P1.040 3000 rpm - - O O
analog Speed command
Second set of maximum rotation speed
P1.081 Rated speed rpm - - O O
for analog Speed command
Maximum output for analog Torque
P1.041▲ 100 % O O O O
command
8-9
Parameters ASDA-B3
Planning of digital input / output pin and output parameters
Control mode
Parameter
No.
PT PR S T
8
General range compare DO output -
P0.053 0x0000 - O O O O
filter time
General range compare digital output -
P0.054 0 - O O O O
first lower limit
P0.055 0 - O O O O
first upper limit
P0.056 0 - O O O O
second lower limit
P0.057 0 - O O O O
second upper limit
P0.058 0 - O O O O
third lower limit
P0.059 0 - O O O O
third upper limit
P0.060 0 - O O O O
fourth lower limit
P0.061 0 - O O O O
fourth upper limit
P2.009 DI response filter time 2 ms O O O O
0x0101 (B3-L)
P2.010 DI1 functional planning - O O O O
0x0100
0x0104 (B3-L)
0x0022
0x0116 (B3-L)
0x0023
0x0117 (B3-L)
0x0021
0x0102 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0022 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0023 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0021 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0101 (B3-L)
P2.018 DO1 functional planning - O O O O
0x0100
0x0103 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0109 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0105 (B3-L)
0x0100
0x0007 (B3-L)
0x0100
P2.036 DI9 functional planning 0x0100 - O O O O
8-10
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Planning of digital input / output pin and output parameters (continued)

No. PT PR S T
8
P2.041 DO6 functional planning 0x0100 - O O O O

10.0 1 rpm
(panel / (panel /
P1.038 Zero speed range software) software) O O O O
100 0.1 rpm
P1.039 Target speed detection level 3000 rpm O O O O
P1.042 Enable delay time for magnetic brake 0 ms O O O O
P1.043 Disable delay time for magnetic brake 0 ms O O O O
P1.047 Speed reached (DO.SP_OK) range 10 rpm - - O -
P1.054 Pulse range for position reached 167772 pulse O O - -
P1.056 Motor output overload warning level 120 % O O O O
Communication parameters
Control mode
Parameter
No.
PT PR S T
P3.000● Address 0x007F - O O O O
0x0203
P3.001● Transmission speed - O O O O
0x3203 (B3-F)
P3.002 Communication protocol 0x0006 - O O O O
MODBUS communication error
P3.003 0x0000 - O O O O
handling
P3.004 Communication timeout 0 sec O O O O
P3.006■ Digital input (DI) control switch 0x0000 - O O O O
MODBUS communication response
P3.007 0 0.5 ms O O O O
delay time
8-11
Parameters ASDA-B3
Diagnosis parameters
Control mode
Parameter
No.
PT PR S T
8 P4.000★
P4.001★
P4.002★
Fault record (N)
Fault record (N-1)
Fault record (N-2)

0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P4.003★ Fault record (N-3) 0x00000000 - O O O O
P4.004★ Fault record (N-4) 0x00000000 - O O O O
P4.005 Servo motor JOG control 20 rpm O O O O

Digital output register (readable and
P4.006■ 0x0000 - O O O O
writable)
P4.007■ Multi-function for digital input 0x0000 - O O O O
Input status of servo drive panel (read-

P4.008★ - - O O O O
only)
P4.009★ Digital output status (read-only) - - O O O O
P4.010▲■ Adjustment function 0 - O O O O
P4.011 Analog speed input (1) offset adjustment Factory setting - O O O O
P4.012 Analog speed input (2) offset adjustment Factory setting - O O O O
P4.013 Analog torque input (1) offset adjustment Factory setting - O O O O
P4.014 Analog torque input (2) offset adjustment Factory setting - O O O O
Current encoder (V1 phase) offset

P4.015 Factory setting - O O O O
adjustment
Current encoder (V2 phase) offset

adjustment
Current encoder (W1 phase) offset

adjustment
Current encoder (W2 phase) offset

adjustment
IGBT NTC adjustment level (cannot
P4.019 Factory setting - O O O -
reset)
Offset adjustment for analog monitor

P4.020 0 mV O O O O
output (Ch1)
Offset adjustment for analog monitor

P4.021 0 mV O O O O
output (Ch2)
P4.022 Analog speed input offset 0 mV - - O -
P4.023 Analog torque input offset 0 mV - - - O
8-12
ASDA-B3 Parameters
8.3 Parameter descriptions

P0.xxx Monitoring parameters
Address: 0000H
8
P0.000★ Firmware version 0001H
Default: Factory setting Control mode: All
Unit: - Setting range: -
Settings:
Displays the firmware version of the servo drive.
Address: 0002H
P0.001■ Current drive alarm code (seven-segment display) 0003H
Default: - Control mode: All
0x0000: alarm clear (same as
DI.ARST)
Unit: - Setting range:
0x0001 - 0xFFFF: displays the
alarm code (not writable)
Settings:
For the list of alarms, refer to Section 12.1 Alarm list.
Address: 0004H
P0.002 Drive status 0005H
Default: 1 Control mode: All
Unit: - Setting range: -300 to 127
Settings:
The parameter setting displayed on the panel. Input the monitoring code to P0.002 to view changes to
the variable on the panel. For the list of monitoring variables, refer to Table 8.3 Monitoring variables
descriptions.
Address: 0006H
P0.003 Analog output monitoring 0007H
Default: 0x0000 Control mode: All
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x0077
Settings:
U Z Y X
X MON2 value Z Reserved
Y MON1 value U Reserved
8-13
Parameters ASDA-B3
MON1 and MON2 MON1 and MON2

Description Description
value value
Torque command
Motor speed
0 4 (+/- 8 volts / Maximum Torque
8
(+/- 8 volts / Maximum speed)
command)
Motor torque VBUS voltage
1 5
(+/- 8 volts / Maximum torque) (+/- 8 volts / 450V)
Pulse command frequency Analog output voltage is the set
2 6
(+8 volts / 4.5 Mpps) value of P1.101
Speed command
Analog output voltage is the set
3 (+/- 8 volts / Maximum Speed 7
value of P1.102
command)
Note: refer to P1.004 and P1.005 for the proportional setting for the analog output voltage.
For example: when you set P0.003 to 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor speed; MON2 is the analog
output of motor torque):
Motor speed
MON1 output voltage = 8 x P1.004 (Unit: volts)
(Maximum speed x )
100
Motor torque
MON2 output voltage = 8 x P1.005 (Unit: volts)
(Maximum torque x )
100
P0.004 -
Reserved
P0.007
Address: 0010H
P0.008★ Total servo drive operation time 0011H
Unit: hour Setting range: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFFFF
Settings:
Displays the total servo drive operation and Servo On time. The unit is in hours and durations of less
than 1 hour are not recorded. The recorded hours are saved when the servo power is off.
High bit Low bit
D C B A U Z Y X
DCBA Servo On time UZYX Servo power applied time
8-14
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0012H
P0.009★■ Status monitoring register 1 0013H
Format:
Settings:
DEC Data size: 32-bit
Set the value to be monitored in P0.017 through the drive panel or communication. Please refer to
8
P0.002. To get the status, read the communication address through the communication port.
For example, if you set P0.017 to 7 to access P0.009, the panel displays the motor speed (rpm).
If accessing the data through MODBUS communication, it reads two 16-bit values (0012H and 0013H)
as a single 32-bit value. (0013H : 0012H) = (Hi-word : Low-word). Set P0.002 to 23 and the panel
displays “VAR-1” and then the value of P0.009.
Address: 0014H
Settings:
P0.002. To get the status, read the communication address through the communication port. Set P0.002
to 24 and the panel displays “VAR-2” and then the value of P0.010.
Address: 0016H
Settings:
Address: 0018H
8-15
Parameters ASDA-B3
Settings:
8
Address: 001AH
P0.013★■ Status monitoring register 5 001BH
Settings:
P0.002. To get the status, read the communication address through the communication port.
P0.014 -
Reserved
P0.016
Address: 0022H
P0.017 Select content displayed by status monitoring register 1 0023H
Settings:
Refer to Table 8.3 for the available values.
For example, if you set P0.017 to 7, then reading P0.009 displays the motor speed (rpm).
Address: 0024H
Settings:
Address: 0026H
Settings:
8-16
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0028H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 16-bit
8
Address: 002AH
P0.021 Select content displayed by status monitoring register 5 002BH
Settings:
P0.022 -
Reserved
P0.024
Address: 0032H
P0.025■ Mapping parameter #1 0033H
Determined by the corresponding
parameter P0.035
Settings:
You can continuously read and write parameters faster if they are not in the same group. Use P0.035 to
specify the mapping parameter number through the panel or communication. The value of the parameter
that is specified by P0.035 is shown in P0.025. Refer to P0.035 for its settings.
Address: 0034H
parameter P0.036
Settings:
This setting is the same as P0.025, except its mapping target is set in P0.036.
8-17
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0036H
8
parameter P0.037
Settings:
Address: 0038H
parameter P0.038
Settings:
Address: 003AH
P0.029■ Mapping parameter #5 003BH
parameter P0.039
Settings:
Address: 003CH
P0.030■ Mapping parameter #6 003DH
parameter P0.040
Settings:
Address: 003EH
P0.031■ Mapping parameter #7 003FH
parameter P0.041
Settings:
8-18
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0040H
8
parameter P0.042
Settings:
P0.033 -
Reserved
P0.034
Address: 0046H
P0.035 Target setting for mapping parameter P0.025 0047H
Determined by the communication
address of the parameter group
Settings:
The formats of the high-bit parameter (PH) and the low-bit parameter (PL) are:
High bit Low bit
D C BA U Z YX
BA Hexadecimal code for the parameter index YX Hexadecimal code for the parameter index
C Hexadecimal code for the parameter group Z Hexadecimal code for the parameter group
D N/A U N/A
Select the data block to access the parameter corresponding to register 1. The mapping value is 32 bits
and can map to two 16-bit parameters or one 32-bit parameter.
P0.035: (Mapping parameter: P0.035; Mapping content: P0.025)
Set the parameter to Set the parameter to

be mapped for be mapped for
P0. 035 P0.025 high bit P0.025 low bit
Map the parameter Map the parameter

P0. 025 set in P0.035 high bit set in P0.035 high bit
1. When PH ≠ PL, it indicates that the content of P0.025 includes two 16-bit parameters.
Example: Target: set P2.003 to 0 in the mapping parameter and set P2.005 to 100.
Setting: set the P0.035 high bit to 0203 (P2.003) and low bit to 0205 (P2.005).
Thus, P0.035 = 0x02030205.
P0.035 P2.003 P2.005
8-19
Parameters ASDA-B3
Write: in the mapping content, set P0.025 to 0x00050064, and the values of P2.003 and
P2.005 are:
8 P0.025 0005 0064
P2.003 0005 P2.005 0064
2. When PH = PL = P, it indicates that the content of P0.025 includes one 32-bit parameter.
Example: Target: set P6.010 to 0x00050064 in the mapping parameter.
Setting: set both the high bit and low bit of P0.035 to 060A (P6.010).
Thus, P6.010 = 0x060A060A.
P0.035 P6.010 P6.010
Write: in the mapping content, set P0.025 to 0x00050064 and P6.010 changes
immediately.
Address: 0048H
Settings:
High bit Low bit

Position of mapping Position of mapping
P0.036 parameter parameter
Content of mapping Content of mapping

Address: 004AH
P0.037 Target setting for mapping parameter P0.027 004BH
Settings:
High bit Low bit


8-20
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 004CH
P0.038 Target setting for mapping parameter P0.028 004DH
8
Settings:
High bit Low bit


Address: 004EH
P0.039 Target setting for mapping parameter P0.029 004FH
Settings:
High bit Low bit


Address: 0050H
Settings:
High bit Low bit


8-21
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0052H
8
Settings:
High bit Low bit


Address: 0054H
Unit: - Setting range: Determined by the communication

Settings:
High bit Low bit


P0.043 Reserved
Address: 0058H
P0.044★■ Status monitoring register (for PC software) 0059H
Settings:
This setting is the same as P0.009.
8-22
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Status monitoring register content selection (for PC Address: 005AH

P0.045■ 005BH
software)
Format:
Settings:
DEC
This setting is the same as P0.017.

Data size: 16-bit
8
Address: 005CH
P0.046★■ Servo drive digital output (DO) status 005DH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x00FF
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Bit Function Bit Function

0 SRDY (servo ready) 8 HOME (homing complete)
1 SON (servo activated) 9 OLW (early warning for motor overload)
WARN (This DO is on when servo warning, CW,

2 ZSPD (zero speed detection) 10 CCW, EMGS, undervoltage, or communication
error occurs.)
3 TSPD (target speed reached) 11 Reserved
4 TPOS (target position reached) 12 Reserved
5 TQL (torque limit activated) 13 Reserved
6 ALRM (servo alarm) 14 Reserved
7 BRKR (magnetic brake control output) 15 Reserved
P0.047 -
Reserved
P0.048
Address: 0062H
P0.049■ Update encoder absolute position 0063H
Settings:
U Z Y X
8-23
Parameters ASDA-B3
X Command processing Z Reserved

Y Reserved U Reserved
 X: command processing
0: N/A
8 1: update the encoder data in P0.050 - P0.052.
2: update the values in P0.050 - P0.052 and clear the position error. When this command takes
effect, the motor's current position is set to the terminal point of the Position command.
Address: 0064H
P0.050★■ Absolute coordinate system status 0065H
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x001F
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Bit Function Description

0: normal.
Bit 0 Absolute position status
1: lost.
0: normal.
Bit 1 Battery voltage status
1: undervoltage.
Status for absolute 0: normal.
Bit 2
number of turns 1: overflows.
0: normal.
Bit 3 PUU status
1: overflows.
Absolute coordinate 0: established.
Bit 4
status 1: not yet established.
Bit 5 - Bit 15 Reserved -
Address: 0066H
P0.051★■ Encoder absolute position - multiple turns 0067H
Unit: rev Setting range: -32768 to +32767
Settings:
When you set P2.070 [Bit 1] to 1 for reading the pulse number, this parameter indicates the number of
turns of the motor (absolute position). When you set P2.070 [Bit 1] to 0 for reading the PUU number,
this parameter becomes invalid and the panel displays 0.
8-24
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Encoder absolute position - pulse number or PUU within Address: 0068H

P0.052★■ 0069H
single turn
0 to 16777216-1 (pulse)
8
Unit: pulse or PUU Setting range:
-2147483648 to +2147483647 (PUU)
Settings:
When you set P2.070 [Bit 1] to 1 for reading the pulse number, this parameter indicates the pulse
number of the encoder which refers to the motor’s absolute position within a single turn. When you set
P2.070 [Bit 1] to 0 for reading the PUU number, this parameter indicates the motor’s absolute position in
PUU.
Address: 006AH
P0.053 General range compare DO output - filter time 006BH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Settings:
U Z Y X
X First filter time Z Third filter time
Y Second filter time U Fourth filter time
Note: the minimum filter time is 1 ms (set value 0 = 1 ms; 1 = 2 ms; 2 = 3 ms; ...; F = 16 ms).
Example of the first filter:
P0.055
P0.054
P0.009 monitoring
item value
On P0.053.X
DO: 0x2C P0.053.X
Off filter time
filter time
8-25
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 006CH
P0.054 General range compare digital output - first lower limit 006DH
8 Format:
Settings:
Before using this function, set the digital output function to [0x2C] (first set of general range comparison)
and the monitoring items of P0.017. When the monitoring item value of P0.009 is within the range set in
P0.054 and P0.055, and after the filter time set in P0.053.X has elapsed, this digital output is on.
Address: 006EH
P0.055 General range compare digital output - first upper limit 006FH
Settings:
Refer to the description of P0.054.
Address: 0071H
P0.056 General range compare digital output - second lower limit 0072H
Settings:
Before using this function, set the digital output function to [0x2D] (second set of general range
comparison) and the monitoring items of P0.018. When the monitoring item value of P0.010 is within the
range set in P0.056 and P0.057, and after the filter time set in P0.053.Y has elapsed, this digital output
is on.
Address: 0073H
P0.057 General range compare digital output - second upper limit 0074H
Settings:
8-26
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0075H
P0.058 General range compare digital output - third lower limit 0076H
Format:
Settings:
Before using this function, set the digital output function to [0x2E] (third set of general range
8
range set in P0.058 and P0.059, and after the filter time set in P0.053.Z has elapsed, this digital output
is on.
Address: 0077H
P0.059 General range compare digital output - third upper limit 0078H
Settings:
Address: 0079H
P0.060 General range compare digital output - fourth lower limit 007AH
Settings:
Before using this function, set the digital output function to [0x2F] (fourth set of general range
range set in P0.060 and P0.061, and after the filter time set in P0.053.U has elapsed, this digital output
is on.
Address: 007BH
P0.061 General range compare digital output - fourth upper limit 007CH
Settings:
P0.062 Reserved
8-27
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 007EH
P0.063 Duration of voltage exceeding 400V 007FH
Unit: ms Setting range: 0x00000000 - 0x7FFFFFFF
8 Format:
Settings:
Records the total time during which the voltage of the servo drive exceeded 400V.
8-28
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P1.xxx Basic parameters

Address: 0100H
P1.000▲ External pulse input type 0101H
Default: 0x1042 Control mode: PT
Unit:
Format:
Settings:
-
HEX
Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x11F2
Data size: 16-bit 8

U Z Y X
X Pulse type Z Logic type
Y Filter width U Filter width
 X: pulse type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: clockwise and counterclockwise pulse

2: pulse + symbol
 Z: logic type
0: positive logic
1: negative logic
Digital circuits use 0 and 1 to represent the high and low voltage levels. In positive logic, 1 represents
high voltage and 0 represents low voltage. In negative logic, 1 represents low voltage and 0 represents
high voltage.
Example:
Positive logic Negative logic
Logic Pulse Pulse input

type type Forward Reverse
Pulse phase lead Pulse phase lag
(43) (43)
PULSE TH PULSE TH
X=0 (41) (41)
(39) (39)
SIGN T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SIGN T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
(37) (37)
Z=0
(43)
PULSE TH
(41)
X=1
T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
(39)
SIGN TH
(37)
8-29
Parameters ASDA-B3
Logic Pulse Pulse input

type type Forward Reverse
Sign = low Sign = high
8
(43) (43)
PULSE TH PULSE TH
Z=0 X=2 (41) (41)
T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4 T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4
(39) (39)
SIGN SIGN
(37) (37)
Note: pin definition of the communication type models is different from that of the L model. Communication type model
pins: SIGN (23), /SIGN (24), PULSE (25), and /PULSE (26).
Minimum allowed time width

Maximum input
Pulse specification
frequency
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
Differential signal 4 Mpps 62.5 ns 125 ns 250 ns 200 ns 125 ns 125 ns
Open-collector 200 Kpps 1.25 μs 2.5 μs 5 μs 5 μs 2.5 μs 2.5 μs
Pulse specification Maximum input frequency Voltage Forward current
Differential signal 4 Mpps 5V < 25 mA
Open-collector 200 Kpps 24V (maximum) < 25 mA
 UY: filter width setting
If the pulse frequency is too high, causing a pulse width smaller than the filter width, then this pulse
gets filtered out as noise. Therefore, set the filter width smaller than the actual pulse width. You should
set the filter width as 4 times smaller than the actual pulse width.
U=0 U=1
Y
Unit: μs (kHz) Unit: μs (kHz)
0 No filter function No filter function

1 2 (250) 0.2 (2500)
2 3 (166) 0.3 (1666)
3 4 (125) 0.4 (1250)
4 5 (100) 0.5 (1000)
5 6 (83) 0.6 (833)
6 7 (71) 0.7 (714)
7 8 (62) 0.8 (625)
8 9 (55) 0.9 (555)
9 10 (50) 1 (500)
A 11 (45) 1.1 (454)
B 12 (41) 1.2 (416)
C 13 (38) 1.3 (384)
D 14 (35) 1.4 (357)
E 15 (33) 1.5 (333)
8-30
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Example:
When you set U and Y to 1 respectively (and filter width is therefore 0.2 μs), and when the high and
low duty width of the command pulse are both larger than 0.8 μs (four times the filter width 0.2 μs),
8
then the pulse command is not filtered out.
> 0.8 μs
> 0.8 μs
When the high or low duty width of the pulse is smaller than the filter width, then it is filtered out.
< 0.8 μs < 0.8 μs

0.8 μs
0.8 μs
Pulse input Pulse input
Filtered signal Filtered signal
If the first pulse width is smaller than 0.8 μs, it may If the low level pulse width is smaller than 0.8 μs, it
be filtered out, and thus two input pulses will be may be filtered out, and thus two input pulses will
regarded as one pulse. If the pulse width is be regarded as one pulse. If this low level pulse
smaller than 0.2 μs, it will be filtered out. width is smaller than 0.2 μs, it will be filtered out.
If you use a 125 ns (4 Mpps) input pulse, set the filter value Y to 0 to disable the filter function.
Note: when the high-speed pulse specification of the signal is 4 Mpps and the value of the filter is 0, then the pulse is not
filtered out.
Address: 0102H
P1.001● Input for control mode and control command 0103H
0x0000
Default: Control mode: All
0x000B (B3-F)
Settings:
U Z YX
YX Control mode setting Z Direction control
- - U DIO value control
8-31
Parameters ASDA-B3
 YX: control mode setting
Mode PT PR S T Sz Tz
00 ▲
8
01 ▲
02 ▲
03 ▲
04 ▲
05 ▲
Dual mode
06 ▲ ▲
07 ▲ ▲
08 ▲ ▲
09 ▲ ▲
0A ▲ ▲
Communication mode for Delta PLC DVP-15MC and DVP-50MC
0B
series models, DMCNET mode
0C CANopen mode, EtherCAT mode
Multi-mode
0D ▲ ▲
0E ▲ ▲ ▲
0F ▲ ▲ ▲
PT: Position control mode; the command source is from the external pulse and the external analog
voltage (coming soon).
PR: Position control mode; the command source is from the 100 sets of internal registers which you
can select with DI.POS0 - DI.POS6. Multiple homing methods are also available.
S: Speed control mode; the command source is from the external analog voltage and the internal
registers which you can select with DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1.
T: Torque control mode; the command source is from the external analog voltage and the internal
registers which you can select with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
Sz: Speed control mode; the speed command is zero or the command source is from the internal
speed registers which you can select with DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1.
Tz: Torque control mode; the torque command is zero or the command source is from the internal
torque registers which you can select with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
Dual mode: you can switch between two modes with external DI. For example, you can use DI.S-P
to switch the dual mode of PT/S (control mode setting: 06). Refer to Table 8.1 for further
information.
Multi-mode: you can switch between three modes with external DI. For example, you can use DI.S-P
and DI.PT-PR to switch the multi-mode of PT/PR/S (control mode setting: 0E). Refer to
Table 8.1 for further information.
Communication mode: the command source is from the external fieldbus controller, which sends the
command to the servo drive through direct communication.
8-32
ASDA-B3 Parameters
 Z: direction control
Z=0 Z=1
Positive direction
P(CCW) P(CW) 8
Negative direction
N(CW) N(CCW)
 U: DIO value control (volatile)
0: when you switch the mode, DIO settings (P2.010 - P2.022) remain the same.
1: when you switch the mode, DIO settings (P2.010 - P2.022) are reset to the default
corresponding to each mode.
Address: 0104H
P1.002▲ Speed and torque limits 0105H
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Disable / enable Speed Limit function Z Reserved
Y Disable / enable Torque Limit function U Reserved
 X: disable / enable Speed Limit function
0: disable Speed Limit function
1: enable Speed Limit function (only available in T and Tz modes)
See the following diagram for Speed Limit setting:

Vref (0)
(analog
command)
P1.009 (1)
Speed Limit
P1.010 (2) command
P1.011 (3)
Select with DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1
 Y: disable / enable Torque Limit function
0: disable Torque Limit function
1: enable Torque Limit function
8-33
Parameters ASDA-B3
See the following diagram for Torque Limit setting:
Vref (0)
(analog
command)
8
P1.012 (1)
Torque Limit
P1.013 (2) command
P1.014 (3)
Select with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1
When using the Torque Limit function, set this parameter to 1 to limit the torque permanently without
occupying a DI setting. Alternatively, you can enable or disable the limit function with DI.TRQLM,
which is more flexible, but the setting then occupies a DI setting. You can enable the Torque Limit
function with either P1.002 or DI.
Address: 0106H
P1.003 Encoder pulse output polarity 0107H
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Polarity of monitor analog output Z Reserved
Y Polarity of encoder pulse output U Reserved
 X: polarity of monitor analog output
0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
 Y: polarity of encoder pulse output
0: pulse output in positive direction
1: pulse output in negative direction
Address: 0108H
P1.004 MON1 analog monitor output proportion 0109H
Unit: % (full scale) Setting range: 0 - 100
Settings:
Refer to P0.003 for the analog output setting.
8-34
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Example 1:
If the requirement is for the motor to run at 1,000 rpm, which corresponds to 8V, and its maximum
speed is 5,000 rpm, then the setting is:

Required speed 1000 rpm
P1.004 = ×100% = ×100% = 20%
8
Maximum speed 5000 rpm
Refer to the following examples for the motor's current speed and corresponding voltage output:
Motor speed MON1 analog monitor output

300 rpm MON1 = 8V × P1.004 ×100% = 8V × 20 ×100% = 2.4V
Maximum speed × 5000 rpm×100
100

900 rpm MON1 = 8V × P1.004 ×100% = 8V × 20 ×100% = 7.2V
Maximum speed× 100 5000 rpm×
100
Address: 010AH
P1.005 MON2 analog monitor output proportion 010BH
Unit: % (full scale) Setting range: 0 - 100
Settings:
Refer to P0.003 for the analog output setting.
Address: 010CH
P1.006 Speed command smoothing constant (low-pass filter) 010DH
Default: 0 Control mode: S / Sz
Settings:
0: disable this function.
Address: 010EH
P1.007 Torque command smoothing constant (low-pass filter) 010FH
Default: 0 Control mode: T / Tz
Settings:
Address: 0110H
P1.008 Position command smoothing constant (low-pass filter) 0111H
Default: 0 Control mode: PT / PR
Unit: 10 ms Setting range: 0 - 1000
Example: 11 = 110 ms
Settings:
8-35
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0112H
P1.009 Internal Speed command 1 / internal speed limit 1 0113H
S / Sz: internal Speed command 1
Default: 1000 Control mode:
T / Tz: internal speed limit 1
8
Unit: 0.1 rpm Setting range: -60000 to +60000

Internal Speed command: 120 = 12 rpm
Example: Internal speed limit: positive and negative values are identical. Refer to the following
descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Speed command 1: first internal Speed command.
Internal speed limit 1: first internal speed limit.
Example of internal speed limit:
Speed limit in forward Speed limit in reverse

Speed limit value of P1.009 Valid speed range
direction direction
1000
-100 to 100 rpm 100 rpm -100 rpm
-1000
Address: 0114H

descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Speed command 2: second internal Speed command.
Internal speed limit 2: second internal speed limit.

direction direction
1000
-100 to 100 rpm 100 rpm -100 rpm
-1000
8-36
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0116H
8

descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Speed command 3: third internal Speed command.
Internal speed limit 3: third internal speed limit.

direction direction
1000
-100 to 100 rpm 100 rpm -100 rpm
-1000
Address: 0118H
P1.012 Internal Torque command 1 / internal torque limit 1 0119H
T / Tz: internal Torque command 1
PT / PR / S / Sz: internal torque limit 1
Unit: % Setting range: -500 to +500

Internal Torque command: 30 = 30%
Example: Internal torque limit: positive and negative values are identical. Refer to the following
descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Torque command 1: first internal Torque command.
Internal torque limit 1: first internal torque limit.
Example of internal torque limit:
Torque limit in forward Torque limit in reverse

Torque limit value of P1.012 Valid torque range
direction direction
30
-30 to 30% 30% -30%
-30
8-37
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 011AH
P1.013 Internal Torque command 2 / internal torque limit 2 011BH
8

descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Torque command 2: second internal Torque command.
Internal torque limit 2: second internal torque limit.

direction direction
30
-30 to 30% 30% -30%
-30
Address: 011CH
P1.014 Internal Torque command 3 / internal torque limit 3 011DH

descriptions.
Settings:
Internal Torque command 3: third internal Torque command.
Internal torque limit 3: third internal torque limit.

direction direction
30
-30 to 30% 30% -30%
-30
P1.015 -
Reserved
P1.018
8-38
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0126H
P1.019 Additional function for Capture 0127H
Format:
Settings:
HEX Data size: 16-bit
8
U Z Y X
X Additional function for Capture Z Reserved
Y Reserved U Reserved
 X: additional function for Capture
Bit 3 2 1 0

0: disable this function. When the number of capturing times
(P5.038) is 0, capturing is complete.
Bit 0 Cycle mode 1: enable this function. When the number of capturing times
(P5.038) is 0, it automatically resets the number of capturing
times to the default setting.
Address: 0128H
P1.020 Capture - masking range 0129H
Unit: Pulse unit of capture source Setting range: 0 to +100000000
Settings:
When the Capture function is enabled and set to capture multiple points (P5.038 > 1), the system stops
receiving the DI captured signal within this range once the data is captured. The DI captured signal
received within this range is not recognized as valid. Use this function to avoid the system seeing noise
as effective signals within the non-capture range.

P1.020 masking P1.020 masking
pulse number pulse number
Masking area
After capturing this mark, activate the

masking area.
P1.021 Reserved
8-39
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 012CH
P1.022 PR command special filter 012DH
8
Settings:
U Z YX
Acceleration / deceleration time limit
YX Z Reserved
(0 - 1270 ms)
- - U Reverse inhibit
 YX: acceleration / deceleration time limit (0 - 1270 ms)
The setting range is 00 to 7F, with the data format as HEX and unit as 10 ms.
If the PR command changes too drastically, it causes mechanical vibration. Set the acceleration /
deceleration time limit (the time required for the motor to accelerate from 0 to 3,000 rpm) with this
function. If the acceleration / deceleration time of the command is shorter than this limit, the filter
takes effect to smooth the acceleration / deceleration which prevents the command from changing
too drastically and causing mechanical vibration. When the filter is functioning, the following error
caused by the smooth command is automatically compensated after the command is smoothed,
so the final position is not deviated.
Example:
Set YX to 12, so the acceleration / deceleration time limit is 180 ms. If the acceleration / deceleration
time of the PR command is shorter than 180 ms, the filter takes effect. If the acceleration /
deceleration time of the PR command is longer than 180 ms, the filter does not take effect.
PR speed command (rpm)

Original command
Filtered command
Time (sec)
Command slows down Command changes
and the two commands drastically so the
overlap filter takes effect
Note: if the command does not slow down, the following error of the internal position exceeds the allowable
range and then triggers AL404.
 Z: reserved
 U: reverse inhibit
8-40
ASDA-B3 Parameters
1: enable this function. When the value of the current position command is lower than that of the
previous position command, the motor does not move.

PR position command (PUU)
Reverse
8
command
Reverse inhibit
function is disabled
Time (sec)
PR position command (PUU)
Reverse inhibit Reverse

function is enabled command
Time (sec)
P1.023 -
Reserved
P1.024
Address: 0132H
P1.025 Low-frequency vibration suppression frequency (1) 0133H
Unit: 0.1 Hz Setting range: 10 - 1000
Example: 150 = 15 Hz - -
Settings:
Sets the first low-frequency vibration suppression frequency. When you set P1.026 to 0, the first
low-frequency vibration suppression filter is disabled.
Address: 0134H
P1.026 Low-frequency vibration suppression gain (1) 0135H
Unit: - Setting range: 0 - 9
Settings:
Sets the gain of the first low-frequency vibration suppression. The higher the value, the better the
position response. If you set the value too high, the motor may not operate smoothly. The suggested
value is 1. Set P1.026 to 0 to disable the first low-frequency vibration suppression filter.
8-41
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0136H
P1.027 Low-frequency vibration suppression frequency (2) 0137H
8 Format:
Example:
Settings:
DEC
150 = 15 Hz
Data size:
-
16-bit
Sets the second low-frequency vibration suppression frequency. When you set P1.028 to 0, the second
low-frequency vibration suppression filter is disabled.
Address: 0138H
P1.028 Low-frequency vibration suppression gain (2) 0139H
Settings:
Sets the gain of the second low-frequency vibration suppression. The higher the value, the better the
position response. If you set the value too high, the motor may not operate smoothly. The suggested
value is 1. Set P1.028 to 0 to disable the second low-frequency vibration suppression filter.
Address: 013AH
P1.029 Auto low-frequency vibration suppression mode 013BH
Settings:
0: disable the automatic low-frequency vibration detection function.
1: disable the function automatically after vibration suppression. The value resets to 0 automatically.
Auto mode setting description:
When the value is 1, vibration suppression is in automatic mode. When the vibration cannot be detected
or the vibration frequency is stable, the system automatically resets the parameter to 0 and saves the
vibration suppression frequency to P1.025.
Address: 013CH
P1.030 Low-frequency vibration detection 013DH
Unit: pulse Setting range: 1 - 128000
8-42
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Settings:
When enabling automatic vibration suppression (P1.029 = 1), the system automatically finds the
detection level. The lower the value, the more sensitive the detection, but the system may misjudge
8
noise or treat other low-frequency vibrations as frequencies to be suppressed. If the value is high,
the system is less likely to misjudge, but if the mechanical vibration is small, the system may not
properly detect low-frequency vibrations.
P1.031 Reserved
Address: 0140H
P1.032 Motor stop mode 0141H
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Reserved Z Reserved
Y Dynamic brake operation options U Reserved
 Y: options for using the dynamic brake when the servo is in the Servo Off state or an alarm
(including EMGS) occurs
Bit 7 6 5 4

Options for stopping the motor when the servo is in the Servo
Off state or an alarm (including EMGS) occurs
Bit 5 = 0 and Bit 4 = 0: use dynamic brake
Dynamic brake
Bit 5, Bit 4 Bit 5 = 0 and Bit 4 = 1: motor runs freely
operation options
Bit 5 = 1 and Bit 4 = 0: use dynamic brake first, then let the
motor run freely once the speed is slower
than the value of P1.038
0: disable this function
Trigger stop
Bit 6 command when 1: when P1.043 is a negative value and AL022 occurs, the servo
AL022 occurs drive commands the motor to decelerate to 0 in the Servo On
state
Bit 7 Reserved -
When the motor reaches PL (CCWL) or NL (CWL), refer to P5.003 for setting the deceleration time.
If you set the deceleration time to 1 ms, the motor stops instantly.
Note: the function of Bit 6 is only available in PT, PR, S, and Sz modes and is effective only when P1.043 is a
negative value.
P1.033 Reserved
8-43
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0144H
P1.034 S-curve acceleration constant 0145H
8 Format:
Settings:
P1.034, P1.035, and P1.036 represent the acceleration time for the Speed command from zero to the
rated speed. You can set each parameter individually. When using an internal command, if you set
P1.036 to 0, the acceleration and deceleration follow a trapezoid-curve; when using an analog
command, you must set P1.036 larger than 0 so that the acceleration and deceleration follow a
trapezoid-curve.
Address: 0146H
P1.035 S-curve deceleration constant 0147H
Settings:
P1.034, P1.035, and P1.036 represent the deceleration time for the Speed command from the rated
speed to zero. You can set each parameter individually. When using an internal command, if you set
P1.036 to 0, the acceleration and deceleration follow a trapezoid-curve; when using an analog
command, you must set P1.036 larger than 0 so that the acceleration and deceleration follow a
trapezoid-curve.
Address: 0148H
P1.036 S-curve acceleration / deceleration constant 0149H
Default: 0 Control mode: PR / S / Sz
Settings:
Acceleration / deceleration constant of S-curve:
Speed
Time
(ms)
P1.036 P1.034 P1.036 P1.036 P1.035 P1.036

2 2 2 2 2 2
8-44
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P1.034: set the acceleration time for the trapezoid-curve.
P1.035: set the deceleration time for the trapezoid-curve.
P1.036: set the smoothing time for the S-curve acceleration and deceleration.
8
You can set P1.034, P1.035, and P1.036 individually. Even if you set P1.036 to 0, the acceleration and
deceleration still follow a trapezoid-curve.
Note the following error compensation:
P1.036 = 0 P1.036 = 1 P1.036 > 1

Smoothing function for
Disabled Disabled Enable
S-curve
Following error
Disabled Enable Determined by P2.068.X
compensation function
Address: 014AH
P1.037 Load inertia ratio 014BH
Operation
Panel / software Communication Control mode: All
interface:
6.0 60
Default: Data size: 16-bit
0.0 (B3-F) 0 (B3-F)
Unit: 1 times 0.1 times - -
Setting range: 0.0 - 200.0 0 - 2000 - -
Format: One decimal DEC - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 times 15 = 1.5 times - -
Settings:
Load inertia ratio of servo motor (rotary motor): (J_load / J_motor)
J_motor: moment of inertia of the servo motor
J_load: total equivalent moment of inertia of external mechanical load
Address: 014CH
P1.038 Zero speed range 014DH
Operation
interface:

Setting range: 0.0 - 200.0 0 - 2000 - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 rpm 15 = 1.5 rpm - -
Settings:
Sets the range for the zero-speed signal (ZSPD). When the forward or reverse speed of the motor is
slower than this value, the zero-speed signal is triggered and DO.ZSPD is on.
8-45
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 014EH
P1.039 Target speed detection level 014FH
Unit: rpm Setting range: 0 - 30000
8 Format:
Settings:
When the forward or reverse speed of the motor is faster than this value, the target speed signal is
triggered and DO.TSPD is on.
First set of maximum rotation speed for analog Speed Address: 0150H
P1.040 0151H
command
Default: 3000 Control mode: S / T
Settings:
Maximum rotation speed for analog Speed command:
Speed mode:
Voltage input×Setting value
Speed control command =
10
Set the rotation speed corresponding to 10V (maximum voltage) for the analog speed control
command. If the value is 2000 and the external voltage input is 5V, then the speed control command is
1000 rpm.
5V×2000 rpm
Speed control command = = 1000 rpm
10
Torque mode:
Speed limit command =
10
Set the rotation speed corresponding to 10V (maximum voltage) for the analog speed limit command.
If the value is 2000 and the external voltage input is 5V, then the speed limit command is 1000 rpm.
5V×2000 rpm
Speed limit command = = 1000 rpm
10
Address: 0152H
P1.041▲ Maximum output for analog Torque command 0153H
Unit: % Setting range: -1000 to 1000
Settings:
Torque mode:
Set the torque corresponding to 10V (maximum voltage) for the analog torque command.
Voltage input×P1.041
Torque control command = (Unit: %)
10
8-46
ASDA-B3 Parameters
In Speed, PT, and PR modes:

Set the torque limit corresponding to 10V (maximum voltage) for the analog torque limit.
Torque limit command = (Unit: %)
10
Example:
If P1.041 = 10
When the external analog voltage input is 10V, the torque control command =
When the external analog voltage input is 5V, the torque control command =
10V×10
10
5V×10
10
= 10%
= 5%
8
Address: 0154H
P1.042 Enable delay time for magnetic brake 0155H
Settings:
Sets the delay time from Servo On status to the activation of the magnetic brake signal (DO: 0x08, BRKR).
ON
OFF OFF
SON
ON [1*]
[2*]
OFF
BRKR
(P1.042) (P1.043)
Motor speed
(P1.038) [2*]
ZSPD [1*]
Note:
1. If the delay time specified in P1.042 has not passed yet and the motor speed is slower than the value of P1.038,
the magnetic brake signal (BRKR) is disabled.
2. If the delay time specified in P1.042 has passed and the motor speed is faster than the value of P1.038,
the magnetic brake signal (BRKR) is disabled.
Address: 0156H
P1.043 Disable delay time for magnetic brake 0157H
Unit: ms Setting range: -1000 to 1000
Settings:
Sets the delay time from Servo Off status to the deactivation of the magnetic brake signal (DO: 0x08,
BRKR). Refer to P1.042 for the detailed diagram.
Note: if P1.043 is a negative value and the servo is off due to an alarm (except for AL022) or emergency stop,
this setting does not function. This is equivalent to setting the delay time to 0.
8-47
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0158H
P1.044▲ E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N1) 0159H
Unit: pulse Setting range: 1 to (229-1)
8 Format:
Settings:
For the E-Gear ratio setting, refer to Section 6.2.5. For multiple E-Gear ratio (numerator) settings,
refer to P2.060 - P2.062.
Note: do not change the setting in the Servo On state.
Address: 015AH
P1.045▲ E-Gear ratio (denominator) (M) 015BH
Settings:
If the setting is incorrect, the servo motor is prone to sudden unintended acceleration. Follow these
instructions.
Setting of pulse input:
Command pulse input N Position command N

f2 = f1 x M
f1 M f2
Command pulse input range: 1 / 4 ＜ Nx / M ＜ 262144.
For the E-Gear ratio setting, refer to Section 6.2.5.
Note: do not change the setting in the Servo On state.
Address: 015CH
P1.046▲ Encoder pulse number output 015DH
Settings:
The number of single-phase pulse outputs per revolution. The maximum output frequency of the
hardware is 19.8 MHz.
Note:
In the following circumstances, pulse output of the encoder may exceed the maximum allowable output pulse
frequency of the drive, causing AL018:
1. Encoder error
2. The motor speed is faster than P1.076.
3. If P1.074.Y = 0 and P1.097 = 0, motor speed (rpm)/60 x P1.046 x 4 > 19.8 x 106
8-48
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 015EH
P1.047 Speed reached (DO.SP_OK) range 015FH
Format:
Settings:
In Speed mode, when the deviation between the Speed command and the motor feedback speed is
8
less than this parameter and the difference reaches the time set in P1.049, the digital output
DO.SP_OK (DO code: 0x19) is on.

Note: when the deviation between the Speed command and the motor feedback speed exceeds the range set in
P1.047, the system recalculates the duration.
Diagram:
1. Speed command
2. Feedback speed 3. Obtain absolute value
4. Determine if the
absolute value of speed
deviation is smaller than
P1.047
5. DO.SP_OK is on 6. DO.SP_OK is off
1. Speed command: the command that you input without acceleration or deceleration, rather than the
command from the front end speed circuit. Its source is from the register.
2. Feedback speed: the actual speed of the motor which has been filtered.
3. Obtain the absolute value.

4. Determine whether the absolute value of the speed deviation is smaller than the parameter value.
If you set the parameter to 0, DO.SP_OK is always off. If the absolute value is smaller than the
parameter, DO.SP_OK is on, otherwise it is off.
Address: 0160H
P1.048 Motion reached (DO.MC_OK) operation selection 0161H
Settings:
Control selection of digital output DO.MC_OK (DO code: 0x17).
U Z Y X
X DO output hold option Z Reserved
Y Position deviation alarm (AL380) option U Reserved
8-49
Parameters ASDA-B3
 X: DO output hold option
0: output status is not retained
1: output status is retained
8
 Y: position deviation alarm (AL380) option
0: AL380 not functioning
1: AL380 functioning
Diagram:
1. Position command
triggered
2. DO.Cmd_OK
DLY
3. Command output
4. DO.TPOS
5. DO.MC_OK
P1.048.X = 0: output not retained
6. DO.MC_OK P1.048.X = 1: output retained P1.048.Y = 1

7
7. Keep activated
8. AL380 triggered
after first time on
Description:
1. Command triggered: new PR command is effective. Command 3 starts and clears signals 2, 4, 5,
and 6 simultaneously. Command triggering source: DI.CTRG, DI.EV1/EV2,
and P5.007 (triggered through software).
2. DO.Cmd_OK: indicates whether command 3 is complete, and can be set with a delay time (DLY)
with parameters.
3. Command output: output the profile of the Position command based on the setting for acceleration
or deceleration.
4. DO.TPOS: indicates whether position error of the servo drive is within the range set in P1.054.
5. DO.MC_OK: Position command output and servo positioning completed, which indicates that
DO.Cmd_OK and DO.TPOS are both on.
6. DO.MC_OK (retains digital output status): same as 5, except that once this DO is on, its status is
retained regardless of the signal 4 status.
7. Can only select either signal 5 or signal 6 to output, and the choice is specified in P1.048.X.
8. Position deviation: when event 7 occurs, if signal 4 (or 5) is off, it means the position has deviated
and AL380 can be triggered. Use P1.048.Y to set whether AL380 is functioning.
8-50
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0162H
P1.049 Accumulated time to reach desired speed 0163H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 16-bit
8
P1.050 -
Reserved
P1.051
Address: 0168H
P1.052 Regenerative resistor value 0169H
Determined by the model. Refer to
the following table.
Unit: Ohm Setting range: Refer to the following note.
Settings:
Model Default (Ω) Model Default (Ω)
1.5 kW or below 100 2 - 3 kW (included) 20
Refer to the description of P1.053 for the parameter values when connecting the regenerative resistor
through different methods.
Note:
Model Setting range Model Setting range
750 W or below 60 - 750 2 - 3 kW 15 - 750
1 - 1.5 kW 30 - 750 - -
Address: 016AH
P1.053 Regenerative resistor capacity 016BH
Determined by the model. Refer to
the following table.
Unit: Watt Setting range: 0 - 3000
Settings:
Model Default (Watt) Model Default (Watt)
200 W or below 0 2 - 3 kW (included) 80
400 W - 1.5 kW 40 - -
8-51
Parameters ASDA-B3
Setting the parameter value when connecting the regenerative resistor with different methods:
External regenerative resistor Setting

External
regenerative resistor
8
P Setting:
P1.052 = 10 (Ω)
1 kW, 10Ω
P1.053 = 1000 (W)
C
External regenerative
resistor (in series)
P
Setting:
1 kW, 10Ω
P1.052 = 20 (Ω)
P1.053 = 2000 (W)
1 kW, 10Ω
C
External regenerative
resistor (in parallel)
P Setting:
P1.052 = 5 (Ω)
1 kW, 10Ω 1 kW, 10Ω
P1.053 = 2000 (W)
C
Address: 016CH
P1.054 Pulse range for position reached 016DH
Settings:
In Position (PT) mode, when the deviation pulse number is smaller than the range set by P1.054,
DO.TPOS is on.
In Position Register (PR) mode, when the deviation between the target position and the actual motor
position is smaller than the range set by P1.054, DO.TPOS is on.
Example:
For a rotary motor, if P1.054 = 167772 and the deviation is less than 167,772 pulses, which equals 0.01
turns (167772 / 16777216 = 0.01), then DO.TPOS is on.
Address: 016EH
P1.055 Maximum speed limit 016FH
Default: Rated speed Control mode: All
Unit: rpm Setting range: 0 to maximum speed
Settings:
Sets the maximum speed of the servo motor.
8-52
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0170H
P1.056 Motor output overload warning level 0171H
Format:
Settings:
When the value is 0 - 100 and the servo motor continuously outputs load that is higher than the setting
8
of P1.056, the pre-warning signal for overload (DO code: 0x10, OLW) is on. If the value is over 100,
this function is disabled.
Address: 0172H
P1.057 Motor hard stop (torque percentage) 0173H
Settings:
Sets the protection level. For the percentage of rated torque, set the value to 0 to disable the function
and set the value to 1 or above to enable the function.
Address: 0174H
P1.058 Motor hard stop (protection time) 0175H
Settings:
Sets the protection time: when the motor reaches the protection level and the protection time is
exceeded, AL030 occurs.
Note: this function is only suitable for non-contactable uses, such as electrical discharge machines (set P1.037
correctly).
Address: 0176H
P1.059 Speed command - moving filter
0177H
Operation
Panel / software Communication Control mode: S
interface:
Unit: 1 ms 0.1 ms - -
Setting range: 0.0 - 4.0 0 - 40 - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms - -
Settings:
8-53
Parameters ASDA-B3
P1.006 is the low-pass filter and P1.059 is the moving filter. The difference between them is that the
moving filter can smooth the beginning and end of the step command, while the low-pass filter can only
smooth the command at the end.
8
Therefore, if the speed loop receives the command from the controller for the position control loop, then
the low-pass filter is recommended. If the setting is only for the speed control, then use the moving filter
for better smoothing.
Original step analog

Speed command
Holding time
Command that has

gone through analog
speed linear filtering
P1.060 -
Reserved
P1.061
Address: 017CH
P1.062 Percentage of friction compensation 017DH
Default: 0 Control mode: PT / PR / S / Sz
Settings:
Sets the level of friction compensation. For the percentage of rated torque, set the value to 0 to disable
the function and set the value to 1 or above to enable the function.
Address: 017EH
P1.063 Constant of friction compensation 017FH
Settings:
Sets the smoothing constant of friction compensation.
8-54
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0180H
P1.064 Analog position command: activation control 0181H
Format:
Settings:
8
U Z Y X
Setting for position command issued by
X Z Reserved
the analog signal
Y Initial position setting U Reserved
 X: setting for position command issued by the analog signal
0: disable
1: enable
 Y: initial position setting
0: after the servo is on, the motor regards the current position as the position when the voltage is 0V.
Then the motor will operate to the position according to the command issued by analog input.
Motor position (Turn)
The motor operates to the

position corresponding to the
current voltage command
when this function is executed
The current position is Analog input

regarded as the position command (V)
Current
when the voltage is 0V command level
1: after the servo is on, if the command level is not changed, the motor does not operate.
The position the motor stops at is the position corresponding to the current command level.
Motor position (Turn)
The motor does not operate if the

Motor current command level is not changed
position when this function is executed
The position
corresponding
Analog input
to 0V is not Command level command (V)
changed
8-55
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0182H
P1.065 Smooth constant of analog Position command 0183H
Default: 1 Control mode: PT
Unit: 10 ms Setting range: 1 - 1000
8 Format:
Settings:
The smooth constant of analog Position command is only effective to analog Position command.
Address: 0184H
P1.066 Maximum rotation number of analog Position command 0185H
Operation
Panel / software Communication Control mode: PT
interface:
Unit: 1 cycle 0.1 cycle - -
Setting range: 0.0 - 200.0 0 - 2000 - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 cycles 15 = 1.5 cycles - -
Settings:
Rotation number setting when the maximum voltage (10V) is input to the analog Position command.
If the setting on the panel is 3.0 and the external voltage input is +10V, then the Position command is
+3 cycles. If the input is +5V, then the Position command is +1.5 cycles. If the input is -10V, then the
Position command is -3 cycles.
Position control command = Input voltage x Set value / 10
P1.067 Reserved
Address: 0188H
P1.068 Position command - moving filter 0189H
Settings:
The moving filter smooths the beginning and end of the step command, but it also delays the command.
8-56
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Original Position
command
Holding time
Command that
has gone through
moving filter
8
P1.069 -
Reserved
P1.073
Address: 0194H
P1.074 Output source of OA / OB / OZ 0195H
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Reserved Z Reserved
Y Selection of OA / OB / OZ output source U Reserved
 Y: selection of OA / OB / OZ output source
0: output source is from the encoder connected to CN2
1: reserved
2: output source is the pulse command from CN1
(If P1.097 = 0, the output ratio has to be 1 : 1. If you need to change the output ratio, refer to
the settings of P1.046 and P1.097.)
P1.075 Reserved
Address: 0198H
P1.076▲ Maximum speed for encoder output (OA, OB) 0199H
Unit: rpm Setting range: 0 - 6000 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
The reference value of the filtered maximum speed which is actually input to the motor.
8-57
Parameters ASDA-B3
P1.077 -
Reserved
P1.080
Second set of maximum rotation speed for analog Speed Address: 01A2H
8
P1.081 01A3H
command
Default: Rated speed Control mode: S / T
Settings:
Address: 01A4H
P1.082 Filter switching time between P1.040 and P1.081 01A5H
Default: 0 Control mode: S / T
Unit: ms Setting range: 0 - 1000 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
Address: 01A6H
P1.083 Abnormal analog input voltage level 01A7H
Default: 0 Control mode: S
Unit: mV Setting range: 0 - 12000 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
When the absolute value of the analog input voltage is higher than this set parameter for more than
50 ms, AL042 occurs. The comparison value for this parameter is the original analog input voltage
which has not been changed by an offset value through P4.022 (analog speed input offset).
P1.084 -
Reserved
P1.086
Address: 01AEH
P1.087 Torque homing - torque level detection 01AFH
Settings:
This setting is only for the torque homing mode. As shown in the following figure, after homing is
triggered, the motor runs in one direction and reaches the protector. The servo drive then outputs a
larger motor current in order to counter the external force. The servo drive uses P1.087 and P1.088 as
the conditions for homing. Since the hard stops are not always the same, it is recommended to return
8-58
ASDA-B3 Parameters
to find the Z pulse as the origin.
Protector
Torque level
detection
10%
Level reached timer P1.088
Maximum torque output

8
P1.087
Torque curve when
the servo searches for
the hard stop Start point
Torque curve when

the servo searches for
Z pulse
Z pulse
Note: the actual maximum torque output of the motor is 10% greater than the detected torque level (P1.087).
For example: set P1.087 to 50%, then the maximum torque output of the motor is 60%.
Address: 01B0H
P1.088 Torque homing - level reached timer 01B1H
Settings:
The setting of the level reached timer for the torque homing mode. Refer to P1.087 for the timing
diagram of torque homing mode.
First set of vibration elimination - anti-resonance Address: 01B2H

P1.089 01B3H
frequency
Settings:
Anti-resonance frequency for the first set of low frequency vibration elimination.
Use this function in flexible machines with low rigidity. The definition of a flexible machine is one for
which when the target position is reached, due to lack of rigidity, the machine vibrates and needs more
time to become stable.
B3 provides two sets of vibration elimination. The first set is P1.089 - P1.091 and the second set is
P1.092 - P1.094. The vibration elimination setting must be obtained through the system module and
enabling the low-frequency analysis option is needed.
Vibration elimination takes effect only when the two dimensional control function is enabled (P2.094
[Bit 12] = 1). After enabling the two dimensional control function, enable the first set of vibration
elimination with P2.094 [Bit 8] and the second set with P2.094 [Bit 9].
8-59
Parameters ASDA-B3
Example:
1. Set P2.094 = 0x11 to enable the first set.
2. Set P2.094 = 0x12 to enable the second set.
8
3. Set P2.094 = 0x13 to enable the first and second sets simultaneously.
Address: 01B4H
P1.090 First set of vibration elimination - resonance frequency 01B5H
Settings:
Resonance frequency for the first set of low frequency vibration elimination.
Address: 01B6H
P1.091 First set of vibration elimination - resonance difference 01B7H
Unit: 0.1 dB Setting range: 10 - 4000
Settings:
Attenuation rate for the first set of low frequency vibration elimination.
Second set of vibration elimination - anti-resonance Address: 01B8H

P1.092 01B9H
frequency
Settings:
Anti-resonance frequency for the second set of low frequency vibration elimination. The setting method
is the same as the first set of vibration elimination (P1.089).
Address: 01BAH
P1.093 Second set of vibration elimination - resonance frequency 01BBH
Settings:
Resonance frequency for the second set of low frequency vibration elimination.
8-60
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 01BCH
P1.094 Second set of vibration elimination - resonance difference 01BDH
Unit: 0.1 dB Setting range: 10 - 4000
Format:
Settings:
Attenuation rate for the second set of low frequency vibration elimination.
8
P1.095 -
Reserved
P1.096
Address: 01C2H
P1.097▲ Encoder output denominator (OA, OB) 01C3H
Settings:
1. When P1.074.Y = 0 (output source is from the encoder connected to CN2):
(a) When P1.097 = 0, OA / OB pulse output refers to the value of P1.046. (Refer to Example 1.)
(b) When P1.097 ≠ 0, OA / OB pulse output refers to the values of P1.046 and P1.097. (Refer to
Example 2.)
2. When P1.074.Y = 2 (output source is the pulse command from CN1):
(a) When P1.097 = 0, OA / OB pulse output does not refer to the value of P1.046, but outputs
according to the ratio of 1:1 instead.
(b) When P1.097 ≠ 0, OA / OB pulse output refers to the values of P1.046 and P1.097. (Refer to
Example 2.)
Example 1 (the value must be multiplied by 4 times the frequency):
When P1.097 = 0 and P1.046 = 2500,
OA / OB output is P1.046 multiplied by 4 times the frequency, which is 10,000 pulses.
Example 2 (the calculated value does not need to be multiplied by 4 times the frequency):
When P1.097 = 7 and P1.046 = 2500,
２５００
OA / OB output =
7
8-61
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 01C4H
P1.098 Disconnection detection protection (UVW) response time 01C5H
Unit: ms Setting range: 0, 100 - 800
8 Format:
Settings:
When the disconnection detection protection (UVW) function is enabled (P2.065 [Bit 9] = 1), select the
detection response time with this parameter.
Set P1.098 to 0 to use the servo's default response time.
When P1.098 is not set to 0, the setting range should be between 100 and 800 as the detection
response time.
Note:
1. If it is necessary to shorten the response time, it is recommended that you use this parameter.
2. When the servo is on and the motor does not move (servo drive has not issued the command),
it is recommended that you set this parameter if disconnection detection is needed.
P1.099 -
Reserved
P1.100
Address: 01CAH
P1.101■ Analog monitor output voltage 1 01CBH
Unit: mV Setting range: -10000 to 10000
Settings:
When you set 6 for the monitor source of P0.003 [YX], then the analog monitor output voltage refers to
the voltage value of P1.101.

Note: the analog monitor output voltage should be within the range of -8V to 8V.
Address: 01CCH
P1.102■ Analog monitor output voltage 2 01CDH
Settings:
When you set 7 for the monitor source of P0.003 [YX], then the analog monitor output voltage refers to
the voltage value of P1.102.

Note: the analog monitor output voltage should be within the range of -8V to 8V.
8-62
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P1.103 -
Reserved
P1.110
Address: 01DEH
8
P1.111 Overspeed protection level 01DFH
Default: Maximum motor speed x 1.1 Control mode: All
Unit: rpm Setting range: 0 to maximum speed
Settings:
This function is to protect the motor from overspeeding, which can be applied to all control modes.
When the filtered motor speed exceeds this set speed, AL056 is triggered.
Address: 01F0H
P1.112 Single-direction torque limit 01F1H
Unit: % Setting range: -500 to 500
Settings:
Sets the torque limit for one of the motor operation directions. If the value of P1.112 is smaller than the
values of P1.012 - P1.014, the torque limit changes according to the setting of P1.112. Otherwise,
the torque limit remains unchanged.
8-63
Parameters ASDA-B3
P2.xxx Extension parameters

Address: 0200H
P2.000 Position control gain 0201H
8 Unit:
Format:
Settings:
rad/s
DEC
Setting range: 0 - 2047
Data size: 16-bit
Increasing the position control gain can enhance the position response and reduce the deviation in
position control. If you set the value too high, it may cause vibration and noise.
Address: 0202H
P2.001 Position control gain rate of change 0203H
Settings:
Adjust the rate of change for the position control gain according to the gain switching condition.
Address: 0204H
P2.002 Position feed forward gain 0205H
Settings:
If the position control command changes position smoothly, increasing the gain value can reduce the
position following errors. If it does not change smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.

Note: this gain parameter is disabled when the two dimensional control function is on (P2.094 [Bit 12] = 1).
Address: 0206H
P2.003 Position feed forward gain smoothing constant 0207H
Settings:
If the position control command changes position smoothly, decreasing the smoothing constant value
can reduce the position following errors. If it does not change smoothly, increasing the smoothing
constant value can reduce the mechanical vibration during operation.
8-64
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0208H
P2.004 Speed control gain 0209H
Unit: rad/s Setting range: 0 - 8191
Format:
Settings:
Increasing the speed control gain can enhance the speed response. If you set the value too high, it may
8
cause vibration and noise.
Address: 020AH
P2.005 Speed control gain rate of change 020BH
Settings:
Adjust the rate of change for the speed control gain according to the gain switching condition.
Address: 020CH
P2.006 Speed integral compensation 020DH
Settings:
Increasing the value of the integral speed control can enhance the speed response and reduce the
deviation in speed control. If you set the value too high, it may cause vibration and noise.
Address: 020EH
P2.007 Speed feed forward gain 020FH
Settings:
If the speed control command changes speed smoothly, increasing the gain value can reduce the speed
following errors. If it does not change smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation.
8-65
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0210H
P2.008■ Special parameter write-in function 0211H
8 Format:
Settings:
DEC
Special parameter write-in function:

Data size: 16-bit
Code Function
10 Reset all parameters (cycle the power after reset).
20 P4.010 is writable.
22 P4.011 - P4.021 are writable.
30, 35 Save Capture data.
406 Enable forced DO mode.
400 When forced DO mode is enabled, switch back to the normal DO mode.
Address: 0212H
P2.009 DI response filter time 0213H
Settings:
When environmental interference is high, increasing this value can enhance the control stability.
If you set the value too high, it affects the response time.
Address: 0214H
P2.010 DI1 functional planning 0215H
0x0101 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
(last two codes are DI codes)
Settings:
U Z YX
YX Input function selection Z Input contact: A or B contact
- - U Reserved
 YX: input function selection
Refer to Table 8.1.
 Z: input contact: A or B contact
0: set this input contact to be normally closed (B contact)
1: set this input contact to be normally open (A contact)
Note that you can use P3.006 to determine the source of the digital signal, which can be either an
external terminal block or the communication parameter P4.007.
8-66
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0216H
0x0104 (B3-L)
0x0022 (B3-F, E, M)
8
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Address: 0218H
0x0116 (B3-L)
0x0023 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Address: 021AH
P2.013 DI4 functional planning 021BH
0x0117 (B3-L)
0x0021 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Address: 021CH
P2.014 DI5 functional planning 021DH
0x0102 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Refer to the description of P2.010. There is no physical pin for DI5 on B3-F, B3-E, and B3-M models.
DI5 is a virtual digital input which you can use when the number of physical DI points is insufficient and
trigger through communication. You can set this virtual DI for a normally closed contact if the DI has to
switch on as soon as power is applied, such as DI.SON.
8-67
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 021EH
P2.015 DI6 functional planning 021FH
0x0022 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
8
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Address: 0220H
0x0023 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Address: 0222H
0x0021 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
8-68
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0224H
P2.018 DO1 functional planning 0225H
0x0101 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
8
0x0000 - 0x013F
(last two codes are DO codes)
Settings:
U Z YX
YX Output function selection Z Output contact: A or B contact
- - U Reserved
 YX: output function selection
Refer to Table 8.2.
 Z: output contact: A or B contact

0: set this output contact to be normally closed (B contact).
1: set this output contact to be normally open (A contact).
Address: 0226H
0x0103 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x013F
Settings:
Address: 0228H
0x0109 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x013F
Settings:
8-69
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 022AH
P2.021 DO4 functional planning 022BH
0x0105 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
8
0x0000 - 0x013F
Settings:
Address: 022CH
P2.022 DO5 functional planning 022DH
0x0007 (B3-L)
0x0100 (B3-F, E, M)
0x0000 - 0x013F
Settings:
Address: 022EH
P2.023 Notch filter frequency (1) 022FH
Unit: Hz Setting range: 50 - 5000
Settings:
The first setting for resonance frequency. This function is disabled if P2.024 is 0. P2.043 and P2.044 are
the second Notch filter parameters.
Address: 0230H
P2.024 Notch filter attenuation level (1) 0231H
Unit: -dB Setting range: 0 - 40 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
The first Notch filter attenuation level. For example, an attenuation level of 5 indicates -5 dB.
8-70
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0232H
P2.025 Resonance suppression low-pass filter 0233H
Operation
interface:
8
Unit: 1 ms 0.1 ms - -
Setting range: 0.0 - 100.0 0 - 1000 - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms - -
Settings:
Sets the time constant for the low-pass filter for resonance suppression. This function is disabled if
P2.025 is 0.
Address: 0234H
P2.026 Anti-interference gain 0235H
Settings:
Increasing this parameter can increase the damping of the speed loop and reduce the speed loop
response. Setting the value of P2.026 to equal P2.006 is recommended. See the following for setting
P2.026:
1. In Speed mode, increase the value of this parameter to reduce speed overshoot.
2. In Position mode, decrease the value of this parameter to reduce position overshoot.
Note: this gain parameter is disabled when the two dimensional control function is on (P2.094 [Bit 12] = 1).
Address: 0236H
P2.027 Gain switching condition and method selection 0237H
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Gain switching condition Z Reserved
Y Gain switching method U Reserved
 X: gain switching condition
X Function
0 Disable gain switching function
1 Signal of gain switching (DI.GAINUP) is on
8-71
Parameters ASDA-B3
X Function
2 In position control mode, position error is larger than P2.029
3 Frequency of Position command is larger than P2.029
8
4 Rotation speed of servo motor is faster than P2.029
5 Signal of gain switching (DI.GAINUP) is off
6 In position control mode, position error is smaller than P2.029
7 Frequency of Position command is smaller than P2.029
8 Rotation speed of servo motor is slower than P2.029
 Y: gain switching method
0: gain rate switching
1: integrator switching (switch from P controller to PI controller)
Setting
Control mode P Control mode S Gain switching
value
P2.000 x 100%
P2.004 x 100% Before switching
P2.004 x 100%
0
P2.000 x P2.001
P2.004 x P2.005 After switching
P2.004 x P2.005
P2.006 x 0%; P2.026 x 0% Before switching
1
P2.006 x 100%; P2.026 x 100% After switching
Address: 0238H
P2.028 Gain switching time constant 0239H
Unit: ms Setting range: 0 - 1000 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
Controls the switching of smoothing gain.
Address: 023AH
P2.029 Gain switching condition 023BH
Unit: pulse; kpps; rpm Setting range: 0 - 50331648
Settings:
You determine the gain switching (pulse error, kpps, rpm) by the selection of gain switching condition
(P2.027).
8-72
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 023CH
P2.030■ Auxiliary function 023DH
Format:
Settings:
Setting
DEC Data size:
Function
16-bit
8
value
0 Disable all functions described as follows.
1 Switch servo to Servo On state.
2 to 4 Reserved.
This setting makes all parameter settings volatile. When there is no need to save the data, this setting
5 can avoid continually writing the parameters to EEPROM and shortening the lifetime of the EEPROM.
You must use this function when controlling through communication.
This setting enables command simulation mode. In this mode, use the DI/O in ASDA-Soft to Servo On
as both the external Servo On signal and the force Servo On of the PR mode in ASDA-Soft cannot
work. Also, the DSP Error (variable 0x6F) is read as 0 and P0.001 only shows the external error code
6 (positive / negative limit, emergency stop).
In this mode, DO.SRDY is on, commands are accepted in each mode and can be observed through
the scope function of the software, but the motor does not operate. Use this mode to examine
command accuracy.
7 Reserved.
Back up all current parameter values to EEPROM, so that the values are retained after power cycling.
8 The panel displays ‘to.rom’ during execution. This feature can also be executed when servo is in the
Servo On state.
-1, -5, -6 Disable the functions of 1, 5, and 6.
-2 to -4,
Reserved.
-7, -8
Note: set the value to 0 during normal operation. The value returns to 0 automatically after power cycling.
Address: 023EH
P2.031 Bandwidth response level 023FH
Settings:
In gain adjustment mode (P2.032), adjust the servo bandwidth with the bandwidth response level
parameter (P2.031). When you increase the bandwidth response level (P2.031), the servo bandwidth
increases as well. Refer to Chapter 5 for adjustment details.
8-73
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0240H
P2.032 Gain adjustment mode 0241H
0x0000 (B3-F)
8
Settings:
The servo drive provides three gain adjustment modes for fine tuning. You can then easily complete
tuning by increasing or decreasing the bandwidth response level (P2.031). Follow the tuning procedure
in Section 5.1.
Setting Parameter
Adjustment mode Inertia estimation
value Manual Auto
P1.037, P2.000,
P2.004, P2.006,
P2.023, P2.024,
P2.025, P2.043,
Fixed set value of
0 Manual P2.044, P2.045, N/A
P1.037
P2.046, P2.049,
P2.089, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
P1.037, P2.000,
P2.004, P2.006,
P2.023, P2.024,
P2.025, P2.043,
Gain adjustment
mode 1
P2.046, P2.049,
P2.089, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
P2.000, P2.004,
P2.006, P2.023,
P2.024, P2.025,
Gain adjustment Fixed set value of P1.037 P2.043, P2.044,
2
mode 2 P1.037 P2.031 P2.045, P2.046,
P2.049, P2.089,
P2.098, P2.099,
P2.101, P2.102
P2.000, P2.004,
P2.006, P2.023,
Gain adjustment P2.024, P2.025,
mode 3 (only when P1.037
Fixed set value of P2.043, P2.044,
3 two dimensional P2.031
P1.037 P2.045, P2.046,
control function is P2.089
enabled) P2.049, P2.098,
P2.099, P2.101,
P2.102
Gain adjustment
4 Reset to default gain value
mode 4
Note: when the two dimensional control function is disabled (P2.094 [Bit 12] = 0), the effect of gain adjustment mode 3
is equivalent to that of gain adjustment mode 2, so setting P2.089 is invalid in that scenario.
8-74
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P2.033 Reserved
Address: 0244H
8
P2.034 Speed command error warning 0245H
Settings:
In Speed mode, this parameter sets the acceptable difference between the command speed and the
feedback speed. If the difference is greater than this value, AL007 occurs.
Address: 0246H
P2.035 Excessive deviation of Position command warning 0247H
Settings:
In Position mode, this parameter sets the condition of acceptable difference between the command
position and the feedback position. If the difference is greater than this value, AL009 occurs.
Address: 0248H
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Refer to the description of P2.010. There is no physical pin for DI9 on all models. DI9 is a virtual digital
input which you can use when the number of physical DI points is insufficient and trigger through
commuicaiton. You can set this virtual DI for a normally closed contact if the DI has to switch on as soon
as power is applied, such as DI.SON.
8-75
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 024AH
P2.037 DI10 functional planning 024BH
0x0000 - 0x015F
8
Settings:
Refer to the description of P2.010. There is no physical pin for DI10 on all models. DI10 is a virtual
digital input which you can use when the number of physical DI points is insufficient and trigger through
communication. You can set this virtual DI for a normally closed contact if the DI has to swtich on as
soon as power is applied, such as DI.SON.
Address: 024CH
P2.038 DI11 functional planning 024DH
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
Refer to the description of P2.010. There is no physical pin for DI11 on all models. DI11 is a virtual digital
input which you can use when the number of physical DI points is insufficient and trigger through
communication. You can set this virtual DI for a normally closed conact if the DI has to swtich on as soon
as power is applied, such as DI.SON.
Address: 024EH
P2.039 DI12 functional planning 024FH
0x0000 - 0x015F
Settings:
communication. You can set this virtual DI for a normally closed contact if the DI has to switch on as
soon as power is applied, such as DI.SON.
8-76
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0250H
0x0000 - 0x015F
8
Settings:
communication. You set this virtual DI for a normally closed contact if the DI has to switch on as soon as
power is applied, such as DI.SON.
Address: 0252H
0x0000 - 0x013F
Settings:
P2.042 Reserved
Address: 0256H
P2.043 Notch filter frequency (2) 0257H
Settings:
The second setting for resonance frequency. This function is disabled if P2.044 is 0.
Address: 0258H
P2.044 Notch filter attenuation level (2) 0259H
Settings:
The second Notch filter attenuation level. A value of 5 indicates -5 dB.
8-77
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 025AH
P2.045 Notch filter frequency (3) 025BH
8 Format:
Settings:
The third setting for resonance frequency. This function is disabled if P2.046 is 0.
Address: 025CH
P2.046 Notch filter attenuation level (3) 025DH
Settings:
The third Notch filter attenuation level. A value of 5 indicates -5 dB.
Address: 025EH
P2.047 Auto resonance suppression mode 025FH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x01F2
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Auto resonance suppression function Z Fixed resonance suppression parameter
Y Fixed resonance suppression parameter U Reserved
 X: auto resonance suppression function
0: disable auto resonance suppression. After the function is disabled, the existing resonance
suppression parameter values do not change.
1: auto resonance suppression mode 1; when the servo determines it is stable* 2, the servo stores
the resonance suppression points to EEPROM (non-volatile memory for parameters) and
disables the auto resonance suppression function (X = 0). Before the servo is stable,
(1) If you cycle power on the servo drive, the found resonance suppression points are lost
and will not be saved. The servo searches for the resonance suppression points again.
(2) If you switch the setting of X from 1 to 0, the known resonance suppression points will be
stored to EEPROM.
(3) If you keep the setting of X as 1, the known resonance suppression points will not be
cleared, but they are not written to EEPROM yet. They are written to EEPROM when the
servo determines it is stable.
8-78
ASDA-B3 Parameters
2: auto resonance suppression mode 2; when the servo determines it is stable*2, the servo stores
the resonance suppression points to EEPROM (non-volatile memory for parameters). In this
mode, the searching cycle continues until the 5 sets of resonance suppression parameters are
8
set, then the auto resonance suppression function is disabled (X = 0). Before the servo is stable,
(1) If you cycle power on the servo drive, the resonance suppression points that are not yet
stored to EEPROM are lost and will not be saved. The resonance suppression points that
have been stored to EEPROM are not affected.
(2) If you switch the setting of X from 2 to 0, the known resonance suppression points will be
stored to EEPROM.
(3) If you keep the setting of X as 2, the known resonance suppression points will not be
cleared, but they are not written to EEPROM yet. They are written to EEPROM when the
servo determines it is stable.

Note:
1. If you switch the setting of X from 0 to 1 or 2, the system clears the unfixed Notch filter, and sets the
frequency to 1,000 Hz and the suppression level to 0 dB.
2. The servo determines it is stable when the following conditions are met: resonances have been
suppressed, no other interference that affects the operation is found, and the motor speed is maintained
at above 10 rpm for 3 minutes.
 Y: fixed resonance suppression parameter
In auto resonance suppression mode, set the Notch filters to use manual resonance suppression.
Bit 3 2 1 0

0: auto resonance suppression
Notch 1
Bit 0 1: manually set the first set of resonance suppression
auto / manual setting
parameters
Notch 2
Bit 1 1: manually set the second set of resonance suppression
parameters
Notch 3
Bit 2 1: manually set the third set of resonance suppression
parameters
Notch 4
Bit 3 1: manually set the fourth set of resonance suppression
parameters
 Z: fixed resonance suppression parameter
In auto resonance suppression mode, set the Notch filters to use manual resonance suppression.
Bit 3 2 1 0

Notch 5
Bit 0 1: manually set the fifth set of resonance suppression
parameters
Example: if P2.047 = 0x0021, and the auto resonance suppression function is enabled, the servo
searches for the resonance point and suppresses it. When you set Y [Bit 1] to 1, you manually set
the second set of resonance suppression parameters. Then, if the servo finds 2 resonance points,
8-79
Parameters ASDA-B3
it writes the data of the 1st point to the 1st set of resonance suppression parameters and the data
of the 2nd point to the 3rd set of resonance suppression parameters. That is, it skips the 2nd set of
parameters.
8 P2.048
Default: 100
Auto resonance detection level
Control mode: All

Address: 0260H
0261H
Settings:
The smaller this parameter value, the more sensitive it is to resonance. The larger this parameter value,
the less sensitive it is to resonance.
Address: 0262H
P2.049 Speed detection filter and jitter suppression 0263H
Operation
interface:
Unit: 1 ms 0.1 ms - -
Setting range: 0.0 - 100.0 0 - 1000 - -
Example: 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms - -
Settings:
Sets the filter for speed estimation. Adjusting this parameter can improve the extent of the speed jitter,
but when the value is too high, the phase margin affecting the speed loop decreases, and thus makes
the system unstable.
Address: 0264H
P2.050 Pulse Clear mode 0265H
Settings:
Refer to Table 8.1 for digital input descriptions. Set digital input (DI) as CCLR to enable the Pulse Clear
function. If this DI is on, the accumulated position error is reset to 0.
When P2.050 = 0: DI.CCLR is rising-edge triggered.
When P2.050 = 1: DI.CCLR is level triggered.
P2.051 Reserved
8-80
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0268H
P2.052▲ Indexing coordinates scale 0269H
Unit: PUU Setting range: 0 - 1000000000
Format:
Settings:
Sets the scale of the indexing coordinates, indexing command position, and indexing feedback position.
8
If the value is too small, it may cause errors in the indexing coordinates. The ranges of values for
P2.052 are:
16777216 P1.045
P2.052 > 1.05 x Maximum motor speed (rpm) x x
60000 P1.044
P1.045
P2.052 > 279.62 x Maximum motor speed (rpm) x
P1.044
Address: 026AH
P2.053 Position integral compensation 026BH
Settings:
Increase the position control integral compensation to reduce the position steady-state errors.
If the value is too high, it may cause position overshoot and noise.
P2.054 -
Reserved
P2.059
Address: 0278H
P2.060 E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N2) 0279H
Settings:
The numerator of the E-Gear ratio can be selected with DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 (refer to Table 8.1).
If both DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 are not defined, P1.044 is the default numerator of the E-Gear ratio.
Switch DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 only when the servo is stopped in order to avoid mechanical vibration.
GNUM0, GNUM1
1st numerator (P1.044) Position

2nd numerator (P2.060) command
3rd numerator (P2.061) moving filter
Pulse (P1.068)
4th numerator (P2.062)
----------------------------
Denominator (P1.045) Smooth filter
(P1.008)
Pulse
Error
Feedback pulse
8-81
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 027AH
P2.061 E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N3) 027BH
8 Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 027CH
P2.062 E-Gear ratio (numerator) (N4) 027DH
Settings:
P2.063 -
Reserved
P2.064
Address: 0282H
P2.065 Special bit register 0283H
Default: 0x0104 Control mode: PT / PR / S / Sz
Unit: - Setting range: 0 - 0xFFFF
Format: HEX Data size: -
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Methods for regenerative 0: determined by the servo’s internal algorithm.
Bit 3
energy consumption 1: determined by the DC Bus voltage.
Pulse error (pulse
frequency is too high) 0: enable the function.
Bit 6
protection function in PT 1: disable the function.
mode
Bit 7 Reserved -
U, V, W wiring error 0: disable the function.
Bit 8
detection function 1: enable the function.
U, V, W disconnection 0: disable the function.
Bit 9
detection function 1: enable the function.
The ZCLAMP function is enabled when all the following
conditions are met.
Bit 10 ZCLAMP function selection Condition 1: Speed mode
Condition 2: DI.ZCLAMP is on
Condition 3: motor speed is slower than the value of P1.038
8-82
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Bit 10
 Bit 10 = 0 and command source is the analog voltage.
The ZCLAMP function uses the analog Speed command without acceleration or deceleration to
determine if this function should be enabled. The motor is clamped at the position where ZCLAMP
8
conditions are met.
 Bit 10 = 0 and command source is the internal register.

The ZCLAMP function uses the register Speed command with acceleration or deceleration to
determine if this function should be enabled. The motor is clamped at the position where ZCLAMP
conditions are met.
 Bit 10 = 1 and command source is the analog voltage.

ZCLAMP function uses the analog Speed command without acceleration / deceleration to determine if
this function is enabled. When ZCLAMP conditions are met, the motor speed decelerates to 0 rpm by
S-curve deceleration. If ZCLAMP conditions are not met, the motor follows the analog Speed command
through the S-curve.
8-83
Parameters ASDA-B3
8
 Bit 10 = 1 and command source is the internal register.
ZCLAMP function uses the register Speed command with acceleration or deceleration to determine if
this function should be enabled. When ZCLAMP conditions are met, the motor speed is set to 0 rpm.

0: disable PL / NL pulse inhibit function.
In PT mode, the servo drive receives pulse position
commands for both positive- and negative-direction
operations whether the motor reaches the NL or PL.
1: enable PL / NL pulse inhibit function.
In PT mode, if the motor reaches the PL, the servo drive
Bit 11 Pulse inhibit function switch receives pulse position commands for negative-direction
opertaion and stops receiving pulse position commands
for positive-direction operataion.
In PT mode, if the motor reaches the NL, the servo drive
receives pulse position commands for positive-direction
operation and stops receiving pulse position commands
for negative-direction operation.
Leak phase detection 0: enable the leak phase (AL022) detection function.
Bit 12
function 1: disable the leak phase (AL022) detection function.
Encoder output error 0: enable encoder output error (AL018) detection function.
Bit 13
detection function 1: disable encoder output error (AL018) detection function.
Bit 14 Reserved -
0: the compensation value remains unchanged when motor
Friction compensation mode speed is slower than the value of P1.038.
Bit 15
selection 1: the compensation value reduces to 0 when motor speed is
slower than the value of P1.038.
8-84
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0284H
P2.066 Special bit register 2 0285H
Format:
Settings:
Bit 7 6
HEX
5 4 3 2 1 0
Data size: 16-bit
8
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

0: enable the function, so the low voltage error is not cleared
Low voltage error automatically.
Bit 2
(AL003) latch switch 1: disable the function, so the low voltage error is cleared
automatically.
Bit 3 Reserved -
AL044 detection (servo 0: enable the function.
Bit 4 function overload
warning) function switch 1: disable the function.
Bit 5 Reserved -
0: disable the function, so leak phase error (AL022) is cleared
automatically.
Bit 6 Leak phase error latch
1: enable the function, so leak phase error (AL022) is not
cleared automatically.
Low voltage error 0: set AL003 as WARN.
Bit 9 (AL003) error type
selection 1: set AL003 as ALM.

RST leak phase (AL022) 0: set AL002 as WARN.
Bit 12
error type selection 1: set AL002 as ALM.
P2.067 Reserved
8-85
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0288H
P2.068 Following error compensation switch 0289H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX
High bit
Data size: 32-bit
Low bit
D C B A U Z Y X
A Reserved X Following error compensation switch
B Reserved Y Reserved
C Reserved Z DI.STP triggering method
D Reserved U Reserved
 X: following error compensation switch (functions under the condition of P1.036 > 1)
0: disable following error compensation
1: enable following error compensation
 Z: DI.STP triggering method
0: DI.STP is rising-edge triggered
1: DI.STP is level triggered
Address: 028AH
P2.069● Absolute encoder 028BH
Settings:
U Z Y X
Index coordinates function setting when
X Operation mode setting Z
overflow occurs
Pulse command setting when absolute
Y U Reserved
position is lost
 X: operation mode setting
0: incremental type. An absolute type motor can be operated as an incremental type motor.
1: absolute type. This setting is only applicable to an absolute type motor. If it is used for an
incremental type motor, AL069 occurs.
 Y: pulse command setting when absolute position is lost
0: when AL060 or AL06A occurs, the system cannot accept a pulse command.
1: when AL060 or AL06A occurs, the system can accept a pulse command.
8-86
ASDA-B3 Parameters
 Z*: index coordinates function setting when overflow occurs
0: index coordinates are lost when overflow occurs.
1: index coordinates are not affected by overflow, but absolute coordinates are not retained.
8
Note: this function is coming soon.
Address: 028CH
P2.070 Read data selection 028DH
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

0: PUU.
Bit 0 DI/DO data unit setting
1: pulse.
Communication data 0: PUU.
Bit 1
unit setting 1: pulse.
0: overflow warning, including AL289 (PUU) and AL062 (pulse).
Bit 2 Overflow warning setting
1: no overflow warning.
Address: 028EH
P2.071■ Absolute position homing 028FH
Settings:
When P2.071 is 1, the current absolute position of the encoder is the home position. Set P2.008 to 271
and then you can enable this function.
P2.072 -
Reserved
P2.088
Address: 02B2H
P2.089 Command response gain 02B3H
Settings:
Increasing this gain speeds up the responsiveness of the Position command and shortens the tuning
time, but when the gain is too large, it causes position overshoot which leads to machine jitter.
Note: enable the two-degrees-of-freedom control function (P2.094 [Bit 12] = 1) before adjusting this parameter.
8-87
Parameters ASDA-B3
P2.090 -
Reserved
P2.093
Address: 02BCH
8
P2.094▲ Special bit register 3 02BDH
0x1010
Default: Control mode: PT / PR / S / Sz
0x0010 (B3-F)
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0xF3F6
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

0: disable new dynamic brake
Bit 4 Dynamic brake options 1: enable new dynamic brake and force use the DC Bus
voltage to determine the timing of regenerative energy
consumption
AL016 IGBT overheat 0: enable AL016 IGBT overheat alarm
Bit 5
alarm switch 1: disable AL016 IGBT overheat alarm

0: disable first set of vibration elimination
First set of vibration 1: enable first set of vibration elimination (P1.089 - P1.091)
Bit 8
elimination Vibration elimination takes effect only when the two-degrees-
of-freedom control function (P2.094 [Bit 12]) is enabled.
0: disable second set of vibration elimination
1: enable second set of vibration elimination (P1.092 -
Second set of vibration
Bit 9 P1.094)
elimination
Vibration elimination takes effect only when the two-degrees-
of-freedom control function (P2.094 [Bit 12]) is enabled.
0: disable two-degrees-of-freedom control function (A2 and
Two-degrees-of-freedo B2 models do not have this function.)
Bit 12
control function
1: enable two-degrees-of-freedom control function
Address: 02BEH
P2.095 Notch filter bandwidth (1) 02BFH
Settings:
The first value of resonance width. This function is disabled if P2.024 is 0. P2.023, P2.024, and P2.095
are the first Notch filter parameters.
8-88
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 02C0H
P2.096 Notch filter bandwidth (2) 02C1H
Format:
Settings:
The second value of resonance width. This function is disabled if P2.044 is 0. P2.043, P2.044, and
8
P2.096 are the second Notch filter parameters.
Address: 02C2H
Settings:
The third value of resonance width. This function is disabled if P2.046 is 0. P2.045, P2.046, and P2.097
are the third Notch filter parameters.
Address: 02C4H
P2.098 Notch filter frequency (4) 02C5H
Settings:
The fourth value of resonance frequency. This function is disabled if P2.099 is 0. P2.098, P2.099, and
P2.100 are the fourth set of Notch filter parameters .
Address: 02C6H
P2.099 Notch filter attenuation level (4) 02C7H
Settings:
The fourth Notch filter attenuation level. For example, if you set the attenuation level to 5, then the value
is -5 dB.
8-89
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 02C8H
8 Format:
Settings:
The fourth value of resonance width. This function is disabled if P2.099 is 0. P2.098, P2.099, and
P2.100 are the fourth set of Notch filter parameters.
Address: 02CAH
P2.101 Notch filter frequency (5) 02CBH
Settings:
The fifth value of resonance frequency. This function is disabled if P2.102 is 0. P2.101, P2.102, and
P2.103 are the fifth set of Notch filter parameters.
Address: 02CCH
P2.102 Notch filter attenuation level (5) 02CDH
Settings:
The fifth Notch filter attenuation level. For example, if you set the attenuation level to 5, then the value is
-5 dB.
Address: 02CEH
P2.103 Notch filter bandwidth (5) 02CFH
Settings:
The fifth value of resonance width. This function is disabled if P2.102 is 0. P2.101, P2.102, and P2.103
are the fifth set of Notch filter parameters.
8-90
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 02D0H
P2.104 P/PI torque switching command condition 02D1H
Format:
Settings:
When the Torque command exceeds P2.104, the speed controller gain is switched from PI to P in order
8
to reduce response overshoot.
Address: 02D2H
P2.105 Automatic gain adjustment level 1 02D3H
Settings:
Use this parameter to adjust the bandwidth when auto-tuning. If the value is larger, the bandwidth after
auto-tuning is higher, but if the bandwidth margin is insufficient, it may cause machine jitter. If the value
is smaller, the bandwidth after auto-tuning is lower, but the response is slower.
Value (dB)
Higher
bandwidth
Moderate
bandwidth
Lower
bandwidth
Frequency
(Hz)
P2.105 > 11
P2.105 = 11
P2.105 < 11
Address: 02D4H
P2.106 Automatic gain adjustment level 2 02D5H
Settings:
Use this parameter to adjust the maximum allowable overshoot when auto-tuning. The overshoot range
is set for either the user or the machine. If the value is larger, the maximum overshoot allowed by
auto-tuning is greater, but the response is faster. If the value is smaller, the maximum overshoot
allowed by auto-tuning is smaller, but the response is slower.
8-91
Parameters ASDA-B3
Pulse number
(Pulse)
Feedback
8
P2.106
Command
Time (sec)
P2.107 -
Reserved
P2.111
Address: 02E0H
P2.112▲ Special bit register 4 02E1H
Settings:
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Bit 0 Reserved -
0: disable AL089
Bit 1 Enable or disable AL089
1: enable AL089
Bit 2 Reserved -
0: reserved
Bit 3 Auto gain adjustment mode
1: cycle adjustment
8-92
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P3.xxx Communication parameters
Address: 0300H
P3.000● Address
0301H
8
Default: 0x007F Control mode: All
0x0001 - 0x007F
0x0001 - 0xFFFF (B3-E)
Settings:
U Z YX
UZYX Communication address setting
When using RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive can set only one address. Setting more than one
addresses causes abnormal communications.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive in the communication network.
It is applicable to RS-485, CANopen, DMCNET, and EtherCAT.
When the communication address of MODBUS is 0xFF, the servo drive automatically receives and
replies the data regardless of the address, but P3.000 cannot be set to 0xFF.
Address: 0302H
P3.001● Transmission speed 0303H
0x0203 (B3-L, M, E)
0x3203 (B3-F)
0x0000 - 0x0405 (B3-L, M, E)
0x0000 - 0xF405 (B3-F)
Settings:
U Z Y X
X RS-485 transmission speed Z CANopen / DMCNET transmission speed
Y Reserved U DMCNET motion card
 X: RS-485 transmission speed
0: 4800 bps 1: 9600 bps 2: 19200 bps
3: 38400 bps 4: 57600 bps 5: 115200 bps
 Z: CANopen / DMCNET transmission speed
0: 125 Kbps 1: 250 Kbps 2: 500 Kbps
3: 750 Kbps 4: 1.0 Mbps -
8-93
Parameters ASDA-B3
 U: DMCNET motion card
0: use Delta’s controller, such as PLC or HMI
3: use Delta’s motion card
8 Note:
1.
2.
The communication speed of USB is set at 1.0 Mbps and cannot be changed.
If this parameter is set through CANopen, only Z can be set and the others remain unchanged.
3. After the Z value is set, cycle the power to take effect.
Address: 0304H
P3.002 Communication protocol 0305H
Settings:
Definition of each value:
0: 7, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII) 1: 7, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII) 2: 7, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)

3: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII) 4: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII) 5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU) 7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU) 8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 0306H
P3.003 Modbus communication error handling 0307H
Settings:
0: display warning and let motor continue operating.
1: display warning and let motor decelerate to a stop. Deceleration time is set in P5.003.B.
Address: 0308H
P3.004 Communication timeout 0309H
Unit: sec Setting range: 0 - 20 (0: disable this function)
Settings:
If the value is not 0, communication timeout is enabled immediately.
P3.005 Reserved
8-94
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 030CH
P3.006■ Digital input (DI) control switch 030DH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x1FFF
Format:
Settings:
Source of the DI that controls the switch. Each bit of this parameter determines one input source of
8
DI signal: Bit 0 - Bit 8 correspond to DI1 - DI9; Bit 9 - Bit 12 correspond to DI10 - DI13.
The setting for each bit is as follows:
0: DI status is controlled by the external terminal block.
1: DI status is controlled by P4.007.
For more information on DI functional planning, please see:
DI1 - DI8: P2.010 - P2.017
DI9 - DI13: P2.036 - P2.040
Address: 030EH
P3.007 Modbus communication response delay time 030FH
Unit: 0.5 ms Setting range: 0 - 1000
Settings:
Delay the time of RS-485 communication response from servo drive to controller.
P3.008 Reserved
Address: 0312H
P3.009 Communication synchronization 0313H
Default: 0x5055 Control mode: CANopen
Unit: - Setting range: Shown as follows
Settings:
The synchronous setting is divided into U, Z, Y, and X (hexadecimal):
Digit U Z Y X
Range of synchronous
Function Target value Deadband -
error
Range 1-9 0-9 0-F -
The slave synchronizes with the master via SYNC. The definition is as follows:
 X: reserved.
 Y: set the size of deadband (unit: μsec). If the deviation between the SYNC arrival time and the
target value does not exceed the deadband, a correction is not needed.
 Z: target value of SYNC arrival time. The standard value is 500 μsec, but you need to take the
8-95
Parameters ASDA-B3
initial lead into account.
Target value = 400 + 10 x T. For example, if T = 5, the target value is 450.
 U: if the deviation between the SYNC arrival time and the target value is smaller than the range,
8
it means the synchronization is successful (unit: 10 μs).
Address: 0314H
P3.010 CANopen / DMCNET protocol 0315H
Default: 0x1010 Control mode: CANopen / DMCNET
Settings:
Communication protocol is divided into U, Z, Y, and X (hexadecimal):
Digit U Z Y X
Motor status when
PDO alarm is cleared
Function Source for torque limit communication error -
automatically or not
occurs
Range 0-1 0-1 0-1 -
 X: reserved.
 Y: motor status when communication error occurs.
0: motor keeps operating when communication error (AL170) occurs (only applicable in DMCNET
mode and CANopen B).
1: motor switches to Servo Off status when communication error (AL180) occurs.
 Z: source for torque limit (only applicable in DMCNET mode).
0: communication commands are the source for the torque limit.
1: DI commands are the source for the torque limit.
 U: PDO alarm is cleared automatically or not
0: if PDO error (AL121 - AL132) occurs, the PDO alarm must be cleared by DI.ARST, NMT: reset
node, or 0x6040 fault reset.
1: if PDO error (AL121 - AL132) disappears, the alarm is automatically cleared.
Address: 0316H
P3.011 CANopen / DMCNET options 0317H
Default: 0x0000 Control mode: CANopen / DMCNET
Unit: - Setting range: Shown as follows
Settings:
U Z Y X
8-96
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Communication setting is divided into X, Y, Z, and U (hexadecimal):

Digit U Z Y X
Function - - - Parameter is stored in EEPROM or not
Range - - - 0-1
 X: parameter is stored in EEPROM or not
0: parameters are not stored in EEPROM.
1: when you write parameters through CANopen / DMCNET PDOs, parameters are stored in
8
EEPROM.
Note: if you set X to 1 and continuously write parameters through DMCNET PDO, it shortens the lifetime of the
EEPROM.
Address: 0318H
P3.012 Fieldbus support setting 0319H
Default: 0x0000 Control mode: CANopen / DMCNET / EtherCAT
Settings:
U Z Y X
Digit U Z Y X
Load in CANopen / DMCNET /

Function Reserved Reserved Reserved
EtherCAT values
Range - 0-1 - -
X: reserved.
Y: reserved.
Z: P parameters are overwritten by the CANopen / DMCNET / EtherCAT parameters.
Z = 0: when you cycle the power on the servo drive or reset the communication, P parameters in the
following table load the values in CANopen / DMCNET / EtherCAT mode.
Z = 1: when you cycle the power on the servo drive or reset the communication, P parameters in the
following table retain the same settings and do not load the values in CANopen / DMCNET /
EtherCAT mode.
8-97
Parameters ASDA-B3
Related variables for Z settings:

Variables during initialization P3.012.Z = 0 P3.012.Z = 1 Note
P1.032 0x0010 EEPROM -
P2.035 50331648 EEPROM -
8
P1.047 100 EEPROM -
P1.049 0 EEPROM -
P1.038 100 EEPROM -
P6.001 0 EEPROM -
Acc (P1.034) 200 EEPROM Used in PV and PP modes
Dec (P1.034) 200 EEPROM Used in PV and PP modes
Torque slope (P1.034) 200 EEPROM Used in PT mode
P1.044 1 EEPROM -
P1.045 1 EEPROM -
Depending on the
P1.055 EEPROM -
motor specifications
P5.008 2147483647 EEPROM -
P5.009 -2147483648 EEPROM -
Methods to write parameters to EEPROM (even when the power is off):
SDO: parameters are stored in EEPROM when written.
PDO: refer to the setting of P3.011.X. (X = 1: when you write parameters through PDOs, parameters are
stored in EEPROM; X = 0: when you write parameters through PDOs, parameters are not stored in
EEPROM.)
Note: when using OD 1010 Store Parameter, the servo drive stores the CANopen OD in non-volatile memory.
If P3.012.Z = 0, then the initial values are the corresponding CANopen OD vaues specified in the CANopen
Stardard document. If P3.012.Z = 1, then the initial values are the values listed in the above table.
P3.013 -
P3.017 Reserved
Address: 0324H
P3.018 EtherCAT special function switch 0325H
Default: 0x00002000 Control mode: EtherCAT
Settings:
High bit Low bit
D C B A U Z Y X
A Reserved X Reserved
B Reserved Y Reserved
AL185 communication disconnection
C Reserved Z
detection setting
D Reserved U Reserved
 Z: AL185 communication disconnection detection setting
0: disconnection detection starts after EtherCAT communication enters OP state.
8-98
ASDA-B3 Parameters
1: disconnection detection starts after EtherCAT communication enters INIT state.
2: disconnection detection disabled.
8
P3.019 -
P3.021 Reserved
Address: 032CH
P3.022 EtherCAT PDO timeout setting 032DH
Default: 0xFF04 Control mode: EtherCAT
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0002 - 0xFF14
Settings:
When using the PDO to transmit data periodically, use this parameter to set the timeout setting.
The following two sets of digits set the alarm conditions for AL180 and AL3E3 respectively to ensure
that the drive receives the PDO properly. When one of the alarm occurs, it means the allowable
duration for packet loss exceeds the set range.
U Z Y X
Digit UZ YX
Function AL180 alarm condition AL3E3 alarm condition
Range 0x00 (disabled) - 0xFF (default) 02 - 14
 YX: AL3E3 alarm condition (allowable cycle for elapsed time); applicable to IP / CSP / CSV / CST
modes.
AL3E3 occurs when the servo drive does not receive the PDO within the set cycle.
When the communication cycle is 4 ms and you set this parameter to 02 (allow two cycles),
it means AL3E3 occurs when the servo drive does not receive any PDO within 8 ms.
 UZ: AL180 alarm condition (allowable duration for elapsed time); applicable to all motion modes.
AL180 occurs when the servo drive does not receive the PDO within the set duration (unit: ms).
Set 0x01 for 1 ms, 0x02 for 2 ms, and 0xFF for 255 ms.
8-99
Parameters ASDA-B3
P4.xxx Diagnosis parameters
Address: 0400H
P4.000★ Fault record (N)
0401H
8
Settings:
The last abnormal status record.
Low word (LXXXX): the alarm number.
High word (hYYYY): the alarm number.
Address: 0402H
P4.001★ Fault record (N-1)
0403H
Settings:
The second to last abnormal status record.
Address: 0404H
0405H
Settings:
The third to last abnormal status record.
Address: 0406H
0407H
Settings:
The fourth to last abnormal status record.
8-100
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0408H
0409H
Format:
Settings:
HEX
The fifth to last abnormal status record.

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 040AH
P4.005 Servo motor JOG control
040BH
Unit: rpm Setting range: 0 - 5000 (rotary motor)
Settings:
The control methods are as follows:
1. Operation test:
After the JOG speed is set by P4.005, the panel displays “JOG”. Pressing the UP key controls the
JOG operation in the positive direction; pressing the DOWN key controls the JOG operation in the
negative direction. Stop pressing to stop the JOG operation. If there is any error in this setting, then
the motor cannot operate. The maximum JOG speed is the maximum speed of the servo motor.
2. DI control:
If you set the DI to JOGU and JOGD (refer to Table 8.1), then the JOG operation in the positive or
negative direction is controlled with this DI.

3. Communication control:
1 - 5000: JOG speed 4998: JOG operation in counterclockwise direction
4999: JOG operation in clockwise direction 0: stop operation
Note: when using communication to write values, and the frequency is high, set P2.030 to 5.
Address: 040CH
P4.006■ Digital output register (readable and writable)
040DH
Settings:
bit 00: corresponds to DO code = 0x30 bit 08: corresponds to DO code = 0x38
bit 01: corresponds to DO code = 0x31 bit 09: corresponds to DO code = 0x39
bit 02: corresponds to DO code = 0x32 bit 10: corresponds to DO code = 0x3A
bit 03: corresponds to DO code = 0x33 bit 11: corresponds to DO code = 0x3B
bit 04: corresponds to DO code = 0x34 bit 12: corresponds to DO code = 0x3C
bit 05: corresponds to DO code = 0x35 bit 13: corresponds to DO code = 0x3D
8-101
Parameters ASDA-B3
bit 06: corresponds to DO code = 0x36 bit 14: corresponds to DO code = 0x3E
bit 07: corresponds to DO code = 0x37 bit 15: corresponds to DO code = 0x3F
If you set P2.018 to 0x0130, then the output of DO#1 is the bit 00 status of P4.006, and so forth.
Set the DO codes (0x30 - 0x3F) through communication DO, and then write to P4.006.
8 P4.007■
Default:
Multi-function for digital input
0x0000 Control mode: All

Address: 040EH
040FH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x3FFF
Settings:
The source of the DI input signal can be the external terminal (DI1 - DI5) or the software (SDI1 - SDI5
corresponding to Bit 0 - 4 of P4.007), which is determined by P3.006. If the corresponding bit of P3.006
is 1, which means the source is the software SDI (P4.007); if the corresponding bit is 0, then the source
is the hardware DI. See the following figure:
P3.006
External DI: DI1 - DI5
DI after
Software DI: SDI1 - combination
SDI5
(P4.007 bit)
Read parameters: shows the DI status after combining external DI and software DI.
Write parameters: writes the software SDI status. This function is the same whether using the panel or
communication to set the parameter.
For example: if the read value of P4.007 is 0x0011, it means DI1 and DI5 are on; if the written value of
P4.007 is 0x0011, it means the software SDI1 and SDI5 are on. Refer to P2.010 - P2.014 for more
information on digital input pins (DI1 - DI5).
Address: 0410H
P4.008★ Input status of servo drive panel (read-only)
0411H
Unit: - Setting range: Read-only
Settings:
Use this communication parameter to read and check if the five keys (MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT, and
SET) can function normally.
8-102
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0412H
P4.009★ Digital output status (read-only)
0413H
Format:
Settings:
HEX Data size:
There is no difference whether reading by panel or through communication.

16-bit
8
Address: 0414H
P4.010▲■ Adjustment function
0415H
Settings:
4: execute current encoder (W phase) offset
0: reserved
adjustment
1: execute analog speed input offset adjustment 5: execute 1 - 4 offset adjustment
2: execute analog torque input offset adjustment 6 - 14: reserved

3: execute current encoder (V phase) offset
-
adjustment
Note: the function must be enabled by setting P2.008. When adjusting, the external analog voltage wiring connected
to the torque needs to be removed completely and must be in the Servo Off state.
Address: 0416H
P4.011 Analog speed input (1) offset adjustment
0417H
Settings:
Manually adjust the offset. The function must be enabled by setting P2.008. Do not change the auxiliary
adjustment as this parameter cannot be reset.
Address: 0418H
P4.012 Analog speed input (2) offset adjustment
0419H
Settings:
8-103
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 041AH
P4.013 Analog torque input (1) offset adjustment
041BH
8 Format:
Settings:
Address: 041CH
P4.014 Analog torque input (2) offset adjustment
041DH
Settings:
Address: 041EH
P4.015 Current encoder (V1 phase) offset adjustment
041FH
Settings:
Address: 0420H
P4.016 Current encoder (V2 phase) offset adjustment
0421H
Settings:
8-104
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0422H
P4.017 Current encoder (W1 phase) offset adjustment
0423H
Format:
Settings:
8
Address: 0424H
P4.018 Current encoder (W2 phase) offset adjustment
0425H
Settings:
Address: 0426H
P4.019 IGBT NTC adjustment level (cannot reset)
0427H
Settings:
Cool down the drive to 25°C (77°F) before adjustment. The function must be enabled by setting P2.008.
Address: 0428H
0429H
Settings:
Offset adjustment value (cannot reset). The function must be enabled by setting P2.008.
8-105
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 042AH
042BH
8 Format:
Settings:
Offset adjustment value (cannot reset). The function must be enabled by setting P2.008.
Address: 042CH
P4.022 Analog speed input offset
042DH
Default: 0 Control mode: S
Settings:
Manually adjust the offset.
Address: 042EH
P4.023 Analog torque input offset
042FH
Default: 0 Control mode: T
Settings:
Manually adjust the offset.
Address: 0430H
P4.024 Level of undervoltage error
0431H
Unit: V (rms) Setting range: 140 - 190
Settings:
When the voltage of the DC Bus is lower than P4.024*√2, the undervoltage alarm occurs.
8-106
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P5.xxx Motion control parameters
Address: 0500H
P5.000★■ Firmware subversion
0501H
8
Settings:
The low bit is the subversion of the firmware.
P5.001 -
P5.002 Reserved
Address: 0506H
P5.003 Deceleration time for auto-protection
0507H
Default: 0xEEEFEEFF Control mode: PR / S / T
Unit: - Setting range: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFFFF
Settings:
The parameter setting is divided into D, C, B, A, W, Z, Y, and X (hexadecimal), including:
1. Deceleration time when the auto-protection function is enabled: OVF (DO: 0x12, Position command /
feedback overflows), CTO (communication timeout, AL020), SPL, SNL, PL, and NL.
2. Deceleration time for stop command: STP
Digit D C B A W Z Y X
Function STP PFQS CTO OVF SNL SPL NL PL
Range 0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F 0-F
Use 0 - F to index the deceleration time of P5.020 - P5.035. For example: if you set X to A, then the
deceleration time of PL is determined by P5.030.
Address: 0508H
P5.004 Homing methods 0509H
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0x012A
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Homing method Z Limit setting
Y Z pulse setting U Reserved
8-107
Parameters ASDA-B3
Definition of each setting value:
U Z Y X
Reserved Limit setting Z pulse setting Homing method
8
0-1 0-2 0-8
X = 0: homing in forward direction and
define the positive limit as the homing
origin
-
Y = 0: return to Z pulse X = 1: homing in reverse direction and
define the negative limit as the homing
Y = 1: go forward to Z pulse origin
X = 3: homing in reverse direction, ORG:

X = 4: look for Z pulse in forward
direction and define it as the homing
When reaching the limit:
origin
- Z = 0: show error -
X = 5: look for Z pulse in reverse
Z = 1: reverse direction
direction and define it as the homing
origin

Y = 0: return to Z pulse ONOFF as the homing origin
Y = 2: do not look for Z pulse X = 7: homing in reverse direction, ORG:
ONOFF as the homing origin
X = 8: define current position as the

- -
origin
When reaching the limit: X = 9: torque homing in forward direction

Y = 0: return to Z pulse
Z = 0: show error
Z = 1: reverse direction X = A: torque homing in reverse direction
Address: 050AH
P5.005 High speed homing (first speed setting) 050BH
Operation
interface:
Setting range: 0.1 - 2000.0 1 - 20000 - -
Format: DEC DEC - -

Example: 1.5 = 1.5 rpm 15 = 1.5 rpm - -
Settings:
The first speed setting for high speed homing.
First high speed homing First high speed homing
ORG ORG
Z pulse Z pulse
8-108
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 050CH
P5.006 Low speed homing (second speed setting) 050DH
Operation
interface:
8
Setting range: 0.1 - 500.0 1 - 5000 - -
Format: DEC DEC - -

Example: 1.5 = 1.5 rpm 15 = 1.5 rpm - -
Settings:
The second speed setting for low speed homing.
Address: 050EH
P5.007■ Trigger Position command (PR mode only) 050FH
Settings:
Set P5.007 to 0 to start homing.
Set P5.007 to 1 - 99 to execute the specified PR procedure, which is the same as using
DI.CTRG+POSn. You cannot set P5.007 to 100 - 999 as the value exceeds the valid range.
Example: to trigger PR#2

Trigger by DI:
Method 1
Register Position command selection 1 - 99 Bit 1 (DI: 0x12) + Trigger command (DI: 0x08)
Trigger by P5.007:
Method 2
Set P5.007 to 2 to start executing PR#2
Write 1000 to execute stop command, which is the same as DI.STP.

When reading P5.007, if the command is incomplete, the drive reads the current command (1 - 99).
If the command is complete but DO.TPOS is off (motor position not reached), the drive reads the
current command +10000.
If the command is complete and DO.TPOS is on (motor position reached), the drive reads the current
command +20000.
Commands triggered by DI are also applicable.
Example:
If the value read is 3, it means PR#3 is in execution but incomplete. If the value read is 10003, it means
PR#3 completed, but the motor has not reached the target position yet. If the value read is 20003,
it means PR#3 completed and the motor reached the target position.
8-109
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0510H
P5.008 Positive software limit 0511H
Unit: PUU Setting range: -2147483648 to +2147483647
8 Format:
Settings:
In PR mode, if the motor rotates in the positive direction and its feedback position exceeds the value of
P5.008, AL283 occurs.
Address: 0512H
P5.009 Negative software limit 0513H
Default: -2147483648 Control mode: PR
Settings:
In PR mode, if the motor rotates in the negative direction and its feedback position exceeds the value of
P5.009, AL285 occurs.
Address: 0514H
P5.010★■ Data array - data size
0515H
Unit: - Setting range: Read-only
Settings:
Data size (N x 32 bits) means size N of data array.
Address: 0516H
P5.011■ Data array - address for reading and writing
0517H
Unit: - Setting range: 0 to (value set by P5.010 minus 1)
Settings:
Specify the address in the data array when reading and writing data. Refer to Chapter 7 for detailed
instructions.
8-110
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0518H
P5.012■ Data array - window #1 for reading and writing
0519H
Format:
Settings:
Window #1: when you read the parameter with the panel, the value set in P5.011 does not add 1,
8
but reading or writing by other methods adds 1.
Refer to Section 7.2.1 Data array for detailed instructions.
Address: 051AH
051BH
Settings:
Window #2: when you read the parameter with the panel or read and write the parameter through
communication, the value set inP5.011 adds 1, but the panel is write-protected.
P5.014 Reserved
Address: 051EH
P5.015■ PATH#1 - PATH#2 volatile setting
051FH
Settings:
This parameter allows you to write data to the target continuously through communication.
U Z Y X
X PATH#1 volatile setting Z Reserved
Y PATH#2 volatile setting U Reserved
 X: PATH#1 volatile setting
0: non-volatile
1: volatile
 Y: PATH#2 volatile setting
0: non-volatile
1: volatile
8-111
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0520H
P5.016■ Axis position - motor encoder
0521H
8 Format:
Settings:
Read: feedback position of the encoder, which is the monitoring variable 000(00h) + offset value.
Write: write any value to the parameter, and it neither changes the monitoring variable 000(00h) nor
affects the positioning coordinate system. It is only for observation when you adjust the offset value.
P5.017 Reserved
Address: 0524H
P5.018 Axis position - pulse command
0525H
Unit: pulse Setting range: -2147483648 to +2147483647
Settings:
Pulse count from the pulse command.
P5.019 Reserved
Address: 0528H
P5.020 Acceleration / deceleration time (Number #0)
0529H
Unit: ms Setting range: 1 to 65500
Settings:
The duration of acceleration and deceleration in PR mode, which is the length of time to accelerate
from 0 to 3,000 rpm.
Address: 052AH
052BH
Settings:
Refer to P5.020 for the acceleration / deceleration time in PR mode.
8-112
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 052CH
052DH
Format:
Settings:

8
Address: 052EH
052FH
Settings:
Address: 0530H
0531H
Settings:
Address: 0532H
0533H
Settings:
Address: 0534H
0535H
Settings:
8-113
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0536H
0537H
8 Format:
Settings:
Address: 0538H
0539H
Settings:
Address: 053AH
053BH
Settings:
Address: 053CH
053DH
Settings:
Address: 053EH
053FH
Settings:
8-114
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0540H
0541H
Format:
Settings:
DEC Data size:

16-bit
8
Address: 0542H
0543H
Settings:
Address: 0544H
0545H
Settings:
This parameter is for the deceleration time for auto protection, and the default value of this is small
(shorter deceleration time).
Address: 0546H
0547H
Settings:
This parameter is for the deceleration time for auto protection, and the default value of this is small
(shorter deceleration time).
Address: 0548H
P5.036 Capture - start address of data array
0549H
Unit: - Setting range: 0 to (value set by P5.010 minus 1)
Settings:
The first data Capture obtained is saved at this address in the data array. This parameter is only
writable when Capture stops (refer to P5.039).
8-115
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 054AH
P5.037■ Capture－Axis position
054BH
Unit: Pulse unit of capture source Setting range: -2147483648 to +2147483647
8 Format:
Settings:
Displays the axis position of Capture pulse source. Note that this parameter is only writable when
Capture stops (refer to P5.039). If the axis source of Capture is the main encoder, this parameter is
write-protected and the Capture axis position is the feedback position of the motor (monitoring
variable 00h).
Address: 054CH
P5.038■ Capture－Number of capturing times
054DH
Unit: - Setting range: 1 to (value set by P5.010 minus

value set by P5.036)
Settings:
When Capture stops, this parameter indicates the number of data expected to be captured (readable
and writable). When Capture activates, this parameter indicates the remaining number of data to be
captured (read-only); each time it captures one data, the value of P5.038 decrements by 1 until the
value is 0, indicating that capturing is complete.

Note: the total number of data from Capture cannot exceed 100.
Address: 054EH
P5.039■ Capture－Activate CAP control
054FH
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0xF13F
Settings:
U Z Y X
X Capture setting Z Trigger logic
Y Axis source of Capture U Trigger minimum interval
 X: Capture setting
0 Activate Capture Start capturing; after finishing capturing, set to 0

After capturing the first data, reset the position coordinate of the
1 Reset position
first data. The reset coordinate position is set by P5.076
2 Reserved -
3 Execute PR Execute PR#50 after capturing is complete
8-116
ASDA-B3 Parameters
 Y: axis source of Capture
0: Capture is not working
1: reserved
8
2: pulse command (CN1)
3: motor encoder (CN2)
Note: when the source of Compare is the Capture axis, the source of Capture (P5.039.Y) cannot
be changed.
 Z: trigger logic
0: NO (normally open)
1: NC (normally closed)
 U: trigger minimum interval (unit: ms)

Note: refer to Chapter 7 for detailed instructions for Capture.
Address: 0550H
P5.040 Delay time after position reached (Number #0)
0551H
Settings:
The first delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0552H
0553H
Settings:
The second delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0554H
0555H
Settings:
The third delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0556H
0557H
8-117
Parameters ASDA-B3
Settings:
8
The fourth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0558H
0559H
Settings:
The fifth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 055AH
055BH
Settings:
The sixth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 055CH
055DH
Settings:
The seventh delay time of PR mode.
Address: 055EH
055FH
Settings:
The eighth delay time of PR mode.
8-118
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0560H
0561H
Format:
Settings:
DEC
The ninth delay time of PR mode.

Data size: 16-bit
8
Address: 0562H
0563H
Settings:
The tenth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0564H
0565H
Settings:
The eleventh delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0566H
0567H
Settings:
The twelfth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 0568H
0569H
Settings:
The thirteenth delay time of PR mode.
8-119
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 056AH
056BH
8 Format:
Settings:
DEC
The fourteenth delay time of PR mode.

Data size: 16-bit
Address: 056CH
056DH
Settings:
The fifteenth delay time of PR mode.
Address: 056EH
056FH
Settings:
The sixteenth delay time of PR mode.
P5.056 -
P5.059 Reserved
Address: 0578H
P5.060 Target speed setting #0
0579H
Operation
Panel / software Communication Control mode: PR
interface:
Setting range: 0.0 to 6000.0 0 to 60000 - -
Format: DEC DEC - -

Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
First target speed of PR mode.
8-120
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 057AH
P5.061 Target speed setting #1 057BH
Operation
interface:
8
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Second target speed of PR mode.
Address: 057CH
P5.062 Target speed setting #2 057DH
Operation
interface:

Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Third target speed of PR mode.
Address: 057EH
P5.063 Target speed setting #3 057FH
Operation
interface:
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Fourth target speed of PR mode.
8-121
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0580H
P5.064 Target speed setting #4 0581H
Operation
interface:
8
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Fifth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0582H
Operation
interface:

Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Sixth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0584H
Operation
interface:
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Seventh target speed of PR mode.
8-122
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0586H
Operation
interface:
8
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Eighth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0588H
Operation
interface:

Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Ninth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 058AH
P5.069 Target speed setting #9 058BH
Operation
interface:
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Tenth target speed of PR mode.
8-123
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 058CH
P5.070 Target speed setting #10 058DH
Operation
interface:
8
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Eleventh target speed of PR mode.
Address: 058EH
P5.071 Target speed setting #11 058FH
Operation
interface:

Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Twelfth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0590H
Operation
interface:
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Thirteenth target speed of PR mode.
8-124
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0592H
Operation
interface:
8
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Fourteenth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0594H
Operation
interface:

Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Fifteenth target speed of PR mode.
Address: 0596H
Operation
interface:
Format: DEC DEC - -
Example: 15 = 15 rpm 150 = 15 rpm - -
Settings:
Sixteenth target speed of PR mode.
8-125
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0598H
P5.076 Capture - reset position after first data 0599H
Unit: Pulse unit of capture source Setting range: -1073741824 to +1073741823
8 Format:
Settings:
If the position reset function is enabled (P5.039.X [Bit 1] = 1), after the first position data is captured,
the servo resets the coordinates of the first point, which is defined by this parameter.
P5.077 -
P5.092 Reserved
Address: 05BAH
P5.093 Motion control macro command: command parameter #4
05BBH
Settings:
Before executing the macro command, set the relevant parameters in advance. The function of the
parameter is determined by the macro command. Not every macro command requires this parameter.
Address: 05BCH
05BDH
Settings:
Address: 05BEH
05BFH
Settings:
8-126
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 05C0H
05C1H
Format:
Settings:
8
Motion control macro command: issue command / Address: 05C2H

P5.097■ execution result 05C3H
Unit: - Setting range: 0 - 0x099F
Settings:
Write to this parameter to issue a macro command; read this parameter to examine the execution result
of a macro command.
If the command 0x0003 is issued, 0x1003 is returned if successful; and 0xF03X if unsuccessful
(depending on the command description). If you execute a command that is not supported, the failure
code 0xF001 is returned.
The command codes are listed in the following tables:

Parameter and data array protection: password setting, protection activation
Command code
This function can only be executed prior to activating the parameter protection
0x0003
function. When the protection function is activated, the failure code is returned if this
function is executed repeatedly.
P5.093 = parameter groups 5, 6, and 7 are write-protected
0: no protection
1: enable protection
P5.094 = read protection range of parameter and data array (-1 to 7)
-1: parameter groups 5, 6, 7 and data array are readable
0: parameter groups 5, 6, 7 and data array are unreadable
1: parameter groups 5, 6, 7 and data array #100 - 799 are unreadable
Macro parameters 2: parameter groups 5, 6, 7 and data array #200 - 799 are unreadable
7: parameter groups 5, 6, 7 are unreadable, but data array is readable
P5.095 = set new password (1 to 16777215)
P5.096 = confirm new password (1 to 16777215)
Success code
0x1003
Failure code
Read the return value of 0xF031: protection function is activated and cannot be set repeatedly
P5.097 after executing
the macro 0xF032: wrong password setting, P5.095 does not equal P5.096
0xF033: password value exceeds the allowable range (1 to 16777215)
0xF034: protection range P5.094 exceeds the allowable range (-1 to 7)
0xF035: protection level P5.093 exceeds the allowable range (0 to 1)
8-127
Parameters ASDA-B3
Parameter and data array protection: unlock protection

This function can only be executed when the protection function is activated.
When the protection function is unlocked, the failure code is returned if this function is
Command code
executed repeatedly. If the wrong password is entered, failure code 0xEnnn is
0x0004
returned. nnn indicates the remaining attempts to enter the password. The number
8
decrements by 1 after each failed attempt. When the number displays 0, it indicates
the maximum number of failed password attempts has been reached and it is locked.
You can only reset all parameters (P2.008 = 10) to unlock.
Macro parameter P5.096 = enter password (1 to 16777215)
Success code
0x1004
Failure code
0xF041: protection function is unlocked and cannot be unlocked repeatedly
Read the return value 0xF043: password value exceeds the allowable range (1 to 16777215)
of P5.097 after 0xF044: the maximum number of failed password attempts has been reached and it
executing the macro is locked. You can only unlock by resetting the parameters (P2.008 = 10),
but this also resets all parameters to the default values.
0xEnnn: incorrect password setting; failed to unlock
nnn: remaining attempts to enter the password. The number decrements by 1 after
each failed attempt. When the number displays 0, it is locked and does not allow
further attempts.
Address: 05C4H
P5.098 PR# triggered by event rising-edge
05C5H
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0xDDDD
Settings:
U Z Y X
X PR triggered by EV1 rising-edge Z PR triggered by EV3 rising-edge
Y PR triggered by EV2 rising-edge U PR triggered by EV4 rising-edge
 X: PR triggered when EV1 is on
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 Y: PR triggered when EV2 is on
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 Z: PR triggered when EV3 is on
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 U: PR triggered when EV4 is on
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
8-128
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 05C6H
P5.099 PR# triggered by event falling-edge
05C7H
Unit: - Setting range: 0x0000 - 0xDDDD
Format:
Settings:
8
U Z Y X
X PR triggered by EV1 falling-edge Z PR triggered by EV3 falling-edge
Y PR triggered by EV2 falling-edge U PR triggered by EV4 falling-edge
 X: PR triggered when EV1 is off
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 Y: PR triggered when EV2 is off

0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 Z: PR triggered when EV3 is off
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
 U: PR triggered when EV4 is off
0: no action
1 - D: execute PR# 51 - 63
Address: 05C8H
05C9H
Settings:
Window #3: when you read or write the parameter by any method, the value set in P5.011 does
not add 1.
8-129
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 05CAH
05CBH
8 Format:
Settings:
Window #4: when you read or write the parameter by any method, the value set in P5.011 does
not add 1.
Address: 05CCH
05CDH
Settings:
Window #5: when you read or write the parameter by any method, the value set by P5.011 does
not add 1.
Address: 05CEH
05CFH
Settings:
Window #6: when you read or write the parameter by any method, the value set by P5.011 does
not add 1.
8-130
ASDA-B3 Parameters
P6.xxx PR parameters
Address: 0600H
P6.000 Homing definition
0601H
8
Unit: - Setting range: 0x00000000 - 0xFFFFFF6F
Settings:
Homing definition:
High bit Low bit
D C B A U Z YX
A YX PATH: path type
second homing
B DLY: select 0 - F for delay time Z ACC: select 0 - F for acceleration time
C N/A U
first homing
D BOOT - -
 YX: PATH: path type
0x00: Stop: homing complete and stop
0x01 - 0x63: Auto: homing complete and execute the specified path (Path#1 - Path#99)
 Z: ACC: select 0 - F for acceleration time
 U: DEC1: deceleration time selection for first homing
 A: DEC2: deceleration time selection for second homing
 B: DLY: select 0 - F for delay time
 D: BOOT: when the drive is powered on, whether to search for the origin
0: do not execute homing
1: execute homing automatically (servo switches to on for the first time after applying power)
Apart from the above definitions, the related settings for homing also include:
1. P5.004 homing methods.
2. P5.005 - P5.006 speed setting of searching for the origin.
3. P6.001: ORG_DEF is the coordinate of the origin and may not be 0. This function is used as a
traversal of the coordinate.
Note:
1. After the origin is found (sensor or Z), the motor has to decelerate to a stop. The stop position exceeds the origin
by a short distance:
If returning to the origin is not needed, set PATH to zero.
8-131
Parameters ASDA-B3
If returning to the origin is needed, set PATH to a non-zero value and set PABS = ORG_DEF.
Example:
Upon completion of P6.000 = 0x0001, automatically execute Path#1.
8
Set from absolute position (ABS) to 0 as the route of Path#1 (set P6.002 & P6.003).
2. If the origin is found (sensor or Z), and you want the motor to move an offset S and define the coordinate as P
after moving, then PATH = non-zero and set ORG_DEF = P - S, and this absolute Position command = P.
Address: 0602H
P6.001 Origin definition
0603H
Settings:
Origin definition.
Address: 0604H
P6.002 PATH#1 definition
0605H
Settings:
Format of this parameter: (High word h) DCBA : (Low word L) UZYX

High bit Low bit
D C B A U Z Y X
A SPD, Target speed index* X TYPE, Path type
B DLY, Delay time index Y OPT, Option
C AUTO*1 Z ACC, Acceleration time index*
D Reserved U DEC, Deceleration time index*
Definitions are as follows:
 YX
Y: OPT, Option
X: TYPE, Path type
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
- UNIT AUTO INS 1: SPEED, constant speed control.
2: SINGLE, positioning control. It stops when finished.
CMD OVLP INS 3: AUTO, positioning control. It automatically loads the
next path when finished.
- - - INS 7: JUMP, jump to the specified path.
- ROM AUTO INS 8: write specified parameter to specified path.
DIR OVLP INS A: indexing position control.
TYPE, Path type: when executing 1 - 3, it can be interrupted and stopped by DI.STP and
software limits.
8-132
ASDA-B3 Parameters
INS: executing this path interrupts the previous path.
OVLP: allow overlapping of the next path. Overlapping is not allowed in Speed mode.
When overlapping in Position mode, DLY has no function.
8
AUTO: once current PR path is finished, automatically load the next path.
CMD: refer to Section 7.1.3 Motion control commands.
 UZ
U: DEC, Deceleration Z: ACC, Acceleration time Corresponding

Default value (ms)
time index index parameter
0 0 P5.020 200
1 1 P5.021 300
2 2 P5.022 500
3 3 P5.023 600
4 4 P5.024 800
5 5 P5.025 900
6 6 P5.026 1000
7 7 P5.027 1200
8 8 P5.028 1500
9 9 P5.029 2000
10 10 P5.030 2500
11 11 P5.031 3000
12 12 P5.032 5000
13 13 P5.033 8000
14 14 P5.034 50
15 15 P5.035 30
 A: SPD, target speed index
A Corresponding parameter Default value (ms)

0 P5.060 20
1 P5.061 50
2 P5.062 100
3 P5.063 200
4 P5.064 300
5 P5.065 500
6 P5.066 600
7 P5.067 800
8 P5.068 1000
9 P5.069 1300
10 P5.070 1500
11 P5.071 1800
12 P5.072 2000
13 P5.073 2300
14 P5.074 2500
15 P5.075 3000
 B: DLY, delay time index
B Corresponding parameter Default value (ms)

0 P5.040 0
1 P5.041 100
2 P5.042 200
8-133
Parameters ASDA-B3
3 P5.043 400
4 P5.044 500
5 P5.045 800
6 P5.046 1000
8
7 P5.047 1500
8 P5.048 2000
9 P5.049 2500
10 P5.050 3000
11 P5.051 3500
12 P5.052 4000
13 P5.053 4500
14 P5.054 5000
15 P5.055 5500
 C: AUTO: once current PR path is finished, automatically load the next path.
This function is only enabled when X = A indexing position control.
Description of each bit:

0: disable auto function
Bit 2 AUTO 1: once current PR path is finished, automatically load the
next path
Note: the parameter format definition [C, A, U, Z] is different from the above table when the path type is [7]: write the
specified parameter to the specified path. Refer to Chapter 7 for detailed instructions.
Address: 0606H
P6.003 PATH#1 data
0607H
Settings:
P6.002 defines the property of the target point; P6.003 defines the target position of P6.002 or the
target path for the Jump command.
Address: 0608H
0609H
Settings:
8-134
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 060AH
P6.005 PATH#2 data
060BH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 060CH
060DH
Settings:
Address: 060EH
P6.007 PATH#3 data
060FH
Settings:
Address: 0610H
0611H
Settings:
Address: 0612H
P6.009 PATH#4 data
0613H
Settings:
8-135
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0614H
0615H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0616H
P6.011 PATH#5 data
0617H
Settings:
Address: 0618H
0619H
Settings:
Address: 061AH
P6.013 PATH#6 data
061BH
Settings:
Address: 061CH
061DH
Settings:
8-136
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 061DH
P6.015 PATH#7 data
061FH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0620H
0621H
Settings:
Address: 0622H
P6.017 PATH#8 data
0623H
Settings:
Address: 0624H
0625H
Settings:
Address: 0626H
P6.019 PATH#9 data
0627H
Settings:
8-137
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0628H
0629H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 062AH
P6.021 PATH#10 data
062BH
Settings:
Address: 062CH
062DH
Settings:
Address: 062EH
P6.023 PATH#11 data
062FH
Settings:
Address: 0630H
0631H
Settings:
8-138
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0632H
P6.025 PATH#12 data
0633H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0634H
0635H
Settings:
Address: 0636H
P6.027 PATH#13 data
0637H
Settings:
Address: 0638H
0639H
Settings:
Address: 063AH
P6.029 PATH#14 data
063BH
Settings:
8-139
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 063CH
063DH
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 063EH
P6.031 PATH#15 data
063FH
Settings:
Address: 0640H
0641H
Settings:
Address: 0642H
P6.033 PATH#16 data
0643H
Settings:
Address: 0644H
0645H
Settings:
8-140
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0646H
P6.035 PATH#17 data
0647H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0648H
0649H
Settings:
Address: 064AH
P6.037 PATH#18 data
064BH
Settings:
Address: 064CH
064DH
Settings:
Address: 064EH
P6.039 PATH#19 data
064FH
Settings:
8-141
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0650H
0651H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0652H
P6.041 PATH#20 data
0653H
Settings:
Address: 0654H
0655H
Settings:
Address: 0656H
P6.043 PATH#21 data
0657H
Settings:
Address: 0658H
0659H
Settings:
8-142
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 065AH
P6.045 PATH#22 data
065BH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 065CH
065DH
Settings:
Address: 065EH
P6.047 PATH#23 data
065FH
Settings:
Address: 0660H
0661H
Settings:
Address: 0662H
P6.049 PATH#24 data
0663H
Settings:
8-143
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0664H
0665H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0666H
P6.051 PATH#25 data
0667H
Settings:
Address: 0668H
0669H
Settings:
Address: 066AH
P6.053 PATH#26 data
066BH
Settings:
Address: 066CH
066DH
Settings:
8-144
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 066EH
P6.055 PATH#27 data
066FH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0670H
0671H
Settings:
Address: 0672H
P6.057 PATH#28 data
0673H
Settings:
Address: 0674H
0675H
Settings:
Address: 0676H
P6.059 PATH#29 data
0677H
Settings:
8-145
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0678H
0679H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 067AH
P6.061 PATH#30 data
067BH
Settings:
Address: 067CH
067DH
Settings:
Address: 067EH
P6.063 PATH#31 data
067FH
Settings:
Address: 0680H
0681H
Settings:
8-146
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0682H
P6.065 PATH#32 data
0683H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0684H
0685H
Settings:
Address: 0686H
P6.067 PATH#33 data
0687H
Settings:
Address: 0688H
0689H
Settings:
Address: 068AH
P6.069 PATH#34 data
068BH
Settings:
8-147
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 068CH
068CH
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 068EH
P6.071 PATH#35 data
068FH
Settings:
Address: 0690H
0691H
Settings:
Address: 0692H
P6.073 PATH#36 data
0693H
Settings:
Address: 0694H
0695H
Settings:
8-148
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0696H
P6.075 PATH#37 data
0697H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0698H
0699H
Settings:
Address: 069AH
P6.077 PATH#38 data
069BH
Settings:
Address: 069CH
069DH
Settings:
Address: 069EH
P6.079 PATH#39 data
069FH
Settings:
8-149
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 06A0H
06A1H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 06A2H
P6.081 PATH#40 data
06A3H
Settings:
Address: 06A4H
06A5H
Settings:
Address: 06A6H
P6.083 PATH#41 data
06A7H
Settings:
Address: 06A8H
06A9H
Settings:
8-150
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 06AAH
P6.085 PATH#42 data
06ABH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 06ACH
06ADH
Settings:
Address: 06AEH
P6.087 PATH#43 data
06AFH
Settings:
Address: 06B0H
06B1H
Settings:
Address: 06B2H
P6.089 PATH#44 data
06B3H
Settings:
8-151
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 06B4H
06B5H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 06B6H
P6.091 PATH#45 data
06B7H
Settings:
Address: 06B8H
06B9H
Settings:
Address: 06BAH
P6.093 PATH#46 data
06BBH
Settings:
Address: 06BCH
06BDH
Settings:
8-152
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 06BEH
P6.095 PATH#47 data
06BFH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 06C0H
06C1H
Settings:
Address: 06C2H
P6.097 PATH#48 data
06C3H
Settings:
Address: 06C4H
06C5H
Settings:
Address: 0602H
P6.099 PATH#49 data
0603H
Settings:
8-153
Parameters ASDA-B3
P7.xxx PR parameters
Address: 0700H
0701H
8
Settings:
Address: 0702H
P7.001 PATH#50 data
0703H
Settings:
Address: 0704H
0705H
Settings:
Address: 0706H
P7.003 PATH#51 data
0707H
Settings:
Address: 0708H
0709H
Settings:
8-154
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 070AH
P7.005 PATH#52 data
070BH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 070CH
070DH
Settings:
Address: 070EH
P7.007 PATH#53 data
070FH
Settings:
Address: 0710H
0711H
Settings:
Address: 0712H
P7.009 PATH#54 data
0713H
Settings:
8-155
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0714H
0715H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0716H
P7.011 PATH#55 data
0717H
Settings:
Address: 0718H
0719H
Settings:
Address: 071AH
P7.013 PATH#56 data
071BH
Settings:
Address: 071CH
071DH
Settings:
8-156
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 071EH
P7.015 PATH#57 data
071FH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0720H
0721H
Settings:
Address: 0722H
P7.017 PATH#58 data
0723H
Settings:
Address: 0724H
0725H
Settings:
Address: 0726H
P7.019 PATH#59 data
0727H
Settings:
8-157
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0728H
0729H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 072AH
P7.021 PATH#60 data
072BH
Settings:
Address: 072CH
072DH
Settings:
Address: 072EH
P7.023 PATH#61 data
072FH
Settings:
Address: 0730H
0731H
Settings:
8-158
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0732H
P7.025 PATH#62 data
0733H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0734H
0735H
Settings:
Address: 0736H
P7.027 PATH#63 data
0737H
Settings:
Address: 0738H
0739H
Settings:
Address: 073AH
P7.029 PATH#64 data
073BH
Settings:
8-159
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 073CH
073DH
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 073EH
P7.031 PATH#65 data
073FH
Settings:
Address: 0740H
0741H
Settings:
Address: 0742H
P7.033 PATH#66 data
0743H
Settings:
Address: 0744H
0745H
Settings:
8-160
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0746H
P7.035 PATH#67 data
0747H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0748H
0749H
Settings:
Address: 074AH
P7.037 PATH#68 data
074BH
Settings:
Address: 074CH
074DH
Settings:
Address: 074EH
P7.039 PATH#69 data
074FH
Settings:
8-161
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0750H
0751H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0752H
P7.041 PATH#70 data
0753H
Settings:
Address: 0754H
0755H
Settings:
Address: 0756H
P7.043 PATH#71 data
0757H
Settings:
Address: 0758H
0759H
Settings:
8-162
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 075AH
P7.045 PATH#72 data
075BH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 075CH
075DH
Settings:
Address: 075EH
P7.047 PATH#73 data
075FH
Settings:
Address: 0760H
0761H
Settings:
Address: 0762H
P7.049 PATH#74 data
0763H
Settings:
8-163
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0764H
0765H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 0766H
P7.051 PATH#75 data
0767H
Settings:
Address: 0768H
0769H
Settings:
Address: 076AH
P7.053 PATH#76 data
076BH
Settings:
Address: 076CH
076DH
Settings:
8-164
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 076EH
P7.055 PATH#77 data
076FH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0770H
0771H
Settings:
Address: 0772H
P7.057 PATH#78 data
0773H
Settings:
Address: 0774H
0775H
Settings:
Address: 0776H
P7.059 PATH#79 data
0777H
Settings:
8-165
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 0778H
0779H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 077AH
P7.061 PATH#80 data
077BH
Settings:
Address: 077CH
077DH
Settings:
Address: 077EH
P7.063 PATH#81 data
077FH
Settings:
Address: 0780H
0781H
Settings:
8-166
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0782H
P7.065 PATH#82 data
0783H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0784H
0785H
Settings:
Address: 0786H
P7.067 PATH#83 data
0787H
Settings:
Address: 0788H
0789H
Settings:
Address: 078AH
P7.069 PATH#84 data
078BH
Settings:
8-167
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 078CH
078DH
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 078EH
P7.071 PATH#85 data
078FH
Settings:
Address: 0790H
0791H
Settings:
Address: 0792H
P7.073 PATH#86 data
0793H
Settings:
Address: 0794H
0795H
Settings:
8-168
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 0796H
P7.075 PATH#87 data
0797H
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 0798H
0799H
Settings:
Address: 079AH
P7.077 PATH#88 data
079BH
Settings:
Address: 079CH
079DH
Settings:
Address: 079EH
P7.079 PATH#89 data
079FH
Settings:
8-169
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 07A0H
07A1H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 07A2H
P7.081 PATH#90 data
07A3H
Settings:
Address: 07A4H
07A5H
Settings:
Address: 07A6H
P7.083 PATH#91 data
07A7H
Settings:
Address: 07A8H
07A9H
Settings:
8-170
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 07AAH
P7.085 PATH#92 data
07ABH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 07ACH
07ADH
Settings:
Address: 07AEH
P7.087 PATH#93 data
07AFH
Settings:
Address: 07B0H
07B1H
Settings:
Address: 07B2H
P7.089 PATH#94 data
07B3H
Settings:
8-171
Parameters ASDA-B3
Address: 07B4H
07B5H
8 Format:
Settings:
HEX

Data size: 32-bit
Address: 07B6H
P7.091 PATH#95 data
07B7H
Settings:
Address: 07B8H
07B9H
Settings:
Address: 07BAH
P7.093 PATH#96 data
07BBH
Settings:
Address: 07BCH
07BDH
Settings:
8-172
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Address: 07BEH
P7.095 PATH#97 data
07BFH
Format:
Settings:
DEC

Data size: 32-bit
8
Address: 07C0H
07C1H
Settings:
Address: 07C3H
P7.097 PATH#98 data
07C4H
Settings:
Address: 07C4H
07C5H
Settings:
Address: 07C6H
P7.099 PATH#99 data
07C7H
Settings:
8-173
Parameters ASDA-B3
Table 8.1 Digital input (DI) descriptions
Value: 0x01
Triggering Control
DI name Description
8
method mode
Level
SON When this DI is on, servo is activated (Servo On). All
triggered
Value: 0x02
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
After the alarm is cleared, the drive shows that the alarm is cleared Rising-edge
ARST All
when this DI is on. triggered
Value: 0x03
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In Speed and Position modes, when this DI is on (P2.027 set to 1), Level
GAINUP PT, PR, S
the gain switches to the original gain multiplied by the switching rate. triggered
Value: 0x04
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Clear pulse counter and P2.050. Rising-edge
Set DI.CCLR to 0 to clear position pulse deviation (applicable to PT triggered,
CCLR PT, PR
mode). When this DI is on, the accumulative pulse deviation of the level
drive is cleared to 0. triggered
Value: 0x05
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
When the speed is slower than the setting of zero speed (P1.038),
the motor stops operating when this DI is on.
Speed
command
Set value of
P1.038
(zero speed)
Level
ZCLAMP S
ZCLAMP triggered
Input signal
OFF ON
Motor speed
Set value of
P1.038
(zero speed)
Time
Value: 0x06
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In Speed and Torque modes, the input command is reversed when Level
CMDINV S, Sz, T
this DI is on. triggered
8-174
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Value: 0x08
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In PR mode, after you select the PR command (POS0 - 6), the motor
Rising-edge
CTRG operates according to the command issued by the register when this PR
8
triggered
DI is on.
Value: 0x09
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In Speed and Position modes, motor torque is limited when this DI is
Level
TRQLM on, and source of the limited Torque command is the internal register PT, PR, S
triggered
or analog voltage.
Value: 0x0C
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Latch function of analog Position command. If this DI is on, position
of the motor is held at the current position when the DI is triggered.
During the time this DI is on, the motor does not operate even when
there is a change in the analog command. When this DI is off, the
motor completes the command that was changed during the time the
DI was on.
Motor position
(Turn)
When DI is off, motor

operates to the
corresponding Level
VPL PT
position inputted by triggered
analog
Motor
position
when DI is
triggered Analog input
When DI is on, command (V)
Voltage analog input
when DI is command
triggered changes the
amount; motor
does not move
8-175
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x0D
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Clear function of analog Position command. If this DI is on, the
position of the motor is held at the current position when DI is
8
triggered. Despite the change in the analog command during the time
DI is on, the motor remains at the current position even when the DI
is off. However, the position that the motor remains at corresponds to
the new analog command. Thus, the analog input command
redefines the coordinate system of the motor.
Motor Position
(Turn)
Level
VPRS PT
triggered
Motor
position
when DI is
When DI is on, all
triggered
input commands
are cleared
Analog input
Voltage when DI command (V)
is triggered
Analog input
When DI is off, motor command (V)
does not move, but the
zero point of the
coordinate is redefined
Value: 0x10
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In Torque mode, motor speed is limited when this DI is on, and source
Level
SPDLM of the limited Speed command is the internal register or analog T
triggered
voltage.
Value: 0x11, 0x12, 0x13, 0x1A, 0x1B, 0x1C, 0x1E

Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
PR command selection (0 - 99)
Corres-
Position POS POS POS POS POS POS POS ponding
CTRG
CMD 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 para-
meter
P6.000
POS0 Homing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6.001
POS1
P6.002
POS2 PR#1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6.003 Level
POS3 PR
… … triggered
POS4
P6.098
POS5 PR#50 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6.099
POS6 P7.000
PR#51 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7.001
… …
P7.098
PR#99 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
P7.099
8-176
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Value: 0x1D
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
When DI.ABSE is on, it is in absolute mode and can enable the
functions of DI.ABSQ, DI.ABSR, DI.ABSD, and DI.ABSC at the same
8
time.
Level
ABSE When DI.ABSE is on, the functions of DI4, DO2, and DO3 are no All
triggered
longer the ones assigned by the parameter. The DI4 function will be
DI.ABSQ, DO2 will be DI.ABSR, and DO3 will be DI.ABSD. In
addition, DI pin of DI.ABSC can be assigned by parameters.
Value: 0x1F
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
When DI.ABSC is on, the number of turns stored in absolute encoder Rising-edge
ABSC All
are cleared. But this DI is only valid when DI.ABSE is on. triggered
Value: when DI.ABSE is on, the DI.ABSQ from DI4 replaces the DI4 function from P2.013
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
During I/O transmission, the controller sends the handshaking signal.
ABSQ
When DI.ABSQ is off, the controller issues the request; when Rising- and
always
DI.ABSQ is on, the controller has processed the ABSD signal. This DI falling-edge All
input by
is only valid when DI.ABSE is on. Refer to Figure 10.3.5.1.1 for the triggered
DI4
timing diagram.
Value: 0x14, 0x15

Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Register Speed command selection (1 - 4)
Speed DI signal of CN1
number SPD1 SPD0
External Voltage difference
S analog between V-REF -10V to +10V
SPD0 signal and GND
S1 0 0 Level
S, Sz
SPD1 Speed command triggered
Sz N/A 0
is 0
S2 0 1 P1.009 +/- 6000 rpm
S3 1 0 Internal register P1.010 +/- 6000 rpm

parameter
S4 1 1 P1.011 +/- 6000 rpm
Value: 0x16, 0x17

Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Register Torque command selection (1 - 4)
Torque DI signal of CN1
number TCM1 TCM0
Voltage difference
External
T between T_REF -10V to +10V
TCM0 analog signal
T1 0 0 and GND Level
T, Tz
TCM1 Torque command triggered
Tz N/A 0
is 0
T2 0 1 P1.012 +/- 500%
T3 1 0 Internal register P1.013 +/- 500%

parameter
T4 1 1 P1.014 +/- 500%
8-177
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x18
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In S-P dual mode, if DI is off, it is in Speed mode; if DI is on, it is in
Level Dual
S-P Position mode. In PT / PR / S modes, select PT or PR with DI.PT-PR
8
triggered mode
(0x2B).
Value: 0x19
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In S-T dual mode, if DI is off, it is in Speed mode; if DI is on, it is in Torque Level Dual
S-T
mode. triggered mode
Value: 0x20
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In T-P dual mode, if DI is off, it is in Torque mode; if DI is on, it is in
Level Dual
T-P Position mode. In PT / PR / T modes, select PT or PR with DI.PT-PR
triggered mode
(0x2B).
Value: 0x21
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Level
EMGS When this DI is on, the motor stops immediately. All
triggered
Value: 0x22
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
NL Level
Negative inhibit limit (contact B). All
(CWL) triggered
Value: 0x23
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
PL Level
Positive inhibit limit (contact B). All
(CCWL) triggered
Value: 0x24
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Rising- and
During homing, when this DI is on, the servo uses this position as the
ORGP falling-edge PR
homing origin. Refer to the setting of P5.004.
triggered
Value: 0x27
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
During homing, when this DI is on, it activates the function to search Rising-edge
SHOM PR
for the origin. Refer to the setting of P5.004. triggered
8-178
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Value: 0x2B
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Use this DI to select the command source in PT-PR dual mode or
Level Dual
PT-PR PT-PR-S multiple mode. If this DI is off, it is in PT mode; if this DI is
8
triggered mode
on, it is in PR mode.
Value: 0x37
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Level
JOGU When this DI is on, motor jogs in the positive direction. All
triggered
Value: 0x38
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Level
JOGD When this DI is on, motor jogs in the negative direction. All
triggered
Value: 0x39
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Rising- and
Event trigger command #1. Refer to the setting of P5.098 and
EV1 falling-edge PR
P5.099.
triggered
Value: 0x3A
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Rising- and
EV2 falling-edge PR
P5.099.
triggered
Value: 0x3B
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Rising- and
EV3 falling-edge PR
P5.099.
triggered
Value: 0x3C
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Rising- and
EV4 falling-edge PR
P5.099.
triggered
8-179
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x43, 0x44

Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
E-Gear ratio (numerator) selection 0
8
E-Gear ratio (numerator) selection 1
GNUM0, GNUM1
1st numerator (P1.044) Position

2nd numerator (P2.060) command
GNUM0 3rd numerator (P2.061) moving filter
Level
Pulse (P1.068) PT
GNUM1
4th numerator (P2.062) triggered
----------------------------
Denominator (P1.045) Smooth filter
(P1.008)
Pulse
Error
Feedback pulse
Value: 0x45
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
In Position mode, the external pulse input command has no
Level
INHP function when this DI is on. PT
triggered
Note: this function has to be set to DI4 to ensure immediate pulse inhibition.
Value: 0x46
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Rising-edge
STP Motor stops. PR
triggered
Value: 0x47
Triggering Control
DI name Description
method mode
Use this DI to set the emergency stop for deceleration time.
The value for deceleration time is same as P5.003. If this DI is
Rising-edge PT, PR, T,
PFQS triggered, AL35F occurs and the motor starts decelerating. When
triggered S
the speed reaches 0, AL3CF occurs and servo is switched to Servo
Off. Reset the alarm to switch the drive to the Servo On state.
Note: the input function is disabled when P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036 - P2.040 are set to 0.
8-180
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Table 8.2 Digital output (DO) descriptions
Value: 0x01
Triggering Control
DO name Description
8
method mode
When the control and main circuit power is applied to the drive, Level
SRDY All
this DO is on if no alarm occurs. triggered
Value: 0x02
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When the servo is activated (Servo On), this DO is on if no alarm
occurs.
The time difference between DO.SRDY and
DO.SON when the servo is on as soon as
power is applied
ON
Level
SON DO.SRDY
OFF All
triggered
ON
OFF
DO.SON
Approx. 300 ns
Value: 0x03
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When the motor speed is slower than the value of the zero speed Level
ZSPD All
(P1.038), this DO is on. triggered
Value: 0x04
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When the motor speed is faster than the target speed setting Level
TSPD All
(P1.039), this DO is on. triggered
Value: 0x05
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When the deviation pulse number is smaller than the position range Level
TPOS PT, PR
setting (setting value of P1.054), this DO is on. triggered
Value: 0x06
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
All (except
Level
TQL When it is in torque limit, this DO is on. for T and
triggered
Tz)
8-181
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x07
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When an alarm occurs, this DO is on. (Except for positive / negative Level
ALRM All
limit, communication error, undervoltage, and fan error.) triggered
8 Value: 0x08
DO name Description
Triggering
method
Control
mode
When the magnetic brake control signal is detected, adjust the
settings of P1.042 and P1.043.
ON
OFF OFF
SON
ON [1*]
[2*]
OFF Level
BRKR All
BRKR triggered
(P1.042) (P1.043)
Motor Speed
(P1.038) [2*]
ZSPD [1*]
Value: 0x09
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When homing is complete, it means the position coordinate system
and position counter are defined and this DO is on. When power is
applied, this DO is off; when homing is complete, this DO is on.
Level
HOME During operation, this DO is on until the position counter overflows PR
triggered
(including commands or feedback). Then, this DO turns off. When
the homing command is triggered, this DO is off; after homing is
complete, this DO is on.
Value: 0x0D
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
ABSW When there are absolute encoder alarms, this DO is on. - All
Value: 0x0E
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Indexing coordinate is defined. When homing is complete, indexing
IDXD - PR
coordinate is defined as well.
Value: 0x10
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
This DO is on when the overload level setting is reached.
tOL = Overload allowable time of the servo x value for the overload
warning level (P1.056). When the overload accumulative time
exceeds tOL, it sends the overload pre-warning (OLW).
However, if the overload accumulative time exceeds the Level
OLW All
overload allowable time of the servo, it sends the overload triggered
error (ALRM).
For example: the value for the overload warning level is 60%.
(P1.056 = 60)
When the output average load of the servo drive is 200% and the
8-182
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Value: 0x10
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
output time exceeds 8 seconds, the overload alarm (AL006) occurs.
tOL = Duration when the output average load of the servo is 200% x
8
value for the overload warning level = 8 sec x 60% = 4.8 sec
Result: when the output average load of the servo drive is 200%
for over tOL = 4.8 seconds, this overload warning DO is on (DO:
0x10). If the duration exceeds 8 seconds, then the overload alarm
(AL006) occurs and sends the overload error (ALRM).
Value: 0x11
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Warning outputs (positive / negative limit, communication error, Level All
WARN
undervoltage, and fan error). triggered
Value: 0x12
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
OVF Position command / feedback overflows. PT, PR
triggered
Value: 0x13
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
SNL Level
Software limit (negative limit). PR
(SCWL) triggered
Value: 0x14
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
SPL Level
Software limit (positive limit). PR
(SCCWL) triggered
Value: 0x15
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When the Position command is executing, this DO is off; after the
command completes, this DO is on. This DO only indicates that the Level
Cmd_OK PR
command is complete, but the motor positioning may not be triggered
complete yet. Refer to DO.TPOS.
Value: 0x16
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
CAP_OK Capture procedure is complete. All
triggered
Value: 0x17
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When DO.Cmd_OK and DO.TPOS are both on, then this DO is on. Level
MC_OK PR
Refer to P1.048. triggered
8-183
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x19
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Motor speed reaches the target speed: in Speed mode, when the
Level
SP_OK deviation between the speed feedback and the command is smaller S, Sz
8
triggered
than the value of P1.047, this DO is on.
Value: 0x2C
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
First set of general range comparison: when the value of the item
Zon1 monitored by P0.009 ranges between the values of P0.054 and - All
P0.055, then this DO is on.
Value: 0x2D
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Second set of general range comparison: when the value of the
Zon2 item monitored by P0.010 ranges between the values of P0.056 - All
and P0.057, then this DO is on.
Value: 0x2E
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Third set of general range comparison: when the value of the item
Value: 0x2F
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Fourth set of general range comparison: when the value of the item
Value: 0x30
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_0 Output bit 00 of P4.006. All
triggered
Value: 0x31
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x32
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
8-184
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Value: 0x33
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x34
DO name Description
Triggering
method
Control
mode
8
Level
triggered
Value: 0x35
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x36
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x37
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x38
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x39
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
triggered
Value: 0x3A
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_A Output bit 10 of P4.006. All
triggered
Value: 0x3B
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_B Output bit 11 of P4.006. All
triggered
8-185
Parameters ASDA-B3
Value: 0x3C
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_C Output bit 12 of P4.006. All
triggered
8 Value: 0x3D
DO name Description
Triggering
method
Control
mode
Level
SPO_D Output bit 13 of P4.006. All
triggered
Value: 0x3E
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_E Output bit 14 of P4.006. All
triggered
Value: 0x3F
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
Level
SPO_F Output bit 15 of P4.006. All
triggered
Note: the output function is disabled when P2.018 - P2.022 are set to 0.
Value: when DI.ABSE is on, DI.ABSR triggered by DO2 will replace the DO2 assigned by P2.019
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
When DO.ABSR is off, it indicates servo drive can receive request
ABSR issued by DI.ABSQ; when DO.ABSR is on, it indicates after
always receiving the request, the data has been prepared and the ABSD Level
All
output by data is valid so that the controller can access the ABSD data. This triggered
DO2 output is only valid when DI.ABSE is on. Refer to Figure 10.3.5.1.1
for the timing diagram.
Value: when DI.ABSE is on, DI.ABSD triggered by DO3 will replace the DO3 assigned by P2.020
Triggering Control
DO name Description
method mode
ABSD
DO pin of ABS data. The data is valid when DO.ABSR is on. This
always Level
output is only valid when DI.ABSE is on. Refer to Figure 10.3.5.1.1 All
output by triggered
for the timing diagram.
DO3
8-186
ASDA-B3 Parameters
Table 8.3 Monitoring variables descriptions
Description of monitoring variables:
Item Description
Monitoring
code
Format
Each monitoring variable has a code, and you can use P0.002 to set the code for
monitoring the variable.
Each monitoring variable is stored in the 32-bit format (long integer) of the servo drive.
Basic variables / expansion variables:
8
1. Basic variables: variables (P0.002 = 0 to 26) within the cycle; in monitoring mode,
Category use the UP / DOWN keys on the panel to display the variables.
2. Expansion variables: variables other than basic variables. (P0.002 = 80, -91, -124,
and 27 to 127)
Panel display / mapping:
Monitoring
1. Panel display: monitor with the panel
method
2. Mapping: monitor variables or parameters by mapping parameters
1. Use the MODE key to switch to the monitor mode and press the UP / DOWN keys
to select the variable to monitor.
Panel 2. Input the variable code to monitor into P0.002 and start monitoring.
display
Press the SHIFT key on the panel to switch between high and low digit display;
Press the SET key on the panel to switch between decimal and hexadecimal display.
1. Parameters that support monitoring variable mapping: P0.009 - P0.013. Refer to
Section 8.3 Parameter descriptions.
2. Read the monitoring variables through communication using mapping parameters.
Mapping 3. The values of the mapping parameters (P0.009 - P0.013) are the content of the
basic variables (17h, 18h, 19h, and 1Ah). To monitor P0.009, set P0.017 to the
value to read (refer to P0.002). Read the data specified by P0.017 through
communication. Or, set P0.002 to 23, and the panel displays “VAR-1” and then the
content value of P0.009.
The property code of each monitoring variable is described in the following table:
Property Description
B BASE: basic variables. Select the variables with the UP / DOWN keys on the panel.
Decimal place displayed on the panel: D1 indicates 1 decimal place; D2 indicates 2
D1 D2
decimal places.
Only decimal display is available on the panel, and you cannot switch to hexadecimal
Dec
display by pressing the SET key.
Only hexadecimal display is available on the panel, and you cannot switch to decimal
Hex
display by pressing the SET key.
Monitoring variables are described in the following table by the code sequence:
Code Variable name / property Description

Feedback position (PUU) Current feedback position of the motor encoder.
000 (00h)
B Unit: Pulse of User Unit (PUU).
Current coordinate of the Position command.
Unit: Pulse of User Unit (PUU).
Position command (PUU)
001 (01h) PT mode: number of pulse commands received by the
B
servo drive.
PR mode: absolute coordinates of the Position command.
Position deviation (PUU) Deviation between the Position command and the
002 (02h)
B feedback position. Unit: Pulse of User Unit (PUU).
Feedback position (pulse) Current feedback position of the motor encoder.
003 (03h)
B Unit: encoder unit (pulse).
Current coordinate of the Position command.
Position command (pulse) Unit: encoder unit (pulse).
004 (04h)
B
This is the command after the E-Gear ratio conversion.
8-187
Parameters ASDA-B3

Position deviation (pulse) Deviation between the Position command and the
005 (05h)
B feedback position. Unit: encoder unit (pulse).
Pulse command Frequency of the pulse command received by the drive.
006 (06h)
frequency B Unit: Kpps. Applicable to PT / PR modes.
8 007 (07h)
008 (08h)
Speed feedback
B D1 Dec
Speed command (analog)

Current motor speed. Unit: 0.1 rpm.
This is the speed after applying the low-pass filter, which
makes it more stable.
Speed command from the analog channel. Unit: 0.01 Volt.

B D2 Dec
Speed command Integrated Speed command. Unit: 0.1 rpm.
009 (09h)
(integrated) B Source includes analog, register, or position loop.
Torque command (analog)
010 (0Ah) Torque command from the analog channel. Unit: 0.01 Volt.
B D2 Dec
Torque command Integrated Torque command. Unit: percentage (%).
011 (0Bh)
(integrated) B Source includes analog, register, or position loop.
Average load rate (moving average every 20 ms) from the
012 (0Ch) Average load rate B
servo drive. Unit: percentage (%).
013 (0Dh) Peak load rate B Maximum load rate from the drive. Unit: percentage (%).
014 (0Eh) DC Bus voltage B Rectified capacitor voltage. Unit: Volt.

Load inertia ratio
015 (0Fh) Ratio of the load inertia to the motor inertia. Unit: 0.1 times.
B D1 Dec
016 (10h) IGBT temperature B Temperature of IGBT. Unit: °C.
Resonance frequency of the system consists of two
groups of frequencies: F1 and F2.
When monitoring from the panel, press the SHIFT key to
switch between F1 and F2:
Resonance frequency F2 displays zero decimal places; F1 displays 1 decimal
017 (11h) place. F2 displays zero decimal places; F1 displays 1
B Dec
decimal place.
When reading by communication (mapping parameter):
Low word returns frequency F2.
High word returns frequency F1.
Offset value between motor position and Z phase;
Z phase offset range: -4999 to +5000.
018 (12h)
B Dec Where it overlaps with Z phase, the value is 0; the greater
the value, the greater the offset.
Mapping parameter
019 (13h) content #1 Returns the value of P0.025 which is mapped by P0.035.
B
Mapping parameter
B
Mapping parameter
B
Mapping parameter
B
Mapping monitoring
023 (17h) variable #1 Returns the value of P0.009 which is mapped by P0.017.
B
Mapping monitoring
B
8-188
ASDA-B3 Parameters

Mapping monitoring
B
8
Mapping monitoring
026 (1Ah) variable #4 Returns the value of P0.012 which is mapped by P0.020.
B
Indexing coordinate Current command for the indexing coordinates.
035 (23h)
command Unit: Pulse of User Unit (PUU).
Voltage level of the battery in an absolute encoder.
Voltage level of the
038 (26h) To display the voltage level, enable the absolute encoder
battery
setting (P2.069).
Integrated DI status of the drive. Each bit corresponds to
DI status (integrated) one DI channel.
039 (27h)
Hex Source includes hardware channel / P4.007, which is
determined by P3.006.
DO status (hardware) Actual status from the DO hardware. Each bit corresponds
040 (28h)
Hex to one DO channel.
041 (29h) Status of the drive Returns P0.046. Refer to the description of this parameter.
The latest data captured by CAP hardware.
043 (2Bh) CAP data capturing
Note: CAP can continuously capture multiple points.
049 (31h) Pulse command CNT Pulse counts from the pulse command (CN1).
Speed command
Integrated Speed command. Unit: 0.1 rpm.
050 (32h) (integrated)
Source includes analog, register, or position loop.
D1 Dec
Speed feedback
051 (33h) (immediate) Current actual motor speed. Unit: 0.1 rpm.
D1 Dec
Torque command
Integrated Torque command. Unit: 0.1%.
053 (35h) (integrated)
Source includes analog, register, or position loop.
D1 Dec
Torque feedback
054 (36h) Current actual motor torque. Unit: 0.1%.
D1 Dec
Current feedback
055 (37h) Current actual motor current. Unit: 0.01 ampere (Amp).
D2 Dec
DC Bus voltage
056 (38h) Rectified capacitor voltage. Unit: 0.1 Volt.
D1 Dec
Endpoint register of PR In PR mode, the endpoint of the Position command
064 (40h)
command (Cmd_E).
Output register of PR In PR mode, the accumulative output of the Position
065 (41h)
command command.
Target speed specified in the PR path.
067 (43h) PR target speed
Unit: PPS (pulse per second).
Speed command (analog)
072 (48h) Speed command from the analog channel. Unit: 0.1 rpm.
B D1 Dec
Capture synchronous axis When the synchronous Capture axis is enabled, the actual
081 (51h) Mark distance can be measured by the received pulse
Incremental pulse input number between two captures.
Capture synchronous axis The accumulative deviation between the actual output
pulse and the target pulse when the synchronous Capture
084 (54h) Pulse number of axis is enabled. This value is close to 0 if synchronization
synchronous deviation is reached.
Indexing coordinate Immediate feedback position of the indexing coordinates.
091 (5Bh)
feedback Unit: Pulse of User Unit (PUU).
8-189
Parameters ASDA-B3

Includes 2 versions: DSP and CPLD.
When monitoring from the panel, press the SHIFT key to
switch between DSP and CPLD:
DSP displays zero decimal places; CPLD displays 1
8
Drive firmware version
096 (60h) decimal place.
Dec
When reading by communication (mapping parameter):
Low word returns the DSP version number;
high word returns the CPLD version number.
Error code of the servo Error code from the servo drive: control loop of the servo
111 (6Fh)
drive only, not including the motion controller.
Value returned when Monitoring value displayed when returned to the
123 (7Bh)
monitoring by panel monitoring panel.
When this value continues to increase, it indicates that
Encoder communication
-80 there is communication interference. In an interference-
error rate
free environment, this value should not increase.
Overload (AL006) Displays the motor load during operation. When the value
-91
protection counter reaches 100%, AL006 occurs.
-124 Encoder temperature Monitor the encoder temperature.
8-190
MODBUS Communication
This chapter describes the MODBUS communication which you use for setting,
9
reading, and writing general parameters. For the motion control network, refer to the
related DMCNET, CANopen, and EtherCAT documentation. The details of ASCII and
RTU modes are also provided in this chapter.
9.1 RS-485 communication interface (hardware) ···········································9-2

9.2 RS-485 communication parameter settings ·············································9-3
9.3 MODBUS communication protocol ························································9-3
9.4 Writing and reading communication parameters ····································· 9-14
9.5 RS-485 communication specification ··················································· 9-15
9-1
MODBUS Communication ASDA-B3
9.1 RS-485 communication interface (hardware)

The ASDA-B3 series servo drive supports RS-485 serial communication that you can use to
9
access and change the parameters of the servo system. See the following description of the
wiring:
Note:
1. The cable length can be up to 100 meters when the servo drive is installed in a quiet environment.
If the required transmission speed is over 38,400 bps, a 15-meter cable is recommended to ensure
data transmission accuracy.
2. The numbers 4 and 5 in the above figure represent the pin number of each connector.
3. Use 12 VDC for the power supply.
4. When using RS-485 communication, you may connect up to 32 servo drives. Install a repeater to
connect more servo drives (the maximum is 127 stations).
5. Refer to Wiring for the CN3 communication connector in Chapter 3.
9-2
ASDA-B3 MODBUS Communication
9.2 RS-485 communication parameter settings

The required parameters for a single servo drive connection are: P3.000 (Address), P3.001
9
(Transmission speed), and P3.002 (Communication protocol). P3.003 (Communication error
handling), P3.004 (Communication timeout), P3.006 (Digital input (DI) control switch), and
P3.007 (Communication response delay time) are optional settings. Refer to Chapter 8 for
detailed descriptions of the relevant parameters.
9.3 MODBUS communication protocol

There are two modes of MODBUS network communication: ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange) and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). You can set the communication
protocol (ASCII or RTU) with P3.002 according to your requirements. The ASDA-B3 servo drive
also supports these functions: reading multiple words (03H), writing single word (06H), and
writing multiple words (10H). Refer to the following descriptions.
Code description
ASCII mode:
In ASCII mode, data is transmitted in ASCII format. For instance, when transmitting “64H”
between the master and slave, the master sends 36H to represent “6” and 34H to represent “4”.
The ASCII codes for the digits 0 to 9 and the characters A to F are as follows:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’

ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
9-3
RTU mode:
Every data frame consists of 8-bit hexadecimal characters, which is more efficient than ASCII
mode for data transmission because it can be done without code interchange. For instance,
9 when transmitting “64H” between the master and slave, just send “64H”.
Characters are encoded into the following frames and transmitted in series. The method for
checking each type of frame is as follows.
10-bit character frame (for 7-bit character)
L H H
7N2 Start Stop Stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit bit
7-data bits
10-bit character frame
L H
7E1 Start Even Stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit Parity bit
7-data bits
L H
7O1 Start Odd Stop
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit Parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (for 8-bit character)
L H
8N2 Start
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stop Stop
bit bit bit
8-data bits
L H
8E1 Start
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Even Stop
bit parity bit
8-data bits
L H
8O1 Start
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Odd Stop
bit parity bit
8-data bits
9-4
Communication data structure
Definitions for the data frames in the two modes are as follows:
9
ASCII mode:
Start Start character ‘:’ (3AH)

Slave Address Communication address: 1 byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Function code: 1 byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
Data (n-1)
……. Data content: n word = 2n-byte consists of 4n ASCII codes, n ≤ 10
Data (0)
LRC Error check: 1 byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
End 1 End code 1: (0DH) (CR)
End 0 End code 0: (0AH) (LF)
RTU mode:
Start A silent interval of more than 10 ms

Slave Address Communication address: 1 byte
Function Function code: 1 byte
Data (n-1)
……. Data content: n-word = 2n-byte, n ≤ 10
Data (0)
CRC Error check: 1 byte
End 1 A silent interval of more than 10 ms
9-5
Example 1: function code 03H, read multiple words
When the master issues a read command to the first slave:
9
The slave reads two continuous words starting from the start data address 0200H. In the
response message from the slave, the content of the start data address 0200H is 00B1H and
the content of the second data address 0201H is 1F40H. The maximum allowable number of
data in one single access is 10.
ASCII mode:
Command Message (Master): Response Message (Slave):
Start ‘:’ Start ‘:’

‘0’ ‘0’
Slave Address Slave Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘0’ Data Number ‘0’
‘2’ (in bytes) ‘4'
Start Data Address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ Content of Start Data ‘0’
‘0’ Address 0200H ‘B’
Data Number ‘0’ ‘1’

(in words) ‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of the 2nd Data ‘F’
‘F’ Address 0201H ‘4’
LRC
‘8’ ‘0’
End 1 (0DH) (CR) ‘E’
LRC
End 0 (0AH) (LF) ‘8’
End 1 (0DH) (CR)
End 0 (0AH) (LF)
RTU mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H

Function 03H Function 03H
02H (High) Data Number
Start Data Address 04H
00H (Low) (in bytes)
Data Number 00H Content of Start Data 00H (High)

(in words) 02H Address 0200H B1H (Low)
CRC (Check Low) C5H (Low) Content of the 2nd Data 1FH (High)
CRC (Check High) B3H (High) Address 0201H 40H (Low)
CRC (Check Low) A3H (Low)
CRC (Check High) D4H (High)
Note: a silent interval of 10 ms is required before and after each transmission in RTU mode.
9-6
Example 2: function code 06H, write single word
When the master issues a write command to the first slave:
9
The slave writes data 0064H to the start data address 0200H and sends a response message
to the master after writing is complete.
ASCII mode:

‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2'
Start Data Address Start Data Address
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data Content Data Content
‘6’ ‘6’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘9’ ‘9’
LRC LRC
‘3’ ‘3’
End 1 (0DH) (CR) End 1 (0DH) (CR)
End 0 (0AH) (LF) End 0 (0AH) (LF)
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H

Slave Function 06H Slave Function 06H
02H (High) 02H (High)
00H (Low) 00H (Low)
Data Content Data Content
64H (Low) 64H (Low)
CRC (Check Low) 89H (Low) CRC (Check Low) 89H (Low)
CRC (Check High) 99H (High) CRC (Check High) 99H (High)
9-7
Example 3: function code 10H, write multiple words
When the master issues a write command to the first slave:
9
The slave writes two words 0BB8H and 0000H starting from the start address 0112H. In other
words, 0BB8H is written into 0112H and 0000H is written into 0113H. The maximum allowable
number of data in one single access is 8. The slave sends a response message to the master
after writing is complete.
ASCII mode:

‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘1’ ‘1’
Function Function
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1'
‘1’ ‘1’
‘2’ ‘2’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data Number ‘0’ ‘0’

Data Number
(in words) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Data Number ‘0’ ‘D’

LRC
(in bytes) ‘4’ ‘A’
‘0’ End 1 (0DH) (CR)
Content of the ‘B’ End 0 (0AH) (LF)

1st Data Frame ‘B’
‘8’
‘0’
Content of the ‘0’

2nd Data Frame ‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
LRC
‘3’
End 1 (0DH) (CR)
End 0 (0AH) (LF)
9-8
RTU mode:
9
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function 10H Function 10H
12H (Low) 12H (Low)
Data Number 00H (High) Data Number 00H (High)

(in words) 02H (Low) (in words) 02H (Low)
Data Number CRC (Check Low) E0H (Low)

04H
(in bytes) CRC (Check High) 31H (High)
Content of the 0BH (High)

1st Data Frame B8H (Low)
Content of the 00H (High)

2nd Data Frame 00H (Low)
CRC (Check Low) FCH (Low)
CRC (Check High) EBH (High)
9-9
LRC and CRC transmission error check
The error check used in ASCII mode is LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) and that used in
9
RTU mode is CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check). See the following details.
LRC (ASCII mode):
Start ‘:’
‘7’
Slave Address
‘F’
‘0’
Function
‘3’
‘0’
‘5’
Start Data Address
‘C’
‘4’
‘0’
‘0’
Data Number
‘0’
‘1’
‘B’
LRC
‘4’
End 1 (0DH) (CR)
End 0 (0AH) (LF)
To calculate the LRC value: add all the bytes, round down the carry, and take the two’s
complement.
For example:
7FH + 03H + 05H + C4H + 00H + 01H = 14CH, round down the carry 1 and take 4CH.
The two’s complement of 4CH is B4H.
9-10
CRC (RTU mode):
To calculate the CRC value:
9
Step 1: load a 16-bit register with the content of FFFFH, which is called the ‟CRC” register.
Step 2: (The low byte of the CRC register) XOR (The first byte of the command), and save the
result in the CRC register.
Step 3: check the least significant bit (LSB) of the CRC register. If the bit is 0, shift the register
one bit to the right. If the bit is 1, shift the register one bit to the right and execute (CRC
register) XOR (A001H). Repeat this step 8 times.
Step 4: repeat Steps 2 and 3 until all bytes have been processed. The content of the CRC
register is the CRC value.
After calculating the CRC value, fill in the low word of the CRC value in the command message,
and then the high word. For example, if the result of CRC calculation is 3794H, put 94H in the
low word and 37H in the high word as shown in the following table.
ARD 01H
CMD 03H
01H (High)
Start Data Address
01H (Low)
Data Number 00H (High)

(in words) 02H (Low)
CRC (Check Low) 94H (Low)
CRC (Check High) 37H (High)
9-11
CRC program example:

This function calculates the CRC value in the C language. It needs two parameters:
9
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length
//The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
Example of a PC communication program:

#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char
tdat[60]={‘:’,’0’,’1’,’0’,’3’,’0’,’2’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’2’,’F’,’8’,’\r’,’\
n’};
void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* Interruption enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* Interruption as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
9-12
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH, <7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H <8,E,1> = 1BH
9
<8,O,1> = 0BH */
for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {

while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) ); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]); /* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, data is read */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}
9-13
9.4 Writing and reading communication parameters

Refer to Chapter 8 for the descriptions of the parameters that you can write or read through the
9
communication interface.
The ASDA-B3 servo drive parameters are divided into eight groups: Group 0 (Monitoring
parameters), Group 1 (Basic parameters), Group 2 (Extension parameters), Group 3
(Communication parameters), Group 4 (Diagnosis parameters), Group 5 (Motion control
parameters), and Group 6 and Group 7 (PR parameters).
Writing parameters through communication

You can set these parameters through communication:
Group 0, except P0.000 - P0.001, P0.008 - P0.013, and P0.046.
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4, except P4.000 - P4.004 and P4.008 - P4.009.
Group 5, except P5.010, P5.016, and P5.076.
Group 6
Group 7
Note the following additional details:

P3.001: when changing the communication speed, the next data is written at the new
transmission speed after the new speed is set.
P3.002: when changing the communication protocol setting, the next data is written with the
new communication protocol setting after the new values are set.
P4.005: JOG control. Refer to Chapter 8 for detailed descriptions.
P4.006: force digital output (DO) contact control. You can use this parameter to test the DO
contacts. Set P4.006 to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and 32 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4, DO5, and
DO6, respectively. Then, set P4.006 to 0 to complete the test.
P4.010: adjustment function. First set P2.008 to 20 (14H in hexadecimal format) to enable this
function.
P4.011 - P4.021: these parameters are for adjusting the hardware offset. The parameters were
adjusted before delivery, so changing the parameter settings is not
recommended. If you need to modify these parameters, first set P2.008 to 22
(16H in hexadecimal format).
Reading parameters through communication

You can read the values from all parameters of Group 0 to Group 7 through communication.
9-14
9.5 RS-485 communication specification

Compared with RS-232, the RS-485 communication can carry out one-to-many transmission
9
and has better anti-interference ability. RS-485 uses a balanced transmission line for signal
reception and transmission. The transmitter converts the TTL signal into a differential signal and
then sends it to the receiver. The receiver receives the differential signal and then converts it
back to the TTL signal. Since the transmission process uses the differential signal, it has better
anti-interference ability. However, there are still restrictions on its use, so note the following
when wiring.
 Number of stations
CN3 can only support up to 32 servo drives. If your application requires more than
32 stations, install a repeater to connect more servo drives. The current maximum is
127 stations.
 Transmission distance
The longer the transmission distance, the slower the transmission speed. The cable length
can be up to 100 meters when the servo drive is installed in a quiet environment. If the
required transmission speed is over 38,400 bps, a 15-meter cable is recommended to
ensure data transmission accuracy.
 Transmission line
The quality of the transmission line affects the signal transmission process. If there is
interference during the transmission process, it may result in data loss. It is suggested to
use a shielded twisted-pair cable as it has metal shielded cover and a grounding wire,
which ensures better anti-interference ability.
 Topology
For topology, the closer to the master station, the more stable the transmitted signal.
RS-485 supports bus topology. The transmission line must connect from the first station to
the second station, and then from the second station to the third station, and so on until
the last station. RS-485 does not support star and ring topologies.
 Terminal resistor
In the communication transmission process, if the impedance is not continuous, it causes
signal reflection and signal distortion. This usually happens to the device that is configured
at the end of the transmission line. If the impedance is small or even 0Ω, the signal will be
reflected. To solve this problem, add a resistor of the same characteristic impedance as
the cable at the end of the cable, which is called a terminal resistor. In general, the
transmission line used in the RS-485 signal transmission circuit is a twisted-pair cable, and
its characteristic impedance is about 120 Ω, so the impedance of the terminal resistor is
also 120 Ω.
9-15
 Anti-interference methods
In the signal transmission process, if there is interference, it may result in signal distortion.
Therefore, it is important to eliminate interference. The elimination methods are as follows:
9 1. Add a terminal resistor.

2. Check if the servo drive is installed in a high magnetic field environment. If so, keep it
as far away as possible.
3. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for the transmission line.
4. When wiring, isolate the high voltage power cable from the signal line.
5. Use a magnetic ring at the power input.
6. Add X capacitor and Y capacitor, which are IEC 60384-14 certified, at the power input.
9-16
Absolute System 10
This chapter introduces the absolute servo system, including the wiring and installation
of the absolute encoder, the steps to set up the system, and the procedures for
initializing and operating the system for the first time.
10.1 Battery box (absolute type) and wiring ················································ 10-3

10.1.1 Specifications ········································································ 10-3
10.1.2 Battery box dimensions···························································· 10-5
10.1.3 Connection cable for the absolute encoder··································· 10-6
10.1.4 Battery box cable ··································································· 10-8
10.2 Installation ···················································································· 10-9
10.2.1 Installing the battery box in the servo system ································ 10-9
10.2.2 Installing and replacing a battery··············································· 10-11
10.3 System initialization and operating procedures ···································· 10-13
10.3.1 System initialization ······························································· 10-13
10.3.2 Pulse number ······································································· 10-14
10.3.3 PUU number ········································································ 10-15
10.3.4 Establish the absolute origin coordinates ···································· 10-16
10.3.4.1 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with DI/DO ······· 10-16
10.3.4.2 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with
parameters ································································ 10-17
10.3.4.3 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with the
PR homing function ····················································· 10-17
10.3.5 Read the absolute position ······················································ 10-17
10.3.5.1 Reading the absolute position with DI/DO ························· 10-17
10.3.5.2 Reading the absolute position with communication ············· 10-20
10.4 List of absolute parameters, DI/DO, and alarms ··································· 10-21
10-1
Absolute System ASDA-B3
Note
A complete absolute servo system includes an ASDA-B3 servo drive, an absolute motor, and a
backup battery box. The backup battery supplies power to the system so that the encoder
10
continues to operate even when the power is off. In addition, the absolute encoder can
continuously record the motor’s actual position at any time, even when the motor shaft is rotated
after the power is off. The absolute servo system must be used only with an absolute motor.
If the servo is set up with other types of motors and the system is enabled, AL069 occurs.
When using an absolute motor connected to power, the motor speed should not exceed
250 rpm. When operating with the battery, make sure the maximum speed does not
exceed 200 rpm.
To determine whether your motor is an absolute type, check the model name as shown in the
following:
ECM–A3 □–□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
A / Y: absolute motor
ECM–B3 □–□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
A / P: absolute motor
ECMC series servo motor
ECMC - □ W □ □ □ □ □ □
W / V: absolute motor
Install the battery correctly on the encoder. One servo drive uses one single battery box; two servo
drives can share one dual battery box. Use Delta’s encoder cable to connect to the battery box.
See the following sections for the specifications of the battery box and its accessories.
10-2
ASDA-B3 Absolute System
10.1 Battery box (absolute type) and wiring

10.1.1 Specifications
Precautions
Carefully read through the following safety precautions. Use batteries only in accordance with
the specifications to avoid damage or dangerous conditions. 10
 Make sure the installation location is free of vapor, corrosive and
inflammable gas.
 Correctly place the battery into the battery box to avoid short-circuiting.
 Do not short-circuit the positive and negative electrodes of the battery,
and do not install the battery in reverse direction.
 Do not mix new and used batteries to avoid losing power or shortening the life
of the new batteries. It is suggested to replace all batteries with new ones.
 Follow the instructions when wiring the battery box to avoid dangerous
conditions.
 Do not place the battery in a high-temperature environment over 100°C,

as this may cause a fire or an explosion.
 The batteries are non-rechargeable. Do not charge the batteries as this
may result in an explosion.
 Do not directly weld on the surface of the battery.
Battery specifications
Item Li/SOCl2 Cylindrical Battery

Type ER14505
International standard size AA
Standard voltage 3.6V
Standard capacity 2700 mAh
Maximum continuous discharge current 100 mA
Maximum pulse current 200 mA
Dimensions (D x H) 14.5 x 50.5 mm
Weight Approx. 19 g
Operating temperature -40 to +85°C
Supplier EVE Energy Co., Ltd
Part number for the battery with cable 0991023281
10-3
Battery life
10
Source: EVE Energy Co. ER14505 Discharge Characteristics
(1) The above figure illustrates the discharge current curves measured in the constant current
test. According to the five curves shown above, if the voltage of the battery keeps at 3V or
higher, the expected battery life is as shown in the following table. Therefore, the lowest
battery voltage level for an absolute encoder is set to 3.1V.
Battery mode current Battery life expectancy
Motor
consumption*2 (μA) (month)
ECM-A3 - A
ECM-B3 - A 30 87.5
ECM-B3 - P
ECMC- W
45 58.33
ECM-A3 - Y
ECMC- V 35 75
(2) The battery voltage can keep at 3.6V or above up to 5 years when stored in a cool dry place.
Note:
1. The battery life expectancy is measured with a test using a servo drive, a motor, and a single battery.
2. The current consumption is nearly 0 when the absolute origin coordinates are not established.
Once you established the absolute origin coordinates, the battery power consumption starts.
To avoid battery power consumption when shipping the machine, it is recommended that you leave
the servo drive and battery disconnected, or leave the absolute origin coordinates unestablished.
10-4
10.1.2 Battery box dimensions
Single battery box

Delta part number: ASD-MDBT0100
10
68 (2.67)
35 (1.37) 22 (2.86)
Unit: mm (inch)
Weight: 44 g
R3.25
Dual battery box

Delta part number: ASD-MDBT0200
72.5 (2.85)
45 (1.77)
26 (1.02)
64.5 (2.54)
Unit: mm (inch)
R2.5 Weight: 79.23 g
10-5
10.1.3 Connection cable for the absolute encoder
A. Quick connector
10
L
Model name
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 1003 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1010 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 1020 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
Connection method:
explosion.
Battery box
CN2 connector Quick connector
Connect to
the servo Connect to
drive the motor

(Female) (Male)
Servo drive Encoder
1 2 3 3 2 1
White Red Black White

Reserved Reserved
T+ BAT+ BAT+ T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
White/Red Black Black/Red White/Red

Reserved Reserved
T- BAT- BAT- T-
7 8 9 9 8 7

Shield Shield
DC+5V GND GND DC+5V
10-6
B. Military connector
L 10
L
Model name Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2703 CMV1-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2705 CMV1-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2710 CMV1-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2720 CMV1-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
standard cables.
Connection method:
explosion.
Battery box
Military connector
CN2 connector
Connect to
Connect to the servo
the motor drive
3 2 1
7 4
10 9 8

1 T+ White
2 T- White/Red
3 - -
4 DC+5V Brown
5 BAT- Black
6 BAT+ Red
7, 8 - -
9 GND Blue
10 Shield -
10-7
10.1.4 Battery box cable
Battery box cable that connects to the encoder (part number: 3864573700)
10 25 + 5 (0.98 +0.2) 15 + 5 (0.59 + 0.2)
200 + 10 (7.87 + 0.4)
(inch)
Battery box cable for self-wiring (part number: 3864850600)
5±1(0.1±0.04) 15±5 (0.59±0.2)
1
2
200±10 (7.87±0.4)
Unit: mm (inch)
10-8
10.2 Installation
10.2.1 Installing the battery box in the servo system
10
 DO NOT wire Pin 3 and Pin 4 of the servo drive CN2 connector. They are for
internal use only; wiring them will cause damage to the internal circuit.
 When using an absolute encoder, the battery supplies power directly to the
encoder, so wiring to the CN2 connector of the servo drive is not required.
Single battery box (standard wiring)
(1) (2)
(3)
BAT +/-
Encoder B3 CN2
(4)
(1) Encoder cable; (2) Single battery box (absolute type); (3) CN2 connector; (4) Battery box wiring
10-9
Pin assignment of CN2 connector:
The end that connects to the encoder The end that connects to the servo drive
Military Quick IP67
Color Pin No. Signal Description
10
connector connector connector
4 7 4 Brown 1 DC+5V +5V power supply
9 8 3 Blue 2 GND Power ground

- - - - 3 - For internal use only.
- - - - 4 -
1 1 1 White 5 T+ Serial communication signal (+)
2 4 2 White / Red 6 T- Serial communication signal (-)
10 9 8 - Case Shield Shielding
6 2 6 Red - - Battery +3.6V
5 5 5 Black - - Battery ground
Note: for the absolute battery wiring, refer to Section 3.1.5 Specification for the encoder connector.
Dual battery box (connects to CN2)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(1) Encoder cable; (2) Battery box cable AW; (3) Dual battery box (absolute type); (4) CN2 connector
10-10
10.2.2 Installing and replacing a battery
Single battery box
Step 1:
Release the snap-fit tabs on both sides and

10
remove the battery box cover.
Step 2:
Position the cable clamp to the encoder
connection cable. Note that the cable clamp
should be placed close to the heat shrink tube.
(A) Cable clamp; (B) Heat shrink tube
Step 3:
Plug in the lead wire and tighten the cable clamp
screw.
Step 4:
Install a new battery and connect the wire.
(C) Replace the battery only when the main power
to the servo drive is still on. Do not remove the
power cable, or else the system may lose data.
Step 5:
Place the battery wire into the box and fit the cover.
10-11
Note:
To avoid data loss, replace the battery when any of the following circumstances occurs:
1. The servo drive shows AL061 which means the voltage is too low. Refer to Chapter 12 for more
10
information.
2. Use P0.002 (monitoring variable 26h) to check the battery power. When it displays 31, it means the
voltage is below 3.1V.
Important When the voltage is below 2.7V, the motor’s position record may be lost if the drive
operates under battery power, so you need to re-establish the absolute origin coordinates after
installing a new battery. Thus, it is suggested that you replace the battery when the main power
to the servo drive is on to avoid loss of absolute position data.
10-12
10.3 System initialization and operating procedures

10.3.1 System initialization
After the servo system resumes operation, the controller can acquire the motor’s current
absolute position either with communication (such as RS-485) or DI/DO. Delta’s absolute
system provides two types of position value for the controller: pulse and PUU.
AL06A occurs when you initialize the absolute system for the first time because the coordinate
10
system has not been established. Clear the alarm by setting up the coordinate system. When
insufficient battery power or interruption of battery power causes loss of the coordinate system,
AL060 occurs. In the absolute system, when the number of motor rotations exceeds the range -
32768 to 32767, AL062 occurs. When the PUU position value goes outside the range
-2147483648 to 2147483647, AL289 occurs.
Except for the alarms mentioned above, you can use P2.070 to set up Delta’s absolute servo
system. You can choose not to show AL062 and AL289 if the absolute coordinate system
overflows when the number of rotations exceeds the range -32768 to 32767 or when the PUU
exceeds the range -2147483648 to 2147483647. For example, you might do this on a system
that uses incremental commands to operate in a single direction.
P2.070 setting:
1. Establish the absolute origin coordinates. When the coordinate setting is complete, AL06A
(or AL060) is automatically cleared. There are two representations to establish the
controllers absolute or igin coordinates: pulse number and PUU number. You can establish
the absolute origin coordinates with DI/DO, parameters, or the PR homing function.
2. When the system is powered on again, the controller can access the motor’s absolute
position either with DI/DO or the communication function. Based on the setting of P2.070,
the controller can select the requested value, either the PUU (refer to Section 10.3.3) or the
pulse value of 16777216, within a single turn (refer to Section 10.3.2).
10-13
10.3.2 Pulse number
When the motor is running in the clockwise direction, the cycle number is expressed as a
negative value. When the motor runs in the counterclockwise direction, the cycle number is
10 expressed as a positive value. The range of the number of rotations is between -32768 and
+32767, and AL062 occurs once the number exceeds the range. To clear the alarm, re-establish
the absolute origin coordinates. If P2.070 has been set to ignore the AL062 alarm, then the
system shows no error. If the system is operating in the counterclockwise direction and reaches
32,767 turns, the value jumps to -32768 once it reaches the target position in the next cycle,
and the value keeps increasing from -32768 to 32767. When the system is operating in the
clockwise direction and reaches -32,768 turns, the value jumps to 32767 once it reaches the
target position in the next cycle, and the value keeps decreasing from 32767 to -32768.
In addition to the cycle counter, there are 16,777,216 pulses (0 - 16777215) in one rotation.
Pay attention to the motors running direction. You can read the cycle number and the pulse
number either with communication or DI/DO. Pulse number = m (cycle number) x 16777216 +
pulse number (0 - 16777215). The conversions between pulse number and PUU are as follows:
P1.045
When P1.001.Z = 0, then the PUU number when power on = pulse number x + P6.001.
P1.044
P1.045
When P1.001.Z = 1, then the PUU number when power on = (-1) x pulse number x +
P1.044
P6.001.
Pulse
number in
one turn
Cycle number P0.052
P0.051 m = -2 m = -1 m=0 m=1
(16777216-1)
Pulse
... ...
0
0 - 16777215 0 - 16777215 0 - 16777215 0 - 16777215 0 - 16777215 0 - 16777215
Origin
CW CCW
Figure 10.3.2.1 Absolute position for pulse number
10-14
10.3.3 PUU number
The PUU number is a 32-bit absolute value with a positive or negative sign. When the motor is
running in the forward direction, the PUU number increases; when it is running in the reverse
direction, the PUU number decreases. The forward direction does not mean the motor is
running clockwise; the direction is defined by P1.001.Z. The range of the cycle number is
-32768 to +32767. AL062 occurs when the number of cycles overflows. If the PUU number
10
exceeds the range -2147483648 to +2147483647, the position counter overflows and AL289
occurs. Establish the absolute origin coordinates to clear AL062 or AL289. You can determine
whether or not to show AL062 and AL289 when the position overflows with P2.070. When
reaching the maximum PUU number in the forward direction, the value changes from
2147483647 to -2147483648, and then increases from -2147483648 to 2147483647. The value
changes the other way when the motor operates in the reverse direction. See the following
examples:
Example 1:
When P1.044 = 16777216 and P1.045 = 100000, the motor needs 100,000 PUU to run a
cycle. 2147483647 ÷ 100000 ≒ 21474.8, so once the motor runs over 21,474.8
(< 32767) cycles in the forward direction, AL289 occurs.
Example 2:
When P1.044 = 16777216 and P1.045 = 10000, the motor needs 10,000 PUU to run a
cycle. 2147483647 ÷ 10000 ≒ 214748.3, so once the motor runs over 32,767
(< 214748.3) cycles in the forward direction, AL062 occurs.
PUU
Overflow cycle value
...... 2147483647 -2147483648 to 2147483647 -2147483648 ......
2147483647
0 ...... ......
-2147483648
Reverse Forward
direction direction
Origin
Overflow
warning
AL289 AL289
Figure 10.3.3.1 Absolute position for PUU number
Note: after establishing the absolute origin coordinates, any change to P1.001.Z or E-Gear ratio (P1.044
and P1.045) changes the original setting of the absolute origin coordinates. If the above parameters
are changed, re-establish the absolute origin coordinates.
10-15
10.3.4 Establish the absolute origin coordinates
When the absolute coordinates are lost, the ASDA-B3 servo drive provides three ways to
establish the absolute origin coordinates: DI/DO, parameter setting, or the PR homing function.
10 The following provides more details for each operation mode.
10.3.4.1 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with DI/DO
When the servo system is controlled by the controller, you can reset the absolute coordinate
system with DI/DO. Once established, the pulse number is set to 0 and the PUU number is the
value of P6.001. Refer to the following diagram for detailed descriptions.
Description:
1. When the controller triggers DI.ABSE (rising-edge triggered), it needs to wait for TS before
proceeding to the next step.
2. After reaching TS, the controller starts to reset the coordinate system. When DI.ABSC turns
on and remains on for TQ the pulse number is set to zero and the PUU number is set to the
value of P6.001.
On
DI.ABSE
Off
TS
On
DI.ABSC
Off
TQ
Absolute
position counter
(Pulse = 0; PUU = P6.001)
Figure 10.3.4.1.1 Timing diagram for establishing the absolute coordinates with DI/DO
The following table describes the TS and TQ delay time after triggering DI.ABSE and DI.ABSC.
TS(ms) TQ(ms)
Min (TS, TQ) P2.009 + 2
Max P2.009 + 10
10-16
10.3.4.2 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with parameters
Set P2.071 to 1 to establish the absolute origin coordinates through the panel or with
communication. Since the write-protect function of P2.071 is protected by P2.008, you must set
P2.008 to 271 first. In other words, the sequence is: set P2.008 to 271, then set P2.071 to 1.
As soon as P2.071 is set to 1, the absolute coordinate system resets. 10
10.3.4.3 Establishing the absolute origin coordinates with the PR homing function
You can use the 11 homing modes in the PR mode to establish the absolute origin coordinates.
For more details, refer to Section 7.1.3.1 Homing methods.
10.3.5 Read the absolute position

10.3.5.1 Reading the absolute position with DI/DO
Set P2.070 Bit 0 to 0 so that you can read the PUU number with DI/DO. See the following
descriptions.
Bit 79 - Bit 64 Bit 63 - Bit 32 Bit 31 - Bit 16 Bit 15 - Bit 0

Encoder PUU Encoder status
Check Sum 0
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (P0.050)
Set P2.070 Bit 0 to 1 so that you can read the pulse number with DI/DO. See the following
descriptions.
Bit 79 - Bit 64 Bit 63 - Bit 32 Bit 31 - Bit 16 Bit 15 - Bit 0

Pulse number in one rotation Encoder turn Encoder status
Check Sum
0 to 16777215 (= 16777216 - 1) -32768 to +32767 (P0.050)
Description:
Check Sum = (((((((WORD_0+0xA700) XOR WORD_1)+0x605A) XOR WORD_2)+0x30A5)
XOR WORD_3)+0x5A06)
WORD_0 WORD_1 WORD_2 WORD_3
+ XOR + XOR + XOR + Output
0xA700 0x605A 0x30A5 0x5A06
Note:
1. This algorithm has no positive or negative sign.
2. 0xA700, 0x605A, 0x30A5, and 0x5A06 are constants in hexadecimal format.
3. WORD_0: encoder status (Bit 15 - 0)
WORD_1: encoder turn (Bit 31 - 16)
WORD_2: encoder pulse number (Bit 47 - 32)
WORD_3: encoder pulse number (Bit 63 - 48)
10-17
You can read the pulse number or PUU number with DI/DO and P2.070. See the following
timing diagram.
Continue to (14) in Continue to (15) in
the following figure the following figure
10
(1) (2) (14) (15)
ABSE (DIx) TB
Communication enabled (12)
(changeable DI)
TS (3) (5) (7) (9) TS
ABSQ (DI4)
Signal request TN
(fixed to DI4) TN
TR
ABSR (DO2) TQ TQ TQ
Signal ready
(fixed to DO2)
(4) (6) (8) (10)
ABSD (DO3)
Data content b0 b1 b2
(fixed to DO3)
ABSW (DOx)
Communication error (DOx) (11) (13)
Continue to (13) in the

following figure
DI/DO function prior to handshake communication
Continued from (14) Continued from (15)

in the above figure in the above figure
(14) (15) (16)
ABSE (DIx) TB
Communication enabled
(changeable DI)
TS
ABSQ (DI4)
Signal request
(fixed to DI4)
ABSR (DO2)
Signal ready
(fixed to DO2)
ABSD (DO3)
Data content b0 b1 b2 b79
(fixed to DO3)
ABSW (DOx)
(13)
Communication error (DOx)
Continued from (13) in the above figure
Figure 10.3.5.1.1 Timing diagram for reading the absolute position with DI/DO
The following table describes the delay time when reading the absolute position with DI/DO.
TR(ms) TS(ms) TQ(ms) TN(ms) TB(ms)
Min - P2.009 + 2
Max 200 P2.009 + 10
10-18
Descriptions:
1. When the handshake communication starts, the ABSE signal is triggered.
2. After the Ts delay time (make sure the signal is on), the functions for DI4, DO2, and DO3
10
are switched to ABSQ, ABSR, and ABSD, respectively. If DI4 was in the high-level state
before, it remains in the high-level state when switched to ABSQ (logic high-level signal).
DI4, DO2, and DO3 are dual-function DI/DO, which means DI4, DO2, and DO3 share the
same DI with ABSQ, ABSR, and ABSD. Pay special attention when switching functions or
set the DI/DO to 0 to disable the dual-function of DI/DO.
3. If DI4 was in the high-level state and switched to ABSQ after the TS delay time, when the
controller resets this signal to low level, the new signal is interpreted as the data access
command.
4. After the TQ time, the handshake data is ready and the absolute position is sent to ABSD.
Now the servo drive turns on the ABSR signal and the controller can access the data.
If the controller still cannot detect the ABSR status while it is changing to high level after the
maximum TQ time (refer to Figure 10.3.5.1.1), there may be a communication error.
5. Once the ABSR signal is set to high level, the controller accesses the data, and the ABSQ
signal is set to high level to notify the servo drive that data was read.
6. When ABSQ is at high level, ABSR is set to low level after the TN time in order to send the
data for the next bit communication.
7. When ABSR is at low level, ABSQ is also set to low level and the servo drive needs to send
the data for the next bit communication.
8. Repeat steps 3 and 4. Send the absolute position to ABSD for the next bit communication.
9. Repeat steps 5 to 7. The controller has read and received the data.
10. The third bit data is ready.
11. After the TR waiting time, if the controller has not read the data and turned on the ABSQ
signal, the servo drive sends the ABSW signal (communication error) and stops the
handshake communication.
12. When the controller receives the communication error signal, it sets ABSE to low level and
prepares to restart the handshake communication.
13. ABSW resumes to low level after the servo drive receives the ABSE signal.
14. The controller resumes communication after the TB time.
15. Repeat step 1.
16. If no error occurs, the controller completes 80 bits (0 - 79) of the handshake communication
with the servo drive. DI4, DO2, and DO3 then resume their original functions.
Note: if ABSE is set to low level first and then changed to high level, but ABSW does not resume to high
level and the alarm remains on, it means some other errors exist. Check for the following possible
warnings: absolute position lost, low battery voltage level, or absolute position overflows. Restart a
new communication cycle after those errors have been cleared.
10-19
10.3.5.2 Reading the absolute position with communication
You can access the data of the absolute encoder through two communication methods: instant
access or parameter access. Instant access refers to reading the motor’s feedback position as
10 soon as power is supplied to the servo. When you set the status monitoring register 1 to the
motors feedback pulse number (P0.017 = 0), you can access the motor’s current position by
reading P0.009.
Parameter access means the motor’s position is temporarily stored in parameters. Once you set
P0.049 with communication, the encoder status and motor absolute position (cycle number),
and pulse number (or PUU) are stored in P0.050, P0.051, and P0.052, respectively. You can
choose to read the pulse number or PUU through P2.070 Bit 1. When P0.049 is set to 1, the
drive does not clear the error when reading the position value. If P0.049 is set to 2, the drive
clears the error at the same time when reading the position value. Even when the motor is
stopped, it still moves slightly forward and backward for position correction which is normal for
the servo system. To avoid difference between the read coordinates and the actual positioning
of the motor, set to clear the position error at the same time when reading the coordinates, so
the motors actual positioning is changed to the read coordinates, which clears the position
error. For example, the motor’s current position is 20000, but it varies between 19999 and
20001. If you send the command to read the motor’s position when it stops at 20001, then the
motor’s position is updated to 20001. After all positions are updated in P0.050 - P0.052, P0.049
is automatically reset to 0. At that point, the controller can access the values of P0.050 - P0.052.
P0.050 shows the status of the absolute encoder. When it shows absolute position lost or cycle
number overflow, that indicates the read absolute position is invalid. You must re-establish the
absolute origin coordinates.
Start
Set P0.049 to 1 or 2
No
Set P0.049 to 0
Yes
Read
P0.050 - P0.052
End
10-20
10.4 List of absolute parameters, DI/DO, and alarms

Relevant parameters (refer to Chapter 8 for detailed information):
10
Parameter Function
P0.002 Drive status
P0.049 Update encoder absolute position
P0.050 Absolute coordinate system status
P0.051 Encoder absolute position - multiple turns
P0.052 Encoder absolute position - pulse number or PUU within single turn
P2.069 Absolute encoder
P2.070 Read data selection
P2.071 Absolute position homing
Relevant DI/DO (refer to Chapter 8 for detailed information):

Setting value DI name Setting value DO name
When DI.ABSE is on,
DI.ABSR triggered by ABSR always output
0x1D ABSE
DO2 replaces the DO2 by DO2
assigned by P2.019.
When DI.ABSE is on, When DI.ABSE is on,
the DI.ABSQ from DI4 ABSQ always input DI.ABSD triggered by ABSD always output
replaces the DI4 by DI4 DO3 replaces the DO3 by DO3
function from P2.013. assigned by P2.020.
0x1F ABSC 0x0D ABSW
Relevant alarms (refer to Chapter 12 for detailed information):
Display Alarm name
AL060 Absolute position is lost
AL061 Encoder undervoltage
AL062 Number of turns for the absolute encoder overflows
AL069 Wrong motor type
AL072 Encoder overspeed
AL073 Encoder memory error
AL074 Encoder single-turn absolute position error
AL075 Encoder absolute number of turns is in error
AL077 Encoder internal error
AL079 Encoder parameter error
AL07B Encoder memory busy

Command to clear the absolute position is issued when the motor
AL07C
speed is over 200 rpm
Motor stops operating when servo drive power is cycled before
AL07D
AL07C is cleared
AL07E Encoder clearing procedure error
AL289 Position counter overflows
10-21
(This page is intentionally left blank,)
10
10-22
CANopen Mode 11
1
This chapter provides details for the required parameter settings when the servo
communicates with the controller through the CANopen communication function.
11.1 Basic configuration ·········································································· 11-2

11.1.1 Supported functions ································································· 11-2
11.1.2 Hardware configuration ····························································· 11-3
11.1.3 Parameter settings of CANopen mode ·········································· 11-4
11.2 Communication specification ····························································· 11-5
11.2.1 Servo communication architecture ··············································· 11-5
11.2.2 Communication objects ····························································· 11-6
11.2.2.1 Process data object (PDO)··················································· 11-7
11.2.2.2 Service data object (SDO) ··················································· 11-8
11.2.2.3 SDO abort codes ······························································11-11
11.2.2.4 Synchronization object (SYNC) ············································11-12
11.2.2.5 Emergency object (EMCY) ··················································11-13
11.2.2.6 NMT services ···································································11-14
11.3 CANopen operation mode ································································11-17
11.3.1 Profile Position Mode ·······························································11-17
11.3.2 Interpolation Position Mode ·······················································11-21
11.3.3 Homing Mode ········································································11-24
11.3.4 Profile Velocity Mode ·······························································11-26
11.3.5 Profile Torque Mode ································································11-28
11.4 Object dictionary ············································································11-30
11.4.1 Specifications for objects ··························································11-30
11.4.2 List of objects ·········································································11-31
11.4.3 Details of objects ····································································11-33
11.4.3.1 OD 1XXXh communication object group ································11-33
11.4.3.2 OD 2XXXh servo parameter group ·······································11-49
11.4.3.3 OD 6XXXh communication object group ································11-50
11.5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting ························································11-82
11-1
CANopen Mode ASDA-B3
11.1 Basic configuration

11.1.1 Supported functions
CANopen functions supported by Delta servo drives:
11 

CANopen communication protocol: NMT, SYNC, SDO, PDO, and EMCY.
SDO transmission: acyclic data exchange for reading / writing parameters and
communication related settings.
 PDO transmission / reception: time-triggered, event-triggered, synchronous transmission

(cyclic), and asynchronous transmission (acyclic).
 Node guarding.
 Heartbeat.
CANopen function not supported by Delta servo drives:
 Time stamp.
11-2
ASDA-B3 CANopen Mode
11.1.2 Hardware configuration
Pin assignment (RJ-45) for CAN bus wiring
8
11
9
16
(1) (2)
Pin assignment:

1, 9 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2, 10 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
4, 12 - -
5, 13 - -
6, 14 - -
8, 16 - -
 Baud rate setting
Baud rate and bus length
Baud rate Maximum bus length
1 Mbps 25 m
750 Kbps 50 m
500 Kbps (default) 100 m
250 Kbps 250 m
125 Kbps 500 m
11-3
11.1.3 Parameter settings of CANopen mode
Follow these instructions to connect the CANopen controller and the ASDA-B3 servo drive:
1. Set CANopen mode: set P1.001 to 0x0C.
11 2. Set node ID: set the range of P3.000 to 01h - 7Fh.
3. Set P3.001 to 0403h for baud rate as 1 Mbps (Z = 0: 125 Kbps; 1: 250 Kbps; 2: 500 Kbps;
3: 750 Kbps; 4: 1 Mbps).
4. It is suggested to set P3.012 to 0x0100, so the parameters in the following table are
non-volatile.
Variables during
P3.012.Z = 0 P3.012.Z = 1 Note
initialization
P1.032 0x0010 EEPROM -
P2.035 50331648 EEPROM -
P1.047 100 EEPROM -
P1.049 0 EEPROM -
P1.038 100 EEPROM -
P6.001 0 EEPROM -
Used in PV and PP
Acc (P1.034) 200 EEPROM
modes
Used in PV and PP
Dec (P1.034) 200 EEPROM
modes
Torque slope
200 EEPROM Used in PT mode
(P1.034)
P1.044 1 EEPROM -
P1.045 1 EEPROM -
Depending on the
P1.055 EEPROM -
motor specifications
P5.008 2147483647 EEPROM -
P5.009 -2147483648 EEPROM -
5. It is suggested to enable the dynamic brake function (P1.032 = 0x0000).
11-4
11.2 Communication specification

11.2.1 Servo communication architecture
11
CAN network
CAN node
DS301 application layer and

communication profile
Drive Profile 402

Servo drive controls
the state machine
Modes of operation
Inter-
Profile Profile Profile
Homing polated
position velocity torque
mode position
mode mode mode
mode
Motor
The CANopen architecture of the servo drive is as follows:
 DS301 is the communication profile: this protocol includes the communication objects
(PDO, SDO, SYNC, and Emergency object), NMT service, and related communication
object dictionary.
 DS402 is the device profile for drives and motion control: defines the behavior of each
motion mode and the required object parameter settings for execution.
11-5
11.2.2 Communication objects
The default of the Delta servo drive complies with the DS301 protocol. All CANopen data contains
an 11-bit identifier, generally referred to as "COB-ID". The COB-ID data format is as follows:
11 Bit
Bit 10 9
Function
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
0
Bit 6 - Bit 0 Node-ID The data size is 7-bit and the setting range is 0 - 127.
Bit 10 - Bit 7 Function code The data size is 4-bit and the setting range is 0 - 15.
The following table lists the supported objects and the corresponding COB-IDs:
Communication Function code Node ID COB-ID Object

object Bit 10 9 8 7 Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DEC (HEX) parameter
NMT service 0000 0000000 0 (0h) -
SYNC object 0001 0000000 128 (80h) 1005h - 1007h
EMCY object 0001 XXXXXXX 128 (80h) 1014h
T_PDO1 0011 XXXXXXX 384 (180h) + Node-ID 1800h

R_PDO1 0100 XXXXXXX 512 (200h) + Node-ID 1400h
T_SDO 1011 XXXXXXX 1408 (580h) + Node-ID 1200h

R_SDO 1100 XXXXXXX 1536 (600h) + Node-ID 1200h
NMT error control 1110 XXXXXXX 1792 (700h) + Node-ID 1016h, 1017h
0 indicates the bit is off; 1 indicates the bit is on; X indicates the bit is set according to the requirement.
Communication dictionary
Communication object Object area
1000 - 1FFF Communication Profile Area
2000 - 2FFF Manufacturer Specific Profile Area
6000 - 9FFF Standardized Device Profile Area
11-6
11.2.2.1 Process data object (PDO)
Real-time data transmission can be achieved with Process data objects (PDOs). There are two
types of PDOs: the sent TxPDO and the received RxPDO. This definition is from the perspective
of the servo drive, for example, the sent TxPDO refers to the object that the servo drive sends to
the controller. Set the communication parameters and mapping parameters as shown in the
following table to use the PDOs.
11
Received RxPDO Sent TxPDO
Communication Mapping Communication Mapping
Communication Communication
object object object object
object object
parameter parameter parameter parameter
R_PDO1 1400h 1600h T_PDO1 1800h 1A00h
R_PDO2 1401h 1601h T_PDO2 1801h 1A01h
R_PDO3 1402h 1602h T_PDO3 1802h 1A02h
R_PDO4 1403h 1603h T_PDO4 1803h 1A03h
The mapping parameter format of PDO is:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Function
Bit 0 - Bit 7 Object length
Bit 8 - Bit 15 Object sub-index
Bit 16 - Bit 31 Object index
Example:
To set three PDOs (OD 6040h, OD 607Ah, and OD 6060h) in the first group of PDOs,
the setting is as follows:
Mapping parameter
setting for received Data Description
PDO
OD 1600 sub0 3 Set 3 PDO mappings.
OD 1600 sub1 6040h 00h 10h -
OD 1600 sub2 607Ah 00h 20h -
OD 1600 sub3 6060h 00h 08h -
Note The total length is 38h (56-bit) which meets the specification of less than 64-bit.
11-7
11.2.2.2 Service data object (SDO)
With Service data objects (SDOs), you can write or read objects. The SDO message format is
mainly composed of COB-ID and SDO data. SDO data can transmit up to 4 bytes.
11 Controller
COB-ID
600h+
Node-ID
Packet (8 bytes in total)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Servo drive
Byte Function
Byte 0 Command code
Byte 1 - Byte 2 Object index
Byte 3 Object sub-index
Byte 4 - Byte 7 Data
 Write data with SDO
To use an SDO to write data with the controller, you need to write the request code, index, and
data according to the SDO format. The servo drive then returns the corresponding message
based on the written data.
The following figure shows the packet format when the controller sends the SDO for writing data:
COB-ID
600h+
Controller 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Servo drive
Node-ID
Function Object
Object index Data
code sub-index Description
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
Write 4 bytes of
23h - - - Data
data.
Write 2 bytes of
2Bh - - - Data
data.
Write 1 byte of
2Fh - - - Data
data.
11-8
The following figure shows the packet format returned by the servo drive when the controller
sends the SDO for writing data:
11
COB-ID
580h+
Node-ID
Function Object
Object index Data
Write-in is
60h - - -
successful.
80h - - - SDO abort codes Error code.
Note: for SDO abort codes, refer to Section 11.2.2.3.
Example:
Write the value of 300,000 (493E0h) to the servo parameter P7.001 (OD 2701h).
The write-in format is as follows:

Function Object
Object index Data
Write 4 bytes of
23h 01 27 0 E0 93 04 00
data.
The returned packet is as follows:

Function Object
Object index Data
Write-in is
60h 01 27 0
successful.
11-9
 Read data with SDO
To use an SDO to read data with the controller, you need to write the request code and index
according to the SDO format. The servo drive then returns the object's data based on the object
11
to be read.
The following figure shows the packet format when the controller sends the SDO for reading data:
COB-ID
600h+
Node-ID
Function Object
Object index Data
40h - - - Read data.
The following figure shows the packet format returned by the servo drive when the controller
sends the SDO for reading data:
COB-ID
Controller 580h+ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Servo drive
Node-ID
Function Object
Object index Data
Read 4 bytes of
43h - - - Data
data.
Read 2 bytes of
4Bh - - - Data
data.
Read 1 byte of
4Fh - - - Data
data.
80h - - - SDO abort codes Error code.
Note: for SDO abort codes, refer to Section 11.2.2.3.
11-10
11.2.2.3 SDO abort codes
The abort codes are as follows:
11
Abort code Description
05040001h Client / server command is invalid or does not exist.
06010002h Attempt to write a read-only object.
06020000h Object does not exist in the object dictionary.
06040041h Unable to map the object to the PDO.
06040042h The number and length of mapped objects exceed the PDO length.
06060000h Access failed due to hardware error (storage or restore error).
06070010h Data type does not match; parameter length does not match.
06090011h Sub-index does not exist.
06090030h The written parameter value is out of range.
08000000h General error.
080000a1h An error occurred when reading an object from EEPROM.
080000a2h An error occurred when writing an object to EEPROM.
080000a3h Invalid range when accessing EEPROM.
080000a4h EEPROM data content error occurred when accessing EEPROM.
080000a5h The entered password is incorrect when writing to the encryption area
08000020h Unable to transfer data or save data to the application.
Unable to transfer data or save data to the application due to restrictions
08000021h
(storage or restore in the wrong state).
08000022h Object is in use.
11-11
11.2.2.4 Synchronization object (SYNC)
The Synchronization objects (SYNCs) are periodically broadcast by the SYNC producer.
There is no data in the SYNC packet (L = 0).
11 The SYNC protocol is as follows:
SYNC producer SYNC consumer

(controller) Write SYNC (servo drive)
Request Indication
Data size L = 0 Indication
Indication
The SYNC object is used to achieve PDO transmission and reception synchronization between
the controller and servo drive. The SYNC object transmission cycle is set by the object OD 1006h
(see Section 11.4 for detailed settings).
The following figure shows the timing sequence between the servo drive RxPDO reception and
the controller SYNC transmission. The controller transmits RxPDO to the servo drive between
two SYNCs (communication cycle), and the servo drive will not execute the RxPDO received in
the previous communication cycle until it receives the SYNC.
SYNC Communication cycle SYNC

Message Message
Objects mapped Objects mapped

in synchronous in synchronous
RxPDO RxPDO
Execute the Execute the
synchronous synchronous
mapped RxPDO mapped RxPDO
received in the received in the
previous cycle previous cycle
11-12
The following figure shows the timing sequence between the servo drive TxPDO transmission
and the controller SYNC transmission. The servo drive transmits the TxPDO data to the
controller as soon as it receives the SYNC.
SYNC
Message
Communication cycle
Objects mapped in
SYNC
Message
Objects mapped in
11
synchronous TxPDO synchronous TxPDO
11.2.2.5 Emergency object (EMCY)
When the servo detects an abnormality, it sends an alarm and notifies the controller with the
Emergency object. The Emergency object can only transmit one alarm at a time. When a higher
priority alarm occurs before the previous lower priority alarm is cleared, the higher priority alarm
overwrites the previous alarm and notifies the controller as an Emergency object.
COB-ID Packet (8 bytes in total)

Controller 80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Servo drive
Error code Error register Servo alarm N/A

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Bytes 4 - 7
Refer to Chapter 12
See OD 603Fh on the error code table. OD 1001h
for details.
11-13
11.2.2.6 NMT services
 State machine
The NMT state machine is shown as follows. After the servo drive completes the Initialization
11 state, it enters the Pre-operational state. The NMT state machine determines the behavior of the
communication function, such as PDO functions only in the Operational state.
Power On or Hardware Reset

(1)
Initialization
(2)
(14) (11)
Pre-operational
(7)
(4) (5) (10)
(13)
Stopped
(3) (6)
(8)
(12) (9)
Operational
State Description
The servo drive successfully completes initialization after being powered on
Initialization
without errors occurring. The packet could still not be transmitted in this state.
Data can be exchanged with SDO. If an alarm occurs in the servo drive,
Pre-operational
an emergency message is sent to notify the controller.
SDO and TxPDO data packets can be used to exchange data with the
Stopped
controller.
This state allows for all data exchanges including SDO and PDO (TxPDO and
Operational
RxPDO).
The following table shows the communication objects that can be used for each communication
state:
Communication object Initialization Pre-operational Operational Stopped

PDO V
SDO V V
Synchronization object V V
Emergency object V V
Boot-up object V
NMT object V V V
11-14
 Heartbeat
The Heartbeat mechanism is mainly to enable the producer to periodically send packets to the
consumer. The producer can be a controller or servo drive; on the other hand, a controller or
servo drive can also be the consumer.
If you use the servo drive as the consumer and the controller to send the heartbeat, you need to
set the heartbeat receiving time (OD 1016h) of the servo drive. When the servo drive does not
11
receive the heartbeat signal within the receiving time, the heartbeat event is triggered, meaning
AL180 is triggered. Consumer heartbeat time (OD 1016h) is defined as the time the servo drive
expects to receive a heartbeat. For the setting, consumer heartbeat time (OD 1016h) must be
greater than the producer heartbeat time. The producer time is set by the controller. Due to
delays and other uncontrollable external factors in transmitting the heartbeat, you must retain a
tolerance margin value.
COB-ID = 700h+Node-ID
Example for Node-ID = 1
Heartbeat Heartbeat
701h S
producer consumer
Heartbeat
Heartbeat consumer time
producer time (OD 1006h)
Heartbeat Heartbeat
701h S
producer consumer
Heartbeat
consumer time
(OD 1006h)
No signal AL180
The S code is described as follows:
S Function
0 Bootup
4 Stopped
5 Operational
127 Pre-operational
If you want to use the servo drive as the producer, then the heartbeat is sent by the drive and
you need to set the producer heartbeat time (OD 1017h). Set the consumer heartbeat time for
the controller, which must be greater than the producer heartbeat time. When the controller
does not receive the heartbeat signal within the receiving time, it triggers the heartbeat event
which corresponds to the alarm defined by the controller.
11-15
The servo drive can play two roles simultaneously, the consumer and producer, but you need to
set OD 1016h and OD 1017h at the same time. And the controller must also be set as the
producer and consumer.
11  Node / Life Guarding
The Node / Life Guarding mechanism is similar to that of Heartbeat. The main difference
between the two is that Heartbeat only uses the consumer to judge whether there are packets
or not, and the producer does not make this judgment. The mechanism of Node / Life Guarding
is mainly based on the master-slave axis and the two-way relationship. The master axis
periodically sends packets to the slave axis, and the slave axis must return the packets to the
master axis within the set guard time (OD 100Ch), otherwise an error occurs. You must set the
life time for the slave axis and the master slave must send the packets within the life guard time.
If the slave axis does not receive the packets, AL180 is triggered. Life time is set by multiplying
the guard time by a life time factor (OD 100Dh).
The Node / Life Guarding architecture is as follows:
COB-ID = 700h + Node-ID
COB-ID
Master Slave
Node COB-ID Bit 7 6-0
Guarding Node
time Life
time
COB-ID
Master Slave
Node COB-ID Bit 7 6-0
Guarding
time
Node Guarding Life Guarding

event No signal
event
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4 = Stopped
Bit 6 - Bit 0 State of the NMT slave 5 = Operational
127 = Pre-operational
Bit 7 - -
11-16
11.3 CANopen operation mode

This section describes the servo motion mode (Mode of Operation) specified by CiA402 in
CANopen mode. The content includes basic operation settings and related object descriptions.
11.3.1 Profile Position Mode 11

After the servo drive receives the position command transmitted by the controller, the servo
drive controls the servo motor to reach the target position. In the position control mode, the
controller only informs the servo drive of the target position, speed command, and acceleration /
deceleration settings at the beginning. The motion plan from command triggering to the arrival
of the target position is performed by the motion command generator in the servo drive.
The following figure shows the position control mode architecture of the servo drive:
Target position (607Ah)

Position [PUU]
Software position limit limit
(607Dh) function
Profile velocity (6081h) Speed [PUU/s]

limit
Max profile velocity (607Fh) function Max torque
(6072h)
Trajectory
Profile acceleration (6083h) generator
Position demand
value (60FCh)
Profile deceleration (6084h)
Quick stop deceleration Filter
Acceleration [ms]
(6085h) E-Gear ratio P1.008
limit function Position Speed Torque Servo
6093h sub1 P1.025 - control
control control motor
Max acceleration (60C5h) 6093h sub2 P1.028
loop loop loop
P1.036
Max deceleration (60C6h) P1.068
Torque actual value (6077h) M
Velocity actual value (606Ch)
Position window (6067h) Encoder
Position window time (6068h)
Statusword (6041h) +
Window Position
Bit 10 Target reached compara- window
tor comparator - E-Gear ratio
Position actual value
(6064h) 6093h sub2
6093h sub1
-
Following error actual value (60F4h) +
Position demand value
Following error window (6065h) (6062h)
Servo alarm AL009 (2001h) Following

error
comparator
11-17
Operation steps:
1. Set OD 6060h to 01h to set the mode as the position control mode.
2. Set OD 607Ah for the target position (unit: PUU).
11 3. Set OD 6081h for the speed command (unit: PUU/sec).
4. Set OD 6083h for the acceleration time slope (unit: ms).
5. Set OD 6084h for the deceleration time slope (unit: ms).
6. Set OD 6040h for the control command. Follow these steps. Steps 6.1 and 6.2 are to
bring the servo drive's state machine into the ready state. For the description of the state
machine, refer to the OD 6040h description in Section 11.4.
Step Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description
6.1 0 0 1 1 0 Shutdown.
6.2 0 0 1 1 1 Switch on (ready for servo on).
6.3 0 1 1 1 1 Enable operation (servo on).
Command triggered (rising-edge
6.4 1 1 1 1 1
triggering).
7. After the servo completes the first motion command, the servo sets the target position,
speed and other conditions to execute the next motion command.
8. Set OD 6040h for the control command. Since the command is rising-edge triggered,
switch Bit 4 to Off first and then to On.
8.2 1 1 1 1 1
triggering).
Read the servo drive information:
1. Read OD 6064h to obtain the current motor feedback position.

2. Read OD 6041h to obtain the servo drive status, including the following error and
notifications for set-point acknowledge and target reached.
11-18
Command to take immediate effect
In the position control mode, set the command to take effect immediately or not with 6040h Bit 5.
11
 When 6040h Bit 5 is set to 0, the command to take immediate effect is disabled.
If the command to take immediate effect is not enabled, when the current motion command is in
execution (not yet complete), the servo continues to execute the current motion command even
if a new command is triggered. The new command is only acknowledged and executed after the
current command is complete.
Position 50000 PUU

Target 20000 PUU
position
(607Ah)
Time
Command 1
triggered
(6040h Bit 4) 0
Speed 60000 PUU/s
Velocity 30000 PUU/s

actual value
(606Ch)
50000 PUU
Execute 20000 PUU
current
position
Set-point 1
acknowledge
(6041h Bit 12) 0
1
Target reached
(6041h Bit 10)
0
11-19
 When 6040h Bit 5 is set to 1, the command to take immediate effect is enabled (only valid in
Profile Position Mode).
If the command to take immediate effect is enabled, when the current motion command is in
11
execution (not yet complete), the servo immediately interrupts the current command and
executes the new command once the servo receives a new triggered command.
Position 50000 PUU
Target 20000 PUU
position
(607Ah) Time
Command 1
triggered
(6040h Bit 4) 0
Speed 60000 PUU/s
Velocity 30000 PUU/s

actual value
(606Ch)
Execute
current
position
Set-point 1
acknowledge
(6041h Bit 12) 0
Target 1
reached
(6041h Bit 10) 0
Relevant object list

Index Name Data type Access
6040h Controlword UNSIGNED16 RW
6041h Statusword UNSIGNED16 RO
6060h Modes of operation INTEGER8 RW
6061h Modes of operation display INTEGER8 RO
6062h Position demand value [PUU] INTEGER32 RO
6063h Position actual internal value INTEGER32 RO
6064h Position actual value INTEGER32 RO
6065h Following error window UNSIGNED32 RW
6067h Position window UNSIGNED32 RW
6068h Position window time UNSIGNED16 RW
607Ah Target position INTEGER32 RW
6081h Profile velocity UNSIGNED32 RW
6083h Profile acceleration UNSIGNED32 RW
6084h Profile deceleration UNSIGNED32 RW
6093h Position factor UNSIGNED32 RW
60F4h Following error actual value INTEGER32 RO
60FCh Position demand value INTEGER32 RO
Note: for more details, refer to Section 11.4.3 Details of objects.
11-20
11.3.2 Interpolation Position Mode
Interpolation Position Mode requires a series of position data to complete the interpolation
positioning. The difference between IP (Interpolation Mode) and PP (Position Mode) is all the
motion command paths of the IP mode are issued by the controller. The servo drive only follows
each position that the controller issues and finally completes a motion command. Delta servo
drives only support synchronous operation which is the controller periodically sends the SYNC
11
object (COB-ID = 0x80). The interpolation cycle can be set by OD 60C2h. And the controller
issues the position command to the interpolation position of OD 60C1h.
Interpolation data record

(60C1h)
Interpolation time period Position
(60C2h) limit [PUU]
Software position limit function
(607Dh)
Max torque
(6072h)
Speed [RPM]
Max profile velocity (607Fh) Trajectory
limit
generator
function Position demand
value (60FCh)
Quick stop deceleration [ms] Filter

Acceleration
(6085h) limit function E-Gear ratio P1.008
Position Speed Torque Servo
control control motor
6093h sub2 P1.028 loop
Controlword (6040h) loop loop
P1.036
P1.068
Torque actual value (6077h)

M
Position window (6067h)

Encoder
Statusword target reached +

Window Position
(6041h)
compara- window
Position actual value tor comparator -
(6064h) E-Gear ratio
6093h sub2
-
6093h sub1
Following error actual value (60F4h) +
Position demand value
Following error window (6065h) (6062h)
Servo alarm AL009 (2001h) Following

error
comparator
11-21
Operation steps:
1. Set OD 6060h to 07h to set the mode as Interpolation Position Mode.
2. Set OD 60C2h for the interpolation cycle. The setting must be the same as the
11 communication cycle of OD 1006h.
3. In the PDO mapping setting of the controller, configure one set of RxPDO to be
OD 60C1h sub1 and OD 60C1h sub2.
4. In the PDO mapping setting of the controller, configure the objects to be monitored in
TxPDO according to the requirements, such as the feedback position (OD 6064h).
bring the servo drive's state machine into the ready state. For more details of the state
machine, refer to Section 11.2.2.6.
5.1 0 0 1 1 0 Shutdown.
SYNC Time
OD 6040h Bit 1
& OD 6040h Bit 2
Servo On
OD 6040h Bit 0
OD 6040h Bit 3
OD 6041h Bit 12 Max.

Interpolation mode 3 ms
in motion
OD 60C1h sub1
Interpolation
position
Servo internal
interpolation position
11-22
Adjustment method:
It is suggested to set the SYNC communication cycle (OD 1006h) between 1 ms and 10 ms.
Since the cycle time is too long, the position error also increases. If the position change is big,
it causes speed fluctuations. In this case, use P1.036 (S-curve acceleration / deceleration
constant) or P1.068 (Position command - moving filter) to smooth the position difference.
Since the jitter of each controller is different, the servo receives a difference between the SYNC
11
and SYNC communication cycle time. When this happens, adjust the error value (U) of P3.009
to increase the error range and let the servo drive automatically correct the internal timer so it is
consistent with the communication cycle of the controller.

Index Name Data type Access
6040h Controlword UNSIGNED16 RW
60C0h Interpolation sub mode select INTEGER16 RW
60C1h Interpolation data record INTEGER32 RW
11-23
11.3.3 Homing Mode
After homing is complete, the coordinate system of the servo drive is established and the drive
can start executing the position command issued by the controller. Delta servo drives offer
11 35 homing modes, including finding the home switch, positive and negative limits, and motor
Z pulse.
Homing method (6098h) [PUU]

Homing
function
Home offset (607Ch)
Homing speeds (6099h) Speed [RPM]

limit
Max profile velocity (607Fh) function Max torque
(6072h)
Trajectory
Quick stop deceleration
generator
(6085h)
Homing acceleration /
deceleration (609Ah)
Acceleration
limit function [ms] Filter
Max acceleration (60C5h) E-Gear ratio P1.008
Position Speed Torque Servo
Max deceleration (60C6h) control control motor
6093h sub2 P1.028 loop
loop loop
P1.036
P1.068
Encoder
E-Gear ratio
Position actual value (6064h) 6093h sub2
6093h sub1
Operation steps:
1. Set OD 6060h to 06h to set the mode as Homing Mode.
2. Set OD 607Ch for the home offset.
3. Set OD 6098h for the method to find the origin point.
4. Set OD 6099h sub1 for the speed when searching for the home switch.
5. Set OD 6099h sub2 for the speed when searching for the Z pulse.
6. Set OD 609Ah for the homing acceleration / deceleration time.
7.1 0 0 1 1 0 Shutdown.
7.4 1 1 1 1 1
triggering).
11-24
1. Read OD 6041h to obtain the servo drive status.
2. Read OD 6064h to obtain the current motor feedback position.

Index
6040h
Name
Controlword
Data type
UNSIGNED16
Access
RW
11
607Ch Home offset INTEGER32 RW
6098h Homing method INTEGER8 RW
6099h Homing speeds UNSIGNED32 RW
609Ah Homing acceleration UNSIGNED32 RW
11-25
11.3.4 Profile Velocity Mode
In PV (Profile Velocity) mode, the controller specifies the speed command and acceleration /
deceleration conditions, and the motion command generator of the servo drive plans the motion
11 path according to these conditions.
Target velocity (60FFh)

Max profile velocity
Speed [RPM]
command
and limit Max torque
(607Fh) function (6072h)
Profile acceleration (6083h)
Trajectory
Profile deceleration (6084h) generator
Quick stop deceleration
Acceleration [ms]2
(6085h) Velocity demand value
limit function Filter (606Bh) Speed Torque Servo
P1.006 control control motor
Max acceleration (60C5h)
P1.036 loop loop
Max deceleration (60C6h)
Velocity window (606Dh)
Velocity window time (606Eh) Encoder
Statusword Bit 10
Position +
Target reached (6041h) Speed
window
comparator -
comparator
Position actual value (6064h) E-Gear ratio

6093h sub2
6093h sub1
Operation steps:
1. Set OD 6060h to 03h to set the mode as the speed control mode.
2. Set OD 6083h for the acceleration time slope.
3. Set OD 6084h for the deceleration time slope.
4. Set the target speed (OD 60FFh) to 0. In speed mode, the servo motor starts operating
once it is switched to servo on (Step 5). Therefore, setting the target speed (OD 60FFh)
to 0 is to ensure that the motor maintains at 0 rpm at the time of servo on.
5.1 0 0 1 1 0 Shutdown.
6. Set OD 60FFh for the target speed.
11-26
2. Read OD 606Ch to obtain the current speed feedback.

Index
6040h
Name
Controlword
Data type
UNSIGNED16
Access
RW
11
606Bh Velocity demand value INTEGER32 RO
606Ch Velocity actual value INTEGER32 RO
606Dh Velocity window UNSIGNED16 RW
606Eh Velocity window time UNSIGNED16 RW
606Fh Velocity threshold UNSIGNED16 RW
60FFh Target velocity INTEGER32 RW
11-27
11.3.5 Profile Torque Mode
In PT (Profile Torque) mode, the controller specifies the torque command and filtering conditions,
and the motion command generator of the servo drive plans the torque slope according to these
11 conditions.
Target torque (6071h)
Torque slope (6087h)

Torque
command
[%]
Trajectory Torque demand value

generator (6074h) Torque
Filter Servo
Max. [%] control motor
P1.007 loop
torque
(210Ch)

Encoder
Position actual value (6064h) E-Gear ratio

6093h sub2
6093h sub1
Operation steps:
1. Set OD 6060h to 04h to set the mode as the torque control mode.
2. Set OD 6087h for the torque slope.
3. Set the target torque (OD 6071h) to 0. In torque mode, the servo target torque takes
effect once the servo is switched to servo on (Step 4). Therefore, set the target torque
(OD 6071h) to 0 for safety reasons.
4.1 0 0 1 1 0 Shutdown.
5. Set OD 6071h for the target torque.
11-28
2. Read OD 6077h to obtain the current torque feedback.

Index
6040h
Name
Controlword
Data type
UNSIGNED16
Access
RW
11
6071h Target torque INTEGER16 RW
6074h Torque demand value INTEGER16 RO
6075h Motor rated current UNSIGNED32 RO
6077h Torque actual value INTEGER16 RO
6078h Current actual value INTEGER16 RO
607Fh Max profile velocity UNSIGNED32 RW
6080h Max motor speed UNSIGNED32 RW
6087h Torque slope UNSIGNED32 RW
11-29
11.4 Object dictionary

This section details the CANopen objects supported by the servo. The contents include object
index, name, data type, data length, and access properties.
11 11.4.1 Specifications for objects
Object type
Object code Description
VAR A single value, such as an UNSIGNED8, Boolean, float, and INTEGER16.
An object of multiple data fields consisting of multiple variables of the same data
ARRAY type, such as an UNSIGNED16 array. The sub-index 0 data type is UNSIGNED8,
so it is not an array data.
An object of multiple data fields consisting of multiple variables of different data
RECORD
types. The sub-index 0 data type is UNSIGNED8, so it is not a RECORD data.
Data type
Refer to CANopen Standard 301.
11-30
11.4.2 List of objects
OD 1XXXh communication object group
11
Index Object code Name Data type Access
1000h VAR Device type UNSIGNED32 RO
1001h VAR Error register UNSIGNED8 RO
1003h ARRAY Pre-defined error field UNSIGNED32 RW
1005h VAR COB-ID SYNC UNSIGNED32 RO
1006h VAR Communication cycle period UNSIGNED32 RW
100Ch VAR Guard time UNSIGNED16 RW
100Dh VAR Life time factor UNSIGNED8 RW
1010h ARRAY Store parameters UNSIGNED32 RW
1011h ARRAY Restore parameters UNSIGNED32 RW
1014h VAR COB-ID EMCY UNSIGNED32 RO
1016h ARRAY Consumer heartbeat time UNSIGNED32 RW
1017h VAR Producer heartbeat time UNSIGNED16 RW
1018h RECORD Identity object UNSIGNED32 RO
1029h ARRAY Error behavior UNSIGNED8 RW
1200h RECORD 1st Server SDO parameter SDO parameter RO
1400h - 03h RECORD Receive PDO parameter UNSIGNED16/32 RW
1600h - 03h RECORD Receive PDO mapping UNSIGNED32 RW
1800h - 03h RECORD Transmit PDO parameter UNSIGNED16/32 RW
1A00h - 03h RECORD Transmit PDO mapping UNSIGNED32 RW
Note: only 1001h can be mapped to PDO.
OD 2XXXh servo parameter group

Index Object code Name Data type Access Mappable
Delta parameter definition
2XXXh VAR Parameter mapping INTEGER16/32 RW Y
OD 6XXXh communication object group

603Fh VAR Error code UNSIGNED16 RO Y
6040h VAR Controlword UNSIGNED16 RW Y
6041h VAR Statusword UNSIGNED16 RO Y
605Bh VAR Shutdown option code INTEGER16 RW N
6060h VAR Modes of operation INTEGER8 RW Y
6061h VAR Modes of operation display INTEGER8 RO Y
6062h VAR Position demand value [PUU] INTEGER32 RO Y
6063h VAR Position actual internal value INTEGER32 RO Y
6064h VAR Position actual value INTEGER32 RO Y
6065h VAR Following error window UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6067h VAR Position window UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6068h VAR Position window time UNSIGNED16 RW Y
606Bh VAR Velocity demand value INTEGER32 RO Y
606Ch VAR Velocity actual value INTEGER32 RO Y
606Dh VAR Velocity window UNSIGNED16 RW Y
606Eh VAR Velocity window time UNSIGNED16 RW Y
11-31

606Fh VAR Velocity threshold UNSIGNED16 RW Y
6071h VAR Target torque INTEGER16 RW Y
6072h VAR Max torque UNSIGNED16 RW Y
11
6074h VAR Torque demand value INTEGER16 RO Y
6075h VAR Motor rated current UNSIGNED32 RO Y
6076h VAR Motor rated torque UNSIGNED32 RO Y
6077h VAR Torque actual value INTEGER16 RO Y
6078h VAR Current actual value INTEGER16 RO Y
607Ah VAR Target position INTEGER32 RW Y
607Ch VAR Home offset INTEGER32 RW Y
607Dh ARRAY Software position limit INTEGER32 RW Y
607Fh VAR Max profile velocity UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6080h VAR Max motor speed UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6081h VAR Profile velocity UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6083h VAR Profile acceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6084h VAR Profile deceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6085h VAR Quick stop deceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6087h VAR Torque slope UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6093h ARRAY Position factor UNSIGNED32 RW Y
6098h VAR Homing method INTEGER8 RW Y
6099h ARRAY Homing speeds UNSIGNED32 RW Y
609Ah VAR Homing acceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
60C0h VAR Interpolation sub mode select INTEGER16 RW Y
60C1h ARRAY Interpolation data record INTEGER32 RW Y
60C2h RECORD Interpolation time period UNSIGNED8 RW Y
60C5h VAR Max acceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
60C6h VAR Max deceleration UNSIGNED32 RW Y
60F4h VAR Following error actual value INTEGER32 RO Y
60FCh VAR Position demand value INTEGER32 RO Y
60FDh VAR Digital inputs UNSIGNED32 RO Y
60FFh VAR Target velocity INTEGER32 RW Y
6502h VAR Supported drive modes UNSIGNED32 RO Y
11-32
11.4.3 Details of objects

11.4.3.1 OD 1XXXh communication object group
Object 1000h: Device type
Index
Name
Object code
1000h
Device type
VAR
11
Data type UNSIGNED32
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range UNSIGNED32
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Format of this object: (High word h) DCBA : (Low word L) UZYX

A X
B Bit 16 - Bit 31 Y Bit 0 - Bit 15
C Model type Z Device profile number
D U
 UZYX: device profile number (servo drive: 0192)

 DCBA: model type
DCBA Model type
0402 A2
0602 M
0702 A3
0B02 B3
Object 1001h: Error register
Index 1001h
Name Error register
Object code VAR
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Default 0
11-33
Object function:
The bits and corresponding functions are as follows:
11
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Function
Bit 0 Generic error
Bit 1 Current
Bit 2 Voltage
Bit 3 Temperature
Bit 4 Communication error
Bit 5 - Bit 7 Reserved
Object 1003h: Pre-defined error field
Index 1003h
Name Pre-defined error field
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Description Number of errors
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Setting range 0-5
Default 0
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Sub-index 1-5
Description Standard error field
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
11-34

A X
B Bit 16 - Bit 31 Y Bit 0 - Bit 15
11
C Delta servo alarm Z Error code
D U
 UZYX: error code. Refer to the error code definition in DS 402.
 DCBA: Delta servo alarm. Refer to Chapter 12 Troubleshooting.
Example:
When you operate the servo, if the encoder cable is not correctly connected, the servo drive
panel displays AL011 and its error code is stored in the 1003h array. The display is as follows:
Byte: High word Low word
Delta servo alarm (UINT16) Error code (UINT16)
0x0011 0x7305
AL011 is defined as encoder error based on the Delta servo alarm.
Error code: 0x7305 is defined as an Incremental Sensor 1 fault according to DS 402.
Object 1005h: COB-ID SYNC message
Index 1005h
Name COB-ID SYNC message
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default 80 h
Object function:
This object is read-only and cannot be set.
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 10 - Bit 0 SYNC-COB-ID = 0x80 -
11-35
Object 1006h: Communication cycle period
Index 1006h
Name Communication cycle period
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Unit μs
Object function:
This object is to set the communication cycle (unit: μs). The communication cycle is the
interval between two SYNCs. If you are not using SYNC, set this object to 0.
Object 100Ch: Guard time
Index 100Ch
Name Guard time
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Unit ms
Object function:
The Life Guarding Protocol includes OD 100Ch and 100Dh. OD 100Ch is the guard time in
milliseconds and OD 100Dh is the multiplying factor. Therefore, OD 100Ch multiplied by
OD 100Dh gives the life time for the Life Guarding Protocol. If the time (OD 100Ch) is set to 0,
then this setting is invalid.
Example: if OD 100Ch = 5 ms and OD 100Dh = 10, then life time equals 50 ms.
Object 100Dh: Life time factor
Index 100Dh
Name Life time factor
Object code VAR
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
11-36
Object function:
The Life Guarding Protocol includes OD 100Ch and 100Dh. OD 100Ch is the guard time in
milliseconds and OD 100Dh is the multiplying factor. Therefore, OD 100Ch multiplied by
OD 100Dh gives the life time for the Life Guarding Protocol. If the time (OD 100Ch) is set to 0,
then this setting is invalid.
Example: if OD 100Ch = 5 ms and OD 100Dh = 10, then life time equals 50 ms.
11
Object 1010h: Store parameters
Index 1010h
Name Store parameters
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Description Number of sub-index
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default 1
Sub-index 1
Description Store communication parameters
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Setting range No
Default 1
Object function:
Write 0x65766173 (save) to sub-index 1 to write all current OD values to the EEPROM.
Object 1011h: Restore parameters
Index 1011h
Name Restore parameters
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping No
11-37
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
11
PDO mapping No
Default 1
Sub-index 1
Description Restore communication parameters
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Setting range No
Default 1
Object function:
Write 0x64616F6C (load) to sub-index 1 to reset all OD parameters to their default values.
Object 1014h: COB-ID EMCY
Index 1014h
Name COB-ID emergency message
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default 80h + Node-ID
Object function:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0: the emergency (EMCY) function is enabled
(servo drive sends the EMCY command).
Bit 31 Emergency (EMCY) function 1: the emergency (EMCY) function is disabled
(servo drive does not send the EMCY
command).
Bit 10 - Bit 0 11-bit Identifier COB-ID 80h + Node-ID
The emergency (EMCY) function is as follows:

Communication Function Object parameter
Node ID COB-ID
object code index
EMCY object 0001 1 - 127 129 (81h) - 255 (FFh) 1014h
11-38
Node ID and corresponding COB-ID

Node ID COB-ID
1 129 (81h)
11
2 130 (82h)
~ ~
127 255 (FFh)
Object 1016h: Consumer heartbeat time
Index 1016h
Name Consumer heartbeat time
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 1
Default 1
Sub-index 1
Description Consumer heartbeat time
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Object function:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 23 - Bit 16 Node-ID UNSIGNED8
Bit 15 - Bit 0 Heartbeat time UNSIGNED8; unit: ms
Consumer heartbeat time is defined as the time the servo drive expects to receive a heartbeat.
For the setting, consumer heartbeat time must be greater than the producer heartbeat time.
Due to delays and other uncontrollable external factors in transmitting the heartbeat, you must
retain a tolerance margin value. When the heartbeat consumer does not receive the heartbeat
signal within the receiving time, the heartbeat event is triggered, meaning AL180 is triggered.
11-39
Object 1017h: Producer heartbeat time
Index 1017h
Name Producer heartbeat time
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Object function:
Producer heartbeat time is defined as the cycle time of the heartbeat. When this value is set
to 0, this function is invalid.
Object 1018h: Identity object
Index 1018h
Name Identity object
Object code RECORD
Data type Identity
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 3
Default 3
Sub-index 1
Description Vendor ID
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default 1DDh
Sub-index 2
Description Product code
Access RO
PDO mapping No
6000h: A2 series
6010h: A3 series
Default
6030h: M series
6080h: B3 series
11-40
Sub-index 3
Description Version
Access RO
PDO mapping
Setting range
Default
No
UNSIGNED32
N/A
11
Object function:
This object includes the servo drive information.
Object 1029h: Error behavior
Index 1029h
Name Error behavior
Object code ARRAY
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Description Number of error types
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 1
Default 1
Sub-index 1
Description Communication error
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Object function:
Generally, when the servo drive detects a serious fault in the Operational state, the state is
automatically switched to the Pre-operational state. Use this object setting to switch the state
to the Pre-operational state, maintain in the original state, or switch to the Stopped state.
OD 1029h sub1 setting Switch the state to

0 Pre-operational (only if current is operational)
1 Keep the original state
2 Stopped
11-41
Object 1200h: Server SDO parameter
Index 1200h
Name Server SDO parameter
11
Object code RECORD
Data type SDO parameter
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 2
Default 2
Sub-index 1
Controller sends to servo drive
Description
COB-ID Client->Server (rx)
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Default Index 1200h: 600h + Node-ID
Sub-index 2
Servo drive returns to controller
Description
COB-ID Server->Client (tx)
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Object function:
This object is read-only and cannot be set. Read the station number for transmitting and
receiving the SDO with this object.
Example:
If the servo drive station number for receiving is 10:

600h + Node-ID:Ah = 60Ah => OD 1200 sub1 reads 60Ah.
If the servo drive station number for transmitting is 10:

580h + Node-ID:Ah = 58Ah => OD 1200 sub2 reads 58Ah。
11-42
Object 1400h - 1403h: RPDO communication parameter
Index 1400h - 1403h

Name Receive PDO parameter
11
Object code RECORD
Data type PDO CommPar
Access RW
Sub-index 0
Description Maximum number of sub-index supported
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 5
Default 5
Sub-index 1
Description COB-ID used by PDO
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default Node-ID: 0
Object function:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 10 - Bit 0 COB-ID The data size is 10-bit.
Bit 30 - Bit 11 - -
0: enable PDO function.
PDO function 1: disable PDO function.
Bit 31
switch Enable / disable the PDO function to determine if PDO is
used in the Operational state.
The COB-ID setting format is as follows:
COB-ID
Communication object Object parameter
DEC (HEX)
R_PDO1 1400h 512 (200h) + Node-ID
R_PDO2 1401h 768 (300h) + Node-ID
R_PDO3 1402h 1024 (400h) + Node-ID
R_PDO4 1403h 1280 (500h) + Node-ID
11-43
Sub-index 2
Description Reception type
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
11
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Object function:
The type setting is as follows.
Setting value Transmission type

RTR
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous
only
00h (0) V V
01h - F0h (1 - 240) V V
F1h - FBh (241 - 251) Reserved
FCh (252) V V
FDh (253) V V
FEh (254) V
FFh (255) V
Sub-index 3
Description Inhibit time (not used for RPOD)
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Sub-index 4
Description Compatibility entry
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Sub-index 5
Description Event timer (not used for RPDO)
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
11-44
Object 1600h - 1603h: RPDO mapping parameter
Index 1600h - 1603h

Name Receive PDO mapping
11
Object code RECORD
Data type PDO mapping
Access RW
The total length of objects in a group of PDO cannot
Note
exceed 64 bits.
Sub-index 0
Description Number of PDO mappings
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
0: disable
Setting range 1 - 8: set the number of PDO mapping and enable
the function
Default 0
Sub-index 1-8
Description Set n PDO mapping application objects
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
The format of this object is as follows:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Function
Bit 0 - Bit 7 Object length
Bit 8 - Bit 15 Object sub-index
Bit 16 - Bit 31 Object index
11-45
Example:
To set three PDOs (OD 6040h, OD 607Ah, and OD 6060h) in the first group of PDO, the setting
is as follows:
11 Mapping
parameter setting
for received PDO
OD 1600 sub0
Data
3
Description
Set 3 PDO mappings.

Mapping control command (6040h),
OD 1600 sub1 6040h 00h 10h
data length is 16-bit
Mapping target position (607Ah),
OD 1600 sub2 607Ah 00h 20h
Mapping mode position (6060h),
OD 1600 sub3 6060h 00h 08h
The total length is 38h (56-bit) which meets the specification of less
Note
than 64-bit.
Object 1800h - 1803h: TPDO communication parameter
Index 1800h - 1803h

Name Transmit PDO parameter
Object code RECORD
Data type PDO CommPar
Access RW
Sub-index 0
Description Largest sub-index supported
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 5
Default 5
Sub-index 1
Description COB-ID used by PDO
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default Node-ID: 0
Index 1800h: 180h + Node-ID
11-46
Object function:
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
11
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 10 - Bit 0 COB-ID The data size is 10-bit.
Bit 30 - Bit 11 - -
0: enable PDO function.
PDO function 1: disable PDO function.
Bit 31
switch Enable / disable the PDO function to determine if PDO is
used in the Operational state.
Sub-index 2
Description Transmission type
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Object function:
The type setting is as follows:
Setting value Transmission type

Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
00h (0) V V
01h - F0h (1 - 240) V V
F1h - FBh (241 - 251) Reserved
FCh (252) V V
FDh (253) V V
FEh (254) V
FFh (255) V
Sub-index 3
Description Inhibit time
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
11-47
Sub-index 4
Description Reserved
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
11
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Sub-index 5
Description Event timer
Access RW
PDO mapping No
0: not in use
Setting range
UNSIGNED16
Default 0
Object 1A00h - 1A03h: TPDO mapping parameter
Index 1A00h - 1A03h

Name Transmit PDO mapping
Object code RECORD
Data type PDO mapping
Access RW
The total length of objects in a group of PDO cannot
Note
exceed 64 bits.
Sub-index 0
Description Number of PDO mappings
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping No
0: disable
Setting range 1 - 8: set the number of PDO mapping and enable
the function
Default 0
Sub-index 1-8
Description Set n PDO mapping application objects
Access RW
PDO mapping No
Default 0
Bit 16 - Bit 31 YX Bit 0 - Bit 7 object length

DCBA
Object index UZ Bit 8 - Bit 15 object sub-index
11-48
11.4.3.2 OD 2XXXh servo parameter group
Object 2XXXh: Parameter mapping
11
Index 2XXXh
Name Parameter mapping
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16 / INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range INTEGER16 / INTEGER32
Default N/A
Object function:
Access the servo parameters with the OD 2XXXh group. The parameter number and index
are converted as follows:
Pa-bc <= = > 2aBCh
BC is bc in hexadecimal format
Read the index first to get the information of the parameter length, and then use SDO or PDO
to change the data.
Example 1:
Object 2300h: Node-ID [P3.000]
Index 2300h
Name Node-ID
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range INTEGER16
Default 7Fh
Example 2:
Object 212Ch: Electronic Gear [P1.044]
Index 212Ch
Name Electronic Gear
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 1
11-49
11.4.3.3 OD 6XXXh communication object group
Object 603Fh: Error code (error code of CANopen defined)
Index 603Fh
11 Name
Object code
Data type
Error code
VAR
UNSIGNED16
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Default 0
Object 6040h: Controlword
Index 6040h
Name Controlword
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Default 0x0004
Object function:
The control command contains many functions, such as Servo on, command triggering,
fault reset, and emergency stop. The state machine architecture is as follows:
Controlword (6040h)
State Machine
Statusword (6041h)
11-50
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
11
Bit 0 Switch on -
Bit 1 Enable voltage -
Bit 2 Quick stop (B-connect) -
Bit 3 Enable operation -
This bit is individually defined
Bit 4 - Bit 6 Operation mode definition according to the control mode,
as shown in the following table.
Bit 7 Fault reset -
Bit 8 Halt -
Bit 9 - Bit 15 - -
Bits 4 - 6 are individually defined according to the mode, as shown in the following table:
Operation mode definition
Profile Velocity Mode
Bit
Profile Position Mode Homing Mode Profile Torque Mode
Interpolated Position Mode
Command triggered Homing
Bit 4 -
(rising-edge triggered) (rising-edge triggered)
Command to take
Bit 5 - -
immediate effect
0: absolute position
command
Bit 6 - -
1: relative position
command
Finite state automation (as shown in the following diagram) defines the behavior of a servo
drive system. Each state represents an internal or external behavior. For example,
point-to-point motion can only be received and executed in the operation enabled state.
Start
0, 1
Switch On 15
disabled
2
7
Ready to Fault
10 switch on
12
3 6 9
Switch on 8
13, 14
4
5
16 Operation
Quick Stop
Enbled
11
11-51
The state transition is defined as follows:
Transition Event Action

0, 1 Automatic transition after power-on Device boot and initialization
11
2 Command shutdown N/A
3 Command switch on Servo is ready for servo on
4 Command enable operation Servo on and executes motion mode
5 Command disable voltage Servo off
6 Command shutdown N/A
Command disable voltage or
7 N/A
command quick stop
8 Command shutdown Servo off
9 Command disable voltage Servo off
Command disable voltage or
10 N/A
command quick stop
Command quick stop
The following two errors belong to this
quick stop type:
11 1. Trigger positive / negative limit Quick stop function is enabled
switch
2. Quick stop triggered by a control
command
(OD 6040h = xxxx x0xxx)
Command Disable Voltage
12 Servo off
(OD 6040h: 0000 0110 or xxxx xx0x)
13, 14 Alarm occurs Servo off
15 Alarm is cleared N/A
Command enable operation and no Motion operation restart.
16
alarm The restart action is mode-dependent.
State changes can be achieved with control commands. The commands are as follows:
Bit of OD 6040h
Setting value State change
Bit 7 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Shutdown 0 X 1 1 0 2, 6, 8
Switch on 0 0 1 1 1 3
Switch on +
0 1 1 1 1 3+4
Enable operation
Disable voltage 0 X X 0 X 7, 9, 10, 12
Quick stop 0 X 0 1 X 7, 10, 11
Disable operation 0 0 1 1 1 5
Enable operation 0 1 1 1 1 4, 16
Fault reset X X X X 15
11-52
Object 6041h: Statusword
Index 6041h
Name Statusword
11
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Default 0
Object function:
The control command contains many functions, such as Servo on, command triggering,
fault reset, and emergency stop. The state machine architecture is as follows:
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit 0 Ready to switch on
Bit 1 Switch on
Bit 2 Operation enabled
Bit 0 - Bit 6: current status of the servo drive
Bit 3 Fault
(see the following table for details).
Bit 4 Voltage enabled
Bit 5 Quick stop
Bit 6 Switch on disabled
Warning output, but the servo remains with the
Bit 7 Warning
servo on signal.
Bit 8 - -
Bit 9 Remote -
Bit 10 Target reached -
Bit 11 - -
Bit 12 - Bit 13 - Individually defined according to the control mode.
Bit 14 Positive limit -
Bit 15 Negative limit -
Bit 0 - Bit 6: current status of the servo drive.

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description
0 - - 0 0 0 0 Not ready to switch on.
1 - - 0 0 0 0 Switch on disabled.
0 1 - 0 0 0 1 Ready to switch on.
0 1 - 0 0 1 1 Switch on.
0 1 - 0 1 1 1 Operation enabled (servo on).
0 0 - 0 1 1 1 Quick stop active.
0 - - 1 1 1 1 Fault reaction active.
0 - - 1 0 0 0 Servo fault (servo off).
Note: 0 indicates the bit is off; 1 indicates the bit is on; - indicates the bit is invalid.
11-53
Bit 12 and Bit 13: current status of the servo drive.

Operation mode definition
Bit Profile Interpolated Profile Velocity Profile Torque
Homing Mode
Position Mode Position Mode Mode Mode
11 Bit 12
Bit 13
Set-point
acknowledge
Following
error
Homing is
complete
Homing error
Interpolation
mode in motion
-
Zero speed
-
-
Object 605Bh: Shutdown option code
Index 605Bh
Name Shutdown option code
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
N/A
parameter
Default 0
Object function:
Set to 0: when servo off, the dynamic brake has no effect, so the motor runs freely
and the mechanism stops only by the frictional force.
Set to 1: when servo off, the servo stops with the operation of the dynamic brake.
Object 6060h: Modes of operation
Index 6060h
Name Modes of operation
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER8
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Object function:
This object sets the mode for operation.

Setting value Mode
0 Reserved
1 Profile Position Mode
3 Profile Velocity Mode
4 Profile Torque Mode
6 Homing Mode
7 Interpolated Position Mode
11-54
Object 6061h: Modes of operation display
Index 6061h
Name Modes of operation display
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER8
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Object function:
This object displays the current operation mode.
Object 6062h: Position demand value (PUU)
Index 6062h
Name Position demand value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object function:
This command position is the interpolation command calculated by the servo internal
interpolator. This command passes through the servo internal filter. For detailed position,
refer to the servo architecture diagram of each mode.
Object 6063h: Position actual internal value
Index 6063h
Name Position actual internal value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Pulse (unit for encoder pulse resolution)
ASDA-A2 corresponds to 1,280,000 pulses per motor
Unit rotation.
ASDA-A3 / ASDA-B3 correspond to 16,777,216
pulses per motor rotation.
11-55
Object 6064h: Position actual value
Index 6064h
Name Position actual value
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object 6065h: Following error window
Index 6065h
Name Following error window
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 3840000
Unit PUU
Object function:
When the position error (60F4h) exceeds this setting range, AL009 (Excessive deviation of
Position command) is triggered.
Accepted following error tolerance
Position
Following error Following error
window window
Following error No following error Following error
Reference position
Object 6067h: Position window
Index 6067h
Name Position window
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 100
Unit PUU
11-56
Object function:
When the error value between the command (PP mode: OD 607Ah; IP mode: OD 60C1h) and
the position actual value (OD 6064h) is smaller than this object, and the time is greater than
OD 6068h (position window time), Bit 10 of Statusword 6041h outputs once the target is reached.
Accepted position range 11

Position
Position window Position window
Position not reached Position reached Position not reached
Target position
PP mode
Position window (6067h)
IP mode
(60C1h)
Statusword target reached (6041h) +

Position
Window
window
comparator
comparator
-
Position actual value (6064h)
Object 6068h: Position window time
Index 6068h
Name Position window time
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit ms
Object function:
When the error value between the command (PP mode: OD 607Ah; IP mode: OD 60C1h) and
the position actual value (OD 6064h) is smaller than this object, and the time is greater than
OD 6068h (position window time), Bit 10 of Statusword 6041h outputs once the target is reached.
11-57
PP mode
Position window (6067h) IP mode
11
(60C1h)
Statusword target reached (6041h) +

Position
Window
window
comparator
comparator
-
Position actual value (6064h)
Object 606Bh: Velocity demand value
Index 606Bh
Name Velocity demand value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0.1 rpm
Object function:
The internal speed command is a command generated by the speed motion command
generator and command filter of the drive. This object only works in Profile Velocity Mode.
Object 606Ch: Velocity actual value
Index 606Ch
Name Velocity actual value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0.1 rpm
Object function:
Returns the current motor speed for the users to monitor.
11-58
Object 606Dh: Velocity window
Index 606Dh
Name Velocity window
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range 0 - 3000
Default 100
Unit 0.1 rpm
Object function:
The speed comparator compares the speed error with OD 606Dh (velocity window).
When the error is less than the velocity window and the retaining time is greater than
OD 606Eh (velocity window time), then OD 6041h Bit 10 (target reached) is output.
This object only works in Profile Velocity Mode.
Velocity window (606Dh)

Velocity demand value
(606Bh)
Velocity window time (606Eh)
Statusword Bit10
Target reached (6041h) Position +
Speed
window
comparator -
comparator
Velocity actual value

(606Ch)
Object 606Eh: Velocity window time
Index 606Eh
Name Velocity window time
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit ms
Object function:
Refer to OD 606Dh for the description of the object.
11-59
Object 606Fh: Velocity threshold
Index 606Fh
Name Velocity threshold
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 100
Unit 0.1 rpm
Object 6071h: Target torque
Index 6071h
Name Target torque
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range -3000 to 3000
Default 0
Unit 0.1%
Object function:
This object sets the target torque in torque mode (unit: 0.1%). If this object is set to 1000
(100.0%), it corresponds to the rated torque of the motor.
Object 6072h: Max torque
Index 6072h
Name Max torque
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 3000
Unit 0.1%
Object function:
This object sets the maximum torque in torque mode (unit: 0.1%).
11-60
Object 6074h: Torque demand value
Index 6074h
Name Torque demand value
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.1%
Object function:
The internal torque command is a command generated by the speed motion command
generator and command filter of the drive. This object only works in Profile Torque Mode.
Object 6075h: Motor rated current
Index 6075h
Name Motor rated current
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.1 mA
Object function:
This object displays the rated current specified on the motor nameplate.
Object 6076h: Motor rated torque
Index 6076h
Name Motor rated torque
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.001 N-m
Object function:
This object displays the rated torque specified on the motor nameplate.
11-61
Object 6077h: Torque actual value
Index 6077h
Name Torque actual value
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.1%
Object function:
This object is the current motor torque feedback percentage.
Object 6078h: Current actual value
Index 6078h
Name Current actual value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.1%
Object function:
This object is the current motor current feedback percentage.
Object 607Ah: Target position
Index 607Ah
Name Target position
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object function:
This object is only available in Profile Position Mode. For more details, refer to Section 11.3.1
Profile Position Mode.
11-62
Object 607Ch: Home offset
Index 607Ch
Name Home offset
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object function:
Home Position is the origin reference point found when executing homing, such as the origin
sensor and Z pulse. When the origin reference point is found, the position offset from this
point is the user-defined origin.
Home position Zero position
Home offset
Object 607Dh: Software position limit
Index 607Dh
Name Software position limit
Object code ARRAY
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
Note -
Sub-index 0
Description Number of entries
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range 2
Default 2
Sub-index 1
Description Min position limit
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range -2147483648 to +2147483647
Default -2147483648
Note Unit: PUU
11-63
Sub-index 2
Description Max position limit
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
11
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range -2147483648 to +2147483647
Default +2147483647
Note Unit: PUU
Object 607Fh: Max profile velocity
Index 607Fh
Name Max profile velocity
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default Varies depending on the motor model
Corresponding servo
P1.055 (rpm) * 10
parameter
Unit 0.1 rpm
Object function:
The unit of this object is 0.1 rpm, so it is equivalent to P1.055 (maximum speed limit,
unit: 1 rpm) multiplied by 10 times.
Object 6080h: Max motor speed
Index 6080h
Name Max motor speed
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default Varies depending on the motor model
Corresponding servo
P1.055
parameter
Unit rpm
Object function:
This object is equivalent to P1.055, which is the maximum speed limit.
11-64
Object 6081h: Profile velocity
Index 6081h
Name Profile velocity
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 10000
Unit PUU/s
Object function:
This object is only available in Profile Position Mode. For more details, refer to Section 11.3.1
Profile Position Mode.
Object 6083h: Profile acceleration
Index 6083h
Name Profile acceleration
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
The time slope set by this object is the time required to accelerate from 0 rpm to 3,000 rpm.
This object is only available in Profile Position Mode and Profile Velocity Mode.
Object 6084h: Profile deceleration
Index 6084h
Name Profile deceleration
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
The time slope set by this object is the time required to decelerate from 3,000 rpm to 0 rpm.
This object is only available in Profile Position Mode and Profile Velocity Mode.
11-65
Object 6085h: Quick stop deceleration
Index 6085h
Name Quick stop deceleration
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
Object 6087h: Torque slope
Index 6087h
Name Torque slope
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
The time slope set by this object is the time required from 0% to 100% of the rated torque.
Object 6093h: Position factor
Index 6093h
Name Position factor
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Corresponding servo
P1.044 and P1.045
parameter
Note Position factor = Numerator / Feed_constant
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 2
Default 2
11-66
Sub-index 1
Description E-Gear ratio numerator
Access RW
PDO mapping
Default
Corresponding servo
parameter
Yes
1
P1.044
11
Note For the E-Gear ratio setting, refer to Section 6.2.5.
Sub-index 2
Description E-Gear ratio denominator
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 1
Corresponding servo
P1.045
parameter
Note For the E-Gear ratio setting, refer to Section 6.2.5.
Object 6098h: Homing method
Index 6098h
Name Homing method
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER8
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Object function:
There are a total of 35 homing methods. The 1st - 16th homing methods look for the Z pulse;
the 17th - 34th do not look for the Z pulse; and the 35th defines the current position as the origin.
Method 1: homing on the negative limit switch and Z pulse
indicates OD 6099h sub1 Speed during search for switch

indicates OD 6099h sub2 Speed during search for zero
Starting
point
Z pulse
Negative limit
switch
11-67
Method 2: homing on the positive limit switch and Z pulse
Starting point
11
2
Z pulse
Positive limit
switch
Methods 3 and 4: homing on the rising edge of home switch and Z pulse
Starting point
Starting
3
point
Starting point 4
Starting
point
Z pulse
Home
switch
11-68
Methods 5 and 6: homing on the falling edge of home switch and Z pulse
Starting point 5
5
Starting
point
11
Starting point
Starting
6 point
Z pulse
Home
switch
Method 7: homing on the positive limit switch, rising edge of home switch, and Z pulse
Starting point
7 Starting point
Starting point
Z pulse
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
11-69
Method 8: homing on the positive limit switch, rising edge of home switch, and Z pulse
Starting point 8
11 8
Starting point
Starting point
Z pulse
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
Method 9: homing on the positive limit switch, falling edge of home switch, and Z pulse
Starting point
Starting point
Starting point
Z pulse
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
11-70
Method 10: homing on the positive limit switch, falling edge of home switch, and Z pulse
Starting point 10
Starting point 10
11
Starting point
10
Z pulse
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
Method 11: homing on the negative limit switch, rising edge of home switch, and Z pulse
Starting point
11
Starting point 11
Starting point
11
Z pulse
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
11-71
Method 12: homing on the negative limit switch, falling edge of home switch, and Z pulse
12 Starting
point
11 Starting point
12
Starting point
12
Z pulse
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
Starting
point
13
Starting point
13
Starting point
13
Z pulse
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
11-72
Starting
14
point
14
Starting point
Starting point
11
14
Z pulse
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
Methods 15 and 16: reserved
Method 17: homing on the negative limit switch
Starting
point
17
Negative limit
switch
Method 18: homing on the positive limit switch
Starting point
18
Positive limit
switch
Methods 19 and 20: homing on the rising edge of home switch
Starting point
19
20
19 Starting
20 point
Home switch
11-73
Methods 21 and 22: homing on the falling edge of home switch
Starting point 21
22
11 21
Starting
point
22
Home switch
Methods 23 and 24: homing on the positive limit switch and rising edge of home switch
Starting point
23
24
23
Starting point
24
Starting point
23
24
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
Methods 25 and 26: homing on the positive limit switch and falling edge of home switch
Starting point
25
26
Starting point
25
26
Starting point
25
26
Home switch
Positive limit
switch
11-74
Methods 27 and 28: homing on the negative limit switch and falling edge of home switch
Starting
point
Starting point
27
28
27
28
11
Starting point
27
28
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
Methods 29 and 30: homing on the negative limit switch and rising edge of home switch
Starting
point
29
30
Starting point
29
30
Starting point
29
30
Home switch
Negative limit
switch
Methods 31 and 32: reserved
Methods 33 and 34: homing on the Z pulse
33 Starting point
Starting point 34
Z pulse
Method 35: define the current feedback position as the origin
11-75
Object 6099h: Homing speeds
Index 6099h
Name Homing speeds
11
Object code ARRAY
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range 2
Default 2
Sub-index 1
Description Speed during search for switch
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 100
Unit 0.1 rpm
Sub-index 2
Description Speed during search for zero
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 20
Unit 0.1 rpm
Object 609Ah: Homing acceleration
Index 609Ah
Name Homing acceleration
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 100
Unit ms
Object function:
The time slope set by this object is the time required to accelerate from 0 rpm to 3,000 rpm
and decelerate from 3,000 rpm to 0 rpm. This object is only available in Homing Mode.
11-76
Object 60C0h: Interpolation sub mode select
Index 60C0h
Name Interpolation sub mode select
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER16
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Value range INTEGER16
Default value 0
Object function: no need to set this object.
Object 60C1h: Interpolation data record
Index 60C1h
Name Interpolation data record
Object code ARRAY
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Object function:
PDO sets this record every T ms before receiving the SYNC message; the T value is
specified by 60C2h: 01h.
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 2
Default 2
Sub-index 1
Description Command position Pos_Cmd
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object function:
This object only works in IP Mode. For more details, refer to Section 11.3.2 Interpolation
Position Mode.
11-77
Object 60C2h: Interpolation time period
Index 60C2h
Name Interpolation time period
11
Object code RECORD
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Sub-index 0
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RO
PDO mapping No
Setting range 2
Default 2
Sub-index 1
Description Interpolation cycle time constant
Data type UNSIGNED8
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 1
Sub-index 2
Description Power of 10
Data type INTEGER8
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Setting range -128 to 63
Default -3
Object function:
This object only works in IP Mode. The interpolation cycle time is calculated by two objects,
OD 60C2h sub1 and OD 60C2h sub2. The calculation is as follows:
Interpolation cycle time = 60𝐶2ℎ sub1 × 1060C2h sub2
Example:
If you want to set the interpolation cycle time to 2 ms, set OD 60C2h sub1 to 2 and
OD 60C2h sub2 to -3.
Interpolation cycle time = 2 × 10−3 = 0.002 𝑠
= 2 𝑚𝑠
11-78
Object 60C5h: Max acceleration
Index 60C5h
Name Max acceleration
11
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
The time slope set by this object is the time required to accelerate from 0 rpm to 3,000 rpm.
Object 60C6h: Max deceleration
Index 60C6h
Name Max deceleration
Object code VAR
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 200
Unit ms
Object function:
Object 60F4h: Following error actual value
Index 60F4h
Name Following error actual value
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit PUU
Object function:
The following error is the difference between the command position (OD 6062h) and feedback
position (OD 6064h). For more details, refer to the architecture diagram in Section 11.3.
11-79
Object 60FCh: Position demand value
Index 60FCh
Name Position demand value
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit pulse
Object function:
This command is generated after being processed by the servo drive filter. For more details,
refer to the architecture diagram in Section 11.3.
Object 60FDh: Digital inputs
Index 60FDh
Name Digital inputs
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit -
Object function:
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Function
Bit 0 Negative limit signal
Bit 1 Positive limit signal
Bit 2 Homing signal
Bit 3 - Bit 15 -
11-80
Object 60FFh: Target velocity
Index 60FFh
Name Target velocity
11
Object code VAR
Data type INTEGER32
Access RW
PDO mapping Yes
Default 0
Unit 0.1 rpm
Object function:
This object sets the target speed. This object is only available in Profile Velocity Mode.
Object 6502h: Supported drive modes
Index 6502h
Name Supported drive modes
Object code VAR
Access RO
PDO mapping Yes
Default 6Dh
Object function:
This object is read-only and provides the control modes supported by Delta servo drives in
CANopen mode (OD 6502h = 6Dh).
Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Function
Bit 0 Profile Position Mode
Bit 1 Reserved
Bit 2 Profile Velocity Mode
Bit 3 Profile Torque Mode
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Homing Mode
Bit 6 Interpolation Position Mode
Bit 7 - Bit 31 Reserved
11-81
11.5 Diagnostics and troubleshooting

This section provides diagnostics and troubleshooting information related to communication or
interference with the controller. For information about the servo drive alarms, refer to Chapter 12.
11 1. The SYNC communication cycle of the controller and servo drive is different
Since the jitter of each controller is different, the communication cycle time between the
servo drive receiving the Sync and Sync synchronization action is different. When this
happens, increase the error value (T) by adjusting P3.009 and let the servo drive
automatically correct the internal timer so it is consistent with the communication cycle of
the controller.
2. Clear interference
Packets are particularly sensitive to interference in high-speed network communication

applications. To achieve fast and high-precision control, the selection of the wire is
extremely important. Use shielded cables for the communication wiring, and make sure that
the cable shield is firmly connected to the servo drive communication port. Also, ensure the
ground wire is properly connected and grounded.
11-82
Troubleshooting 12
2
This chapter provides alarm descriptions and the corrective actions you can use for
troubleshooting.
12.1 Alarm list ······················································································ 12-3

General type ················································································· 12-3
Motion control type ········································································· 12-4
STO type ······················································································ 12-5
Communication type ······································································· 12-6
12.2 Causes and corrective actions ·························································· 12-7
12-1
Troubleshooting ASDA-B3
There are four types of alarms: General, Motion control, STO, and Communication. The detailed
information is as follows.
General type: alarms caused by signal errors of the hardware or encoder.
12 Motion control type: alarms caused by motion control command (in PR mode) errors.
STO type: alarms caused by STO errors.
Communication type: alarms caused by CANopen, DMCNET, or EtherCAT communication
errors.
AL.nnn is the alarm format on the 7-segment display.
If the recommended alarm clearing method is DI.ARST, set DI.ARST (alarm reset) to on or
P0.001 to 1 for clearing the alarm.
12-2
ASDA-B3 Troubleshooting
12.1 Alarm list

General type
12
Error type Servo state
Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
AL001 Overcurrent ○ ○
AL002 Overvoltage ○ ○
AL003 Undervoltage ○ ○
AL004 Motor combination error ○ ○
AL005 Regeneration error ○ ○
AL006 Overload ○ ○
AL007 Excessive deviation of Speed command ○ ○
AL008 Abnormal pulse command ○ ○
AL009 Excessive deviation of Position command ○ ○
AL010 Voltage error during regeneration ○ ○
AL011 Encoder error ○ ○
AL012 Adjustment error ○ ○
AL013 Emergency stop ○ ○
AL014 Reverse limit error ○ ○
AL015 Forward limit error ○ ○
AL016 Abnormal IGBT temperature ○ ○
AL017 Abnormal EEPROM ○ ○
AL018 Abnormal encoder signal output ○ ○
AL020 Serial communication timeout ○ ○
AL022 RST leak phase ○ ○
AL023 Early overload warning ○ ○
AL024 Encoder initial magnetic field error ○ ○
AL025 Encoder internal error ○ ○
AL026 Encoder unreliable internal data ○ ○
AL027 Encoder internal reset error ○ ○
AL028 Encoder voltage error or encoder internal error ○ ○
AL029 Gray code error ○ ○
AL030 Motor crash error ○ ○
AL031 Motor power cable wiring error / disconnection ○ ○
AL034 Encoder internal communication error ○ ○
Encoder temperature exceeds the protective
AL035 ○ ○
range
AL042 Analog input voltage is too high ○ ○
AL044 Servo function overload warning ○ ○
AL045 E-Gear ratio value error ○ ○
AL053 Motor parameters are not confirmed ○ ○
AL056 Excessive motor speed ○ ○
AL05C Motor position feedback error ○ ○
AL060 Absolute position is lost ○ ○
AL061 Encoder undervoltage ○ ○
Number of turns for the absolute encoder
AL062 ○ ○
overflows
AL067 Encoder temperature warning ○ ○
12-3
General type (continued)

Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
12
AL068 Absolute data transmitted by I/O is in error ○ ○
AL069 Wrong motor type ○ ○
AL06A Absolute position is lost ○ ○
Encoder did not complete the set-up command
AL070 ○ ○
issued by servo drive
AL072 Encoder overspeed ○ ○
AL073 Encoder memory error ○ ○
AL074 Encoder single-turn absolute position error ○ ○
AL075 Encoder absolute number of turns is in error ○ ○
AL077 Encoder internal error ○ ○
AL079 Encoder parameter error ○ ○
AL07B Encoder memory busy ○ ○
Command to clear the absolute position is issued
AL07C ○ ○
when the motor speed is over 200 rpm
Motor stops operating when servo drive power is
AL07D ○ ○
cycled before AL07C is cleared
AL07E Encoder clearing procedure error ○ ○
AL07F Encoder version error ○ ○
AL083 Servo drive outputs excessive current ○ ○
AL085 Regeneration error ○ ○
AL086 Input voltage is too high ○ ○
AL088 Servo function operational warning ○ ○
AL089 Current detection interference ○ ○
AL08A Auto-tuning function - command error ○ ○
AL08B Auto-tuning function - pause time is too short ○ ○
AL08C Auto-tuning function - inertia estimation error ○ ○
AL099 DSP error ○ ○
AL521 Vibration elimination parameter error ○ ○
AL35F Emergency stop during deceleration ○ ○
AL3CF Emergency stop ○ ○
Note: if the servo drive shows an alarm that is not in this table, contact the local distributor or technician.
Motion control type

Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
AL207 Parameter group of PR#8 is out of range ○ ○
AL209 Parameter number of PR#8 is out of range ○ ○
AL213 Parameter setting of PR#8 is in error ○ ○
AL215 Write parameters: read-only ○ ○
AL217 Write parameters: parameter locked ○ ○
AL231 Monitoring item of PR#8 is out of range ○ ○
AL235 Position counter overflow warning ○ ○
AL237 Indexing coordinate is undefined ○ ○
AL245 PR positioning timeout ○ ○
12-4
Motion control type (continued)

Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
12
AL249 PR number exceeds the range ○ ○
AL283 Software positive limit ○ ○
AL285 Software negative limit ○ ○
AL289 Position counter overflows ○ ○
AL380 Position offset alarm for DO.MC_OK ○ ○
Communication type absolute position command
AL3F1 ○ ○
error
AL400 Indexing coordinate setting error ○ ○
AL404 Value of PR special filter setting is too high ○ ○
AL555 System failure ○ ○
PR motion setting error or command decoding
AL809 ○ ○
error
STO type
Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
AL500 STO function is enabled ○ ○
AL501 STO_A lost (signal loss or signal error) ○ ○
AL502 STO_B lost (signal loss or signal error) ○ ○
AL503 STO self-diagnostic error ○ ○
12-5
Communication type
Display Alarm name
ALM WARN ON OFF
12
AL111 Buffer overflow occurs when receiving SDO ○ ○
AL112 Buffer overflow occurs when receiving PDO ○ ○
AL121 Object’s index does not exist when accessing PDO ○ ○
Object’s sub-index does not exist when accessing
AL122 ○ ○
PDO
AL123 Data length error occurs when accessing PDO ○ ○
AL124 Data range error occurs when accessing PDO ○ ○
AL125 PDO object is read-only and write-protected ○ ○
AL126 Specified objects does not support PDO mapping ○ ○
PDO object is write-protected when servo drive is
AL127 ○ ○
on
Error occurs when PDO object is read from
AL128 ○ ○
EEPROM
Error occurs when PDO object is written to
AL129 ○ ○
EEPROM
AL130 Accessing address of EEPROM is out of range ○ ○
AL131 EEPROM CRC calculation error ○ ○
AL132 Parameter is write-prohibited ○ ○
AL170 Bus communication timeout ○ ○
AL180 Bus communication timeout ○ ○
AL185 Bus hardware error ○ ○
AL186 Bus data transmission error ○ ○
AL201 Initialization error of objects or data array ○ ○
AL301 CANopen synchronization failure ○ ○
Synchronization signal of CANopen is sent too
AL302 ○ ○
soon
AL303 CANopen synchronization signal timeout ○ ○
AL304 IP mode command failure ○ ○
AL305 SYNC period error ○ ○
AL3E1 Communication synchronization fails ○ ○
Communication synchronization signal is sent too
AL3E2 ○ ○
soon
AL3E3 Communication synchronization signal timeout ○ ○
AL401 NMT reset command is received when servo is on ○ ○
12-6
12.2 Causes and corrective actions
AL001 Overcurrent
12
Condition: main circuit current is greater than 1.5 times the maximum
instantaneous current of the servo drive.
Cause:
1. The servo drive output is short-circuited.

Trigger condition
and cause 2. Motor wiring is in error.
3. IGBT is abnormal.
4. Parameter setting is in error.
5. Control command setting is in error.
1. Check the connection between the motor and servo drive and make sure that
the wire is not short-circuited. Do not expose the metal part of the wiring.
Check if you have followed the wiring sequence of the motor and servo drive
as described in this manual.
Checking method 2. If the temperature of the heat sink is abnormal, send your servo drive back to
and corrective action the distributor or contact Delta. Check if the set value is much greater than the
default. It is recommended to reset the servo drive to the factory settings and
then modify the settings one by one.
3. Check if the input control command changes greatly. If so, modify the rate of
change in the command or enable the filter function.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL002 Overvoltage
Condition: main circuit voltage exceeds the rated value.
Cause:
1. The input voltage of the main circuit is higher than the allowable rated value.
Trigger condition
and cause 2. Incorrect power input (incorrect power system).
3. Malfunction of the servo drive hardware.
4. Incorrect selection of the regenerative resistor or no connection to an external
1. Use a voltmeter to check if the input voltage of the main circuit is within the
allowable rated value (refer to Appendix A Specifications). If not, use the right
Checking method
voltage source or connect the regulator in series. Use a voltmeter to check if
and corrective action
the power system complies with the specifications. If not, use the right voltage
source or connect the transformer in series.
12-7
AL002 Overvoltage
2. Use a voltmeter to check the input voltage of the main circuit. If the voltage is
within the allowable rated value while the issue persists, send your servo drive
12 Checking method
3.
back to the distributor or contact Delta.
Check the connection for the regenerative resistor, re-calculate the value for
the regenerative resistor, and reset the values of P1.052 and P1.053.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL003 Undervoltage
Condition:
1. Main circuit voltage is below the rated value. The error type of AL003 is a
warning by default. To set AL003 as an alarm, you can set P2.066 [Bit 9] to 1.
2. DC Bus voltage is below P4.024× √2.

Trigger condition
and cause Cause:
1. The input voltage of main circuit is lower than the allowable rated value.
2. No power is supplied to the main circuit.
3. Incorrect power input (incorrect power system).
1. Check if the voltage wiring is correct and the wiring of input voltage for the
main circuit is normal.
Checking method 2. Check the power supply and use a voltmeter to check the main circuit voltage.
3. Use a voltmeter to check if the power system complies with the specifications.
Check if using the right voltage source or the transformer is connected in
series.
Set P2.066 [Bit 2] to clear AL003:
1. If P2.066 [Bit 2] is set to 0, use DI.ARST to clear the alarm after the voltage is
How to clear the
back in the normal range.
alarm?
2. If P2.066 [Bit 2] is set to 1, the alarm is automatically cleared once the voltage
is back in the normal range.
AL004 Motor combination error
Condition: an incorrect motor is used with the servo drive.
Cause:
Trigger condition
1. Motor combination error (the servo drive is connected to the wrong motor).
and cause
2. The encoder connector is loose.
3. The encoder is damaged.
12-8
AL004 Motor combination error
1. Use the right motor.

Checking method
12
2. Check and re-install the encoder connector.
3. If the encoder (motor) is not operating properly, replace the motor.
How to clear the

Cycle power on the servo drive.
alarm?
AL005 Regeneration error
Condition: an error occurs during regeneration.
Cause:

Trigger condition
and cause
2. P1.053 (Regenerative resistor capacity) is not set to 0 when the regenerative
resistor is not connected.
3. Incorrect parameter settings for P1.052 and P1.053.
1. Check the connection for the regenerative resistor, re-calculate the value for
the regenerative resistor, and reset the values of P1.052 and P1.053. If the
issue persists, send your servo drive back to Delta.

Checking method
and corrective action 2. Set P1.053 to 0 if not using a regenerative resistor.
3. Correctly set the parameters for the regenerative resistor (P1.052) and the
regenerative resistor capacity (P1.053).
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL006 Overload
Condition: overload of motor and servo drive.
Cause:
1. The load is over the rated range and the servo drive is in a continuous
Trigger condition overload condition.
and cause
2. Improper parameter settings.
3. Incorrect wiring of motor and encoder.
4. Encoder malfunction.
1. Set P0.002 to 12 for monitoring if the average load rate [%] is continuously
over 100%. If so, increase the motor capacity or reduce the load. Refer to
Checking method Appendix A for Graph of load and operating time.
2. Check if there is any mechanical vibration or the setting for acceleration or
deceleration is too drastic.
12-9
AL006 Overload
3. Check if the wiring of UVW and the encoder cables is correct.

Checking method
12
4. Send your servo drive back to the distributor or contact Delta.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL007 Excessive deviation of Speed command
Condition: deviation between the Speed command and the feedback speed
exceeds the allowable range set by P2.034.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause 1. A drastic change in the input Speed command.
2. Improper setting of P2.034 (Speed command error warning).
3. Incorrect wiring of UVW and the encoder cables.
1. Use the signal detector to check if the input analog voltage signal is normal.
If not, adjust the rate of change for input signals or enable the filter function.
Checking method
and corrective action 2. Check if the value of P2.034 (Speed command error warning) is set properly.
3. Check if the wiring of UVW and the encoder cables is correct.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL008 Abnormal pulse command
Condition: the input frequency for the pulse command is over the allowable value
Trigger condition for the hardware interface.
and cause
Cause: the pulse command frequency is higher than the rated input frequency.
Checking method Use the scope to check if the input frequency is higher than the rated frequency.
and corrective action Correctly set the input pulse frequency.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL009 Excessive deviation of Position command
Condition: deviation between the Position command and the feedback position
exceeds the allowable range set by P2.035.
Cause:
Trigger condition 1. The maximum position deviation is set too low.
and cause
2. Gain value is set too low.
3. Torque limit is set too low.
4. Excessive external load.
12-10
AL009 Excessive deviation of Position command
5. Improper setting for the E-Gear ratio.

Trigger condition
and cause
12
6. The power cables are loose.
1. Check the value of the maximum deviation (P2.035 Excessive deviation of

Position command warning). If the value is too low, set a higher value.
2. Check if the gain value is appropriate for the application.
3. Check if the torque limit setting is appropriate for the application.

Checking method
and corrective action 4. Check the external load. Reduce the external load or re-evaluate the motor
capacity if necessary.
5. Check if the settings for P1.044 and P1.045 are appropriate for the application.
If not, set them to proper values.
6. Check if the power cables are loose.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL010 Voltage error during regeneration
Condition: an error occurs during regeneration.
Cause:

Trigger condition
and cause regenerative resistor. The regenerative voltage remains at 400V for a period of
time during regeneration.
2. P1.053 (Regenerative resistor capacity) is not set to 0 when the regenerative
resistor is not connected.
1. Check the connection for the regenerative resistor, re-calculate the value for
the regenerative resistor, and reset the values of P1.052 and P1.053. If the
Checking method
and corrective action issue persists, send your servo drive back to Delta.
2. Set P1.053 to 0 if not using a regenerative resistor.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL011 Encoder error
Condition: the encoder produces abnormal pulses.
Cause:
Trigger condition
1. Encoder wiring is incorrect.
and cause
2. Encoder connector is loose.
3. Encoder wiring is poor.
12-11
AL011 Encoder error
4. Connection to the encoder is cut off due to interference.

Trigger condition
and cause
5. Encoder is damaged.
12 1. Check if the wiring follows the instructions in the user manual. If not, connect
the wiring correctly.
2. Check the connection between CN2 and encoder connector. If the connector
is loose, reconnect it to CN2.
3. Check if the encoder connector is connected to the motor and CN2 of the
servo drive. If there is any poor wiring or damaged wires, replace the
connector and cable.
4. Check the communication error rate by setting P0.002 to -80. If the value
Checking method
and corrective action continuously increases, it means there is interference. Check the following:
(a) Check if the motor is properly grounded. Make sure the power cable
(green end) is grounded to the servo drive heat sink.
(b) Check if the connection for the encoder signal cable is normal. Make sure
the encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any
high-current cables to avoid interference.
(c) Use shielded cable for the encoder.
5. If you took all corrective actions but the issue persists, replace the motor.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL012 Adjustment error
Condition: the calibration value exceeds the allowable value during electronic
calibration.
Trigger condition Cause:
and cause
1. The analog input contact is not correctly returned to zero.
2. The detection device is damaged.
1. Check if the voltage level at the analog input contact is the same as the
ground voltage.
Checking method
2. Reset the power supply. If the issue persists, send your servo drive back to
the distributor or contact Delta.
How to clear the

Remove the connection cable for CN1 and then execute auto calibration.
alarm?
12-12
AL013 Emergency stop

Trigger condition
The emergency stop button is pressed.
and cause
12
Checking method
Check and make sure the emergency stop button is off.
How to clear the
Set DI.EMGS to off to clear the alarm.
alarm?
AL014 Reverse limit error
Condition: reverse limit switch is triggered.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause
1. Reverse limit switch is triggered.
2. Servo system is unstable.
1. Check and make sure the reverse limit switch is off.

Checking method
2. Check the parameter setting or re-estimate the motor capacity.
How to clear the

The alarm is automatically cleared after the motor moves away from the limit.
alarm?
AL015 Forward limit error
Condition: forward limit switch is triggered.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause
1. Forward limit switch is triggered.
2. Servo system is unstable.
1. Check and make sure the forward limit switch is off.

Checking method
2. Check the parameter setting or re-estimate the motor capacity.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL016 Abnormal IGBT temperature
Condition: temperature of IGBT is abnormal.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause 1. The load is over the rated range and the servo drive is in a continuous
overload condition.
2. The servo drive output is short-circuited.
1. Check if the motor is overloaded or over-current. If so, try increasing the

Checking method motor's capacity or reducing the load.
2. Check if the wiring of servo drive output is correct.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-13
AL017 Abnormal EEPROM
Condition: error occurs when DSP accesses EEPROM.
12
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause 1. Parameter writing error or the value exceeds the allowable range.
2. Data in ROM is damaged when power is supplied to the servo drive.
It is usually because data in ROM is damaged or there is no data in ROM.
Press the SHIFT key and the panel displays EXGAB.
X = 1, 2, 3
G = Group number of the parameter
AB = Parameter number in hexadecimal format
If the panel displays “E320A”, it indicates parameter P2.010. If “E3610” is
displayed, it indicates P6.016. Check the value for the parameter.
1. Press the SHIFT key to display the parameter code. If this alarm occurs when
Checking method
and corrective action power is supplied to the drive, it means a parameter value has exceeded the
range. Modify the value and then cycle the power. If the alarm occurs during
normal operation, it means an error occurred when the parameter is written.
Use DI.ARST to clear this alarm.
2. Press the SHIFT key and the panel displays “E100X” or “E0001”. If this alarm
occurs when power is supplied to the drive, it is usually because the data in
ROM is damaged or there is no data in ROM. Send your servo drive back to
the distributor or contact Delta.
How to clear the If this alarm occurs when the drive is started, reset the parameters and then cycle
alarm? the power. If the alarm occurs during operation, set DI.ARST to on.
12-14
AL018 Abnormal encoder signal output
Condition: output pulse frequency of the encoder is higher than the maximum
output frequency of the hardware.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause:
1. Pulse resolution of the encoder is set too high.

12
2. There is interference or cable damage causing communication error.
3. Encoder error.
1. The setting of P1.076 and P1.046 should follow these requirements:

Motor speed
P1.076 > motor speed and × P1.046 × 4 < 19.8 × 106
60
2. Check the communication error rate by setting P0.002 to -80. If the value
continuously increases, it means there is interference. Check the following:
(a) Check if the motor is properly grounded. Make sure the power cable
(green end) is grounded to the servo drive heat sink.

Checking method
and corrective action (b) Check if the connection for the encoder signal cable is normal. Make sure
the encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any
3. Use shielded cable for the encoder.
4. Check the error log (P4.000 - P4.004) and see if an alarm has occurred
(AL011, AL024, AL025, or AL026). Use the checking methods and corrective
actions to clear the alarm if any of them occurs.
How to clear the 1. DI.ARST

alarm?
2. Contact the distributor.
AL020 Serial communication timeout
Condition: RS-485 communication error.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause 1. Improper setting of the timeout parameter (P3.003).
2. Servo drive has not received the communication command for a long time and
has timed out (refer to P3.003).
1. Check and correctly set the value for the communication timeout parameter.
Checking method
and corrective action 2. Check if the communication cable is loose or broken and make sure it is
correctly wired.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-15
AL022 RST leak phase
Condition: RST power cable is loose or there is no power. The error type of AL022
Trigger condition is a warning by default. To set AL022 as an alarm, you can set P2.066 [Bit 12] to 1.
12
and cause
Cause: RST leak phase.
Check if the RST power cable is loose or there is no power. For 1.5 kW (or below)
ASDA-B3 servo drives, this alarm occurs when all three phases are not connected
Checking method to the power supply. For 2 kW (or above) ASDA-B3 servo drives, this alarm occurs
and corrective action when one single phase is not connected to the power supply. Correctly connect the
power to the servo drive. If the issue persists, send your servo drive back to the
distributor or contact Delta.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL023 Early overload warning

Trigger condition
Early overload warning.
and cause
1. Check if your servo drive is overloaded and refer to the corrective actions for
AL006 for troubleshooting.
Checking method
and corrective action 2. Check if the value of P1.056 (Motor output overload warning level) is set too
low. If so, increase the value, which should be over 100 to disable the warning
function.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL024 Encoder initial magnetic field error
Condition: the magnetic field of the encoder U, V, W signal is in error.

Trigger condition
and cause Cause: the initial magnetic field of the encoder is in error. (Signal U, V, W of the
encoder magnetic field is in error.)
1. Check if the motor is properly grounded. Make sure the power cable (green
end) is grounded to the servo drive heat sink.
2. Check if the connection for the encoder signal cable is normal. Make sure the
Checking method encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any high-current
cables to avoid interference.
If the issue persists, send your servo motor back to the distributor or contact Delta.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-16
Condition: internal memory and counter of the encoder are in error.
Cause:
12
Trigger condition
and cause 1. Encoder internal error (internal memory and counter are in error).
2. When power is applied, the motor rotates because of the inertia of the
mechanism or other causes.
Checking method encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any high-current
4. Make sure the motor shaft does not move when power is turned on.
How to clear the Cycle power on the servo drive.

alarm?
AL026 Encoder unreliable internal data
Condition: internal data error occurs three consecutive times.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause
1. External interference.
2. Malfunction of the encoder hardware.
encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any high-current

Checking method
4. Set P0.002 to -80 by using the panel to monitor the communication error rate.
If the value is greater than 0 and increases continuously, check Steps 1 - 3
again. If the value is 0, send your servo motor back to the distributor or contact
Delta.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-17
AL027 Encoder internal reset error
Condition: encoder reset error.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: encoder reset.
12 1.
2.
Check if the encoder signal cable is firmly connected.
Check if the power supply for the encoder is stable and make sure to use
shielded cable.
Checking method
and corrective action 3. Check if the operating temperature is over 95°C (203°F). Identify the cause for
the high temperature and do not restart the operation before the temperature
drops to the allowable range.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL028 Encoder voltage error or encoder internal error
Condition: servo drive charging circuit is not removed so the battery voltage is
higher than the specified value (> 3.8V) or the encoder signal is in error.
and cause
1. Voltage level of the battery is too high.
2. Encoder internal error.
1. Follow the testing procedure for overvoltage and overcurrent and troubleshoot
the following. This automatically clears AL028.
(a) Check the servo drive charging circuit. Avoid incorrect wiring. If Pin 1 (5V)
of CN2 is connected to BAT+, it means the power (5V) of the servo drive
is being charged to the battery.
(b) Check if the battery is correctly installed. (Voltage > 3.8V)
Checking method 2. Check if the motor is properly grounded. Make sure the power cable (green
and corrective action end) is grounded to the servo drive heat sink.
encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any high-current
If the issue persists, send your servo drive and motor back to the distributor or
contact Delta.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-18
AL029 Gray code error

Trigger condition
Absolute position error.
and cause
12
Checking method Cycle power on the servo drive to operate the motor. Then, check if the alarm
and corrective action occurs again. If the issue persists, replace the encoder.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL030 Motor crash error
Condition: when the motor hits the device, the torque reaches the value set by
P1.057 and lasts for the time set by P1.058.
Cause:
1. Check if the function of motor hard stop (P1.057) is enabled. If so, set P1.057
Trigger condition
and cause to 0.
2. Check if the value set by P1.057 is too low and the time set by P1.058 is too
short. Set P1.057 according to the actual torque. If P1.057 is set too low, it
may lead to malfunction; if P1.057 is set too high, it may lose the protection
function.
Checking method Cycle power on the servo drive to operate the motor. Then, check if the alarm
and corrective action occurs again. If the issue persists, replace the encoder.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL031 Motor power cable wiring error / disconnection
Condition: incorrect wiring or disconnection of the motor power cable (U, V, W) and
ground wire (GND).
Trigger condition Cause: incorrect wiring or disconnection of the power cable (U, V, W) and ground
and cause
wire (GND). The switch for cut-off detection is set by P2.065 [Bit 9], which default
is set to disable. The switch for wiring error detection is set by P2.065 [Bit 8], which
default is set to disable.
Check if the motor power cable (U, V, W) and ground wire (GND) are firmly
Checking method
connected. Follow the instructions in this user manual for correct wiring and proper
grounding.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-19
AL034 Encoder internal communication error
Condition:
12
1. Internal communication error for the absolute encoder.
Trigger condition
and cause
2. Internal error for other types of encoder.
Cause: encoder internal communication error.
1. Check if the battery wiring is correct or loose. If it is loose, wire it again and
cycle power on the system.
Checking method
2. Check if the battery voltage is within the normal range.
3. Internal communication error for the absolute encoder occurs. Replace the
motor.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL035 Encoder temperature exceeds the protective range
Condition: encoder temperature is over the upper limit of 100°C (212°F).

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: encoder temperature is over 100°C.
Set P0.002 to -124 to read the temperature and check if it is below 100°C. If the
Checking method encoder temperature is higher than 100°C, improve the heat dissipation to lower
and corrective action the temperature. If the temperature difference between the encoder and motor is
over 30°C (86°F), send the servo motor back to Delta.
How to clear the After the temperature detector shows a temperature below 100°C, cycle power on
alarm?
the servo drive.
AL042 Analog input voltage is too high
Trigger condition Analog input voltage for the Speed command is higher than the level specified by
and cause P1.083.
Checking method Check and make sure the voltage source for the Speed command is correct.
and corrective action Check the value of P1.083 and set it to 0 when this function is not required.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-20
AL044 Servo function overload warning
Condition: when the motor controlling function of the servo drive is overloaded,
Trigger condition the motion control function is affected, causing error in the PR operation.
12
and cause
Cause: servo function overload warning.
1. If using a filter, see if using this filter is necessary.

Checking method
2. Set P2.066 [Bit 4] to 1 to disable this alarm.
1. Disable the filter if it is not required, such as the low-pass filter (P1.006 -
P1.008), moving filter (P1.068), low-frequency vibration suppression (P1.025 -
How to clear the P1.028), vibration elimination (P1.089 - P1.094), Notch filter (1st to 5th sets),
alarm? percentage of friction compensation (P1.062), and motor hard stop (torque
percentage) (P1.057).
2. Set P2.066 [Bit 4] to 1 and cycle power on the servo drive.
AL045 E-Gear ratio value error
Condition: when the value of the E-Gear ratio exceeds the range (1/4 - 262144),
Trigger condition this alarm occurs once power is cycled to the servo drive.
and cause
Cause: E-Gear ratio value is found to be in error after the servo drive is powered on.
Checking method Check if the value of the E-Gear ratio is within the allowable range (1/4 - 262144).
and corrective action If not, correct the value and then cycle power on the servo drive.
How to clear the

Cycle power on the servo drive after the value is corrected.
alarm?
AL053 Motor parameters are not confirmed
Condition: if the Motor Parameter Identification Wizard function has not been
executed or the identification failed, once the servo is on, this alarm is triggered.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the motor has not executed the Motor Parameter Identification Wizard
function or fails to execute it.
Checking method
Execute or re-execute the Motor Parameter Identification Wizard function.
How to clear the
Switch the servo to the Servo Off state to clear this alarm.
alarm?
12-21
AL056 Excessive motor speed
Condition: when the filtered motor speed exceeds the setting of P1.111, the servo
drive immediately switches to the Servo Off state and displays this alarm.
12
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: this alarm is to remind the user that the motor speed has reached the
upper limit of the current setting (P1.111).
1. Check the reason why the motor speed is too high. For example, the set value
of P1.111 is too small or the bandwidth is not properly set.

Checking method
2. Evaluate the motor speed and the condition of the mechanism. If allowable,
increase the speed and then the set value of P1.111.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL05C Motor position feedback error
Condition: sudden jumps occur to the motor position feedback.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause
1. Encoder feedback is abnormal or the encoder is damaged.
2. Encoder feedback is interfered.
1. Check if the feedback signal is abnormal. With the scope function in the
software, select Feedback position [PUU] as the input signal for the channel
and sample at 16 kHz or 20 kHz, then operate the motor manually to monitor
whether the feedback value has discontinuous sudden jumps.

Checking method
2. Check if the feedback signal is interfered, causing sudden jumps to the motor
position feedback.
3. Check if the communication error rate is increased due to interference.
For example, check the communication error rate by setting P0.017 to -80 and
monitor whether the value of P0.009 is not 0 and continuously increases.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-22
AL060 Absolute position is lost
Condition: losing the recorded number of revolutions because of low battery
voltage or loss of power.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause:
1. Voltage level of the battery is too low.

12
2. The battery is replaced when the main power of the servo drive is off.
3. The battery is not installed when the absolute function is enabled.
4. Poor connection or disconnection of the battery power circuit.
1. Check if the battery voltage is below 2.8V. Re-establish the absolute origin
coordinates after replacing the battery.
2. Do not replace or remove the battery when the servo drive’s main power is off.
3. Follow these instructions:

Checking method
(a) Install the battery.
(b) Check the connection between the battery power source and servo drive.
(c) Check the encoder wiring.
4. Ensure the wiring is correct so that the battery power is supplied to the
encoder and then re-establish the absolute origin coordinates.
Connect or reconnect the wiring so that the battery power is supplied to the
How to clear the
encoder and then re-establish the absolute origin coordinates. Refer to Section
alarm?
10.3.4 Establish the absolute origin coordinates for details.
AL061 Encoder undervoltage
Condition: voltage level of the absolute encoder battery is lower than the rated
Trigger condition value (3.1V).
and cause
Cause: voltage level of the battery is too low.
1. Read the battery voltage with monitoring variable 26h to see if it is below 3.1V.
Checking method
2. Measure the battery voltage to see if it is below 3.1V.
If the voltage is too low, replace the battery when the servo drive’s main power is on.
How to clear the

The alarm is cleared automatically.
alarm?
12-23
AL062 Number of turns for the absolute encoder overflows
Condition: the number of turns for the absolute motor exceeds the range of -32768
Trigger condition to +32767.
12
and cause
Cause: motor’s rotation cycle exceeds the allowable range.
Checking method Check if the motor’s number of turns during operation is within the range between
and corrective action -32768 and +32767. If not, re-execute the homing procedure.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL067 Encoder temperature warning
Condition: the encoder temperature is over the warning level of 85°C (185°F),
Trigger condition but still under 100°C (212°F), which is within the protective range.
and cause
Cause: encoder temperature warning (85°C to 100°C).
Set P0.002 to -124 to read the encoder temperature and check if it matches the
Checking method motor temperature. If the encoder temperature is too high, improve the heat
and corrective action dissipation or decrease the operating temperature. If the temperature difference
between the encoder and motor is over 30°C (86°F), send the motor back to Delta.

alarm?
AL068 Absolute data transmitted by I/O is in error
Condition: the time sequence is wrong when you read the absolute position with
DI/O.
and cause
1. Time sequence is wrong.
2. Reading timeout.
1. Correct the time sequence for reading the data with DI/O:
(a) DI.ABSQ switches to off after DO.ABSR is off.
(b) DI.ABSQ switches to on after DO.ABSR is on.
Checking method 2. Check the duration from when DO.ABSR switches on to the time that
DI.ABSQ switches on and see if this duration is over 200 ms. The correct
procedure should be: when DO.ABSR switches on and after the bit data of
absolute position is ready, read DO.ABSD within 200 ms, switch DI.ABSQ on,
and then inform the servo drive that data reading is complete.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-24
AL069 Wrong motor type

Trigger condition
Incremental motor does not support the absolute function.
and cause
12
1. Check whether your servo motor has an incremental or absolute encoder.
Checking method
and corrective action 2. Check the setting of P2.069 and correctly set the value. Set P2.069.X to 0 if
desiring to operate the absolute motor as an incremental motor.
How to clear the Set P2.069.X to 0 and then cycle power on the servo drive.
alarm?
AL06A Absolute position is lost
There are two conditions that may cause the loss of absolute position. One is that
the absolute coordinates are not established, so after homing is complete, the origin
will not be lost after power cycling. The other is that an error occurred. After homing
is complete, AL06A still occurs after power cycling.
 Coordinates are not established.
Condition:
1. Servo drive in use for the first time.
2. The battery is drained and the power supply of the servo drive is cut off.
Cause:
1. Servo drive is in use for the first time, so the absolute coordinate system has
not been established.
2. Retaining the absolute position requires power supply, so when the battery is
drained and the power supply of the servo drive is cut off, the absolute
Trigger condition
and cause position of the servo is lost.
3. After the E-Gear ratio is modified, the communication type coordinate system
needs to be re-established.
 An error occurred.
Condition:
1. Encoder cable is damaged (including the exterior and the internal wiring).
2. There is a momentary power failure in the battery power supply.
3. The absolute motor is in error.
4. The battery box is used, and J1 and J2 are connected reversely.
Cause:
1. Power supply is unstable due to damage of the encoder cable.
2. The reason for the momentary power failure may be that the battery box
connector is loose or excessive machine vibration.
12-25
AL06A Absolute position is lost
3. The absolute encoder of this motor is in error.
12
Trigger condition 4. If J1 and J2 are connected reversely, the battery cannot charge the capacitor.
and cause
The function of the capacitor is to act as a buffer to supply power when the
power of the servo drive is cut off and switching to battery power supply.
1. Check if the absolute origin coordinates are established (refer to Section
10.3.1 for more information).
2. Avoid replacing the battery when the servo drive is powered off. It is suggested
to replace the battery when the servo drive is powered on, so the absolute
encoder has continuous power supply.
3. Re-execute homing to complete establishing the absolute coordinate system.

Checking method
4. Replace the encoder cable. Use the X-ray to check if the internal wiring is
damaged.
5. Check if the connector is loose and the machine vibrates excessively. If both
are fine, then replace the battery box for cross-testing.
6. Replace the servo motor.
7. Ensure that J1 is connected to the battery and J2 is connected to the servo
drive.
How to clear the This alarm is automatically cleared after you establish the absolute origin
alarm?
coordinates.
AL070 Encoder did not complete the set-up command issued by servo drive
Trigger condition
Reading and writing commands are not complete.
and cause
Checking method Check if the wiring is correct and the connector is firmly connected.
and corrective action Correctly connect the wiring. Contact Delta if this error persists.
How to clear the

alarm?
When the encoder is powered by the servo drive: over 8,800 rpm.
Trigger condition
and cause
When the encoder is powered by the battery: over 10,000 rpm.
1. Check if the motor is properly grounded. Make sure the power cable is
grounded to the servo drive heat sink.

Checking method
2. Make sure the encoder signal cable is separated from the power supply or any
12-26
3. Use shielded cable for the encoder, pull out the shielded mesh, and ground it.
Checking method
12
4. Check the motor speed and make sure it is within the rated range.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL073 Encoder memory error

Trigger condition
An error occurs when the encoder is reading data from or writing data to EEPROM.
and cause
Checking method high-current cables to avoid interference.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL074 Encoder single-turn absolute position error

Trigger condition
The single-turn position in the encoder is in error.
and cause
How to clear the

alarm?
12-27
AL075 Encoder absolute number of turns is in error

Trigger condition
The absolute number of turns in the encoder is in error.
and cause
12
How to clear the

alarm?

Trigger condition
Encoder internal error (internal computing error).
and cause
How to clear the

alarm?
AL079 Encoder parameter error
Trigger condition The servo drive is not cycled after the parameter is written to the encoder, so the
and cause parameter value is not updated.
Checking method Check if the parameter is written to the encoder. If so, cycle the servo drive to
and corrective action update the parameter.

alarm?
12-28
AL07B Encoder memory busy

Trigger condition
Encoder memory is busy.
and cause
12
How to clear the

alarm?
AL07C Command to clear the absolute position is issued when the motor speed is over
200 rpm
Trigger condition The command to clear the absolute position is issued when the motor speed is
and cause over 200 rpm.
1. Check if a command to clear the absolute position is issued while the motor
speed is over 200 rpm. If so, follow the procedure for clearing the absolute
Checking method position to clear this alarm.
2. Do not issue a command to clear the absolute position when the motor speed
is over 200 rpm.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL07D Motor stops operating when servo drive power is cycled before AL07C is cleared
Trigger condition AL07C occurs and is not cleared before power is cycled on the servo drive, and
and cause the motor stops operating.
Checking method Use DI.ARST to clear the alarm. Once this alarm is cleared, AL07C occurs.
and corrective action Follow the checking and troubleshooting methods to clear that alarm.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-29
AL07E Encoder clearing procedure error

Trigger condition
The number of times for the encoder to clear the procedure error exceeds 11 times.
and cause
12
Checking method If the issue persists, set P0.002 to -80 to check the communication quality with the
and corrective action encoder. If the communication is normal, use DI.ARST to clear this alarm.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL07F Encoder version error

Trigger condition
The encoder version read by the servo drive is in error.
and cause
Checking method
N/A
How to clear the
Replace the motor immediately.
alarm?
AL083 Servo drive outputs excessive current
Condition: during general operation, this alarm occurs when the servo drive
outputs current that is over the allowable level specified by the firmware.
This alarm protects IGBT from overheating or burning because of the high current.
and cause
1. UVW cable is short-circuited.
2. Motor wiring is in error.
3. The analog signal GND for the servo drive is interfered.
1. Check the connection between the motor power cable and its connector.
If metal wire is exposed or the wire is torn, the UVW cable can short circuit.
In this case, replace the power cable and prevent the metal conductor from
being exposed.
2. Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring and check the following:
(a) If you do not use the Delta standard power cable, make sure the UVW
Checking method
wiring sequence is correct.
(b) Make sure the UVW wiring between the servo drive and motor is
correctly connected.
3. Check if the analog signal GND is mistakenly connected to another ground
signal (incorrect connection can cause interference). Do not use a common
ground for the analog signal GND and other signal cables. Follow the wiring
instructions in Chapter 3.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-30
AL085 Regeneration error
Condition: regeneration control error.

Trigger condition
12
and cause Cause: regenerative resistor is not operating, but the regenerative voltage remains
at 400V for a period of time.
Check the connections for the regenerative resistor, re-calculate the value for the
Checking method
regenerative resistor, and reset the values of P1.052 and P1.053. If this does not
clear the alarm, send your servo drive back to Delta.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL086 Input voltage is too high
Condition: when the servo drive detects no regenerative power, but other energy
(such as interference) is input to the servo drive, or the input voltage is higher than
the allowable rated voltage.

and cause
1. Other energy (such as interference) is input to the servo drive or the input
voltage is higher than the allowable rated voltage.
2. Malfunction of the servo drive hardware.
1. Use a voltmeter to measure if the input voltage from the power supply is within
the allowable rated voltage (refer to Appendix A Specifications). If the input
voltage exceeds the rated range, remove the interference source. If you
cannot eliminate the interference, the interference can be consumed with an

Checking method
and corrective action external resistor by setting P2.065 [Bit 3] to 0 and P2.094 [Bit 4] to 0.
2. If the voltmeter detects that the voltage input from the main circuit is within the
allowable rated voltage but the issue persists, then the servo drive may be
malfunctioning.
How to clear the 1. Use the correct voltage source or connect the voltage regulator in series.
alarm?
2. Send your servo drive back to the distributor or contact Delta.
AL088 Servo function operational warning
Condition: too many motor control functions on the servo drive are enabled.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: servo function operational warning.
Checking method
If using a filter, see if using this filter is necessary.
12-31
AL088 Servo function operational warning
Disable the filter if it is not required, such as the low-pass filter (P1.006 - P1.008),
moving filter (P1.068), low-frequency vibration suppression (P1.025 - P1.028),
12
How to clear the
alarm? vibration elimination (P1.089 - P1.094), Notch filter (1st to 5th sets), motor hard stop
(torque percentage) (P1.057), and percentage of friction compensation (P1.062).
AL089 Current detection interference
Condition: current detection interference.

Trigger condition
and cause Cause: current detection in the servo drive is affected by an external interference
source.
Checking method Check the environment around the servo drive to see if there is any interference
and corrective action source.
1. Remove or reposition the interference source.
How to clear the 2. Set P2.112 [Bit 1] to 0 to disable AL089.

alarm?
3. If the issue persists, send your servo drive back to the distributor or contact
Delta.
AL08A Auto-tuning function - command error
Condition: no command is issued when the servo drive starts the auto-tuning
procedure.
Cause:
1. When the command source is the controller, neither the controller nor the
Trigger condition
position register issued the command.
and cause
2. When the command source is the servo drive, position 1 and 2 specify the
same position.
3. The signal cable is not connected or incorrectly connected so that the servo
drive cannot receive the command.
1. Make sure a command is being issued.

Checking method
2. Make sure the wiring between the controller and servo drive is correct.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-32
AL08B Auto-tuning function - pause time is too short
Condition: the pause time is too short when the controller is the command source
in the auto-tuning procedure. The auto-tuning algorithm requires a certain amount

Trigger condition
and cause
of time to perform the calculation. The tuning result is affected if the pause time is
too short.
Cause: pause time in the cycle is too short.

12
1. For a reciprocating motion between two points, pausing is required on the
return, which has to be longer than 1 second.

Checking method
2. For rotation in a single direction, pause time is required when the motor
rotates a certain number of cycles (> 2 cycles).
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL08C Auto-tuning function - inertia estimation error
Condition: inertia estimation error occurs when the servo drive starts the
auto-tuning procedure.
Cause:
Trigger condition 1. Acceleration or deceleration time is too long.
and cause
2. Rotation speed is too slow.
3. Load inertia of the machine is too large.
4. Inertia variation of the machine is too drastic.
1. The time for the motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to 3,000 rpm or decelerate
from 3,000 rpm to 0 rpm must be within 1.5 seconds.
2. The slowest speed must be no less than 200 rpm; above 500 rpm is
Checking method
and corrective action suggested.
3. The load inertia should be less than 50 times the motor inertia.
4. Avoid applications that require drastic variation in the inertia.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-33
AL099 DSP error

Trigger condition
EEPROM is not reset after DSP firmware is updated.
and cause
12
Check if the firmware is updated. Set P2.008 to 30 first and then set it to 28.
Checking method
Next, cycle power on the servo drive. Contact Delta if this error persists.
How to clear the

Set P2.008 to 30 and then 28. Cycle power on the servo drive.
alarm?
AL111 Buffer overflow occurs when receiving SDO
Trigger condition SDO Rx Buffer overflows (the servo drive receives more than two SDOs within
and cause 1 ms).
Checking method
Check if the servo drive (master) receives or sends more than one SDO within 1 ms.
How to clear the
NMT: reset node, 0x6040 fault reset, or DI.ARST.
alarm?
AL112 Buffer overflow occurs when receiving PDO
Trigger condition PDO Rx Buffer overflows (the servo drive receives more than two PDOs of COBID
and cause within 1 ms).
Checking method Check if the servo drive (master) receives or sends more than one PDO of COBID
and corrective action within 1 ms.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL121 Object’s index does not exist when accessing PDO
Trigger condition When the servo drive receives the PDO from the controller, the specified object’s
and cause index number is incorrect so that the servo drive cannot identify it.
1. Check if the object’s index number for PDO mapping of the controller is correct.
Checking method 2. If the index number is correct, it means this specified object is not supported
by the servo drive. Check if it is necessary to use this object or if you can
substitute it with a different object.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-34
AL122 Object’s sub-index does not exist when accessing PDO
Trigger condition When the servo drive receives the PDO from the controller, the specified object’s
and cause sub-index number is incorrect so that the servo drive cannot identify it.
Checking method
1. Check if the object’s sub-index number for PDO mapping of the controller is
correct.
12
and corrective action 2. If the sub-index number is correct, it means this specified object is not
supported by the servo drive. Check if it is necessary to use this object or if
you can substitute it with a different object.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL123 Data length error occurs when accessing PDO

Trigger condition
Data length in the message does not match the length of the specified object.
and cause
Checking method Check if the data length for PDO mapping is changed when the servo drive
and corrective action receives or sends PDO.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL124 Data range error occurs when accessing PDO

Trigger condition
The data value in the message is out of range for the specified object.
and cause
Checking method
Check if the written range is wrong when the servo drive receives or sends PDO.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL125 PDO object is read-only and write-protected

Trigger condition
The specified object in the message is read-only and write-protected.
and cause
Checking method
Check if the object for PDO mapping is read-only.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL126 Specified object does not support PDO mapping

Trigger condition
The specified object does not support PDO mapping.
and cause
Checking method Check if the specified object allows PDO mapping when the servo drive receives
and corrective action or sends PDO.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-35
AL127 PDO object is write-protected when servo drive is on

Trigger condition
PDO object is write-protected (unchangeable) when servo drive is on.
and cause
12
Checking method Make sure no specified object is written when the servo drive receives or sends
and corrective action PDO in the Servo On state.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL128 Error occurs when PDO object is read from EEPROM
Trigger condition An error occurs when the default value is loaded from ROM at start-up.
and cause All objects automatically return to the default value.
Checking method Check if an error occurs because the specified object reads from EEPROM when
and corrective action the servo drive receives or sends PDO.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL129 Error occurs when PDO object is written to EEPROM

Trigger condition
An error occurs when the current parameter value is saved to ROM.
and cause
Checking method Check if an error occurs because the specified object is written to EEPROM when
and corrective action the servo drive receives or sends PDO.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL130 Accessing address of EEPROM is out of range
The quantity of the data in the ROM is greater than the allowable space specified
Trigger condition
by the firmware. It is probably because the firmware has been updated, but the
and cause
data in the ROM was stored by the firmware of the previous version.
Checking method Check if the addressing in EEPROM exceeds the range for the specified object
and corrective action when the servo drive receives or sends PDO.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-36
AL131 EEPROM CRC calculation error
Trigger condition The data in ROM is damaged. All objects are automatically restored to default
and cause values.
Checking method Check if the specified object causes a CRC calculation error in EEPROM when the
and corrective action servo drive receives or sends PDO. Usually, this alarm is caused by an error in DSP. 12
How to clear the
alarm?
AL132 Parameter is write-prohibited
Trigger condition When using bus communication to write data to the parameter, the parameter is
and cause currently write-prohibited.
Checking method
Refer to the specified parameter description to write data to the parameter.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL170 Bus communication timeout
Trigger condition The servo drive does not receive any PDO data within the set communication
and cause cycle time.
1. Check if the communication is normal.

Checking method
2. Check if the wiring is correctly connected.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL180 Bus communication timeout
Trigger condition The servo drive does not receive any PDO data within the set communication
and cause cycle time.
1. Check if the communication is normal.

Checking method
2. Check if the wiring is correctly connected.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-37
AL185 Bus hardware error
Condition: bus communication is cut off.

Trigger condition
and cause
12
Cause: abnormal communication hardware.
1. Check if the communication cable is intact and firmly connected.
2. Check the communication quality. It is suggested that you use common

Checking method
grounding and shielded cable.
3. As for communication type models, check if the value of monitoring variable
120 increases constantly.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL186 Bus data transmission error

Trigger condition
Bus data transmission error.
and cause
1. Check if the cable is properly connected and whether there is any noise
interference. Replace the communication cable or eliminate the noise if

Checking method necessary.
2. There are an excessive number of slave stations and the communication cycle
time is too short. Lengthen the communication cycle.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL201 Initialization error of objects or data array
Condition: an error has occurred when the servo drive loads data from EEPROM.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: initialization error of objects or data array.
1. If the alarm is cleared after power is cycled on the servo drive, it means the
error occurs at the moment when the servo drive reads the data.
2. If the issue persists after power is cycled on the servo drive, it means the data
in the EEPROM is damaged and you need to write the correct values again.
See the following methods:

Checking method
and corrective action (a) To write the default value, set P2.008 to 30 and then 28, or use
object 0x1011 to complete the setting.
(b) Set object 0x1010 to write the current value.
3. If the issue persists, it means the data array is incorrect. Set P2.008 to 10 to
reset the parameters.
How to clear the

Cycle power on the servo drive, 0x6040 fault reset, DI.ARST, or 0x1011.
alarm?
12-38
AL207 Parameter group of PR#8 is out of range
Condition: parameter group of PR#8 is out of range.

Trigger condition
and cause
12
Cause: the group of PR#8 command source exceeds the range.
Checking method Write parameter using PR procedure: when the parameter group of command
and corrective action source exceeds the range, check the group setting of the written parameters.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL209 Parameter number of PR#8 is out of range
Condition: parameter number of PR#8 is out of range.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the number of PR#8 command source exceeds the range.
Checking method Write parameter using PR procedure: when the parameter number of command
and corrective action source exceeds the range, check the number setting of the written parameters.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL213 Parameter setting of PR#8 is in error
Condition: when you use PR#8 to write parameters, the parameter value is
Trigger condition incorrect.
and cause
Cause: an error occurs when you write parameters with PR#8 command.
Checking method
Make sure the parameter value is within the correct range.
How to clear the
DI.ARST
alarm?
AL215 Write parameters: read-only
Condition: when you use the PR procedure to write parameters, the parameter is
Trigger condition read-only.
and cause
Checking method
The specified parameter is read-only.
How to clear the
DI.ARST
alarm?
12-39
AL217 Write parameters: parameter locked
Condition: when you use the PR procedure to write parameters, the parameter is
write-protected when the servo drive is on or the parameter’s value exceeds the
12
Trigger condition
and cause range.
Checking method Write the parameters when the servo drive is off and make sure the parameter’s
and corrective action value is within the range.
How to clear the

Modify the PR command and the parameter.
alarm?
AL231 Monitoring item of PR#8 is out of range
Condition: the code of the monitoring item for PR#8 is out of range.
Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the code of the monitoring item is out of range.
Checking method Write parameter using PR procedure: when the code of the monitoring item
and corrective action exceeds the range, check the code setting for the monitoring item.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL235 Position counter overflow warning
Condition: execute a positioning command after the position command counter

Trigger condition overflows.
and cause
Cause: position command counter overflows.
Incremental system:
When the motor keeps operating in one direction, this leads to overflow of the
position feedback register (FB_PUU), and the coordinate system cannot display
the correct position. Executing a positioning command after overflow results in this
error. Use the scope to check if the feedback position has overflowed and then
execute the homing procedure.
Absolute system:
Checking method
and corrective action This error occurs when the absolute positioning command is issued in the following
situations:
1. Position feedback register (FB_PUU) overflows.
2. Absolute origin coordinates are not established after you change the setting of
P1.001.Z.
3. Absolute origin coordinates are not established after you change the E-Gear
ratio (P1.044 and P1.045).
12-40
AL235 Position counter overflow warning
4. Established the absolute origin coordinates, but the procedure is incomplete.
12
Checking method 5. When AL060 and AL062 occur, use the scope to check if the feedback
position has overflowed. And check whether the above situations have
occurred, then establish the absolute origin coordinates.
Incremental system: perform homing procedure.

How to clear the
alarm?
Absolute system: establish the absolute origin coordinates.
AL237 Indexing coordinate is undefined
Trigger condition You used the indexing function without firstly defining the starting point of the
and cause indexing coordinate.
Checking method Perform the homing procedure before using the indexing function to avoid
and corrective action triggering this alarm.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL245 PR positioning timeout
Condition: PR positioning function is triggered.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the time for executing positioning is too long.
Checking method Check if the conditions for completing the PR commands are not set or triggered,
and corrective action causing the PR command incomplete.
How to clear the

DI.ARST or cycle power on the servo drive.
alarm?
AL249 PR number exceeds the range
Condition: the triggered PR path number exceeds the upper limit.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the triggered PR path number exceeds 99.
1. Check if the PR command jumps to a path exceeding the range.

Checking method
2. Check if the PR command format is correct.
How to clear the

DI.ARST or cycle power on the servo drive.
alarm?
12-41
AL283 Software positive limit
Condition: the target position specified by the command exceeds the software
Trigger condition positive limit.
12
and cause
Cause: the software positive limit is triggered.
The software positive limit is determined by the Position command instead of the
actual feedback position because the command is sent before the feedback is
Checking method
received. That is, the actual position may not have exceeded the limit when this
limit protection is enabled. Set the appropriate deceleration time to achieve the
desired effect. For more information, refer to the description of P5.003.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL285 Software negative limit
Condition: the target position specified by the command exceeds the software
Trigger condition negative limit.
and cause
Cause: the software negative limit is triggered.
The software negative limit is determined by the Position command instead of the
actual feedback position because the command is sent before the feedback is
Checking method
received. That is, the actual position may not have exceeded the limit when this
limit protection is enabled. Set the appropriate deceleration time to achieve the
desired effect. For more information, refer to the description of P5.003.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL289 Position counter overflows

Trigger condition
Position counter overflows.
and cause
1. Set the gear ratio according to the actual application requirements and the
total traveling distance of the absolute motor to avoid overflow of the feedback
Checking method counter.
2. If P2.069.Z is set to 1 (function of preventing indexing coordinate from overflow),
set P2.070 [Bit 2] to 1.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-42
AL301 CANopen synchronization failure
Condition: the synchronization with the controller fails when you use the CANopen
Trigger condition IP mode (B mode).
12
and cause
Cause: communication synchronization fails.
1. Make sure the communication between the servo drive and controller is good.
Checking method 2. After eliminating any problems that you find, allow the controller to re-send the
and corrective action synchronization signal and ensure that it is sent successfully.
3. Modify the setting for P3.009 (the default value is suggested).
How to clear the

NMT: reset node or 0x6040 fault reset.
alarm?
AL302 Synchronization signal of CANopen is sent too soon
Condition: the synchronization signal is received too soon when you use the
Trigger condition CANopen IP mode (B mode).
and cause
Cause: the synchronization signal of CANopen is sent too soon.
1. Make sure the setting of synchronization cycle (0x1006) is identical to that of
the controller.
Checking method
2. Modify the synchronization error range setting (P3.009.U).
3. Ensure the correct time sequence of sending packets from the controller.
A drift or delay in packet sending time causes synchronization failure.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL303 CANopen synchronization signal timeout
Condition: the synchronization with the controller fails when you use the CANopen
Trigger condition IP mode (B mode).
and cause
Cause: timeout of CANopen synchronization signal.
the controller.
Checking method
How to clear the

alarm?
12-43
AL304 IP mode command failure
Condition: the internal command is in error in IP mode.

Trigger condition
and cause
12
Cause: the IP command fails.
Checking method
The computing time takes too long. Disable the USB monitoring function.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL305 SYNC period error
Condition: CANopen 301 Obj 0x1006 Data Error.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: SYNC period is in error.
Checking method
Check the value of 0x1006. If it is smaller than or equal to 0, this alarm occurs.
How to clear the
alarm?
AL35F Emergency stop during deceleration
Trigger condition DI(0x47) is rising-edge triggered, then the motor decelerates to 0 and AL3CF
and cause occurs.
Checking method Check if any of the parameters P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036 - P2.040 is set to
and corrective action DI(0x47) and is triggered.
How to clear the

alarm?
AL380 Position offset alarm for DO.MC_OK

Trigger condition
DO.MC_OK is on and then goes off.
and cause
Refer to the description of P1.048. After DO.MC_OK is on, DO.MC_OK goes off
Checking method because DO.TPOS turns off. There might be an external force causing the position
and corrective action deviation of the motor after positioning is complete. Disable this alarm by setting
P1.048.Y to 0.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
12-44
AL3CF Emergency stop
Trigger condition This alarm occurs after AL35F is triggered and when the motor speed has
and cause decelerated to 0.
Checking method Check if any of the parameters P2.010 - P2.017 and P2.036 - P2.040 is set to
and corrective action DI(0x47) and is triggered. 12
How to clear the
alarm?
AL3E1 Communication synchronization fails
Condition: the communication synchronization with the controller fails in IP mode.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: communication synchronization fails.
Checking method 2. After eliminating any problems that you find, allow the controller to re-send the
and corrective action synchronization signal and ensure that it is sent successfully.
3. Modify the setting of P3.009 (the default setting is suggested).
How to clear the

alarm?
AL3E2 Communication synchronization signal is sent too soon
Condition: the synchronization signal is received too early.

Trigger condition
and cause
Cause: the communication synchronization signal is sent too soon.

the controller.
Checking method
How to clear the

alarm?
12-45
AL3E3 Communication synchronization signal timeout
Condition: the communication synchronization with the controller fails in IP mode.

Trigger condition
and cause
12
Cause: timeout of synchronization signal.
the controller.
Checking method 3. Modify the synchronization error range setting (P3.009.U). (For -M and -F
and corrective action models.)
4. Modify the setting of IP command timeout (P3.022.XY). (For -E models.)
How to clear the

alarm?
AL3F1 Communication type absolute position command error
Condition: the bus communication type (CANopen, DMCNET, and EtherCAT)

servo is in combination with an incremental motor, and when the position overflow
occurs and the absolute origin coordinates have not been established, the
Trigger condition absolute positioning command is issued.
and cause
Cause:
1. The absolute origin coordinates are not established.
2. Overflow occurs since the motor keeps rotating in the same direction.
Checking method
Establish the absolute origin coordinates.
How to clear the
Establish the absolute origin coordinates.
alarm?
AL400 Indexing coordinate setting error
Condition: the offset value of the motor within 1 ms exceeds the setting value of
Trigger condition P2.052 (Indexing coordinates scale).
and cause
Cause: the value of P2.052 is set too low.
Checking method
Check if the setting value of P2.052 exceeds the range.
How to clear the
DI.ARST
alarm?
12-46
AL401 NMT reset command is received when servo is on

Trigger condition
NMT reset command is received when the servo is on.
and cause
12
Checking method Check if the NMT reset command is received when the servo is on.
and corrective action Use NMT: reset node or 0x6040 fault reset.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL404 Value of PR special filter setting is too high
Condition: the value of the PR special filter (P1.022) is set too high so that the
Trigger condition following error of internal position exceeds the range.
and cause
Cause: following error of internal position exceeds the allowable range.
Checking method Check the setting of P1.022. If the value is set too high, the following error exceeds
and corrective action the allowable range faster. Re-adjust the value of P1.022.
How to clear the

DI.ARST
alarm?
AL500 STO function is enabled

Trigger condition
Safe torque off function (STO) is enabled.
and cause
Checking method
Safe torque off function (STO) is enabled. Check why it is enabled.
1. Reset by using DI.ARST, 0x6040 fault reset, or setting P0.001 to 0.

How to clear the
alarm? 2. If not using the STO function, plug the short circuit terminal into CN10 or wire
to short-circuit the block. Follow the instructions in Chapter 3 for STO wiring.
AL501 STO_A lost (signal loss or signal error)
Trigger condition Loss of STO_A signal or STO_A and STO_B signals are not synchronized for more
and cause than 1 second.
Checking method
Make sure the wiring of STO_A is correct.
How to clear the
alarm?
12-47
AL502 STO_B lost (signal loss or signal error)
Trigger condition Loss of STO_B signal or STO_A and STO_B signals are not synchronized for
and cause more than 1 second.
12 Checking method
How to clear the
alarm?
Make sure the wiring of STO_B is correct.
AL503 STO self-diagnostic error
Trigger condition An error occurs during STO self-diagnosis, which may be caused by an
and cause abnormality in the STO circuit.
Checking method
N/A
How to clear the
Contact the distributor.
alarm?
AL521 Vibration elimination parameter error
Condition: the input value for the vibration elimination parameter is not appropriate.
Cause:
Trigger condition
and cause 1. Your input value for the vibration elimination parameter is not appropriate.
2. The Bode plot is in error due to other variables while the operation system is
analyzing the program.
Checking method Perform system analysis again and correctly set the value for the vibration
and corrective action elimination parameter.
1. Perform system analysis again and correctly set the value for the vibration
How to clear the elimination parameter.

alarm?
2. If the issue persists, disable the vibration elimination function by setting
P2.094 [Bit 8] and [Bit 9] to 0.

.
AL555 System failure

Trigger condition
Servo drive DSP is in error.
and cause
Checking method If this alarm occurs, send your servo drive directly back to Delta without making
and corrective action any modification.
How to clear the

N/A
alarm?
12-48
AL809 PR motion setting error or command decoding error
Condition: an error occurs when the servo drive decodes the motion command.
Trigger condition
12
and cause Cause: incorrect motion command or abnormal software compiling may cause
error in the PR program.
1. If this alarm occurs when the servo is not in the PR mode, save the parameter
file and contact the distributor.

Checking method
2. For advanced users: save the scope screenshot when the alarm occurs.
Set P5.007 and P0.001 for the two channels and save the scope.
How to clear the

alarm?
12-49
12
12-50
Specifications
A
A
A.1 ASDA-B3 series servo drive ·····································································A-2
A.1.1 Specifications of the ASDA-B3 servo drive ···········································A-2
A.1.2 Dimensions of the servo drive ···························································A-5
A.2 ECM series servo motor··········································································A-7
A.2.1 ECM-B3 series servo motor ···························································· A-11
A.2.2 ECM-A3L low inertia series servo motor ············································A-15
A.2.3 ECM-A3H high inertia series servo motor ··········································A-17
A.2.4 Torque features (T-N curves) of the B3 motors ····································A-19
A.2.5 Torque features (T-N curves) of the A3 motors ····································A-21
A.2.6 Power derating curves of the B3 motor ··············································A-23
A.2.7 Overload features ·········································································A-24
A.2.8 Dimensions of ECM-B3 series servo motor ········································A-26
A.2.9 Dimensions of ECM-A3L/A3H series servo motor ································A-29
A-1
Specifications ASDA-B3
A.1 ASDA-B3 series servo drive

A.1.1 Specifications of the ASDA-B3 servo drive
A
100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW
ASDA-B3
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Phase / Voltage Single- / Three-phase 220 VAC Three-phase

220 VAC
Three-phase
Permissible voltage Single- / Three-phase 200 - 230 VAC, -15% to 10% 200 - 230 VAC,
-15% to 10%
Input current (3PH)
0.81 1.61 4.32 8.76 9.21 9.72 14.7 16.68
Unit: Arms
Power
Input current (1PH)

1.39 2.77 8.28 16.68 17.49 18.72 - -
Unit: Arms
Continuous output
current 0.9 1.55 2.65 5.1 7.3 8.3 13.4 19.4
Unit: Arms
Max. instantaneous
output current 3.88 7.07 10.6 16.4 21.21 27 38.3 58.9
Unit: Arms
Cooling method Air convection cooling Fan cooling
Encoder resolution 24-bit (16777216 p/rev)
Main circuit control SVPWM control
Control mode Manual / Auto
Regenerative resistor N/A Built-in
Pulse type Pulse + Direction, CCW pulse + CW pulse, A phase + B phase

Pulse + Direction: 4 Mpps;
Max. input pulse CCW pulse + CW pulse: 4 Mpps;
frequency A phase + B phase: single-phase 4 Mpps;
Position control mode
Open collector: 200 Kpps

Command source External pulse / Register
Smoothing method Low-pass, S-curve, and moving filters

E-Gear ratio: N / M times, limited to (1 / 4 < N / M < 262144)
E-Gear ratio
N: 1 - 536870911 / M: 1 - 2147483647
Torque limit Parameter settings
Feed forward
Parameter settings
compensation
Voltage
-10 to +10 VDC
range
Analog Resolution 12-bit

Speed control mode
command
Input 1 M
input
impedance
Time
25 µs
constant
Speed control range*1 1 : 6000
Command source External analog command / Register
Smoothing method Low-pass and S-curve filter
A-2
ASDA-B3 Specifications
100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW

ASDA-B3
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
A
Torque limit Parameter settings / Analog input
Speed control mode
Bandwidth Maximum 3.1 kHz
±0.01% at 0% to 100% load fluctuation

Speed calibration
±0.01% at ±10% power fluctuation
ratio*2
±0.01% at 0˚C to 50˚C (32˚F to 122˚F) ambient temperature fluctuation
Voltage
-10 to +10 VDC
range
Analog
Torque control mode
Input
command 1 M
impedance
input
Time
25 µs
constant
Command source External analog command / Register
Smoothing method Low-pass filter
Speed limit Parameter settings / Analog input

Monitor signal can be set by parameters (voltage output range: ±8V);
Analog monitor output
resolution:10-bit
Servo on, Fault reset, Gain switch, Pulse clear, Zero speed clamping,
Command input reverse control, Internal position command trigger, Torque
limit, Speed limit, Internal position command selection, Motor stop, Speed
command selection, Speed / position mode switching, Speed / torque
Input mode switching, Torque / position mode switching, PT / PR command
Digital input / output
switching, Emergency stop, Positive / negative limit, Original point,

Forward / reverse operation torque limit, Homing activated, Forward /
reverse JOG input, Event trigger, E-Gear N selection, Pulse input
prohibition
A, B, Z line driver output
Servo ready, Servo on, Zero speed detection, Target speed reached,
Target position reached, Torque limiting, Servo alarm, Magnetic brake
Output control, Homing is complete, Early warning for overload, Servo warning,
Position command overflows, Software limit (negative direction), Software
limit (positive direction), Internal position command is complete, Capture
procedure is complete, Servo procedure is complete
Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Overheat, Regeneration error,
Overload, Excessive speed deviation, Excessive position deviation,
Protection function Encoder error, Adjustment error, Emergency stop, Forward / reverse limit
error, Serial communication error, RST leak phase, Serial communication
timeout, Short-circuit protection for terminals U, V, W and CN1, CN2, CN3
Communication interface RS-485 / USB / CANopen / DMCNET / EtherCAT
Indoors (avoid direct sunlight),
Installation site
no corrosive vapor (avoid fumes, flammable gases, and dust)
Altitude Below 2,000 m above sea level
Atmospheric pressure 86 kPa - 106 kPa

Environment
0˚C - 55˚C (32˚F - 131˚F)

Operating
(If the operating temperature is above 45˚C (113˚F), forced cooling is
temperature
required)
Storage temperature -20˚C to 65˚C (-4˚F to 149˚F)
Humidity Under 0 - 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibrating 9.80665 m/s2 (1 G) less than 20 Hz, 5.88 m/s2 (0.6 G) 20 to 50 Hz
A-3
100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW

ASDA-B3
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
A
IP rating IP20
Environment
Power system TN system*3*4

IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C
Approvals
Note:
1. Within the rated load, the speed ratio is: the minimum speed (smooth operation) / rated speed.
2. Within the rated speed, the speed calibration ratio is: (rotational speed with no load - rotational speed
with full load) / rated speed.
3. TN system: the neutral point of the power system connects directly to the ground. The exposed metal
components connect to the ground through the protective ground conductor.
4. Use a single-phase three-wire power system for the single-phase power model.
A-4
A.1.2 Dimensions of the servo drive
100 W / 200 W / 400 W
A
60(2.36)
60(2.36) 70(2.76) 155.85(6.14) 49(1.92) 6.3(0.25)
162(6.38)
152(5.98)
162(6.38)
5(0.19)
M5*0.8
SCREW: M4x0.7
Mounting scre w torque: 14 (kgf-cm) Unit: mm(inch)
CN1 locking torque 2 - 2.5 kgf-cm Weight 0.9 kg (1.98 lb)

Terminal block
6 - 7 kgf-cm -
locking torque
750 W
74.3(2.93)
74.3(2.93) 70(2.76) 165.85(6.53) 47.5(1.87) 5.8(0.23)
162(6.38)
152(5.98)
162(6.38)
5(0.19)
M5*0.8
SCREW: M4x0.7

Terminal block
6 - 7 kgf-cm - -
locking torque
A-5
1 kW / 1.5 kW
80.2(3.16)
80.2(3.16) 70(2.76) 194.15(7.64) 67(2.64) 7.7(0.3)
A 162(6.38)
152(5.98)
162(6.38)
M5*0.8
5(0.19)
SCREW: M4x0.7

Terminal block
6 - 7 kgf-cm - -
locking torque
2 kW / 3 kW
90(3.54)
90(3.54) 70(2.76) 205.3(8.07) 75(2 . 95)
225(8.86)
216(8.5)
3(0.12)
M5*0.8
SCREW: M4x0.7

Terminal block
10 - 11 kgf-cm - -
locking torque
Note: dimensions and weights of the servo drive may be updated without prior notice.
A-6
A.2 ECM series servo motor

(1) Product name

ECM - B 3 M - C 2 06 04 R S 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
A
(2) Servo type

B: general type servo motor
(3) Series
3: 3rd series
(4) Inertia
M: medium inertia
L: low inertia

C: 220V and 3,000 rpm
E: 220V and 2,000 rpm
F: 220V and 1,500 rpm
(6) Encoder type

16-bit)
P: 17-bit absolute magnetic encoder (resolution of single turn: 17-bit; multiple turns: 16-bit)
M: 17-bit incremental magnetic encoder (single-turn absolute)
04 40 mm 13 130 mm
06 60 mm 18 180 mm
08 80 mm - -

01 100 W 10 1 kW
02 200 W 15 1.5 kW
04 400 W 20 2 kW
07 750 W 30 3 kW
A-7

A Round shaft
Keyway
-
P*
-
Q*
C*
R
D*

S: standard shaft diameter and standard connectors
7: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and standard connectors
J: standard shaft diameter and IP67 waterproof connectors
K: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and IP67 waterproof connectors
(11) Special code

A-8
ECM - A 3 L - C 2 06 04 R S 1
A
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(1) Product name

(2) Servo type

A: high-precision servo motor
(3) Series
3: 3rd series
(4) Inertia
H: high inertia
L: low inertia

C: 220V and 3,000 rpm
(6) Encoder type

Y: 24-bit absolute optical encoder (resolution of single turn: 24-bit; multiple turns: 16-bit)
1: 24-bit incremental optical encoder (single-turn absolute)
16-bit)

04 40 mm 08 80 mm
06 60 mm - -

0F 50 W 04 400 W
01 100 W 07 750 W
02 200 W - -
A-9

A Round shaft
Keyway
-
P*
-
Q*
C
R
D

S: standard shaft diameter and standard connector
7: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and standard connector
J: standard shaft diameter and IP67 waterproof connector
K: special shaft diameter (14 mm)* and IP67 waterproof connector
(11) Special code

Z: refer to the note in Section A.2.8.
A-10
A.2.1 ECM-B3 series servo motor
Motor frame size: 80 mm and below
ECM-B3 1
Rated power (kW)
Rated torque (N-m)*1

C 2 0401
0.1
0.32
C 2 0602
0.2
0.64
C 2 0604
0.4
1.27
C 2 0804
0.4
1.27
C 2 0807
0.75
2.4
A
Max. torque (N-m) 1.12 2.24 4.45 4.45 8.4
Rated speed (rpm) 3000
Max. speed (rpm) 6000
Rated current (Arms) 0.857 1.42 2.40 2.53 4.27

Max. instantaneous current
3.44 6.62 9.47 9.42 15.8
(Arms)
Change of rated power (kW/s) 34.25 29.05 63.50 24.89 53.83
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2) 0.0299 0.141 0.254 0.648 1.07
Mechanical time constant (ms) 0.50 0.91 0.52 0.8 0.54
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 0.374 0.45 0.53 0.5 0.56
Voltage constant-KE (mV/rpm) 13.8 16.96 19.76 18.97 20.17
Armature resistance (Ohm) 8.22 4.71 2.04 1.125 0.55
Armature inductance (mH) 19.1 12.18 6.50 5.14 2.81
Electrical time constant (ms) 2.32 2.59 3.19 4.57 5.11
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance > 100 M, DC 500V
Insulation strength 1.8k Vac, 1 sec
Weight (w/o brake) (kg) 0.5 0.9 1.2 1.7 2.34
Weight (with brake) (kg) 0.7 1.3 1.6 2.51 3.15
Max. radial load (N) 78 245 245 392 392
Max. axial load (N) 54 74 74 147 147

Change of rated power
32.51 27.13 61.09 23.21 50.97
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2)
0.0315 0.151 0.264 0.695 1.13
(with brake)
Mechanical time constant (ms)
0.53 0.97 0.54 0.86 0.57
(with brake)
Brake holding torque
0.3 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption
6.1 7.6 7.6 8 8
(at 20˚C (68˚F))[W]
Brake release time [ms (Max)] 20 20 20 20 20
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max)] 35 50 50 60 60

Rated reduction rate
10 10 5 5 5
with oil seal (%)
A-11
ECM-B3 1 C 2 0401 C 2 0602 C 2 0604 C 2 0804 C 2 0807
Vibration grade (μm) V15
A
Operating temperature 0˚C - 40˚C (32˚F - 104˚F)*4
Storage temperature -10˚C to 80˚C (14˚F - 176˚F)*4
Operating humidity 20 - 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20 - 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity 2.5 G

IP67 (when using waterproof connectors and when an oil seal is fitted to
IP rating
the rotating shaft (for an oil seal model))
Approvals
Note:
1. The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0˚C - 40˚C (32˚F - 104˚F) operating
temperature which is suitable for the servo motor mounted with the following heat sink dimensions.
F04, F06, and F08: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
Material: aluminum
2. The built-in servo motor brake is only for keeping the object installed on the motor in a stopped state.
Do not use it for deceleration or as a dynamic brake.
3. In the servo motor model name, 1 represents the inertia and 2 represents the encoder type.
4. Models with the operating temperature ranging from -20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F) and storage
temperature ranging from -20˚C to 80˚C (-4˚F to 176˚F) are under certification. If the operating
temperature is over 40˚C (104˚F), refer to the power derating curves of B3 motors in Section A.2.6.
5. The load definition for the motor output shaft is as follows. Follow the load specification when
operating.
LR-5
Radial load
Thrust / axial load
A-12
Motor frame size: 130 - 180 mm
ECM-B3 1 E 2 1310 E 2 1315 E 2 1320 E 2 1820 F 2 1830
A
Rated power (kW) 1 1.5 2 2 3
Rated torque (N-m)*1 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55 19.1
Max. torque (N-m) 14.3 21.48 28.65 28.65 57.29
Rated speed (rpm) 2000 1500
Max. speed (rpm) 3000 3000
Rated current (Arms) 5.96 8.17 10.59 11.43 18.21
Max. instantaneous current (Arms) 19.9 26.82 34.20 36.21 58.9
Change of rated power (kW/s) 29.21 45.69 62.25 31.33 68.02
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2) 7.79 11.22 14.65 29.11 53.63
Mechanical time constant (ms) 1.46 1.10 1.03 1.74 1.21
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 0.80 0.88 0.90 0.88 1.05
Voltage constant-KE (mV/rpm) 29.30 31.69 32.70 31.6 37.9
Armature resistance (Ohm) 0.419 0.260 0.198 0.159 0.086
Armature inductance (mH) 4 2.81 2.18 2.34 1.52
Electrical time constant (ms) 9.55 10.81 11.01 14.72 17.67
Weight (w/o brake) (kg) 4.9 6.0 7 10 13.9
Weight (with brake) (kg) 6.3 7.4 8.5 13.7 17.6
Max. radial load (N) 490 686 980 1470 1470
Max. axial load (N) 98 343 392 490 490

28.66 45.09 61.62 30.02 66.45
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2)
7.94 11.37 14.8 30.38 54.9
(with brake)
Mechanical time constant (ms)
1.49 1.12 1.04 1.81 1.24
(with brake)
10 10 10 25 25
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption
21.5 21.5 21.5 31 31
(at 20˚C (68˚F))[W]
Brake release time [ms (Max)] 50 50 50 30 30
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max)] 110 110 110 120 120
5 5 5 5 5
with oil seal (%)
Operating temperature 0˚C - 40˚C (32˚F - 104˚F)*4
A-13
ECM-B3 1 E 2 1310 E 2 1315 E 2 1320 E 2 1820 F 2 1830
Storage temperature -10˚C to 80˚C (14˚F - 176˚F)*4
A

IP67 (when using waterproof connectors and when an oil seal is fitted
IP rating
to the rotating shaft (for an oil seal model))
Approvals
Note:
2. The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F) operating
F130: 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm

F180: 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
Material: aluminum
3. In the servo motor model name, 1 represents the inertia and 2 represents the encoder type.
4. Models with the operating temperature ranging from -20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F) and storage
temperature ranging from -20˚C to 80˚C (-4˚F to 176˚F) are under certification. If the operating
temperature is over 40˚C (104˚F), refer to the power derating curves of B3 motors in Section A.2.6.
operating.
LR-5
Radial load
Thrust / axial load
A-14
A.2.2 ECM-A3L low inertia series servo motor
ECM-A3L 040F 0401 0602 0604 0804 0807
A
Rated power (kW) 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75
Rated torque (N-m)*1 0.159 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39
Max. torque (N-m) 0.557 1.12 2.24 4.45 4.44 8.36
Rated current (Arms) 0.66 0.9 1.45 2.65 2.6 5.1

Max. instantaneous
2.82 3.88 6.2 10.1 10.6 20.6
current (Arms)
11 25.6 45.5 107.5 45.8 102.2
(kW/s)
Rotor inertia
0.0229 0.04 0.09 0.15 0.352 0.559
(× 10-4kg.m2)
Mechanical time
1.28 0.838 0.64 0.41 0.68 0.44
constant (ms)
Torque constant-KT
0.241 0.356 0.441 0.479 0.488 0.469
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
9.28 13.3 16.4 18 17.9 17
(mV/rpm)
Armature resistance
12.1 9.47 4.9 2.27 1.6 0.6
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
18.6 16.2 18.52 10.27 10.6 4.6
(mH)
Electrical time constant
1.54 1.71 3.78 4.52 6.63 7.67
(ms)
Weight (w/o brake) (kg) 0.38 0.5 1.1 1.4 2.05 2.8
Weight (with brake) (kg) 0.68 0.8 1.6 1.9 2.85 3.6
Max. radial load (N) 78 78 245 245 392 392
Max. axial load (N) 54 54 74 74 147 147

9.9 24 34.1 89.6 39.5 93
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2) 0.0255 0.0426 0.12 0.18 0.408 0.614
(with brake)
Mechanical time
constant (ms) 1.44 0.892 0.85 0.5 0.78 0.48
(with brake)
0.32 0.32 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power
consumption 6.1 6.1 7.2 7.2 8 8
(at 20˚C (68˚F))[W]
A-15
ECM-A3L 040F 0401 0602 0604 0804 0807

Brake release time
20 20 20 20 20 20
[ms (Max)]
A
Brake pull-in time
35 35 50 50 60 60
[ms (Max)]
20 10 10 5 5 5
with oil seal (%)
Operating temperature 0˚C - 40˚C (32˚F - 104˚F)
Storage temperature -10˚C to 80˚C (14˚F - 176˚F)

IP67 (when using waterproof connectors and when an oil seal is fitted to the
IP rating
rotating shaft (for an oil seal model))
Approvals
Note:
F40, F60, and F80: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
Material: aluminum
operating.
LR-5
Radial load
Thrust / axial load
A-16
A.2.3 ECM-A3H high inertia series servo motor
ECM-A3H 040F 0401 0602 0604 0804 0807
A
Rated power (kW) 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75
Rated torque (N-m)*1 0.159 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39
Max. torque (N-m) 0.557 1.12 2.24 4.45 4.44 8.36
Rated current (Arms) 0.64 0.9 1.45 2.65 2.6 4.61

Max. instantaneous
2.59 3.64 5.3 9.8 9.32 16.4
current (Arms)
5.56 13.6 16.4 35.8 17.5 37.8
(kW/s)
Rotor inertia
0.0455 0.0754 0.25 0.45 0.92 1.51
(× 10-4kg.m2)
Mechanical time
2.52 1.43 1.38 0.96 1.32 0.93
constant (ms)
Torque constant-KT
0.248 0.356 0.441 0.479 0.49 0.52
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
9.54 12.9 16.4 17.2 17.9 18.7
(mV/rpm)
Armature resistance
12.5 8.34 3.8 1.68 1.19 0.57
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
13.34 11 8.15 4.03 4.2 2.2
(mH)
Electrical time constant
1.07 1.32 2.14 2.40 3.53 3.86
(ms)
Weight (w/o brake) (kg) 0.38 0.5 1.1 1.4 2.05 2.8
Weight (with brake) (kg) 0.68 0.8 1.6 1.9 2.85 3.6
Max. radial load (N) 78 78 245 245 392 392
Max. axial load (N) 54 54 74 74 147 147

4.89 12.5 14.6 33.6 15.07 34.41
(kW/s) (with brake)
Rotor inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2) 0.0517 0.0816 0.28 0.48 1.07 1.66
(with brake)
Mechanical time
constant (ms) 2.86 1.55 1.54 1.02 1.54 1.02
(with brake)
0.32 0.32 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power
consumption 6.1 6.1 7.2 7.2 8 8
(at 20˚C (68˚F))[W]
A-17
ECM-A3H 040F 0401 0602 0604 0804 0807

Brake release time
20 20 20 20 20 20
[ms (Max)]
A
Brake pull-in time
35 35 50 50 60 60
[ms (Max)]
20 10 10 5 5 5
with oil seal (%)
Operating temperature 0˚C - 40˚C (32˚F - 104˚F)
Storage temperature -10˚C to 80˚C (14˚F - 176˚F)

IP67 (when using waterproof connectors and when an oil seal is fitted to the
IP rating
rotating shaft (for an oil seal model))
Approvals
Note:
F40, F60, and F80: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
Material: aluminum
operating.
LR-5
Radial load
Thrust / axial load
A-18
A.2.4 Torque features (T-N curves) of the B3 motors
Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m)
A
1.12 (350%) 2.24 (350%)
Intermittent duty zone 1.30 (203%) Intermittent duty zone

0.52 (162%)
0.32 (100%) 0.64 (100%)
0.16 (50%) Continuous duty zone 0.32 (55%) Continuous duty zone
Speed (rpm) Speed (rpm)
3000 3300 6000 3000 6000
ECM-B3L-C0401
2 3 4 5 ECM-B3M-C0602
2 3 4 5
4.45 (350%) 4.45 (350%)
2.81 (221%) Intermittent duty zone 3 (236%) Intermittent duty zone
1.27 (100%) 1.27 (100%)

3000 3300 6000 3000 3700 6000
ECM-B3M-C0604
2 3 4 5 ECM-B3M-C0804
2 3 4 5
8.4 (350%) 14.3 (300%)

13.81 (290%)
6 (250%)
Intermittent duty zone Intermittent duty zone
2.4 (100%) 4.77 (100%)
3000 3700 6000 2000 2500 3000
ECM-B3M-C0807
2 3 4 5 ECM-B3M-E1310
2 3 4 5
21.5 (300%) 28.65 (300%)

20.47 (286%) 26.75 (280%)
7.16 (100%) 9.55 (100%)

2000 2450 3000 2000 2400 3000
ECM-B3M-E1315
2 3 4 5 ECM-B3M-E1320
2 3 4 5
A-19
28.65 (300%) 57.29 (300%)
A
25.8 (270%)
46.1 (240%)
9.55 (100%) 19.1 (100%)
2000 2350 3000 1500 2000 3000
ECM-B3M-E1820
2 3 4 5 ECM-B3M-F1830
2 3 4 5
Note: in the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type; 3 represents the brake or keyway /
oil seal type; 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type; and 5 represents the special
code.
A-20
A.2.5 Torque features (T-N curves) of the A3 motors
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
A
0.557 (350%)
1.12 (350%)
0.4 (251%) Intermittent duty zone

Intermittent duty zone
0.6 (187%)
0.159 (100%) 0.32 (100%)

3000 4400 6000 3000 3200 6000
ECM-A3L-C040F
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3L-C0401
2 3 4 5
2.24 (350%) 4.45 (350%)

0.79 (123%) 1.57 (123%)
0.64 (100%) 1.27 (100%)
0.32 (50%) Continuous duty zone Continuous duty zone

0.65 (50%)
2400 3000 6000 2300 3000 6000
ECM-A3L-C0602
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3L-C0604
2 3 4 5
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
8.36 (350%) ASD-B3-1021-
1 2
4.44 (350%)
7.17 (300%) ASD-B3-0721-
1 2

Intermittent duty zone 3.5 (146%)
1.6 (126%)
1.27 (100%) 2.39 (100%)

2050 3000 6000 2750 3000 3500 6000
ECM-A3L-C0804
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3L-C0807
2 3 4 5
Note:
1. In the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type; 3 represents the brake or keyway /
oil seal type; 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type; and 5 represents the special code.
2. The dotted line in ECM-A3L-C 2 0807 3 4 5 is the specification for the ASD-B3 1 -0721- 2 servo drive;
and the solid line is the specification for the ASD-B3 1 -1021- 2 servo drive.
A-21
0.557 (350%) 1.12 (350%)
A
0.4 (251%)
Intermittent duty zone 0.9 (281%) Intermittent duty zone
0.159 (100%) 0.32 (100%)
3000 5500 6000 3000 4300 6000
ECM-A3H-C040F
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3H-C0401
2 3 4 5
2.24 (350%) 4.45 (350%)

1.9 (306%) 3.9 (307%)
0.64 (100%) 1.27 (100%)
3000 4300 6000 3000 4200 6000
ECM-A3H-C0602
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3H-C0604
2 3 4 5
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
8.36 (350%)
4.44 (350%)
7 (290%)
3.28 (258%) Intermittent duty zone

1.27 (100%)
2.39 (100%)
0.635 (50%) Continuous duty zone
1.195 (50%) Continuous duty zone
3000 4300 6000 3000 4200 6000
ECM-A3H-C0804
2 3 4 5 ECM-A3H-C0807
2 3 4 5
special code.
A-22
A.2.6 Power derating curves of the B3 motor
120 120
A
F40 F60
100 100
Derating rate (%)

80
Derating rate (%)
80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Operating temperature (°C) Operating temperature (°C)
120 120
F80 F130
100 100
Derating rate (%)
Derating rate (%)
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Operating temperature (°C) Operating temperature (°C)
120
F180
100
Derating rate (%)
80
60
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Operating temperature (°C)
A-23
A.2.7 Overload features
Definition of overload protection
A The overload protection prevents the motor from overheating.
Causes of overload
1. The motor’s rated torque exceeds the rated range and the operation time is too long.
2. The inertia ratio is too high and the motor frequently accelerates and decelerates.
3. An incorrect connection between the power cable and the encoder wiring.
4. Incorrect servo gain setting causes resonance in the motor.
5. You operate a motor with a built-in brake without releasing the brake.
Graph of load and operating time
Low inertia (ECM-A3L series and ECM-B3L series), medium inertia (ECM-B3M-C series),
high inertia (ECM-A3H series)
Operating
Load
time
120% 263.8 s
140% 35.2 s
160% 17.6 s
180% 11.2 s
200% 8s
220% 6.1 s
240% 4.8 s
260% 3.9 s
280% 3.3 s
300% 2.8 s
350% 2.1 s
A-24
Medium inertia (ECM-B3M-E / F series)
Load
120%
140%
Operating
time
527.6 s
70.4 s
A
160% 35.2 s
180% 22.4 s
200% 16 s
220% 12.2 s
240% 9.6 s
260% 7.8 s
280% 6.6 s
300% 5.6 s
A-25
A.2.8 Dimensions of ECM-B3 series servo motor
Model C 2 0401 3 4 5 C 2 0602 3 4 5 C 2 0604 3 4 5 C 2 0804 3 7 5 C 2 0807 3 4 5

LC 40 60 60 80 80
LZ 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.6 6.6
LA 46 70 70 90 90
+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000
S 8( ) 14( ) 14( ) 14( ) 19( )
−0.009 −0.011 −0.011 −0.011 −0.013
+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000
LB 30( ) 50( ) 50( ) 70( ) 70( )
-0.021 −0.025 −0.025 −0.030 −0.030
LL (w/o
77.6 72.5 91 86.7 105.2
brake)
LL (with
111.7 109.4 127.9 126.3 144.8
brake)
LH 300 300 300 300 300
LP 300 300 300 300 300
H 40 48.5 48.5 58.5 58.5
LR 25 30 30 30 35
LE 2.5 3 3 3 3
LG 5 7.5 7.5 8 8
LW 16 20 20 20 25
RH 6.2 11 11 11 15.5
WK 3 5 5 5 6
W 3 5 5 5 6
T 3 5 5 5 6
TP M3 Depth8 M4 Depth15 M4 Depth15 M4 Depth15 M6 Depth20
A-26
Note:
1. In the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type; 3 represents the brake or
2.
special code.
IP67 waterproof connectors are available for F80 and below models. Refer to Section A.2 for detailed
model descriptions.
A
A-27
Motor frame size: 130 - 180 mm
Model E 2 1310 3 4 5 E 2 1315 3 4 5 E 2 1320 3 4 5 E 2 1820 3 4 5 F 2 1830 3 4 5

LC 130 130 130 180 180
LZ 9 9 9 13.5 13.5
LA 145 145 145 200 200

+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000
S 22( ) 22( ) 22( ) 35( ) 35( )
−0.013 −0.013 −0.013 −0.016 −0.016
+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000
LB 110( ) 110( ) 110( ) 114.3( ) 114.3( )
−0.035 −0.035 −0.035 −0.035 −0.035
LL (w/o
127.9 139.9 151.9 137.5 160.5
brake)
LL (with
168.5 180.5 192.5 189.5 212.5
brake)
H 115 115 115 139 139
LS 47 47 47 73 73
LR 55 55 55 79 79
LE 6 6 6 4 4
LG 12.5 12.5 12.5 18 18
LW 36 36 36 63 63
RH 18 18 18 30 30
WK 8 8 8 10 10
W 8 8 8 10 10
T 7 7 7 8 8
TP M6 Depth12 M6 Depth12 M6 Depth12 M12 Depth25 M12 Depth25
keyway / oil seal type; 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type; and 5 represents
the special code.
A-28
A.2.9 Dimensions of ECM-A3L/A3H series servo motor
Model C 2 040F 3 4 5 C 2 0401 3 4 5 C 2 0602 3 4 5 C 2 0604 3 4 5 C 2 0804 3 4 5 C 2 0807 3 4 5

LC 40 40 60 60 80 80
LZ 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.6 6.6
LA 46 46 70 70 90 90
+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0. .000
S 8( ) 8( ) 14( ) 14( ) 14( ) 19( )
−0.009 −0.009 −0.011 −0.011 −0.011 −0.013
+0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000 +0.000
LB 30( ) 30( ) 50( ) 50( ) 70( ) 70( )
-0.021 -0.021 −0.025 −0.025 −0.030 −0.030
LL (w/o
70.6 85.3 84 106 93.7 115.8
brake)
LL (with
105.4 120.1 117.6 139.7 131.2 153.2
brake)
LH 300 300 300 300 300 300
LP 300 300 300 300 300 300
H 34 34 43.5 43.5 54.5 54.5
LS 21.5 21.5 27 27 27 37
LR 25 25 30 30 30 40
LE 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3
LG 5 5 7.5 7.5 8 8
LW 16 16 20 20 20 25
RH 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 15.5
WK 3 3 5 5 5 6
W 3 3 5 5 5 6
T 3 3 5 5 5 6
TP M3 Depth6 M3 Depth6 M4 Depth8 M4 Depth8 M4 Depth8 M6 Depth10
A-29
Note:
1. In the servo motor model name, 2 represents the encoder type; 3 represents the brake or keyway / oil
A
seal type; 4 represents the shaft diameter and connector type; and 5 represents the special code.
2. When the special code of C 2 0807 3 S 5 is Z, LS = 32 and LR = 35.

3. IP67 waterproof connectors are available for F80 and below models. Refer to Section A.2 for detailed
model descriptions.
A-30
Accessories B
B.1 Power connector ··············································································· B-2
B.2 Power cable ····················································································· B-4
B.3 Encoder connector ············································································ B-8
B.4 Encoder cable (incremental type)·························································· B-9
B.5 Encoder cable (absolute type) ···························································· B-11
B.6 Battery box cable ············································································ B-13
B.7 Battery box (absolute type) ································································ B-14
B.8 CN1 connector ··············································································· B-15
B.9 CN1 quick connector ········································································ B-16
B.10 Terminal block module ···································································· B-17
B.11 B3 / B2 conversion cables ······························································· B-19
B.12 CN3 RS-485 tap ············································································ B-19
B.13 CN3 RS-485 / CANopen terminal resistor ··········································· B-20
B.14 CN6 DMCNET terminal resistor ························································ B-20
B.15 CN4 Mini USB communication module ··············································· B-21
B.16 CANopen communication cable ························································ B-23
B.17 CANopen distribution box ································································ B-23
B.18 Optional accessories ······································································ B-24
B-1
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.1 Power connector

Delta model number: ASDBCAPW0000 (for F80 and below)
B
Delta model number: ASDBCAPW0100 (for F80 and below with brake)
Delta model number: ACS3-CNPW1A00 (IP67 waterproof connector for F80 and below)
Delta model number: ACS3-CNPW2A00 (IP67 waterproof connector for F80 and below with
brake)
B-2
ASDA-B3 Accessories
Delta model number: ACS3-CNPW5200 (military connector (MIL 18-10S) for F100 - F130)
B
Delta model number: ACS3-CNPW5300 (military connector (MIL 22-22S) for F180)
Delta model number: ACS3-CNPW6300 (military connector (CMV1-2S) for F100 - F180 with
brake)
B-3
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.2 Power cable

Delta model number: ACS3-CAPW3103, ACS3-CAPW3105, ACS3-CAPW3110,
B
ACS3-CAPW3120, ACS3-CAPF3103, ACS3-CAPF3105, ACS3-CAPF3110, ACS3-CAPF3120
(for F80 and below)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 3103 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3105 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3110 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 3120 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Note: indicates the cable material. F represents flexible cables and W represents standard cables.

(for F80 and below with brake)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 4103 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4105 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4110 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 4120 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-4
ASDA-B3 Accessories
Delta model number: ACS3-CAPW3A03, ACS3-CAPW3A05, ACS3-CAPW3A10,

ACS3-CAPW3A20, ACS3-CAPF3A03, ACS3-CAPF3A05, ACS3-CAPF3A10, ACS3-CAPF3A20
B
(for F80 and below with IP67 waterproof connector)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 3A03 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3A05 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3A10 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 3A20 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Delta model number: ACS3-CAPW4A03, ACS3-CAPW4A05, ACS3-CAPW4A10,

ACS3-CAPW4A20, ACS3-CAPF4A03, ACS3-CAPF4A05, ACS3-CAPF4A10, ACS3-CAPF4A20
(for F80 and below with brake and IP67 waterproof connector)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 4A03 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4A05 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4A10 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 4A20 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-5
Accessories ASDA-B3

B
(for F100 - F130)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 3203 MIL 18-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3205 MIL 18-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3210 MIL 18-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 3220 MIL 18-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4

(for F100 - F130 with brake)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 4203 MIL 18-10S, CMV1-2S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4205 MIL 18-10S, CMV1-2S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4210 MIL 18-10S, CMV1-2S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4

ACS3-CAP 4220 MIL 18-10S, CMV1-2S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-6
ASDA-B3 Accessories

B
(for F180)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 3403 MIL 22-22S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3405 MIL 22-22S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 3410 MIL 22-22S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAP 3420 MIL 22-22S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4

(for F180 with brake)
(80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAP 4403 MIL 22-22S, CMV1-2S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4405 MIL 22-22S, CMV1-2S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAP 4410 MIL 22-22S, CMV1-2S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4

ACS3-CAP 4420 MIL 22-22S, CMV1-2S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-7
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.3 Encoder connector

Delta model number: ACS3-CNEN1100
B + +
Delta model number: ACS3-CNEN3000 (for F100 - F180; military connector: CMV1-10S)
Delta model number: ACS3-CNENC200
Delta model number: ACS3-CNEN2A00 (IP67 waterproof connector for F80 and below)
B-8
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.4 Encoder cable (incremental type)

Delta model number: ACS3-CAEN1003, ACS3-CAEN1005, ACS3-CAEN1010,
B
ACS3-CAEN1020, ACS3-CAEF1003, ACS3-CAEF1005, ACS3-CAEF1010, ACS3-CAEF1020
(for F80 and below)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 1003 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 1010 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 1020 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Note: indicates the cable material. F represents flexible cables and N represents standard cables.
Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring for cable specifications.
Delta model number: ACS3-CAEN2A03, ACS3-CAEN2A05, ACS3-CAEN2A10,

ACS3-CAEN2A20, ACS3-CAEF2A03, ACS3-CAEF2A05, ACS3-CAEF2A10, ACS3-CAEF2A20
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2A03 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A05 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 2A10 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2A20 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-9
Accessories ASDA-B3
Delta model number: ACS3-CAEN2703, ACS3-CAEN2705, ACS3-CAEN2710,

ACS3-CAEN2720, ACS3-CAEF2703, ACS3-CAEF2705, ACS3-CAEF2710, ACS3-CAEF2720
B
(for F100 - F180)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2703 CMV1-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2705 CMV1-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 2710 CMV1-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2720 CMV1-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-10
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.5 Encoder cable (absolute type)

Delta model number: ACS3-CAEA1003, ACS3-CAEA1005, ACS3-CAEA1010,
B
ACS3-CAEA1020, ACS3-CAEB1003, ACS3-CAEB1005, ACS3-CAEB1010, ACS3-CAEB1020
(for F80 and below)
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 1003 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 1010 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 1020 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
Note: indicates the cable material. B represents flexible cables and A represents standard cables.
Delta model number: ACS3-CAEA2A03, ACS3-CAEA2A05, ACS3-CAEA2A10,

ACS3-CAEA2A20, ACS3-CAEB2A03, ACS3-CAEB2A05, ACS3-CAEB2A10, ACS3-CAEB2A20
L
Model No.
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2A03 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2A05 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 2A10 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2A20 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-11
Accessories ASDA-B3
Delta model number: ACS3-CAEA2703, ACS3-CAEA2705, ACS3-CAEA2710,

ACS3-CAEA2720, ACS3-CAEB2703, ACS3-CAEB2705, ACS3-CAEB2710, ACS3-CAEB2720
B
(for F100 - F180)
L
Model No. Straight
mm inch
ACS3-CAE 2703 CMV1-10S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
ACS3-CAE 2705 CMV1-10S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

ACS3-CAE 2710 CMV1-10S 10000 ± 100 394 ± 4
ACS3-CAE 2720 CMV1-10S 20000 ± 100 788 ± 4
B-12
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.6 Battery box cable

Battery box cable that connects to the encoder cable (part number: 3864573700)
25±5 (0.98±0.2) 15±5 (0.59±0.2)
B
200±10 (7.87±0.4)
Unit: mm (inch)
Battery box cable for self-wiring (part number: 3864850600)
5±1 (0.1±0.04) 15±5 (0.59±0.2)
1
2
200±10 (7.87±0.4)
Unit: mm (inch)
B-13
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.7 Battery box (absolute type)

Single battery box
B
Delta model number: ASD-MDBT0100
35 (1.37) 68 (2.67) 22 (2.86)
Unit: mm (inch)
R3.25 Weight: 44 g
Dual battery box

Delta model number: ASD-MDBT0200
72.5 (2.85)
45 (1.77)
26 (1.02)
64.5 (2.54)
Unit: mm (inch)
R2.5
Weight: 79.23 g
B-14
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.8 CN1 connector

Delta model number: ASDBCNDS0044 (for B3-L only)
Delta model number: ACS3-CNTB0500 (for B3-M, F, E)
B-15
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.9 CN1 quick connector

Delta model number: ACS3-IFSC4444 (for B3-L only)
17.2 (0.68)
19 (0.745)
50 (16.97)
56.9 (2.24)
47.04 (1.85)
63.5 (2.5)
27.85 (1.1)
20.1(7.91)
12 (4.72 ) 67.44 (26.55)

Unit: mm (inch)
B-16
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.10 Terminal block module

Delta model number: ACS3-MDTB4400 (for B3-L only)
145.5 (5.73)
500 (19.69)
Unit: mm (inch)
B-17
Accessories ASDA-B3
Delta model number: ACS3-MDTD2600 (for B3-M, F, E)
B
87.0 (3.43)
61.5 (2.42) 62 (2.44)
500 (19.69)
Unit: mm (inch)
B-18
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.11 B3 / B2 conversion cables

CN1 conversion cable (for B3-L only)
B
Delta model number: ACS3-CABDC1
500±50 (19.68±1.97)
Unit: mm (inch)
CN2 conversion cable

Delta model number: ACS3-CABDC2
150 (5.9)
Unit: mm (inch)
B.12 CN3 RS-485 tap

Delta model number: ACS3-CNADC3RC
7.3 (0.29)
34.95 (1.37)
29.20 (1.15)
25.8 (1.01)
43.04 (1.69)
(0.46)
(0.59)
11.68
15.10
Unit: mm (inch)
B-19
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.13 CN3 RS-485 / CANopen terminal resistor

Delta model number: ACS3-CNADC3TR
(0.56)
14.2
16.4
(0.65)
43.5 (1.71)
Unit: mm (inch)
B.14 CN6 DMCNET terminal resistor

Delta model number: ASD-TR-DM0008
40.1 (1.58)
27.8 (1.09)
Unit: mm (inch)
B-20
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.15 CN4 Mini USB communication module

Delta model number: UC-PRG015-01B, UC-PRG030-01B
B
80.45±5 64.5±0.5 12±0.5
(3.3±0.2) (2.54±0.02) (0.59±0.02)
(0.77±0.02)
20±0.5
12 L 6.8
(0.48) (0.27)
USB A Male Mini USB B Male

Unit: mm (inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
UC-PRG015-01B 1500 ± 100 59 ± 4

UC-PRG030-01B 3000 ± 100 118 ± 4
Delta model number: UC-ADP01-A
80.45±5 64.5±0.5 12±0.5

(3.3±0.2) (2.54±0.02) (0.59±0.02)
(0.77±0.02)
20±0.5
Unit: mm (inch)
B-21
Accessories ASDA-B3
Delta model number: UC-PRG015-01A, UC-PRG030-01A
12 L 6.8
B
(0.48) (0.27)
USB A Male Mini USB B Male
Unit: mm (inch)
L
Model No.
mm inch
UC-PRG015-01A 1500 ± 100 59 ± 4

UC-PRG030-01A 3000 ± 100 118 ± 4
B-22
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B.16 CANopen communication cable

Delta model number: UC-CMC030-01A, UC-CMC050-01A
B
L
L
Model No.
mm inch
UC-CMC030-01A 300 ± 10 11 ± 0.4

UC-CMC050-01A 500 ± 10 19 ± 0.4
Note: for cables of other length, refer to the Delta PLC/HMI Cable Selection Guide.
B.17 CANopen distribution box

Delta model number: TAP-CN03
66.5 (2.61)
87 (3.43)
Unit: mm (inch)
B-23
Accessories ASDA-B3
B.18 Optional accessories

100 W servo drive and 50 W / 100 W servo motor
B
Servo drive model ASD-B3 1 -0121- 2
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5 , ECM-A3 1 -C 2 040F 3 4 5,

Servo motor model
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0401 3 4 5
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0000
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0100
(with brake)
Encoder connector ACS3-CNENC200
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW1A00
(without brake)
Waterproof
connector
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW2A00
(with brake)
Encoder connector ACS3-CNEN2A00
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW31XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA10XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF31XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB10XX
(absolute type)
(XX indicates the cable length: 03 = 3 m, 05 = 5 m, 10 = 10 m, 20 = 20 m.)
B-24
ASDA-B3 Accessories
200 W servo drive and 200 W servo motor
B
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5, ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0602 3 4 5
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0000
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0100
(with brake)
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW1A00
(without brake)
Waterproof
connector
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW2A00
(with brake)
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW31XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA10XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF31XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB10XX
(absolute type)
B-25
Accessories ASDA-B3
B
ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 , ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5 ,
Servo motor model
ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0604 3 4 5 , ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0804 3 4 5
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0000
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0100
(with brake)
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW1A00
(without brake)
Waterproof
connector
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW2A00
(with brake)
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW31XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA10XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF31XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB10XX
(absolute type)
B-26
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5, ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807 3 4 5
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0000
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0100
(with brake)
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW1A00
(without brake)
Waterproof
connector
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW2A00
(with brake)
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW31XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA10XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF31XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB10XX
(absolute type)
Note:
1. The connectors and cables listed in the above table are applicable to all B3 series models.
B-27
Accessories ASDA-B3
1 kW servo drive and 750 W servo motor
B
Servo motor model ECM-A3 1 -C 2 0807
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0000
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ASDBCAPW0100
(with brake)
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW1A00
(without brake)
Waterproof
connector
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW2A00
(with brake)
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW31XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA10XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF31XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF41XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF10XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB10XX
(absolute type)
B-28
ASDA-B3 Accessories
1 kW servo drive and 1 kW servo motor
B
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1310 3 4 5
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW5200
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW6300
(with brake wires only)
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW32XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW42XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA27XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF32XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF42XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB27XX
(absolute type)
1.5 kW servo drive and 1.5 kW servo motor
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1315 3 4 5
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW5200
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW6300
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW32XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW42XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA27XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF32XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF42XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB27XX
(absolute type)
B-29
Accessories ASDA-B3
B
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1320 3 4 5 ECM-B3 1 -E 2 1820 3 4 5
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW5200 ACS3-CNPW5300
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW6300
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW32XX ACS3-CAPW34XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW42XX ACS3-CAPW44XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA27XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF32XX ACS3-CAPF34XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF42XX ACS3-CAPF44XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB27XX
(absolute type)
Note:
B-30
ASDA-B3 Accessories
B
Servo motor model ECM-B3 1 -F 2 1830 3 4 5
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW5300
(without brake)
connector
Standard
Power connector
ACS3-CNPW6300
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW34XX
(without brake)
Standard cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPW44XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEN27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEA27XX
(absolute type)
Motor power cable
ACS3-CAPF34XX
(without brake)
Flexible cable
Motor power cable

ACS3-CAPF44XX
(with brake)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEF27XX
(incremental type)
Encoder cable
ACS3-CAEB27XX
(absolute type)
Note:
B-31
Accessories ASDA-B3
B-32
Revision History
Release date Version Chapter Revision contents
February, 2021 V4.0 Added the unit of mm2 for the wire diameter.
(Fourth edition) 3.1.6 Changed the UVW terminal selection
information for the 2 kW and 3 kW models.
December, 2020 V3.0 Changed the term of torsion-resistant cable
3, 10, B
(Third edition) to flexible cable.
July, 2020 V2.0
3.3.7 Optimized the pulse input wiring diagram.
(Second edition)
Added the warning messages.

3.4
Added CN2 pin descriptions.
Added the standard wiring diagram for open-
collector pulse signals.
3.10 Optimized the wiring diagram for differential
pulse signals.
Added the warning messages.
10.2.1
November, 2019 V1.0
(First edition)
For relevant information about [ASDA-B3], please refer to:

(1) ASDA-B2 User Manual
(2) ASDA-A3 User Manual
(3) ASDA-A2 User Manual
1
Revision History ASDA-B3

Delta Ia-Asd Asda-B3 Um en 20210201

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Asd Asda-B3 Um en 20210201

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Asd Asda-B3 Um en 20210201

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta ASDA-B3 Series Servo Drive User Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta ASDA-B3 Series

Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.

Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.

ASDA-B3 product features:

How to use this manual:

Delta technical services:

The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING”, and “STOP” indicate:

Maintenance and Inspection

Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

 When wiring, securely tighten the screws of the terminal block.

4 Trial Operation and Panel Display

Operation and Motion Control

12.1 Alarm list ····································································································12-3

1.1 Components of the servo set ································································1-2

1.1 Components of the servo set

(6) A 44-pin connector for CN1 (optional purchase for B3 -L models).

(7) A 6-pin connector for CN2 (optional purchase).

(10) Power supply for the servo drive:

100 W - 3.0 kW L1C, L2C terminal block R, S, T terminal block P , D, C,

(11) One metal piece for short-circuiting the terminal block.

(12) An installation instruction sheet.

1.2 Model overview

Ser ial n umber and

B30121M0 T 18 01 0001 (1) Model name

ECM series servo motor

ABCYB1JB W 14 23 0024 (1) Model name

power supply is 110V.

1.2.2 Model explanation

ASDA-B3 series servo drive

(3) Rated power output

Code Specification Code Specification Code Specification

01 100 W 07 750 W 20 2.0 kW

(4) Input voltage and phase

21: 220V, single- / three-phase

(5) Model code:

Note: B3 represents B3, B3A, or B3B in this manual.

ECM-B3 series servo motor

(1) Product name

(2) Servo type

B: general type servo motor

(5) Rated voltage and speed

C: 220V and 3,000 rpm

(6) Encoder type

(7) Motor frame size

Code Specification Code Specification

(8) Rated power output

Code Specification Code Specification

(9) Shaft type and oil seal

w/o brake with brake w/o brake with brake

Note: * indicates this model type is coming soon.

(10) Shaft diameter and connector type

S: standard shaft diameter and standard connectors.

Note: special shaft diameter is available for F80 400 W models.

(11) Special code

ECM-A3 series servo motor

(1) Product name